# Get aicreditsusage
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/ai/get-aicreditsusage
/schema.json get /ai/credits/usage
Get the AI credit usage for the current month and the number of allowed credits.
# Get application capabilities
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/application/get-application-capabilities
/schema.json get /application/capabilities
Retrieves the application's capability flags as an object mapping each capability name to a boolean indicating whether it is enabled.
# Export current space audit trail
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/audittrail/export-current-space-audit-trail
/schema.json post /audit_trail/current_space/export
Exports the audit trail entries for the current space. Accepts an optional filter in the form-encoded request body to narrow down which entries are included in the export.
# Get current space audit trail item
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/audittrail/get-current-space-audit-trail-item
/schema.json get /audit_trail/current_space/item/{identifier}
Retrieves a single audit trail item from the current space, identified by the entry identifier supplied in the path. Returns the matching audit trail item, or an error response if it cannot be found.
# Get current space audit trail list
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/audittrail/get-current-space-audit-trail-list
/schema.json get /audit_trail/current_space/list
Retrieves the list of audit trail entries recorded for the current space, returning the matching items together with pagination metadata. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Kill a queued or running process
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/background/kill-a-queued-or-running-process
/schema.json post /queue/kill/{identifier}
Kills the queued or running background process matching the identifier path parameter, terminating it immediately. Returns a message describing the outcome.
# Stop a running process
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/background/stop-a-running-process
/schema.json post /queue/stop/{identifier}
Stops the running background process matching the identifier path parameter, signalling it to halt gracefully. Returns a message describing the outcome.
# Bulk delete object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/bulk-delete-object-configurations
/schema.json delete /di/configurations/{type}/bulk/delete
Deletes all object configurations of the given type that match the filter in the request body. Returns the number of configurations that were deleted.
# Bulk export object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/bulk-export-object-configurations
/schema.json post /di/export/bulk
Exports a selected set of object configurations identified by their type and identifier in the request body, optionally scoped with a client time. Returns the exported configurations for the requested objects.
# Create an object configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/create-an-object-configuration
/schema.json post /di/configurations
Creates a new object configuration from the type, name, and object payload in the request body. Returns the created configuration on success.
# Create an object relation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/create-an-object-relation
/schema.json post /di/relations/{type}/{owner}
Creates a new object relation for the given type and owner from the relation supplied in the request body. Returns the created relation.
# Delete an object configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/delete-an-object-configuration
/schema.json delete /di/configurations/{type}/{identifier}
Deletes the object configuration identified by the type and identifier path parameters. Returns a message confirming the deletion.
# Delete an object relation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/delete-an-object-relation
/schema.json delete /di/relations/{type}/{owner}/{identifier}
Deletes the object relation identified by its type, owner, and identifier. Returns a confirmation message on success.
# Export object configurations by type
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/export-object-configurations-by-type
/schema.json post /di/export/{type}
Exports the configurations of the object type given in the path, optionally filtered to the identifiers supplied in the request body. Returns the exported configurations for the matching objects.
# Get a list of labels
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/get-a-list-of-labels
/schema.json get /di/labels/list
Retrieves all labels defined in the system. Returns a list of labels along with action metadata.
# Get an object configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/get-an-object-configuration
/schema.json get /di/configurations/{type}/{identifier}
Retrieves a single object configuration identified by the type and identifier path parameters. Returns the matching configuration.
# Get an object relation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/get-an-object-relation
/schema.json get /di/relations/{type}/{owner}/{identifier}
Retrieves a single object relation identified by its type, owner, and identifier. Returns the matching relation.
# Get object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/get-object-configurations
/schema.json get /di/configurations
Retrieves the list of available object configurations, optionally narrowed down with the filter query parameter. Returns the matching configurations together with pagination metadata.
# Get object relations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/get-object-relations
/schema.json get /di/relations/{type}/{owner}
Retrieves the list of object relations for the given type and owner. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to apply search criteria, and returns the matching relations along with metadata.
# Get stored object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/get-stored-object-configurations
/schema.json get /di/stored-configurations
Retrieves the list of object configurations that are persisted in storage, optionally narrowed down with the filter query parameter. Returns the matching configurations together with pagination metadata.
# Get the history of an object
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/get-the-history-of-an-object
/schema.json get /di/configurations/{type}/{identifier}/history
Retrieves the list of historical states recorded for the configuration identified by the given type and identifier. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the returned history entries by search criteria.
# Import object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/import-object-configurations
/schema.json post /di/import
Imports object configurations supplied as JSON, NDJSON, or uploaded files, and returns a result detailing per-object decisions, actions, relationships, and any validation violations. Set the dry-run query parameter to only validate and check for existing configurations without persisting, or validate-variables to additionally validate variables.
# List configuration relations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-configuration-relations
/schema.json get /di/list/nodes/{type}/{identifier}
Resolves the dependency relations for a single configuration identified by its type and identifier path parameters, returning the resolved nodes with their relationships. Use the optional "direction" query parameter to control how relations are traversed (down, up, both, or recursive).
# List configuration relations for multiple configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-configuration-relations-for-multiple-configurations
/schema.json post /di/list/nodes/bulk
Resolves dependency relations for multiple configurations supplied as a list of type and identifier pairs in the request body, returning each resolved node with its relationships. Use the optional "direction" query parameter to control how relations are traversed (down, up, both, or recursive).
# List configuration usages
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-configuration-usages
/schema.json get /di/list/usages/{type}/{identifier}
Retrieves the usages of the dependency injection configuration identified by the given type and identifier path parameters. Returns a list of usages, each describing the property path, type, and specification where the configuration is referenced.
# List dependants
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-dependants
/schema.json get /di/list/dependants
Retrieves the configuration dependants, returning each dependant with its type, identifier, and the usages that reference it. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# List object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-object-configurations
/schema.json get /di/list/{type}/configurations
Retrieves the configured objects for the given dependency injection type. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# List object configurations and prototypes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-object-configurations-and-prototypes
/schema.json get /di/list/{type}
Retrieves both the configured objects and the available prototypes for the given dependency injection type. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# List object prototypes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-object-prototypes
/schema.json get /di/list/{type}/prototypes
Retrieves the available object prototypes for the given dependency injection type. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# List platforms
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/list-platforms
/schema.json get /di/platforms
Retrieves a list of available data integration platforms, each including its identifier, name, categories, vendor, logo, editions, extensions, and APIs. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow results by search criteria.
# Patch an object configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/patch-an-object-configuration
/schema.json patch /di/configurations
Partially updates an existing object configuration, identified by the type and identifier in the request body, applying only the supplied fields. Returns the updated configuration.
# Restore a configuration to a previous state
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/restore-a-configuration-to-a-previous-state
/schema.json put /di/configurations/restore/{type}/{identifier}
Restores the configuration identified by the given type and identifier to a previous historical state, selected by the ulid supplied in the request body. Returns the restored configuration object.
# Set labels of a configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/set-labels-of-a-configuration
/schema.json put /di/labels/{type}/{identifier}
Replaces the labels assigned to the configuration identified by the given type and identifier with the labels provided in the request body. Returns the updated list of labels along with action metadata.
# Test a non-stored object configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/test-a-non-stored-object-configuration
/schema.json post /di/configurations/{type}/test
Tests an object configuration of the given type without persisting it, using the specification and test data supplied in the request body. Returns the test result for the evaluated object.
# Test an object configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/test-an-object-configuration
/schema.json get /di/configurations/{type}/{identifier}/test
Tests the stored object configuration identified by the type and identifier path parameters and returns the test result for the evaluated object.
# Toggle favorite status
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/toggle-favorite-status
/schema.json put /di-favorite/toggle
Toggles the favourite status of a configuration identified by its type and identifier, marking it as a favourite if it is not already one and removing the favourite otherwise. Returns the resulting favourite item reflecting the new status.
# Update an object configuration
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/update-an-object-configuration
/schema.json put /di/configurations
Replaces an existing object configuration, identified by the type and identifier in the request body, with the supplied values. Returns the updated configuration.
# Update an object configuration status
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/update-an-object-configuration-status
/schema.json put /di/configurations/{type}/{identifier}/status
Updates the enabled or disabled status of the object configuration identified by the type and identifier path parameters, using the disabled flag in the request body. Returns the updated configuration.
# Update an object relation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/update-an-object-relation
/schema.json put /di/relations/{type}/{owner}/{identifier}
Updates the object relation identified by its type, owner, and identifier with the data supplied in the request body. Returns the updated relation.
# Validate configured object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/validate-configured-object-configurations
/schema.json post /di/configurations/validate/configured
Validates the configured object configurations and returns a DiValidationResult listing any validation violations found. Use the optional type query parameter to restrict validation to a single type identifier.
# Validate registered object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/di/validate-registered-object-configurations
/schema.json post /di/configurations/validate/registered
Validates the registered object configurations and returns a DiValidationResult; responds with status 400 when invalid configurations are found. Use the optional type query parameter to restrict validation to a single type identifier.
# Bulk export all object configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/diexport/bulk-export-all-object-configurations
/schema.json post /di/export_all/bulk
Exports every object configuration in the environment as a single bulk export. Returns the exported configurations for all object types without requiring a selection.
# Create environment variable
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/environment/create-environment-variable
/schema.json post /environment/variables
Creates a new environment variable from the supplied name and value, optionally marked as encrypted, and returns the created variable.
# Delete environment variable
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/environment/delete-environment-variable
/schema.json delete /environment/variables/{name}
Deletes the environment variable identified by its name in the path and returns a confirmation message.
# Get environment variable
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/environment/get-environment-variable
/schema.json get /environment/variables/{name}
Retrieves a single environment variable identified by its name in the path.
# Get variable usage
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/environment/get-variable-usage
/schema.json get /environment/variables/{variable}/usage
Retrieves the configurations that reference the specified environment variable. Returns a list of usage entries, each identifying the configuration by its type, identifier, and name.
# List candidate environment variables
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/environment/list-candidate-environment-variables
/schema.json get /environment/candidates
Retrieves candidate environment variables detected across the system, each returned with the locations where it is referenced as a list of matches describing the match type, metadata, and payload. Use this to discover values that could be promoted to environment variables.
# List environment variables
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/environment/list-environment-variables
/schema.json get /environment/variables
Retrieves the collection of environment variables. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to apply search criteria.
# Update environment variable
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/environment/update-environment-variable
/schema.json put /environment/variables/{name}
Updates the environment variable identified by its name, modifying its description, value, or encrypted flag, and returns the updated variable. For encrypted variables the value may be left blank to retain the current value.
# Get environment information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/info/get-environment-information
/schema.json get /info/environment
Retrieves information about the current environment, including data engine settings such as the memory limit and number of workers, along with usage metrics for filesystem and database size.
# Get subscription details
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/info/get-subscription-details
/schema.json get /info/subscription
Retrieves details about the current Alumio subscription, including the environment and subscription identifiers, edition, version, queue status, related URLs, support contact details, and the list of associated environments.
# Retrieve application information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/info/retrieve-application-information
/schema.json get /info/server
Retrieves general server information about the application, including the server IP address, the OAuth2 redirect URL, and the API base URL.
# Retrieve support information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/info/retrieve-support-information
/schema.json get /info/support
Retrieves support-related information, including the support portal URL and the login help URL.
# Delete a token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/jwt/delete-a-token
/schema.json delete /tokens/{identifier}
Deletes the JWT token identified by the identifier path parameter. Returns a confirmation message.
# Generate a new token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/jwt/generate-a-new-token
/schema.json post /tokens
Generates a new JWT token from the supplied name and optional description. Returns the generated access token together with its identifier.
# Get a token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/jwt/get-a-token
/schema.json get /tokens/{identifier}
Retrieves a single JWT token identified by the identifier path parameter. Returns the token's metadata such as name, description, creation details, and last used timestamp.
# List tokens
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/jwt/list-tokens
/schema.json get /tokens
Retrieves the list of JWT token identifiers along with their metadata. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to apply search criteria.
# Update a token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/jwt/update-a-token
/schema.json patch /tokens/{identifier}
Updates the name and description of the JWT token identified by the identifier path parameter. Returns the updated token.
# Count logs
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/log/count-logs
/schema.json post /logs/count
Counts the log entries in Elasticsearch that match the supplied query and returns the total number of hits. The target index is selected with the optional index query parameter, which defaults to filebeat-*.
# Export Elasticsearch by ID
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/log/export-elasticsearch-by-id
/schema.json get /elasticsearch/export/{id}
Exports the Elasticsearch log entry identified by the given message id. Returns the matching log data for that message.
# Export Elasticsearch logs in bulk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/log/export-elasticsearch-logs-in-bulk
/schema.json post /logs/export/bulk
Exports the Elasticsearch log entries identified by the given message ids as a newline-delimited JSON (application/x-ndjson) file. The body is form encoded, so a browser can stream the download itself. IDs that cannot be found are omitted from the result. Optionally accepts an index override, defaulting to filebeat-*, and a clientTime used to name the file in the caller's timezone.
# Search logs
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/log/search-logs
/schema.json post /logs/search
Searches log entries in Elasticsearch using the supplied query and returns the matching documents. The target index is selected with the optional index query parameter, which defaults to filebeat-*.
# Get maintenance window logs
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/maintenancewindow/get-maintenance-window-logs
/schema.json get /maintenance_window/logs
Retrieves the list of maintenance window log records, each describing a maintenance window's identifier, start and end dates, and timezone. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Get notification usage info
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/notifier/get-notification-usage-info
/schema.json get /notifier/info
Retrieves notification usage statistics broken down per channel, returning the number of notifications sent and the credits consumed for each channel.
# Get OAuth token key
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/oauth/get-oauth-token-key
/schema.json get /oauth/redirect
Initiates the OAuth flow for the specified provider and redirects to the provider's authorization endpoint to obtain a token key. Accepts the current key and a callback id used to correlate the returned authorization data.
# Handle OAuth1 callback
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/oauth/handle-oauth1-callback
/schema.json get /oauth1/callback
Handles the OAuth1 callback by validating the oauth_token and oauth_verifier query parameters returned by the provider to complete the authorization flow. Typically responds with a redirect once the callback is processed.
# Initialize OAuth1 token request
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/oauth/initialize-oauth1-token-request
/schema.json get /oauth1/initialize/token
Starts the OAuth1 authorization flow for the given provider, using the supplied provider specification, key, and callbackId to track the request. Typically responds with a redirect to the provider's authorization URL.
# Get a list of queued processes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/queue/get-a-list-of-queued-processes
/schema.json get /queue/process/list
Retrieves the list of queue processes along with action metadata. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Get a single job
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/queue/get-a-single-job
/schema.json get /queue/job/{job}/view
Retrieves the details of a single queue job identified by the job path parameter. Returns the job's queue process information.
# Get a single process
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/queue/get-a-single-process
/schema.json get /queue/process/{process}/view
Retrieves the details of a single queue process identified by the process path parameter. Returns the process log including its status, priority, command type, and timing information.
# Kill jobs in bulk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/queue/kill-jobs-in-bulk
/schema.json post /queue/jobs/kill/bulk
Kills multiple jobs matching the filter provided in the request body, terminating them immediately. Returns a message and the number of jobs that were scheduled for killing.
# Publish a job in the queue
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/queue/publish-a-job-in-the-queue
/schema.json post /queue/publish
Publishes a job onto the queue from the request body, specifying its target queue, priority, and the commands to run. Returns a confirmation message and the process identifier of the scheduled job.
# Skip jobs in bulk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/queue/skip-jobs-in-bulk
/schema.json post /queue/jobs/skip/bulk
Skips multiple queued jobs matching the filter provided in the request body. Returns a message and the number of jobs that were skipped.
# Stop jobs in bulk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/queue/stop-jobs-in-bulk
/schema.json post /queue/jobs/stop/bulk
Stops multiple jobs matching the filter provided in the request body, signalling them to halt gracefully. Returns a message and the number of jobs that were scheduled for stopping.
# Get routes across all spaces
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/reporting/get-routes-across-all-spaces
/schema.json get /reporting/all_routes
Retrieves all routes from every space, returning each route's type, identifier, space, name, disabled status, and timestamps. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Get stats about routes and tasks
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/reporting/get-stats-about-routes-and-tasks
/schema.json get /reporting/routes
Retrieves task processing statistics aggregated per route, returning counts of new, processing, skipped, finished, and failed tasks for each route. Supports optional filtering by a date range using the from and to query parameters and by a specific route identifier.
# Get the statistics of routes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/reporting/get-the-statistics-of-routes
/schema.json post /reporting/routes_statistics
Retrieves task and log statistics for the specified routes within a given time window, accepting a request body with the required from and to timestamps and one or more route identifiers. Returns per-route statistics including counts of new, finished, and failed tasks along with log error counts and memory usage.
# Get all available routes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/routing/get-all-available-routes
/schema.json get /routes
Retrieves all available routes, returning a list of route entries with their identifier, name, and type along with action metadata.
# General search
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/search/general-search
/schema.json get /search
Searches across configurations, tasks, and variables using the optional query string with predefined properties and search operators, and the optional filter expression. Returns each type as a separate group containing its matching results and metadata.
# Set the preferred update cycle
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/settings/set-the-preferred-update-cycle
/schema.json put /settings/update_cycle
Sets the preferred Alumio update cycle, accepting either "latest" or "lts" in the request body. Returns the updated update cycle setting.
# Allocate workers to a space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/allocate-workers-to-a-space
/schema.json post /space_workers/allocation
Allocates a number of workers to each space from the list in the request body and returns the updated worker allocation.
# Assign users to a space in bulk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/assign-users-to-a-space-in-bulk
/schema.json post /spaces/{space}/assign_users
Assigns a list of users to the space identified by the space path parameter in a single bulk operation, using the users array provided in the request body. Returns the resulting set of spaces on success.
# Assign workers to spaces
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/assign-workers-to-spaces
/schema.json post /space_workers/list
Assigns specific workers to spaces based on the worker identifiers supplied per space in the request body, and returns the updated worker assignments.
# Cancel a space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/cancel-a-space
/schema.json delete /spaces/cancel/{identifier}
Cancels the space identified by the path identifier so that it will be deleted on its expiration date, and returns a confirmation message.
# Create a space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/create-a-space
/schema.json post /spaces
Creates a space from the supplied identifier, name, purpose, and terms agreement, along with its initial users and data engine allocations. Returns the created space.
# Create a space user
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/create-a-space-user
/schema.json post /spaces/{space}/users
Adds a user to the given space, assigning the email address and one or more roles supplied in the request body. Returns the created space user on success.
# Delete a space user
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/delete-a-space-user
/schema.json delete /spaces/{space}/users/{email}
Removes the user identified by the email address from the given space, revoking their access. Returns a confirmation message.
# Export audit trail
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/export-audit-trail
/schema.json post /audit_trail/export
Exports the audit trail entries as a downloadable file, optionally narrowing the result set with the form-encoded filter parameter.
# Get a single space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-a-single-space
/schema.json get /spaces/{identifier}
Retrieves a single space identified by the path identifier, returning its full details.
# Get a single space user
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-a-single-space-user
/schema.json get /spaces/{space}/users/{email}
Retrieves a single user of the given space, identified by their email address. Returns the user's email, space, and assigned roles.
# Get all statistics for a specific period
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-all-statistics-for-a-specific-period
/schema.json get /spaces/tasks/statistics/totals
Retrieves task log totals per space, broken down by status (new, processing, finished, failed, and skipped). Accepts optional dateFrom and dateTo query parameters to restrict the statistics to a specific period.
# Get assigned space workers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-assigned-space-workers
/schema.json get /space_workers/allocation
Retrieves the current worker allocation per space, including the total number of available workers and the number of workers available per space.
# Get assigned space workers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-assigned-space-workers-1
/schema.json get /space_workers/list
Retrieves the list of workers assigned to each space, identified by their worker identifiers, along with the total number of available workers and the number of workers available per space.
# Get audit trail item
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-audit-trail-item
/schema.json get /audit_trail/item/{identifier}
Retrieves a single audit trail item identified by the path identifier. Returns the audit trail item details, or an error response if the identifier cannot be resolved.
# Get audit trail list
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-audit-trail-list
/schema.json get /audit_trail/list
Retrieves the list of audit trail entries, returning the matching items along with result metadata. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Get space users
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-space-users
/schema.json get /spaces/{space}/users
Retrieves the list of users that have access to the given space, returned together with action metadata. Supports an optional filter query parameter to apply search criteria.
# Get spaces
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-spaces
/schema.json get /spaces
Retrieves a paginated list of spaces along with metadata such as the total count and the space limit. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to apply search criteria.
# Get usage info
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/get-usage-info
/schema.json get /spaces/notifier/info
Retrieves notifier usage information across spaces.
# Reactivate a space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/reactivate-a-space
/schema.json get /spaces/reactivate/{identifier}
Reactivates a previously canceled space identified by the path identifier and returns a confirmation message.
# Search logs
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/search-logs
/schema.json post /spaces/audit_trail
Searches audit trail logs using the query supplied in the request body and returns the matching log entries. Accepts an optional index query parameter to select the log index to search, defaulting to filebeat-*.
# Update a space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/update-a-space
/schema.json put /spaces
Creates or updates a space from the supplied name, identifier, purpose, and optional description, and returns the resulting space object.
# Update a space user
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/spaces/update-a-space-user
/schema.json put /spaces/{space}/users/{email}
Updates the user identified by the email address within the given space, replacing their email and roles with the values from the request body. Returns the updated space user.
# Copy storage items from source to target
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/copy-storage-items-from-source-to-target
/schema.json post /storage/copy/{source}/{target}
Copies all stored items from the source storage into the target storage, both identified by path parameters. Returns information about the copied objects.
# Create a new entity in a storage
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/create-a-new-entity-in-a-storage
/schema.json post /storage/entity/{identifier}
Creates a new entity in the storage identified by the path identifier, using the required entity query parameter as its key. Returns the created entity value with its last-updated timestamp.
# Delete multiple entities from a storage
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/delete-multiple-entities-from-a-storage
/schema.json delete /storage/entities/{identifier}
Deletes multiple entities from the storage identified by the path identifier, selecting which entities to remove via the filter in the request body. Returns a message describing the result.
# Delete the content of a stored entity
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/delete-the-content-of-a-stored-entity
/schema.json delete /storage/entity/{identifier}
Deletes a single stored entity, selected by the storage path identifier and the required entity query parameter. Returns a message describing the result.
# Empty the stored entities
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/empty-the-stored-entities
/schema.json delete /storage/entities/{identifier}/empty/set
Removes all entities from the storage identified by the path identifier, emptying it completely. Returns a message describing the result.
# Export storage entities matching the filter
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/export-storage-entities-matching-the-filter
/schema.json post /storage/entities/{identifier}/export/bulk
Exports entities from the storage identified by the path identifier that match the filter in the request body, with an optional clientTime hint. Streams the matching entities as a newline-delimited JSON (application/x-ndjson) response.
# Get a list of storage entities
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/get-a-list-of-storage-entities
/schema.json get /storage/entities/{identifier}
Retrieves the list of entities in the storage identified by the path identifier, optionally narrowed by the filter query parameter. Returns the matching entities along with metadata and a pagination cursor.
# Prune storages
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/storage/prune-storages
/schema.json post /storage/prune
Prunes storages to remove expired or obsolete entries, optionally limited to a single storage via the identifier query parameter. Returns a message describing the result of the prune operation.
# Create a system administrator
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministrator/create-a-system-administrator
/schema.json post /system_administrators
Creates a new system administrator from the supplied email address and roles, and returns the created administrator.
# Delete the supplied system administrator
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministrator/delete-the-supplied-system-administrator
/schema.json delete /system_administrators/{email}
Deletes the system administrator identified by the email path parameter, and returns a confirmation message.
# Get system administrators
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministrator/get-system-administrators
/schema.json get /system_administrators
Retrieves the list of system administrators, returning their email addresses and assigned roles. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Get the requested system administrator
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministrator/get-the-requested-system-administrator
/schema.json get /system_administrators/{email}
Retrieves a single system administrator identified by the email path parameter, returning their email address and assigned roles.
# Update a system administrator
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministrator/update-a-system-administrator
/schema.json put /system_administrators/{email}
Updates the system administrator identified by the email path parameter with the supplied email address and roles, and returns the updated administrator.
# Delete a system administrator token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministratortoken/delete-a-system-administrator-token
/schema.json delete /system_administrator_tokens/{identifier}
Deletes the system administrator token identified by the identifier path parameter, revoking access for that token immediately. Returns a confirmation message.
# Generate a new system administrator token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministratortoken/generate-a-new-system-administrator-token
/schema.json post /system_administrator_tokens
Generates a new system administrator token from the supplied name and optional description. Returns the generated access token together with its identifier. The access token is only shown once. A system administrator token grants system-wide administrative access to this environment, including managing spaces. By creating a token you accept responsibility for keeping it secret, sharing it only with parties that are allowed to administer this environment, and revoking it as soon as it is no longer needed.
# Get a system administrator token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministratortoken/get-a-system-administrator-token
/schema.json get /system_administrator_tokens/{identifier}
Retrieves a single system administrator token identified by the identifier path parameter. Returns the token's metadata such as name, description, creation details, and last used timestamp.
# List system administrator tokens
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministratortoken/list-system-administrator-tokens
/schema.json get /system_administrator_tokens
Retrieves the list of system administrator token identifiers along with their metadata. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to apply search criteria.
# Update a system administrator token
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/systemadministratortoken/update-a-system-administrator-token
/schema.json patch /system_administrator_tokens/{identifier}
Updates the name and description of the system administrator token identified by the identifier path parameter. Returns the updated token.
# Get aggregated task statistics
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasklogger/get-aggregated-task-statistics
/schema.json get /tasks/statistics
Retrieves aggregated task log statistics grouped by date, returning per-status counts of new, processing, finished, failed, and skipped log items. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Get all statistics for a specific period
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasklogger/get-all-statistics-for-a-specific-period
/schema.json get /tasks/statistics/totals
Retrieves aggregated task log statistics, returning the total counts of log items grouped by status (new, processing, finished, failed, and skipped). Accepts an optional filter for search criteria and dateFrom and dateTo parameters to restrict the totals to a specific period.
# Get environment task statistics time series
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasklogger/get-environment-task-statistics-time-series
/schema.json get /tasks/statistics/environment/time_series
Retrieves a time series of task statistics for the environment, returning per-period counts of new, processing, finished, failed, and skipped task log items. Requires a filter to scope the results and accepts an optional aggregation level (daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly, defaulting to monthly).
# Get the current task limits
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasklogger/get-the-current-task-limits
/schema.json get /tasks/limits
Retrieves the task usage limits for the current environment, returning the maximum number of tasks allowed alongside the number of tasks currently used.
# Export task entity data
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/export-task-entity-data
/schema.json get /tasks/{identifier}/entity-data/export
Exports the entity data of the task identified by the path parameter. Returns the data as a downloadable JSON attachment.
# Export tasks matching filter
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/export-tasks-matching-filter
/schema.json post /tasks/export/bulk
Exports all tasks matching the filter supplied in the form-encoded request body, using the optional clientTime value to align timestamps with the caller's timezone.
# Get a task
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/get-a-task
/schema.json get /tasks/{identifier}
Retrieves a single task by its identifier, including detailed information such as entity data, context, status, route, and processing metadata.
# Get task entity data
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/get-task-entity-data
/schema.json get /tasks/{identifier}/entity-data
Retrieves the entity data of the task identified by the given path identifier. Returns a JSON object containing the task's entity data under the data property.
# List tasks
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/list-tasks
/schema.json get /tasks
Retrieves a paginated list of tasks, optionally narrowed by search criteria passed in the filter query parameter. Returns the matching tasks along with action metadata.
# Patch tasks entity data
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/patch-tasks-entity-data
/schema.json patch /tasks/{identifier}/entity-data
Update the entity data of a task. Only tasks with status 'new' or 'failed' can be edited.
# Prune tasks
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/prune-tasks
/schema.json post /tasks/prune
Deletes tasks older than the required maxAge or beyond the required maxCount most recent tasks, optionally restricted by the filter query parameter. Returns the number of tasks removed for being expired and for exceeding the count.
# Repair stuck tasks
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/repair-stuck-tasks
/schema.json post /tasks/repair/stuck
Resets tasks that have been stuck for at least the given age (default 1 hour) to the newStatus (default new), optionally limited by the filter query parameter. Returns the number of tasks repaired and the status they were set to.
# Resolve tasks matching filter
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/resolve-tasks-matching-filter
/schema.json post /tasks/resolve/bulk
Sets the status to resolved for all tasks matching the filter in the request body. Returns the new status and the number of tasks affected.
# Retry tasks matching filter
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/retry-tasks-matching-filter
/schema.json post /tasks/retry/bulk
Sets the status to retry for all tasks matching the filter in the request body. Returns the new status and the number of tasks affected.
# Set task status to failed
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/set-task-status-to-failed
/schema.json post /tasks/waiting_to_failed/bulk
Set the status of tasks from waiting to failed.
# Set task status to finished
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/set-task-status-to-finished
/schema.json post /tasks/waiting_to_finished/bulk
Set the status of tasks from waiting to finished.
# Skip tasks matching filter
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/skip-tasks-matching-filter
/schema.json post /tasks/skip/bulk
Sets the status to skipped for all tasks matching the filter in the request body. Returns the new status and the number of tasks affected.
# Update waiting tasks in bulk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/tasks/update-waiting-tasks-in-bulk
/schema.json post /tasks/update_waiting/bulk
Transitions waiting tasks to a finished or failed status in bulk, attaching the provided log messages to each identifier. Returns the number of tasks updated together with their details.
# Execute a transformer
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/transformer/execute-a-transformer
/schema.json post /transformers/execute
Runs the transformer of the given "type" (defaulting to "list-transformer") against the supplied request body and returns the resulting entities. Supports debugging via the "breakpoints" and "stop-exec-at" query parameters to pause or halt execution at specific points.
# Get UI schema by type
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/ui/get-ui-schema-by-type
/schema.json get /ui/schema/{type}
Retrieves the UI schema items for the type given in the path, returning them as a map of items under an object wrapper.
# Create a new table filter for the user
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/create-a-new-table-filter-for-the-user
/schema.json post /user-tables/filters
Creates a new table filter for the current user from the supplied table key, name, and filter criteria. Returns the stored filter, including its generated identifier.
# Create a user in the current space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/create-a-user-in-the-current-space
/schema.json post /current_space/users
Creates a new user in the current space from the supplied email address and one or more roles. Returns the created user.
# Delete a table filter by identifier
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/delete-a-table-filter-by-identifier
/schema.json delete /user-tables/filters/{identifier}
Deletes the table filter matching the given identifier. Returns a confirmation message once the filter has been removed.
# Delete a user from the current space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/delete-a-user-from-the-current-space
/schema.json delete /current_space/users/{email}
Removes the user identified by the email path parameter from the current space. Returns a confirmation message.
# Get a single user from the current space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/get-a-single-user-from-the-current-space
/schema.json get /current_space/users/{email}
Retrieves a single user from the current space identified by the email path parameter. Returns the user's email address and assigned roles.
# Get accessible spaces for current user
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/get-accessible-spaces-for-current-user
/schema.json get /user/spaces
Retrieves the list of spaces the currently authenticated user has access to, including each space's identifier, name, and the user's roles within it.
# Get current logged-in user
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/get-current-logged-in-user
/schema.json get /users/current
Retrieves the profile of the currently authenticated user based on the request's credentials. Returns the user details as a UserResponse.
# Get the table filters
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/get-the-table-filters
/schema.json get /user-tables/filters
Retrieves the list of saved table filters for the current user. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to narrow the results by search criteria.
# Get users of the current space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/get-users-of-the-current-space
/schema.json get /current_space/users
Retrieves the list of users belonging to the current space, each with their email address and assigned roles. Accepts an optional filter query parameter to apply search criteria.
# Save updated user preferences
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/save-updated-user-preferences
/schema.json put /users/preferences/update
Updates the authenticated user's preferences by merging the supplied updatedPreferences object into the stored settings. Returns the updated user, including the new preferences.
# Update a table filter by identifier
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/update-a-table-filter-by-identifier
/schema.json put /user-tables/filters/{identifier}
Updates the table filter matching the given identifier with the supplied table key, name, and filter criteria. Returns the updated filter.
# Update a user in the current space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/update-a-user-in-the-current-space
/schema.json put /current_space/users/{email}
Updates the user in the current space identified by the email path parameter, replacing their assigned roles with those in the request body. Returns the updated user.
# Update user preferences in the current space
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/users/update-user-preferences-in-the-current-space
/schema.json put /current_space/user_preferences/update
Updates the preferences of the current user in the current space using the preference values supplied in the request body. Returns the updated user.
# Accelo
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/accelo
Connect Alumio to Accelo.
## Extra information
System documentation: [WooCommerce API Reference ](https://woocommerce.github.io/woocommerce-rest-api-docs/)
## Connector package documentation
**Accelo**
# Setting up HTTP Client Accelo
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Accelo HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Authentication type, Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes (optional).
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Accelo
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Accelo Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Accelo.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Accelo HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Accelo documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Accelo API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Accelo. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Accelo API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Accelo API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get Activity entity
That’s why we need to define the **activity\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get Activity.
/activities/24
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Accelo.
# Publishing Entity to Accelo
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Accelo Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Accelo entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Accelo.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Accelo endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Accelo API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Remove Company. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Remove a Company” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Accelo into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Accelo with URL /companies/\{company\_id}
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Accelo.
# Act-On
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/act-on
Connect Alumio to Act-On.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
## Setting up HTTP Client Act-On
**Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Act-On HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, Username, and Password.
3. Scopes is optional.
4. Choose Content-Type (Explained at Important Notes Below)
## Subscribing to Entities from Act-On
**Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Act-On Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Act-On.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Act-On HTTP Client to use
**General Concept**
We follow Act-On documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Act-On API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Act-On. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Act-On API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Act-On API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define the **listid**, and **recordid** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such a Request Parameters field.
/api/1/list/123/record/123/facts
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Act-On.
## Publishing Entity to Act-On
**Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Act-On Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Act-On entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Act-On.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Act-On endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Act-On API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a User. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create Bew Account User(s)” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Act-On into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Act-On with URL /api/1/user
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Act-On.
***
## Important Notes
**On the endpoints, we do not support query on Input**
see that the Endpoint is
/api/1/list/\{listid}/record?email=\{emailaddress}.
In Alumio we make it like this.
/api/1/list/\{listid}/record
we didn't insert any query on this one, in this case, you have to insert manually on the parameter like this.
```
{
"path": [],
"query": {
"email": "emailAdressHere"
},
"payload": []
}
```
**We Currently are not supporting File (-F) type of Payload in Alumio.**
ex :
**For the Data Payload,**
ex :
In this case, you have to create another Client and Publisher for it.
Please look at the Publisher I’ve created.
See that the Content-Type is form-urlencoded.
Take a look at the Client, and see the Content Type is form-urlencoded.
In this case, you have to create 2 clients and 2 publishers for Json and URL-encoded and use it differently.
# Adyen
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/adyen
Connect Alumio to Adyen.
## Extra information
System documentation: [\[Adyen API Reference\]](https://docs.adyen.com/api-explorer/)
# Setting up HTTP Client Adyen
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Adyen HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Choose the Authentication Type.
* Basic : Fill the Username and Password
* Api Key : Fill in the Api Key
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Adyen
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Adyen Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Adyen.
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Adyen HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Adyen documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Adyen API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Adyen. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Adyen API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Adyen API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get a company acount entity.
That’s why we need to define the **companyId** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get a company account.
/v3/companies/AlumioTestingSite
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Adyen.
# Publishing Entity to Adyen
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Adyen Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Adyen entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Adyen.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Adyen endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Adyen API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create an Order. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create an order” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Adyen into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Adyen with URL /v71/orders
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Adyen.
# AFAS
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/afas
Connect Alumio to AFAS Profit.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://help.afas.nl/help/EN/SE/App\_Cnr\_Rest\_Api.htm](https://help.afas.nl/help/EN/SE/App_Cnr_Rest_Api.htm)
Find shared AFAS configurations in our [Exchange configuration category](https://forum.alumio.com/c/ipaas-general/exchange-configuration/146).
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client AFAS
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to Entities from AFAS
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General Concept
* **3.** Publishing Entity to AFAS
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General Concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client AFAS
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients.
2. Create a new HTTP Client and select AFAS Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
3. AFAS has a URL with an environment ID that needs to be filled in along with the Base64 of the AFAS token that you would like to use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from AFAS
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration and select AFAS Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the AFAS HTTP Client to use.
3. (Optional) Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. (Optional) Add a transformer to modify the request parameters into something you need.
**2.2 General Concept**
AFAS uses a custom connector for using the subscriber. Please fill the Entity based on the connector name in the AFAS application.
**Entity**
Fill in the connector name that you created in the AFAS application.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed Entity based on the AFAS API Docs. As an example, to get an "Order" that’s dated in the year 2022, you can fill it in as follows:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.
For example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the "Request Parameters" are loaded. This means you can basically add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This refers to the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access AFAS.
### 3. Publishing Entity to AFAS
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, to create a new outgoing configuration and select the AFAS – Entity Publisher as the Publisher.
2. Optionally, you can also add any transformers to modify the data into anything you need before submitting it to AFAS.
3. Select the AFAS HTTP Client to use.
4. Fill in the AFAS connector name with the same one used in the AFAS application.
**3.2 General Concept**
AFAS uses a custom connector to use the Publisher. Please fill the Entity based on the connector name used in the AFAS application.
**Method**
You can select the method of Post, Update or Delete to do what you want with the Publisher.
**Entity**
To fill data using the Alumio AFAS connector, you need to use the Alumio standard pathing and fill the payload with the data you need to add to AFAS, as an example, when we creating an order.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to AFAS based on the setting
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access AFAS.
# Aha!
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/aha
Connect Alumio to Aha!.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Aha! API Reference](https://www.aha.io/api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Aha!
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Aha!
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Aha!
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Aha!
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Aha! HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Token URL, Authorize URL, Client ID and Client Secret.
(See the [Aha! Authentication Documentation](https://www.aha.io/api) for more information)
4. Click on "Grant access to Aha!" and you will be redirected to Aha! website to get the key for the client.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Aha!
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Aha! Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Aha!.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Aha! HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Aha!.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Aha! documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Aha! API Reference](https://www.aha.io/api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Aha!. Please refer to the entities from [Aha! API Reference](https://www.aha.io/api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Aha! API Reference](https://www.aha.io/api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve list comments by subscribing ["Comments API - List comments on a goal"](https://www.aha.io/api/resources/comments/list_comments_on_a_goal) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the goal id as parameters. That is why we set the "goal\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Aha! with the URL `/api/v1/goals/7416189478687263166/comments`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Aha!.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Aha!
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Aha! Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Aha! entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Aha!.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Aha! endpoints.
Please refer to [Aha! API Reference](https://www.aha.io/api) page.
For example, we want to update a product. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Products API - Update a product"](https://www.aha.io/api/resources/products/update_a_product).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Aha! with URL `/api/v1/products/7416573148990007139`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Aha!.
# Airfocus
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/airfocus
Connect Alumio to Airfocus.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Airfocus API Reference]
**Airfocus**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Airfocus
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Airfocus HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Api Key.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Airfocus
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Airfocus Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Airfocus .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Airfocus HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Airfocus documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Airfocus API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Airfocus. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Airfocus API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Airfocus . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Airfocus API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Airfocus API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Retrieve a single field.
That’s why we need to define the **fieldId** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve a single field.
/api/fields/abc123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Airfocus .
# Publishing Entity to Airfocus
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Airfocus Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Airfocus entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Airfocus .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Airfocus endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Airfocus API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Update a workspace. Please select “Put” as the action and “Update an existing workspace” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Airfocus into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Airfocus with URL /api/workspaces/workspace123
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Airfocus .
# Akeneo
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/akeneo
Connect Alumio to Akeneo.
## Extra information
System documentation Akeneo REST API: [https://api.akeneo.com/api-reference.html](https://api.akeneo.com/api-reference.html)
System documentation Akeneo GraphQL: [https://api.akeneo.com/graphql/getting-started.html](https://api.akeneo.com/graphql/getting-started.html)
## Connector package documentation
\[details="Akeneo REST API"]
### 1. Setting up the Akeneo HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select the Akeneo HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, Username, Password, and Authentication Method
Note: We recommend using Body as an Authentication Method.
3. Press “Grant Access to Akeneo”.
4. The Key will show up and you can save the Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to entities from Akeneo
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration and select the Akeneo Subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Akeneo.
3. (Optional) Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can also add a transformer to modify the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Akeneo HTTP Client to use.
6. You can add a pagination feature to allow Alumio to fetch a paginated entity.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Akeneo documentation for building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the Akeneo API Reference.
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to from Akeneo. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Akeneo API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed Entity based on the Akeneo API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing the "All Parcels" Entity.
* The property `path` is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the `{id}`.
* The property `query` is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
This is why you need to define the code property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. The final URL will be like this `/api/rest/v1/products/123`.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can basically add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an Entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Akeneo.
### 3. Publishing entities to Akeneo
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select the Akeneo Publisher as the Publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the Publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Akeneo entity where you want the data to be published.
4. Optionally, you can add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also add any transformers to modify the data into anything you need before submitting it to Akeneo.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the Subscriber, the Publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Akeneo endpoints, but not with publishing binary files for now. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Akeneo API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to delete a Product. Please select “Delete” as the action and [“Delete a Product”](https://api.akeneo.com/api-reference.html#delete_products__code_) as the entity of the publisher.
As you can see, we need to add `code` in the Path, so please make sure we add `code` inside the `path` key in the data. For example:
Alumio will send an API request to Akeneo with URL `/api/rest/v1/products/123`
Another example is when we want to update several products at once. Please select “Patch” as the Action and ["Update/create Several Products"](https://api.akeneo.com/api-reference.html#patch_products) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires the product data as the body. In order to achieve this, we should provide the product data in our data in the key `payload` within Alumio.
Akeneo will process the request and return a response (please enable logging in HTTP Client to make this visible).
You may look that in the documentation, the endpoint requires us to provide [NDJSON](http://ndjson.org/) format to send to Akeneo.
Rest assured, our Akeneo connector has the capability to automatically change the JSON input to NDJSON format, based on the endpoint's documentation at Akeneo.
* The property `path` is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the `{id}`.
* The property `query` is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* The property `payload` is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Akeneo.
\[/details]
\[details="Akeneo GraphQL"]
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Akeneo GraphQL
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Akeneo GraphQL Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, X-PIM-URL, Username, Password, X-PIM-Client-ID or Client ID, and Client Secret.
* Save and Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from Akeneo GraphQL
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Akeneo - GraphQL Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Add any Request URI that you need to add from the Base URI from Client.
* Select the HTTP Method you want to subscribe to from Akeneo GraphQL (Recommended POST).
* Add any request data in the request parameter that you needed to subscribe to the entity.
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Akeneo GraphQL HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Akeneo GraphQL documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Akeneo GraphQL API Reference.
**Request URI**
It’s the Endpoint you want to subscribe from Akeneo.
**Request Method**
It’s the HTTP Method that you want to use, we recommend using post as default method.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Akeneo GraphQL API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing productModels.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Akeneo GraphQL.
# Publishing Entity to Akeneo GraphQL
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Akeneo Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the Request URI you want the data to be published.
* Select the Request Method that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Add any request data in the request parameter that you needed to subscribe to the entity.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it.
**Request Parameters**
Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Akeneo GraphQL API Reference page.
Please look at the example below. For example, we want to Get Product List
You can put the payload you want to send to Akeneo GraphQL into the Request Parameters .
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Akeneo GraphQL.
\[/details]
# Algolia
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/algolia
Connect Alumio to Algolia.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Algolia API Reference](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Algolia
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Algolia
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Algolia
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Algolia
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Algolia Dashboard, go to Settings -> Organization Settings -> Teams and Access -> API Keys.
You can manage the Application ID, and API Keys.
Please make sure you choose the right API keys for your need.
(For more information, see [Algolia API Keys](https://www.algolia.com/doc/guides/security/api-keys/))
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Algolia Client as the HTTP Client.
3. Fill in the Base URI, Algolia Application ID, and Algolia API Key.
(For more information, see [Algolia Hosts](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/#hosts))
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Algolia
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Algolia Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Algolia.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Algolia.
5. Select the Algolia HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Algolia documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Algolia API Reference](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Algolia. Please refer to the entities from [Algolia API Reference](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [Algolia API Reference](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing ["Search Index"](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/#search-endpoints) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "indexName" as a path. That is why we set the "indexName" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Algolia with the URL /1/indexes/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Algolia.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Algolia
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Algolia Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Algolia entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH Method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Algolia.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Algolia endpoints.
Please refer to [Algolia API Reference](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/) page.
For example, we want to use [“Delete object”](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/#objects-endpoints) entity. Please select “Delete” as the Action and [“Delete object”](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/#objects-endpoints) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "indexName" and "objectID" as a path. That is why we set the "indexName" and "objectID" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Algolia with URL /1/indexes/contacts/myID.
Another example is when we want to use [“Add/replace object (with ID)”](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/#objects-endpoints) entity. Please select “Update” as the Action and [“Add/replace object (with ID)”](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/#objects-endpoints) as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Algolia into the payload key in the data. Here is an example of the possible Data for [“Add/replace object (with ID)”](https://www.algolia.com/doc/rest-api/search/#objects-endpoints).
Alumio will send an API request to Algolia with URL /1/indexes/contacts/myID.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Algolia.
# Amazon Selling Partner
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/amazon-selling-partner
Connect Alumio to Amazon Selling Partner.
## Extra information
System documentation: [\[Amazon Selling Partner API Reference\]](https://developer-docs.amazon.com/sp-api/docs/welcome)
**Amazon Selling Partner**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Amazon Selling Partner
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Amazon Selling Partner HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Client ID, Client Secret, and Refresh Token.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Amazon Selling Partner
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Amazon Selling Partner Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Amazon Selling Partner.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Amazon Selling Partner HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Amazon Selling Partner documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Amazon Selling Partner API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Amazon Selling Partner. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Amazon Selling Partner API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Amazon Selling Partner API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing getCatalogItem
That’s why we need to define the **asin** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on getCatalogItem.
/catalog/v0/items/**KCL123B**
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Amazon Selling Partner.
# Publishing Entity to Amazon Selling Partner
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Amazon Selling Partner Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Amazon Selling Partner entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Amazon Selling Partner.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Amazon Selling Partner endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Amazon Selling Partner API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Scheduled Package. Please select “Post” as the action and “createScheduled Package” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Amazon Selling Partner into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Amazon Selling Partner with URL /easyShip/2022-03-23/package
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Amazon Selling Partner.
# AS2 Gateway
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/as2-gateway
Connect Alumio to AS2 Gateway.
## Extra information
System documentation: [AS2 Gateway API Reference](https://aayutechnologies.com/docs/product/as2-gateway/rest-api-integration/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client AS2 Gateway
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from AS2 Gateway
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to AS2 Gateway
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client AS2 Gateway
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select AS2 Gateway HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Username and Password.
4. You can optionally enable caching of the token and set Alumio storage to store the token.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from AS2 Gateway
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "AS2 Gateway Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from AS2 Gateway.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the AS2 Gateway HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from AS2 Gateway.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow AS2 Gateway documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [AS2 Gateway API Reference](https://aayutechnologies.com/docs/product/as2-gateway/rest-api-integration/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to AS2 Gateway. Please refer to the entities from [AS2 Gateway API Reference](https://aayutechnologies.com/docs/product/as2-gateway/rest-api-integration/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [AS2 Gateway API Reference](https://aayutechnologies.com/docs/product/as2-gateway/rest-api-integration/) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Retrieving a Received AS2 Message entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "as2\_message\_id" as parameters. That is why we set the "as2\_message\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to AS2 Gateway with the URL `/v1/message/received/<1612348314.4843.1712128400537@as2gateway.com>`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access AS2 Gateway.
### 3. Publishing Entity to AS2 Gateway
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "AS2 Gateway Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the AS2 Gateway entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Patch method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to AS2 Gateway.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most AS2 Gateway endpoints.
Please refer to [AS2 Gateway API Reference](https://aayutechnologies.com/docs/product/as2-gateway/rest-api-integration/) page.
For example, we want to add a new contact. Please select “Post” as the Method and "Sending AS2 Messages" as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires "as2\_station\_id" and "as2\_partner\_id" as parameters, it also requires multipart request body. Please go into the "Advanced" tab and set the "as2\_station\_id" and "as2\_partner\_id" inside the path key inside Advanced Path Parameters. Then we set "Body type" as "Multipart/form-data". Because AS2 require file as Key, please always set the Key into file. Please set the other field as you need.
Alumio will send an API request to AS2 Gateway with URL /v1/message/ALUMIO123/PARTNER123
* Path Parameters is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query Parameters is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Body Type and Parameter will determine the data you will send inside the request
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access AS2 Gateway.
# Asana
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/asana
Connect Alumio to Asana.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Asana API Reference](https://developers.asana.com/reference/rest-api-reference)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Asana
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Asana
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Asana
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Asana
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Asana HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. We support Personal access token authentication and Oauth Authentication
(For more information, see [Asana Authentication Reference](https://developers.asana.com/docs/authentication))
(Please press the button Grant access to Asana when using oauth)
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Asana
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Asana Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Asana.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Asana.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the Asana HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Asana documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Asana API Reference](https://developers.asana.com/reference/rest-api-reference).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Asana. Please refer to the entities from [Asana API Reference](https://developers.asana.com/reference/rest-api-reference).
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Asana API Reference](https://developers.asana.com/reference/rest-api-reference).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Get teams in a workspace"](https://developers.asana.com/reference/getteamsforworkspace) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "workspace\_gid" as a path. That is why we set the "workspace\_gid" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Asana with the URL /workspaces/1204588700815234/teams
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Asana.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Asana
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Asana Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Asana entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Asana.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Asana endpoints.
Please refer to [Asana API Reference](https://developers.asana.com/reference/rest-api-reference) page.
For example, we want to create a team. Please select "Create" for the Action then ["Create a team"](https://developers.asana.com/reference/createteam) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we need to add data. So we put the data inside the payload key in the Alumio Data.
Alumio will send an API request to Asana with URL /teams
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Asana.
# Atlassian Confluence Cloud
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/atlassian-confluence-cloud
Connect Alumio to Atlassian Confluence Cloud.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client Confluence Cloud
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Confluence Cloud HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Username, Password.
# Subscribing to Entities from Confluence Cloud
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Confluence Cloud Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Confluence Cloud.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
## Select the Confluence Cloud HTTP Client to use. General Concept
We follow Confluence Cloud documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Confluence Cloud API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Confluence Cloud. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Confluence Cloud API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Confluence Cloud API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity.
That’s why we need to define **id and versionNumber** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on coupon entity.
/wiki/rest/api/content/1/version/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Confluence Cloud.
# Publishing Entity to Confluence Cloud
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Confluence Cloud Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Confluence Cloud entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Confluence Cloud endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Confluence Cloud API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Thread. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create new user group” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Confluence Cloud into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Confluence Cloud with URL /wiki/rest/api/group
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Confluence Cloud.
# Atlassian Jira Cloud
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/atlassian-jira-cloud
Connect Alumio to Atlassian Jira Cloud.
## Extra information
System documentation:
**Atlassian Jira Cloud**
## Connector Package Documentation\*\*
# Setting up HTTP Client Atlassian Jira Cloud
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Atlassian Jira Cloud HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password.
# Subscribing to Entities from Atlassian Jira Cloud
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Atlassian Jira Cloud Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Atlassian Jira Cloud.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
## Select the Atlassian Jira Cloud HTTP Client to use. General Concept
We follow Atlassian Jira Cloud documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Atlassian Jira Cloud API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Atlassian Jira Cloud. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Atlassian Jira Cloud API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Atlassian Jira Cloud API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on coupon entity.
/rest/api/3/user?accountId= 5b10ac8d82e05b22cc7d4ef5
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Atlassian Jira Cloud.
# Publishing Entity to Atlassian Jira Cloud
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Atlassian Jira Cloud Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Atlassian Jira Cloud entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Atlassian Jira Cloud endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Atlassian Jira Cloud API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a User. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create User” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Atlassian Jira Cloud into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Atlassian Jira Cloud with URL /rest/api/3/user
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Atlassian Jira Cloud.
# Atlassian Jira Server
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/atlassian-jira-server
Connect Alumio to Atlassian Jira Server.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Atlassian Jira Server
## Connector Package Documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client Atlassian Jira Server
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Atlassian Jira Server HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and Authentication Type
* Basic
* Fill in Username and Password (Replace Password with API Token).
* PATs
* Fill in the Bearer Token
3. Save.
# Subscribing to Entities from Atlassian Jira Server
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Atlassian Jira Server Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Atlassian Jira Server.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Atlassian Jira Server HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Atlassian Jira Server documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Atlassian Jira Server API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from Atlassian Jira Server. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Atlassian Jira Server API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Atlassian Jira Server API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when calling “Get project category by id” entity
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get project category by id.
/rest/api/2/projectCategory/abc
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Atlassian Jira Server.
# Publishing Entity to Atlassian Jira Server
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Atlassian Jira Server Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Atlassian Jira Server entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Atlassian Jira Server endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Atlassian Jira Server API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create project category. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create project category” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Atlassian Jira Server into the payload property in the data, Here's the Example of payload and response.
Alumio will send an API request to Atlassian Jira Server with URL /rest/api/2/projectCategory
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Atlassian Jira Server.
# Auth0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/auth0
Connect Alumio to Auth0.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Auth0 API Reference](https://auth0.com/docs/api/management/v2)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Auth0
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Auth0
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Auth0
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Auth0
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Auth0 HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, Scopes and Audience.
4. Click on "Grant access to Auth0" and you will get the key for the client.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Auth0
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Auth0 Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Auth0.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Auth0 HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Auth0.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Auth0 documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Auth0 API Reference](https://auth0.com/docs/api/management/v2).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Auth0. Please refer to the entities from [Auth0 API Reference](https://auth0.com/docs/api/management/v2) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Auth0 API Reference](https://auth0.com/docs/api/management/v2).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve details of a client by subscribing ["Clients - Get client by ID"](https://auth0.com/docs/api/management/v2/clients/get-clients-by-id) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the client id as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Auth0 with the URL `/api/v2/clients/fcIhGma68utXY5tWMcfgSWyOjzEeyBLm`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Auth0.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Auth0
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Auth0 Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Auth0 entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Auth0.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Auth0 endpoints.
Please refer to [Auth0 API Reference](https://auth0.com/docs/api/management/v2) page.
For example, we want to create a user. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Users - Create a User"](https://auth0.com/docs/api/management/v2/users/post-users).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a body parameters. That is why we set the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Auth0 with URL `/api/v2/users`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Auth0.
# Basecamp
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/basecamp
Connect Alumio to Basecamp.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client Basecamp 4
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Basecamp 4 HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, and Client Secret.
3. Press “Grant Access to Basecamp 4 ”.
4. Press Save Button on Top-Right.
# Subscribing to Entities from Basecamp 4
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Basecamp 4 Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Entity you want to subscribe from Basecamp 4.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Shipstation HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Basecamp 4 documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Basecamp 4 API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Basecamp 4. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Basecamp 4 API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Basecamp 4 API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define the **id1** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such a Request Parameters field. (For more examples on how we define the path parameters please see extra Notes below).
/projects/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Basecamp 4.
# Publishing Entity to Basecamp 4
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Basecamp 4 Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Basecamp 4 entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently we support Post, Put, and Delete methods for submitting data to Basecamp 4 Cloud API.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Basecamp 4 endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Basecamp 4 API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Project. Please select “POST” as the action and “Create a Project” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Basecamp 4 into payload property in the data. Here is an
example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Basecamp 4 with URL /projects.json
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Basecamp 4.
# Extra Notes
**Endpoint Decision**
For the Path in the Endpoint the name of the ID is undecided in Documentation
This is from the Documentation :
`/buckets/1/chats/2.json`
This is what i implement on Endpoint :
`"/buckets/{{id1}}/chats/{{id2}}.json"`
This also implemented in the Random Number Generated on Docs
`/buckets/1/card_tables/lists/3/cards.json`
Implemented :
`"/buckets/{{id1}}/card_tables/lists/{{id2}}/cards.json"`
This works for every endpoint that has a random number in the endpoint
`/buckets/1/card_tables/lists/3/cards.json`
So if the Endpoints are like this
`/buckets/1/3/1/3/cards.json`
Implemented :
`/buckets/{{id1}}/{{id2}}/{{id3}}/{{id4}}/cards.json`
# BigCartel
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/bigcartel
Connect Alumio to BigCartel.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[BigCartel API Reference]
**BigCartel**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client BigCartel
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select BigCartel HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from BigCartel
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select BigCartel Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from BigCartel .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the BigCartel HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow BigCartel documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on BigCartel API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from BigCartel . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from BigCartel API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on BigCartel API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get all products.
That’s why we need to define the **account\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get all products.
/v1/accounts/Alumio/products
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access BigCartel .
# Publishing Entity to BigCartel
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select BigCartel Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the BigCartel entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to BigCartel .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most BigCartel endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the BigCartel API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new cateogry. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a cateogry” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to BigCartel into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to BigCartel with URL /v1/accounts/Alumio/categories
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access BigCartel .
# BigCommerce
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/bigcommerce
Connect Alumio to BigCommerce.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://developer.bigcommerce.com/api-reference/239aeabf5a786-storefront-carts#management-apis](https://developer.bigcommerce.com/api-reference/239aeabf5a786-storefront-carts#management-apis)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up the BigCommerce HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from BigCommerce
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entities to BigCommerce
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the BigCommerce HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. Go to the API Accounts page in BigCommerce Control Panel (Advanced Settings -> API Accounts) and create a new API Account.
2. Select the scopes you need and save them.
3. You will get a file downloaded from the page containing the Base URI and Access Token to be used to configure the HTTP Client in your Alumio Dashboard.
4. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select BigCommerce Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
5. Fill in the Base URI and Access Token with the values from the downloaded file when creating an API Account in the BigCommerce Control Panel. We recommend putting the Base URI and Access Token as Alumio Environment Variables and using the variables instead of directly filling the values in the BigCommerce HTTP Client form.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from BigCommerce
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select BigCommerce – Entity Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from BigCommerce.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the BigCommerce HTTP Client to use.
6. You can add a pagination feature to allow Alumio to fetch a paginated entity.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow BigCommerce documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on BigCommerce API Reference.
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to from BigCommerce. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the BigCommerce API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the BigCommerce API reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to the "Product Images" entity.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
This means that we want to subscribe to product images of a product with ID 111, and we only want to fetch the url\_standard and url\_thumbnail of every image. We can see in the documentation that the product images entity requires product\_id as a path parameter to define which product we want to fetch the images from.
That’s why we need to define the product\_id property inside the path key in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters (in this example, would be include\_fields, page, and limit) will be parsed as query parameters. The final URL that Alumio requested is /v3/catalog/products/111/images?page=1\&limit=3\&include\_fields=url\_standard%2Curl\_thumbnail
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access BigCommerce.
**Follow Pagination**
We can configure Alumio to be able to fetch a paginated entity from BigCommerce in a single run of the incoming configuration. In order to do a pagination for a BigCommerce entity within Alumio, you need to fill the “Pattern to Items” with “data” because BigCommerce wraps the data returned inside the “data” property. And then, please select “Increase query parameter” as the “Follow Pagination” method. Please have a look at the picture below.
The above configuration will allow Alumio to fetch a maximum of 100 pages of the entity with 100 entities per page. When Alumio has fetched the 100th page, Alumio will stop and track the pagination progress in the Storage, which you can select “Storage to track progress”. In the next run of the incoming configuration, Alumio will continue the pagination process if you select the storage.
### 3. Publishing Entities to BigCommerce
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select BigCommerce – Entity Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the BigCommerce entity where you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can add transformers to manipulate the data into anything you need before submitting it to BigCommerce.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in the outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using a Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) entities.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most BigCommerce endpoints but not publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the BigCommerce API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to update an image of a specific product. Please select “Update” as the action and “Product Image by Product ID and Image ID” as the entity of the publisher.
The documentation says that we need product\_id and image\_id as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide product\_id and image\_id properties into the path property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in the Outgoing Configuration. And you can put the payload you want to send to BigCommerce into the payload key in the data. Here is an example of the required data.
Alumio will send an API request to BigCommerce with URL /v3/catalog/products/111/images/371, and the body will be like this:
For endpoints that require us to put query parameters into the URL, i.e., Delete Brands, you can just put the query into the query property in the data like this:
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to BigCommerce with URL /v3/catalog/brands?name=Brand%20X
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access BigCommerce.
# BigCommerce B2B
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/bigcommerce-b2b
Connect Alumio to BigCommerce B2B.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
# Setting up HTTP Client Bigcommerce Bundle B2B
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Bigcommerce Bundle B2B HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI (Recommend: [https://api.bundleb2b.net](https://api.bundleb2b.net)), Store Hash, Email, Password, Name, BeginAt, EndAt, and ChannelID.
# Subscribing to Entities from Bigcommerce Bundle B2B
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Bigcommerce Bundle B2B Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Bigcommerce Bundle B2B.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Bigcommerce Bundle B2B HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Bigcommerce Bundle B2B documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Bigcommerce Bundle B2B API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Bigcommerce Bundle B2B. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Bigcommerce Bundle B2B API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Bigcommerce Bundle B2B API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get a User entity
That’s why we need to define the **userId** property inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the Get a user entity.
/api/v3/io/users/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Bigcommerce Bundle B2B.
# Publishing Entity to Bigcommerce Bundle B2B
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Bigcommerce Bundle B2B Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Bigcommerce Bundle B2B entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Bigcommerce Bundle B2B endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Bigcommerce Bundle B2B API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Delete a User. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Delete a User” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Bigcommerce Bundle B2B into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Bigcommerce Bundle B2B with the URL
/api/v3/io/users/123
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Bigcommerce Bundle B2B.
# BigQuery
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/bigquery
Connect Alumio to BigQuery.
## Extra information
System documentation: [BigQuery API Reference](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client BigQuery
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from BigQuery
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to BigQuery
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client BigQuery
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select BigQuery HTTP Client as Platform and click Next Step
3. Fill in the Base URI and then select OAuth 2 for the Authentication type or Bearer for the alternative.
4. Fill in the Client ID and the Client Secret (See the [BigQuery Authentication Documentation](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference/rest) for more information)
5. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from BigQuery
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "BigQuery Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from BigQuery.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the BigQuery HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from BigQuery.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow BigQuery documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [BigQuery API Reference](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference/rest).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to BigQuery. Please refer to the entities from [BigQuery API Reference](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference/rest) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [BigQuery API Reference](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference/rest).
Please look at the example below on how to fill request parameters when we want to run a BigQuery SQL query synchronously and return query results [(Queries)](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference/rest/v2/jobs/query).
From the endpoint, we can see that we need to set the "query" as a payload.
Alumio will then make a POST request to BigQuery with the URL
`/queries`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* A query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access BigQuery.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "BigQuery Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the BigQuery entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the POST method, PUT, PATCH method, and DELETE method for submitting data to BigQuery.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all BigQuery endpoints.
Please refer to [BigQuery API Reference](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference/rest) page.
For example, we want to patch the dataset information. Please select “Patch” as the Method and ["Patch Dataset"](https://cloud.google.com/bigquery/docs/reference/rest/v2/datasets/patch).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path for "datasetId" and body parameters. That is why we set the "datasetId" inside the path key and the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to BigQuery with URL `/dataset/_datasetId12334545465`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* A query isa defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access BigQuery.
# Bitrix24
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/bitrix24
Connect Alumio to Bitrix24.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Bitrix24 API Reference](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/index.php)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Bitrix24
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Bitrix24
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Bitrix24
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Bitrix24
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Bitrix24 HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes (Optional).
(For more information, see [Bitrix24 Authentication Reference](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/oauth/authentication.php))
3. Click on "Grant access to Bitrix24" to get the Key.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Bitrix24
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Bitrix24 Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Bitrix24.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Bitrix24.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the Bitrix24 HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Bitrix24 documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Bitrix24 API Reference](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/index.php).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Bitrix24. Please refer to the entities from [Bitrix24 API Reference](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/index.php) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Bitrix24 API Reference](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/index.php).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Sale Order Get"](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/sale/order/sale_order_get.php) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the payload key in the Request Parameters.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will then make a request to Bitrix24 with the URL /rest/sale.order.get.json
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Bitrix24.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Bitrix24
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Bitrix24 Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Bitrix24 entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method) and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Bitrix24.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Bitrix24 endpoints.
Please refer to [Bitrix24 API Reference](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/index.php) page.
For example, we want to add a new sale paysystem. Please select “Create” as the Action and ["Sale Paysystem Add"](https://training.bitrix24.com/rest_help/crm/sale/sale_paysystem_add.php) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we need to add fields. So we put the fields inside the payload key in the Data.
Alumio will send an API request to Bitrix24 with URL /sale.paysystem.add.json
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Bitrix24.
# BlueSnap
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/bluesnap
Connect Alumio to BlueSnap.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[BlueSnap API Reference]
**BlueSnap**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client BlueSnap
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select BlueSnap HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from BlueSnap
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select BlueSnap Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from BlueSnap .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the BlueSnap HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow BlueSnap documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on BlueSnap API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from BlueSnap. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from BlueSnap API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from BlueSnap . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from BlueSnap API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on BlueSnap API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Retrieve Vendor.
That’s why we need to define the **vendorId** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve Vendor.
/services/2/vendors/20231512057123123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access BlueSnap .
# Publishing Entity to BlueSnap
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select BlueSnap Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the BlueSnap entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to BlueSnap .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most BlueSnap endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the BlueSnap API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Vendor. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create Vendor” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to BlueSnap into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to BlueSnap with URL /services/2/vendors
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access BlueSnap .
# Bol.com
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/bol-com
Connect Alumio to Bol.com.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://api.bol.com/retailer/public/Retailer-API/index.html](https://api.bol.com/retailer/public/Retailer-API/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Bol.com
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Bol.com
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Bol.com
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Bol.com
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Bol.com v9 HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Token URI, Client Type, Client id, and Client Secret.
3. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
4. Click on Grant access to Bol.com to get the Key.
5. Save the HTTP Client after the key has been provided.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Bol.com
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Bol.com v9 Advertiser Subscriber, Bol.com Retailer v9 Subscriber, or Bol.com v9 Shared Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Bol.com.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Bol.com HTTP Client to use. (Please set the Client Type according to what you need for the Subscriber)
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Bol.com documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Bol.com API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Bol.com. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Bol.com API Reference.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Bol.com API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing ["Retrieve an offer by its offer id"](https://api.bol.com/retailer/public/redoc/v9/retailer.html#tag/Offers/operation/get-offer).
Because the offer id is inside path, we put it like that. This will be sent to the Bol system as /retailer/offers/6a3ef7aa-d1b8-4eaf-9fe9-7260ccc08281
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Bol.com. (Please set the Client Type according to what you need for the Subscriber)
### 3. Publishing Entity to Bol.com
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Bol.com v9 Advertiser Publisher or Bol.com v9 Retailer Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data currently Bol.com support Create, Update, and Delete.
3. Select the Bol.com entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use. (Please set the Client Type according to what you need for the Publisher)
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Bol.com endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Bol.com API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Thread. Please select “CREATE” as the action and [“ Create content for a product”](https://api.bol.com/retailer/public/redoc/v9/retailer.html#tag/Product-Content/operation/post-product-content) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we need to add a Body Request. So we put the body inside the payload key in the Data.
Alumio will send an API request to Bol.com with the URL /retailer/content/products
Another example is when we want to delete an offer.
We can see in the documentation that we need to add "offer-id" in the path; we need to add them in our data, for example:
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Bol.com. (Please set the Client Type according to what you need for the Publisher)
# Brightpearl
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/brightpearl
Connect Alumio to Brightpearl.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Brightpearl API Reference](https://api-docs.brightpearl.com/)
## Connector package documentation
**Brightpearl**
# Setting up HTTP Client Brightpearl
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Brightpearl HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Application Reference and Token.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Brightpearl
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Brightpearl Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Brightpearl.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Brightpearl HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Brightpearl documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Brightpearl API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Brightpearl. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Brightpearl API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Brightpearl API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Product entity
That’s why we need to define the **ID-SET** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Product.
/product-service/product/126274
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Brightpearl.
# Publishing Entity to Brightpearl
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Brightpearl Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Brightpearl entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Brightpearl.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Brightpearl endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Brightpearl API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Product. Please select “Post” as the action and “Product” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Brightpearl into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Brightpearl with URL /product-service/product
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Brightpearl.
# Caflou
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/caflou
Connect Alumio to Caflou.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Caflou**
# Setting up HTTP Client Caflou
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Caflou HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Authentication type.
* Request, Fill in the Username and Password
* Token, Fill in the Token.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Setting up Credentials
## Steps
1. Token
* On the Dashboard, click on top right gear icon (setting icon)
* Go to Account settings > API
* Click Add Token then set the name and validity date.
* Copy the Token to use
2. Request
* Simply Register to the environment and use the same username and password that used to login into Freshdesk
# Subscribing to Entities from Caflou
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Caflou Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Caflou.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Caflou HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Caflou documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Caflou API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Caflou. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Caflou API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Caflou API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Products - Get entity
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Products - Get.
/products/AB2SC
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Caflou.
# Publishing Entity to Caflou
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Caflou Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Caflou entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Caflou.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Caflou endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Caflou API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Delete Project. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Projects - Delete” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Caflou into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Caflou with URL /projects/AB2SC
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Caflou.
# Catch of the Day
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/catch-of-the-day
Connect Alumio to Catch of the Day.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Catch of the day**
# Setting up HTTP Client Catch of the day
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Catch of the day HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and API Key.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Catch of the day
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Catch of the day Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Catch of the day.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Catch of the day HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Catch of the day documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Catch of the day API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Catch of the day. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Catch of the day API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Catch of the day API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Retrieve a thread entity.
That’s why we need to define the **thread\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve a thread.
/api/inbox/threads/123bact
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Catch of the day.
# Publishing Entity to Catch of the day
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Catch of the day Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Catch of the day entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Catch of the day.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Catch of the day endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Catch of the day API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create offer. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create, update, or delete offers” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Catch of the day into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Catch of the day with URL /api/offers
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Catch of the day.
# Centra
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/centra
Connect Alumio to Centra.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Centra API Reference](https://centra.dev/docs/integration-api/what-you-can-do-with-it)
# Setting up Centra GraphQL Client
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Centra GraphQL Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI and API Token.
* Enable the logging if needed.
* Save and Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from Centra GraphQL
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Centra - GraphQL Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Add any Request URI that you need to add from the Base URI from Client.
* Select the HTTP Method you want to subscribe to from Centra GraphQL (The default is POST).
* Add any request data in the request parameter that you needed to subscribe to the entity.
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Centra GraphQL Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Centra GraphQL documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Centra GraphQL API Reference.
**Request URI**
It’s the Endpoint you want to subscribe from Centra.
**Request Method**
It’s the HTTP Method that you want to use, we recommend using post as default method.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Centra GraphQL API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when trying to fetch products using some query parameter.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Centra GraphQL.
# Publishing Entity to Centra GraphQL
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Centra Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the Request URI you want the data to be published.
* Select the Request Method that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Add any request data in the request parameter that you needed to subscribe to the entity.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it.
**Request Parameters**
Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Centra GraphQL API Reference page.
Please look at the example below. For example, we want to confirm an order with number 3957.
You can put the payload you want to send to Centra GraphQL into the Request Parameters .
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Centra GraphQL.
# Channable
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/channable
Connect Alumio to Channable.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Channable API Reference](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#section/Introduction)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Channable
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Channable
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Channable
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Channable
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select the Channable Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Bearer Token according to your Channable account.
For more information, see [Channable Getting Started](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#section/Introduction/Getting-started)
3. You can optionally enable logging to get the log of the request.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Channable
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Channable Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Channable HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Channable.
4. You can optionally change the logging to be different with the HTTP Client.
5. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity. Please refer to an example in the General Concept section.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters before making a request to Channable.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Channable documentation for building this connector, which means you can easily use the connector based on the [Channable API Reference](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#section/Introduction).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Channable. Please refer to the entities from th [Channable API Reference](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#section/Introduction) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Channable API Reference](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#section/Introduction).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to the [Channels For Transporter](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#tag/transporters/operation/channels_for_transporter_transporters_transporter__transporter_code__get) entity. We can see in the documentation that there are some parameter values in the path URL such as transporter\_code.
We set the Request Parameter as an example below:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then send it to Channable as
/v1/transporters/transporter/DHL
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers that are set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as the query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Channable.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Channable
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select the Channable Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the Channable entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally change the logging to be different with the HTTP Client.
5. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path or change them in the Advanced Tab.
6. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query or change them in the Advanced Tab.
7. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload or change them in the Advanced Tab.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support POST method on submitting data to Channable.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Channable endpoints.
Please refer to [Channable API Reference](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#section/Introduction) page.
Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to update return status. Please select "POST" as the method and ["Update Return Status"](https://api.channable.com/v1/docs#tag/returns/operation/update_return_status_companies__company_id__projects__project_id__returns__return_id__status_post) as the entity of the publisher.
The documentation says that we need "return\_id", "company\_id", and "project\_id" as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide "return\_id", "company\_id", and "project\_id" key into the path key in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. And, you can put the payload you want to send to Channable into the payload key in the data. Here is an example of the required data.
Alumio will send an API request to Channable with the URL
/v1/companies/29370/projects/84767/returns/1/status
and the body will be like this.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Channable.
# ChannelEngine
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/channelengine
Connect Alumio to ChannelEngine.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Channel Engine API Reference](https://demo.channelengine.net/api/swagger/index.html?urls.primaryName=ChannelEngine%20Channel%20API)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Channel Engine
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Channel Engine
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Channel Engine
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Channel Engine
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Channel Engine HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL and API Key.
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Channel Engine
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "ChannelEngine - Merchant Subscriber" or "ChannelEngine - Channel Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Channel Engine HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Channel Engine.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Channel Engine.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Channel Engine documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Channel Engine API Reference](https://demo.channelengine.net/api/swagger/index.html?urls.primaryName=ChannelEngine%20Channel%20API).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Channel Engine.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Channel Engine. Please refer to the entities from [Channel Engine API Reference](https://demo.channelengine.net/api/swagger/index.html?urls.primaryName=ChannelEngine%20Channel%20API) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Channel Engine API Reference](https://demo.channelengine.net/api/swagger/index.html?urls.primaryName=ChannelEngine%20Channel%20API).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Download Invoice" entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "merchantOrderNo" as a path. That is why we set the "merchantOrderNo" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Channel Engine with the URL /v2/orders/123/invoice
### 3. Publishing Entity to Channel Engine
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "ChannelEngine - Merchant Publisher" or "ChannelEngine - Channel Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Channel Engine entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support HTTP POST method, HTTP PUT method and HTTP DELETE method on submitting data to Channel Engine.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Channel Engine endpoints.
Please refer to [Channel Engine API Reference](https://demo.channelengine.net/api/swagger/index.html?urls.primaryName=ChannelEngine%20Channel%20API) page.
For example, we want to use delete a product. Please select “DELETE” as the Action and "Delete Product" as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "merchantOrderNo" as a path. That is why we set the "merchantOrderNo" inside the path key in the Data.
Alumio will send an API request to Channel Engine with URL /v2/products/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Channel Engine.
# Claude by Anthropic
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/claude-by-anthropic
Connect Alumio to Claude by Anthropic.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Claude by Anthropic API Reference]
**Claude**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Claude
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Claude HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Api Key, and Anthropic Version (Currently we support 2023-06-01, Please Request the newest version in Alumio Forum ).
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Claude
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Claude Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Claude .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Claude HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Claude documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Claude API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Claude. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Claude API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Claude . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Claude API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Claude API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Stream – Create a Message.
Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Create a Message.
/v1/messages
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Claude .
# Publishing Entity to Claude
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Claude Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Claude entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Claude .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we only support Post (HTTP POST method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Claude endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Claude API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Message. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a Message” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Claude into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Claude with URL /v1/messages
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Claude .
# ClickUp
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/clickup
Connect Alumio to ClickUp.
## Extra information
System documentation: [ClickUp API Reference](https://clickup.com/api/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client ClickUp
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from ClickUp
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to ClickUp
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client ClickUp
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select ClickUp HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI
4. Select the Authentication Type
* Basic Authentication
* Fill in the Personal Token
(See the [ClickUp Token Authentication Documentation](https://clickup.com/api/developer-portal/authentication/#personal-token) for more information)
* Oauth 2.0 Authentication
* Fill in the Token URL, Authorize URL, Client ID and Client Secret.
* Click on "Grant access to ClickUp" and you will be redirected to ClickUp website to get the key for the client.
(See the [ClickUp Oauth 2.0 Authentication Documentation](https://clickup.com/api/developer-portal/authentication/#build-apps-for-others---oauth-flow)
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from ClickUp
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "ClickUp Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from ClickUp.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the ClickUp HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from ClickUp.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow ClickUp documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [ClickUp API Reference](https://clickup.com/api/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to ClickUp. Please refer to the entities from [ClickUp 2.0 API Reference](https://clickup.com/api/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [ClickUp API Reference](https://clickup.com/api/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve list of task by subscribing ["Tasks - Get Tasks"](https://clickup.com/api/clickupreference/operation/GetTasks/) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the list id as parameters. That is why we set the "list\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to ClickUp with the URL `/v2/list/901803781168/task`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ClickUp.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "ClickUp Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the ClickUp entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to ClickUp.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all ClickUp 2.0 endpoints.
Please refer to [ClickUp API Reference](https://clickup.com/api/) page.
For example, we want to update a task. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Tasks - Update a Task"](https://clickup.com/api/clickupreference/operation/UpdateTask/).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameters. That is why we set the "task\_id" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to ClickUp with URL `https://api.clickup.com/api/v2/task/86eqhgatq`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ClickUp.
# Cloudflare
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/cloudflare
Connect Alumio to Cloudflare.
## Extra information
System documentation: [\[Cloudflare API Reference\]](https://developers.cloudflare.com/api/)
**Cloudflare**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Cloudflare
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Cloudflare HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Choose the Authentication Type.
* Bearer Token : Fill in the Token
* Api key (api\_email) : Fill in the X-Auth-Email
* Api key (api\_key) : Fill in the X-Auth-Key
* Api key (user\_service\_key) : Fill in the X-Auth-User-Service-Key
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Cloudflare
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Cloudflare Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Cloudflare.
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Cloudflare HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Cloudflare documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Cloudflare API Reference.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), and Get (HTTP GET method).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Cloudflare. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Cloudflare API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Cloudflare API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get Account Details entity.
That’s why we need to define the **account\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get Account Details.
/client/v4/accounts/Alumio
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Cloudflare.
# Publishing Entity to Cloudflare
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Cloudflare Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Cloudflare entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Cloudflare.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Cloudflare endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Cloudflare API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Purge Cached Conent of Zone. Please select “Post” as the action and “Zone – Purge All Files” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Cloudflare into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Cloudflare with URL /client/v4/zones/Alumio/purge\_cache
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Cloudflare.
# Cloudsuite
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/cloudsuite
Connect Alumio to Cloudsuite.
## Extra information
System documentation: [CloudSuite API Reference](https://cloudsuite.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/CCS/pages/291471404/CloudSuite+API+v1.0+REST)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client CloudSuite
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from CloudSuite
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to CloudSuite
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client CloudSuite
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select CloudSuite HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and choose the Authentication type (Access Token or OAuth 2)
(For more information, see [CloudSuite Authentication Reference](https://cloudsuite.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/CCS/pages/444727395/Usage+Info#Authentication-API))
3. Fill in the Access token if you choose Access Token for the Authentication type.
4. Fill in the Client ID, Client secret, Token URL, and Scopes if you choose OAuth 2 for the Authentication type.
5. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
6. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from CloudSuite
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select CloudSuite Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from CloudSuite.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from CloudSuite.
5. Select the CloudSuite HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow CloudSuite documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [CloudSuite API Reference](https://cloudsuite.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/CCS/pages/291471404/CloudSuite+API+v1.0+REST).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to CloudSuite. Please refer to the entities from [CloudSuite API Reference](https://cloudsuite.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/CCS/pages/291471404/CloudSuite+API+v1.0+REST) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [CloudSuite API Reference](https://cloudsuite.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/CCS/pages/291471404/CloudSuite+API+v1.0+REST).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing "Address" entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* A query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to CloudSuite with the URL /address/403035324637
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access CloudSuite.
### 3. Publishing Entity to CloudSuite
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select CloudSuite Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the CloudSuite entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to CloudSuite.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most CloudSuite endpoints.
Please refer to [CloudSuite API Reference](https://cloudsuite.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/CCS/pages/291471404/CloudSuite+API+v1.0+REST) page.
For example, we want to use "Delete an Asset". Please select “Delete” as the Action and "Asset" as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "key" as a path. That is why we set the "key" inside the path key in the data.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* A query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to CloudSuite with URL /asset/123
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access CloudSuite.
# Cohere
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/cohere
Connect Alumio to Cohere.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Cohere API Reference](https://docs.cohere.com/v2/reference/about)
### Setting up HTTP Client Cohere
**Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Connections → HTTPS (API). Create a new HTTP Client and select Cohere HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and Token.
### Subscribing to Entities from Cohere
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations → Incoming and create a new Incoming configuration and select Cohere Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Cohere.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Cohere HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
We follow the Cohere documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on the Cohere API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from Cohere. Please refer to the entities in the Management APIs from the Cohere API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Cohere API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
That’s why we need to define **id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the dataset entity.
`/v1/datasets/123456`
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Cohere.
### Publishing Entity to Cohere
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations → Outgoing, create a new Outgoing configuration, and select CoherePublisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Cohere entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in the Outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Cohere endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in the Management APIs from the Cohere API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Chat with Streaming Outputs. Please select “Post” as the action and “Chat / Chat with Streaming Outputs (API V2)” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Cohere into the payload property in the data (go to Advanced).
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Cohere with URL `/v2/chat`
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Cohere.
# Connector reference
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/commercetools/reference
Connect Alumio to commercetools: HTTP client, subscriber, and publisher.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://docs.commercetools.com/api/](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Commercetools
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Commercetools
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Commercetools
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### Setting up HTTP Client Commercetools
**Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Connections -> HTTP (API). Create a new HTTP Client and select Commercetools HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Region Auth URL, Region API URL, Project Key, Username/Client ID, Password/Client Secret, and Scopes.
For more information, see [Commercetools General Concepts](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/general-concepts)
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Click “Grant Access to Commercetools” and the key will be filled.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### Subscribing to Entities from Commercetools
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Commercetools Subscriber as the subscriber (use the latest version **2025-02**).
2. Select the Commercetools HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the Entity you want to subscribe to from Commercetools.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to modify the request parameters into something you will request from Commercetools.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**General Concept**
We follow Commercetools documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Commercetools API Reference](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Commercetools.
**Method**
Currently we support Get (HTTP Get method),and Head(HTTP HEAD method) for publishing data to Commercetools.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to from Commercetools.
Please refer to the entity from the [Commercetools API Reference](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Commercetools API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
For example, we try subscribing to "Get Order by ID".
We can see in the documentation that there is a projectKey and ID present in the path URL. Alumio will fill in the project key from the HTTP Client, and you can fill in the ID as follows:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then send this to the Commercetools as /orders/cb4c3632-f8e5-4283-af8b-39e1d45e44b1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
### Publishing Entity to Commercetools
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Commercetools Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use (use the latest version **2025-02**).
3. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
4. Select the Commercetools entity you want the data to be published to.
5. (Optional) Add any path data to the request on the key path.
6. (Optional) Add any query data to the request on the key query.
7. (Optional) Add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the data using transformers.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Commercetools.
**Method**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) for publishing data to Commercetools.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Commercetools endpoints.
Please refer to [Commercetools API Reference](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/) page.
Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
And below are example data for when we want to use "Update Category by ID" :
We can see in the documentation there is a project key and ID in the path URL. Alumio will fill in the project key from the HTTP Client. So, we still need to fill in the ID example of the data which looks like this:
Alumio will then send this to the Commercetools as /categories/cd4c3632-e8e5-4283-af8b-39e1d45e44b1
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
# Connector reference (copy)
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/commercetools/reference-2
Connect Alumio to commercetools: HTTP client, subscriber, and publisher.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://docs.commercetools.com/api/](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Commercetools
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Commercetools
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Commercetools
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### Setting up HTTP Client Commercetools
**Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Connections -> HTTP (API). Create a new HTTP Client and select Commercetools HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Region Auth URL, Region API URL, Project Key, Username/Client ID, Password/Client Secret, and Scopes. For more information, see [Commercetools General Concepts](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/general-concepts)
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Click “Grant Access to Commercetools” and the key will be filled.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### Subscribing to Entities from Commercetools
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Commercetools Subscriber as the subscriber (use the latest version **2025-02**).
2. Select the Commercetools HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the Entity you want to subscribe to from Commercetools.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to modify the request parameters into something you will request from Commercetools.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**General Concept** We follow Commercetools documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Commercetools API Reference](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/).
**HTTP Client** The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Commercetools.
**Method** Currently we support Get (HTTP Get method),and Head(HTTP HEAD method) for publishing data to Commercetools.
**Entity** The entity you want to subscribe to from Commercetools. Please refer to the entity from the [Commercetools API Reference](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/) page.
**Request Parameters** These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Commercetools API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
For example, we try subscribing to "Get Order by ID".
We can see in the documentation that there is a projectKey and ID present in the path URL. Alumio will fill in the project key from the HTTP Client, and you can fill in the ID as follows:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then send this to the Commercetools as /orders/cb4c3632-f8e5-4283-af8b-39e1d45e44b1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
### Publishing Entity to Commercetools
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Commercetools Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use (use the latest version **2025-02**).
3. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
4. Select the Commercetools entity you want the data to be published to.
5. (Optional) Add any path data to the request on the key path.
6. (Optional) Add any query data to the request on the key query.
7. (Optional) Add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the data using transformers.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Commercetools.
**Method** Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) for publishing data to Commercetools.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Commercetools endpoints. Please refer to [Commercetools API Reference](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/) page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
And below are example data for when we want to use "Update Category by ID" :
We can see in the documentation there is a project key and ID in the path URL. Alumio will fill in the project key from the HTTP Client. So, we still need to fill in the ID example of the data which looks like this:
Alumio will then send this to the Commercetools as /categories/cd4c3632-e8e5-4283-af8b-39e1d45e44b1
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
# Transferring products from XML/sFTP
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/commercetools/xml-sftp-guide
Guide: transfer products from an XML file on sFTP to commercetools with Alumio.
**TABLE OF CONTENTS**
* Introduction
* The Route
* Incoming Configuration
* Outgoing Configuration
* Entity Transformer
* Making The Connection: A Step-by-step Guide
* Data X
* Filtering Out Unnecessary Tasks When Products Don’t Change
* Data Y
* Closing Thoughts!
## **Introduction**
CommerceTools is considered as one of the frontrunners in the eCommerce space when it comes to customizing business and customer experience. If you are looking to integrate your business with th6e CommerceTools platform, let Alumio sail the ship for you!
This guide will provide insights on how to integrate a sFTP environment (containing a product XML file) and a commercial environment with the help of Alumio. This is done by reading an XML file from sFTP and checking whether or not a product has changed. If the product has changed, a task will be created and if it has not, it will be filtered out.
## The Route
To begin with, we will start off with a route- Products from XML to CommerceTools. It contains an Incoming configuration- Get Products From XML and an Outgoing configuration- CommerceTools- Create Product.
### Incoming Configuration
The Incoming configuration is responsible for retrieving the products from the sFTP environment. Upon clicking View configuration just beneath the Incoming configuration, you can check the nitty gritties of it. For instance, there will be a Subscriber that includes a Filesystem: file subscriber system that connects to the generic Alumio sFTP environment and is looking for a file (in Patterns) called products.xml.
### Outgoing Configuration
Similarly, there is an outgoing configuration for the route. If you click on the View configuration just beneath the Outgoing configuration, you will be redirected to the configurations set up page.
Here, you will see that it has a Publisher that utilizes the commerce sale publisher Commercetools, which connects to a specific Commercetools HTTP Client (environment) called. The environment is further connected to the Module called Products.
#### Entity Transformer
Moving on, you will also come across an Entity Transformer within the Outgoing Configuration called Map Product. You click on the View configuration just beneath it to check its functioning. What it does is that it maps the incoming product data to a CommerceTools product.
## Making The Connection: A Step-by-step Guide
To have a better understanding, you can check the CommerceTools (open it in another tab). If you click on Products (left-hand panel), you will see that there are no products present right now.
If you open the sFTP environment of Alumio, you won’t find anything there as well.
What you can do is that you can create a new XML file in the editor.
Step 1.1: Create an XML file having three products (for example). Let’s call it data X.
#### Data X
```
alumio-t-shirt
Alumio T-shirt
false
alumio-hat
Alumio Hat
false
alumio-hoodie
Alumio Hoodie
true
```
So, in the above example of data X, we are considering three products namely Alumio T-shirt, Alumio Hat, and Alumio Hoodie respectively. So, each of these products has a name and a status that indicates whether it should or should not be published.
Step 1.2: Now, upload this file to the sFTP environment and then go back to Alumio.
Step 1.3: Go to the Incoming Configurations of the Route: Get Products From XML, and click on Run Incoming button at the top-right corner.
As you run the Incoming configuration, it will connect to the sFTP environment and look for a file called products.xml.
Step 1.4: A “Subscriber has been consumed” pop-up box will appear. Hit on Click to view more information just beneath it.
Step 1.5: Click on Logs. You can see that Alumio has created tasks (3). To verify this, you can go to the Dashboard (left-hand panel of Alumio). It will show that 3 New tasks have been created.
Step 1.6: Go to Dashboard>Tasks and here you will see that all the three tasks belong to the single route called Products from XML to CommerceTools. The entity identifiers will show alumio-hoodie, alumio-hat, and alumio-t-shirt.
Step 1.7: Open any one of the tasks. For example, let’s say you open the task with the Identifier: alumio-hat.
Step 1.8: Click on Entity Data at the top to view the corresponding data for the task. In this case, what you will see is:
```
{
"sku": "alumio-hat",
"name": "Alumio Hat",
"publish": "false"
}
```
This is the data retrieved from XML.
As soon as you execute the Route or export the data from Alumio to CommerceTools, the data will get mapped to a format that is compatible with CommerceTools. Eventually, the products will get created on the CommerceTools.
Step 2.1: Go back to Routes (Products from XML to CommerceTools) and click on Run Route (top-right corner). A “Publish has been exported” pop-up box will appear.
Step 2.2: Revert back to the task (step 1.7). Click on Overview and refresh it.
Step 2.3: Now, you will see that the Status is showing FINISHED (in green).
Step 2.4: Revisit the CommerceTools merchant center and refresh it. Now, three products will appear (Alumio Hoodie, Alumio T-Shirt, and Alumio Hat), which were created by the execution of the Route.
If you look at the status, you will see that the Status for each of them has also been mapped successfully. Alumio Hoodie has been Published (refer to Data X) while the Alumio T-shirt and Alumio Hat remain Unpublished.
## Filtering Out Unnecessary Tasks When Products Don’t Change
In scenarios where Alumio reads the same XML file and the products haven’t changed, you can omit creating tasks because they become unnecessary. To do that, you can create a Filter within the Route.
Step 3.1: Click on Add entity transformer and select Filter previously stored entities from the drop-down menu.
Step 3.2: Next, you have to specify the Storage which will act as a comparison mechanism. It must contain a snapshot of all the imported products.
Thus, the next time Alumio reads an XML file, the transformer will compare the snapshot against the file. If everything remains identical, no tasks will be created. However, if any of the products is different, a task will be created for that specific one.
Step 3.3: Click on View configuration beneath the Storage to inspect it.
Step 3.4: Click on Entities. You will see that it contains three entities (alumio-hoodie, alumio-t-shirt, and alumio-Hat). You can configure the Identifier as per requirement. For example, the Identifier of each entity can be mapped to the sku of the product.
You can open any one of the Identifiers to view the data belonging to the specific product.
Step 3.5: Go back to the Route and open the Incoming Configuration once again by clicking on View configuration.
Step 3.6: Hit the Run Incoming button at the top-right corner and once again the “Subscriber has been consumed” pop-up box will appear. Hit on Click to view more information below it.
Step 3.7: Click on Logs. Now, you can see that the data is being filtered, thanks to the entity transformer you have implemented. There are 3 entities that will be filtered and no tasks will be created because every product is already identical to the storage.
Step 3.8: You can go back to the Alumio Dashboard again. There will be no New tasks reflected there as well.
Step 3.9: Click On the Tasks (left-hand panel of Alumio) and click on Routes (top-left corner). Search for Products from XML to CommerceTools and select it. Then, click on Apply.
Step 3.10: Here, you can see that there remains only the 3 tasks that were created in the beginning (step 1.5) and no new tasks have been added.
To ensure that the entity transformer - Filter previously stored entities is functioning smoothly, you can make some changes to data X. Let’s call this data Y.
#### Data Y
```
alumio-t-shirt
Alumio T-shirt
false
alumio-hat
Alumio Hat 123
false
alumio-hoodie
Alumio Hoodie
true
alumio-trousers
Alumio Trousers
true
```
Here, you can change the name of the second product from Alumio Hat to Alumio Hat 123 for example.
Also, you can add a new product called Alumio Trousers.
Step 3.11: Add data Y (new XML file) to the sFTP environment again (you might have to override the data).
Step 3.12: Repeat Step 3.5 and Step 3.6. Now, you can expect two new tasks to be created here- one for the changed product and one for the new one.
Step 3.13: Click on Logs and this time you will see that there are two new tasks which have been created. If you revisit the Dashboard, you will see that 2 New tasks are being reflected there as well.
Click on the New Tasks and the two new tasks will be reelected here.
If you check the Entity Identifier, you shall see that two tasks have been created for alumio-hat and alumio-trousers (which reflects the change we made in step 3.10).
If you click on the task for alumio-hat and check the Entity Data, it will reflect the changes.
```
{
“sku” : “alumio-hat”
“name” : “Alumio Hat 123”
“Publish” : “false”
}
```
Similarly, If you click on the task for alumio-trousers and check the Entity Data, you can see that the data has been retrieved for the new product.
```
{
“sku” : “alumio-trousers”
“name” : “Alumio Trousers”
“Publish” : “true”
}
```
## Closing Thoughts!
When it comes to providing the best iPaaS solution to help businesses achieve smooth system-to-system integrations, Alumio certainly beats the competition by quite a margin. Being a user-friendly platform, it allows even the non-technical people to use it for a wide range of integrations. Let’s hope that this article has provided you a deep understanding of how to transfer products from XML/sFTP to Alumio. Stay tuned with us to learn more in some other article!
# ConnectWise
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/connectwise
Connect Alumio to ConnectWise.
## Extra information
System documentation: [ConnectWise API Reference](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/REST)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client ConnectWise
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from ConnectWise
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to ConnectWise
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client ConnectWise
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select ConnectWise HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Company ID, Public Key and Private Key.
(See the [ConnectWise Authentication Documentation](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/Developer_Guide/Authentication) for more information)
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from ConnectWise
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "ConnectWise Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from ConnectWise.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the ConnectWise HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from ConnectWise.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow ConnectWise documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [ConnectWise API Reference](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/REST).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to ConnectWise. Please refer to the entities from [ConnectWise API Reference](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/REST) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [ConnectWise API Reference](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/REST).
Please look at the example below on how to fill request parameters when we want retrieve an address format ["AddressFormats - Get AddressFormat by id"](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/REST#/AddressFormats/getCompanyAddressFormatsById) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" as a path the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to ConnectWise with the URL
`/company/addressFormats/4`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ConnectWise.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "ConnectWise Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the ConnectWise entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to ConnectWise.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all ConnectWise endpoints.
Please refer to [ConnectWise API Reference](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/REST) page.
For example, we want to update an address format. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["AddressFormats - Put AddressFormat"](https://developer.connectwise.com/Products/ConnectWise_PSA/REST#/AddressFormats/putCompanyAddressFormatsById).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path for "id" and a body parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key and the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to ConnectWise with URL `/company/addressFormats/4`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ConnectWise.
# Constant Contact Lead Gen & CRM
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/constant-contact-lead-gen-crm
Connect Alumio to Constant Contact Lead Gen & CRM.
Lead Gen & CRM is an Easy to use Lead Gen & CRM software to attract and win more business. Capture every opportunity, prioritize your leads, and convert them faster.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Lead Gen & CRM API Reference](https://knowledgebase.constantcontact.com/lead-gen-crm/articles/KnowledgeBase/50374-Understanding-Lead-Gen-CRM-Open-API-Overview?lang=en_US#h_474050452121518635016023)
**Lead Gen & CRM**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Lead Gen & CRM
## Steps
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Lead Gen & CRM HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI (Example: [http://api.yourappdomain.com/pubapi](http://api.yourappdomain.com/pubapi)).
3. Choose the version and Fill the AccountID & SrcretKey
4. Enable the logging (Optional but recommended)
5. Save and Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from Lead Gen & CRM
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Lead Gen & CRM - Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity to subscribe to Lead Gen & CRM.
3. Add any request parameters and the Payload needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Lead Gen & CRM Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Lead Gen & CRM documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on Lead Gen & CRM API Reference.
**Entity**
It's the entity from Lead Gen & CRM you want to subscribe to. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Lead Gen & CRM API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on Lead Gen & CRM API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to Leads entities.
The Payload is mandatory, especially the payload.id & payload.params. payload.id is A user-supplied request ID for correlating requests. That’s why we must define the **id** property inside the "Payload" property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside the payload will be sent as the POST payload data.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It's the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Lead Gen & CRM Rest API.
# Publishing Entity to Lead Gen & CRM
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Lead Gen & CRM Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Lead Gen & CRM entity where the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Lead Gen & CRM.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods for using it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes and transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Lead Gen & CRM REST endpoints.
Please look at the example below for endpoints that require an object as the request payload. For example, we want to update the Lead data.
You can put the payload you want to send to Lead Gen & CRM into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after the Update process.
**HTTP Client**
It's the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Lead Gen & CRM REST API.
# Copernica
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/copernica
Connect Alumio to Copernica.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Copernica API Reference](https://www.copernica.com/en/documentation/restv4/rest-api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Copernica
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Copernica
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Copernica HTTP Client as Platform and click Next Step
3. Fill in the Base URL, Authentication JWT URL, and the Access token.
4. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the HTTP requests.
5. Click next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Copernica
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Copernica Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Copernica HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Copernica.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Copernica.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Copernica documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Copernica API Reference](https://www.copernica.com/en/documentation/restv4/rest-api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Copernica. Please refer to the entities from [Copernica API Reference](https://www.copernica.com/en/documentation/restv4/rest-api) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [Copernica API Reference](https://www.copernica.com/en/documentation/restv4/rest-api).
Please look at the example below on how to fetch all profiles from the specific database by subscribing to the "Database & Collections - fetch all profiles" entity.
From the endpoint, we can see that we need to set the database id as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Copernica with the URL `https://api.copernica.com/v4/database/{{id}}/collections`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* A query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Copernica.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "Copernica Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
4. Select the entity you want the data to be published to.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods for using it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the HTTP Post, Put, and Delete method on submitting data to Copernica.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Copernica endpoints.
Please refer to the Copernica API Reference
For example, we want to update a profile. Please select “Put” as the Method and "Profile & Subprofile - Update the profile information".
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameter. That is why we set the "id" as a profile ID inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Copernica with URL `PUT https://api.copernica.com/v4/profile/$id ` with the defined payload.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{ContainerId}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Copernica.
# Copper
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/copper
Connect Alumio to Copper.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Copper API Reference]
# Setting up HTTP Client Copper
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Copper HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Authentication type.
* Oauth2.0 : Fill the Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes. (Authorize | Access Token URL is optional), Grant Access to Copper.
* Api Keys : Fill in X-PW-AccessToken, X-PW-Application, and X-PW-UserEmail.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Copper
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Copper Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Copper .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Copper HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Copper documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Copper API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Copper. Based on the Method, the Entity will change.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Copper . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Copper API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Copper API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing See a Persons Activities.
That’s why we need to define the **example\_person\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on See a Persons Activities.
/developer\_api/v1/people/123321/activities
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Copper .
# Publishing Entity to Copper
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Copper Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Copper entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Copper .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Copper endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Copper API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a New Company. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a New Company” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Copper into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Copper with URL /developer\_api/v1/companies
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Copper .
# CS-Cart
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/cs-cart
Connect Alumio to CS-Cart.
## Extra information
System documentation: [CS-Cart API Reference](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client CS-Cart
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from CS-Cart
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to CS-Cart
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client CS-Cart
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "CS-Cart HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Email, and API Key.
(For more information, see [CS-Cart Authentication Reference](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/index.html#authentication))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from CS-Cart
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "CS-Cart Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Object to subscribe to from CS-Cart.
3. Fill in the Object Id (optional).
4. Select Nested Object (optional).
5. Fill in the Nested Object Id (optional).
6. Add any Query parameters needed to subscribe.
7. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from CS-Cart.
8. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
9. Select the CS-Cart HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow CS-Cart documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [CS-Cart API Reference](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/index.html).
**Object**
The object you want to subscribe to CS-Cart. Please refer to the object from [CS-Cart API Reference](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/index.html) page.
**Query Parameters**
These are the query parameters you can provide based on the [CS-Cart API Reference](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/index.html) page..
Please look at the example below on how to fill object when we try to get a particular ["product variation"](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/entities/product_variations.html) of a particular ["product variation group"](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/entities/product_variation_groups.html).
Based on the Documentation, we pick the ["Product Variation Groups"](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/entities/product_variation_groups.html) as the Object, then fill 1 in the "Object Id". We continue by pick ["Product Variations"](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/entities/product_variations.html) as the Nested Object and filling 1 in the "Nested Object Id".
Alumio will then make a request to CS-Cart with the URL /product\_variations\_groups/1/product\_variations/1 and get this specific product variation.
* Query Parameters is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access CS-Cart.
### 3. Publishing Entity to CS-Cart
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "CS-Cart Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the CS-Cart Object you want the data to be published to.
4. Fill in the Object Id (optional).
5. Select Nested Object (optional).
6. Fill in the Nested Object Id (optional).
7. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
8. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
9. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Object**
We support publishing to most CS-Cart endpoints.
Please refer to [CS-Cart API Reference](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/index.html) page.
For example, we want to create a product. Please select Post as the method and ["Products"](https://docs.cs-cart.com/latest/developer_guide/api/entities/products.html) as the object of the publisher.
We don't have to fill in the "Object Id" and "Nested Object Id", we also don't need to select anything from the "Nested Object."
Based on the documentation, we need to add a Body Request. So we put the body inside the payload key in the Data.
Alumio will send an API request to CS-Cart with URL /products
CS-Cart will then return the newly created "product\_id"
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access CS-Cart.
# Datadog
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/datadog
Connect Alumio to Datadog.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Datadog API Reference](https://docs.datadoghq.com/api/latest/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Datadog
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Datadog
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Datadog
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Datadog
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Datadog HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI and API key.
4. You can optionally enable Application Key that is required for some Datadog End Points.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Datadog
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Datadog Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the method you want to subscribe to from Datadog.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Datadog.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. Select the Datadog HTTP Client to use.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Datadog.
7. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Datadog documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Datadog API Reference](https://docs.datadoghq.com/api/latest/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Datadog. Please refer to the entities from [Datadog API Reference](https://docs.datadoghq.com/api/latest/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Datadog API Reference](https://docs.datadoghq.com/api/latest/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve details of an incident by subscribing ["Incidents - Get the details of an incident"](https://docs.datadoghq.com/api/latest/incidents/#get-the-details-of-an-incident) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the incident id as parameters. That is why we set the "incident\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Datadog with the URL `https://api.datadoghq.com/api/v2/incidents/123`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Datadog.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Datadog
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Datadog Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Datadog entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Datadog.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Datadog endpoints.
Please refer to [Datadog API Reference](https://docs.datadoghq.com/api/latest/) page.
For example, we want to delete an eorder. Please select “Delete” as the Method and ["Roles - Delete role"](https://docs.datadoghq.com/api/latest/roles/#delete-role).
From the end point, we can see that we need to set role id as parameters. That is why we set the "role\_id" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Datadog with URL `https://api.datadoghq.com/api/v2/roles/123`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Datadog.
# Dolibarr
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/dolibarr
Connect Alumio to Dolibarr ERP & CRM.
Dolibarr is a Open Source ERP & CRM for Business.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Dolibarr API Reference](https://wiki.dolibarr.org/index.php?title=Module_Web_Services_API_REST_\(developer\))
**Dolibarr**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Dolibarr
## Steps
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Dolibarr HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI (Example: [https://your-dolibarr.saas2.doliondemand.fr/api/index.php](https://your-dolibarr.saas2.doliondemand.fr/api/index.php)).
3. Fill the Username & Password
4. Enable the logging (Optional but recommended)
5. Enable the caching of the token and select or create the storage for the token (recommended)
6. Save and Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from Dolibarr
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, then create a new incoming configuration and select Dolibarr - Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to Dolibarr.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Dolibarr Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Dolibarr documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on Dolibarr API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Dolibarr. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Dolibarr API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Dolibarr API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing One Contracts entity
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such a Request Parameters field on the Contract entity.
/api/index.php/contracts/\{CONTRACT\_ID\_HERE}
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Dolibarr Rest API.
# Publishing Entity to Dolibarr
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Dolibarr Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Dolibarr entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Dolibarr.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Dolibarr REST endpoints.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Contact
You can put the payload you want to send to Dolibarr into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Which only returns the ID of the new contact.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Dolibarr REST API.
# DynamicWeb
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/dynamicweb
Connect Alumio to DynamicWeb.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://doc.dynamicweb.com/dwapi/docs/index.html?url=/dwapi/api.json\&layout=BaseLayout#](https://doc.dynamicweb.com/dwapi/docs/index.html?url=/dwapi/api.json\&layout=BaseLayout#)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client DynamicWeb
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from DynamicWeb
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to DynamicWeb
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client DynamicWeb
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Storages > Storages. Create a new Storage and select default Prototype as the prototype of the Storage.
2. Check the Enable pruning of storage items and Set the Time to live at 30 minutes
3. Save the Storage.
4. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select DynamicWeb HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
5. Fill in the Base URI, Username, Password, Shop Id and expiration in Seconds. You need to change the storage time to live when changing expiration in seconds accordingly.
6. Set the storage as the one that you save at previous step.
7. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
8. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from DynamicWeb
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select DynamicWeb Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from DynamicWeb.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the DynamicWeb HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow DynamicWeb documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on DynamicWeb API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from DynamicWeb. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from DynamicWeb API Reference.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on DynamicWeb API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Products\_GetProduct.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Because the id is inside path, we put it like that. This will be sent to DynamicWeb system as /dwapi/ecommerce/products/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access DynamicWeb.
### 3. Publishing Entity to DynamicWeb
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select DynamicWeb Publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to do with the data currently DynamicWeb support Post, Put, Patch and Delete.
3. Select the DynamicWeb entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently we support Post, Put, Patch and Delete.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most DynamicWeb endpoints. Please refer to the entities from DynamicWeb API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new user. Please select “Post” as the method and “Users\_Create” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to DynamicWeb into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Payload for creating the user.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to DynamicWeb with URL /dwapi/users/create
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access DynamicWeb.
# Ebay
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/ebay
Connect Alumio to Ebay.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
# Setting up HTTP Client eBay
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select eBay HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Choose the Environment (either sandbox, or production), Authentication type (Interactive or Client), Client ID, Client Secret, and scopes.
3. Press “Grant Access to eBay Center”
Note : If you need to input redirect URI, Alumio Redirect URL is on Settings > Info
**When utilizing the OAuth2 authorization code method, eBay manages this in two stages:**
1. Interactive authorization involves consenting to eBay by logging in with a user. Upon successful completion, you receive a code that must be used in the next step, Heres example of the consent request.
This HTML request redirects a user to your application's **Grant Application Access** page. If they consent to the conditions outlined on the page, the redirect returns the user to your application, and the redirect back to your application contains an **authorization code** .
2. Authorization code entails requesting an access token based on the acquired authentication code.
Heres and Example in Alumio
**Heres cURL example on Oauth2 client credentials**
In Alumio
This page in eBay documentation describes the request parameters needed to build the consent request: [https://developer.ebay.com/api-docs/static/oauth-consent-request.html](https://developer.ebay.com/api-docs/static/oauth-consent-request.html)
# Subscribing to Entities from eBay
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select eBay Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from eBay.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
## Select the Ebay HTTP Client to use. General Concept
We follow Ebay documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Ebay API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Ebay. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Ebay API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Ebay API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity.
That’s why we need to define **custom\_policy\_id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field.
/custom\_policy/1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Ebay.
# Publishing Entity to Ebay
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Ebay Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Ebay entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Ebay endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Ebay API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Custom Policy. Please select “Create” as the action and “createCustomPolicy” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Ebay into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Ebay with URL /custom\_policy
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Ebay.
# Ecwid
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/ecwid
Connect Alumio to Ecwid.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Ecwid API Reference](https://api-docs.ecwid.com/reference/access-ecwid-api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Ecwid
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Ecwid
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Ecwid
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Ecwid
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Ecwid HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Store ID, and Client ID and select the Authentication Type of your Ecwid instance (OAuth or using access Token.
4. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting an HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field
5. Click the Grant access to Ecwid button to get the access token (If you're using Oauth as your Authentication Type).
6. You can optionally change how Alumio logs every HTTP request made by the HTTP client
7. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Ecwid
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Ecwid Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Ecwid.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. Select the Ecwid HTTP Client to use
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Ecwid.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Ecwid API documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Ecwid API Reference](https://api-docs.ecwid.com/reference/rest-api).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to do (fetching data from Ecwid). Please refer to the [Ecwid API Reference](https://api-docs.ecwid.com/reference/rest-api) page.
**Request Parameters**
It’s the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on [Ecwid API Reference](https://api-docs.ecwid.com/reference/rest-api) Documentation. For example, we want to subscribe to Product details with endpoint /products/596377786 with productId = 596377786. We add this Json at the Request parameter area.
It will transform to /products/596377786
That’s why we need to define the Product ID property inside the payload property in the Request Parameters field.
Alumio will then make a request to Ecwid.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Ecwid.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Ecwid
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "Ecwid Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Ecwid entity to which the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support POST, PUT, and DELETE methods.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Ecwid endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities from the Ecwid API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
**Action**
We support publishing to most Ecwid endpoints. Please refer to [Ecwid API Reference](https://api-docs.ecwid.com/reference/rest-api) Documentation page.
Please look at the example below. For example, we want to update a product with productId = 596377786 by using the patch method. Please select method PUT and "Products - Update a Product" as the entity action of the publisher.
The documentation describes that we need Product property as a request body. In that case, you need to provide the Product property into the payload property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in the Outgoing Configuration. Here is an example of the required data.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype that you will use to access Ecwid.
# eDesk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/edesk
Connect Alumio to eDesk.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Setting up HTTP Client EDesk**
**Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select EDesk HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password
**Subscribing to Entities from EDesk**
**Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select EDesk Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from EDesk.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the EDesk HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
We follow EDesk documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on EDesk API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from EDesk. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the EDesk API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on EDesk API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when Get custom fields entity
That’s why we need to define the id property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the Get custom fields entity.
/v1/threads/448689220/custom-field
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access EDesk.
**Publishing Entity to EDesk**
**Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select EDesk Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the EDesk entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most EDesk endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the EDesk API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Thread. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create a Thread” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to EDesk into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to EDesk with URL /v1/threads
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access EDesk.
# EffectConnect
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/effectconnect
Connect Alumio to EffectConnect.
## Extra information
System documentation: [EffectConnect API Reference](https://docs.effectconnect.com/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client EffectConnect
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from EffectConnect
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to EffectConnect
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client EffectConnect
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select EffectConnect HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI.
(For more information, see [EffectConnect Reference](https://docs.effectconnect.com/))
4. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from EffectConnect
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Effectconnect Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Effectconnect.
3. Add public key, secret key, and any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. Select the Effectconnect HTTP Client to use
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from EffectConnect.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow EffectConnect documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [EffectConnect API Reference](https://docs.effectconnect.com/documentation/build-an-api-call).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Effectconnect. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the [EffectConnect API Reference](https://docs.effectconnect.com/documentation) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Effectconnect API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters when subscribing Process Status
That’s why we need to define the ID property inside the process property in the Request Parameters field. Based on the documentation, it only provides XML examples. We can convert XML to JSON using [https://codebeautify.org/xmltojson](https://codebeautify.org/xmltojson).
Alumio will then make a request to EffectConnect with the URL /process
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access EffectConnect.
### 3. Publishing Entity to EffectConnect
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "EffectConnect Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the EffectConnect entity to which the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support POST and PUT methods.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Effectconnect endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities from the Effectconnect API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype that you will use to access Effectconnect.
# ERPNext
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/erpnext
Connect Alumio to ERPNext.
## Extra information
System documentation: [ERPNext API Reference](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client ERPNext
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from ERPNext
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to ERPNext
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client ERPNext
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "ERPNext HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Choose OAuth 2 for Authentication Type.
3. Fill in the the Base URI Access Token URL, Authorize URL Client ID, Client Secret and Scope.
(For more information, see [ERPNext Oauth2 Authentication Reference](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api/oauth-2))
4. Click on "Grant access to ERPNext" and you will be redirected to approve the grant.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Save the HTTP Client for use.
7. Alternatively, you can use Token Based Authentication. In that case, please select Token Based as Authentication Type, fill the Base URI and Token, then save the HTTP Client.
(For more information, see [ERPNext Token Based Authentication Reference](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api/token_based_authentication))
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from ERPNext
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "ERPNext Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from ERPNext.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the ERPNext HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the data into something you will be used to request from ERPNext.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow ERPNext documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [ERPNext API Reference](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ERPNext.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to ERPNext. Please refer to the entities from [ERPNext API Reference](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [ERPNext API Reference](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Retrieve a specific document by name (ID)"](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api#rest) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "doctype" and "name" as a parameter. That is why we set the "doctype" and "name" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to ERPNext with the URL /api/resource/Lead/CRM-LEAD-2024-00001
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
### 3. Publishing Entity to ERPNext
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "ERPNext Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the ERPNext entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, Update HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to ERPNext.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most ERPNext endpoints.
Please refer to [ERPNext API Reference](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api) page.
For example, we want to add a new product. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Create a new document of this DocType"](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api#rest) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a "Request Body". That is why we set the "Request Body" inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to ERPNext with URL /api/resource/Lead
Another example is when we want to delete a product by id. Please select “Delete” as the Action and ["Delete a specific document by name (ID)"](https://frappeframework.com/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api#rest) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "doctype" and "name" as a parameter. That is why we set the "doctype" and "name" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will then make a request to ERPNext with the URL /api/resource/Lead/CRM-LEAD-2024-00001
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ERPNext.
# Exact Globe
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/exact-globe
Connect Alumio to Exact Globe.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin API Reference](https://demo-api.clickker.nl/swagger/ui/index#/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL and API Key.
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin API Reference](https://demo-api.clickker.nl/swagger/ui/index#/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin. Please refer to the entities from [Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin API Reference](https://demo-api.clickker.nl/swagger/ui/index#/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin API Reference](https://demo-api.clickker.nl/swagger/ui/index#/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Retrieve an item by Id."](https://demo-api.clickker.nl/swagger/ui/index#/Item/Item_GetById) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "Id" as a path. That is why we set the "Id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{channelId}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin with the URL /api/Item/ById/1
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP POST method and HTTP PUT method on submitting data to Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin endpoints.
Please refer to [Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin API Reference](https://demo-api.clickker.nl/swagger/ui/index#/) page.
For example, we want to create a new Sales Order. Please select “POST” as the Method and ["Create a new SalesOrder"](https://demo-api.clickker.nl/swagger/ui/index#/SalesOrder/SalesOrder_Post) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we need to add a Body Request. So we put the body inside the payload key in the Data.
Alumio will send an API request to Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin with URL /api/SalesOrder
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Exact Globe - Alumio API Plugin.
# Exact Online
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/exact-online
Connect Alumio to Exact Online.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Exact Online API Reference](https://start.exactonline.nl/docs/HlpRestAPIResources.aspx?SourceAction=10)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Exact Online
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Exact Online
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Exact Online
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Exact Online
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Exact Online HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes (Optional).
(For more information, see [Exact Online Reference](https://support.exactonline.com/community/s/knowledge-base#All-All-DNO-Content-gettingstarted))
3. Click on "Grant access to Exact Online" to get the Key.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Exact Online
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Exact Online Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Exact Online.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Exact Online.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the Exact Online HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Exact Online documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Exact Online API Reference](https://start.exactonline.nl/docs/HlpRestAPIResources.aspx?SourceAction=10).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Exact Online. Please refer to the entities from [Exact Online API Reference](https://start.exactonline.nl/docs/HlpRestAPIResources.aspx?SourceAction=10) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Exact Online API Reference](https://start.exactonline.nl/docs/HlpRestAPIResources.aspx?SourceAction=10).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["AccountOwners"](https://start.exactonline.nl/docs/HlpRestAPIResourcesDetails.aspx?name=AccountancyAccountOwners) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "division" as a path. That is why we set the "division" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{channelId}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Exact Online with the URL /api/v1/3389687/accountancy/AccountOwners
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Exact Online.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Exact Online
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Exact Online Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Exact Online entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Exact Online.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Exact Online endpoints.
Please refer to [Exact Online API Reference](https://start.exactonline.nl/docs/HlpRestAPIResources.aspx?SourceAction=10) page.
For example, we want to create owner of an account. Please select “Create” as the Action and ["AccountOwners"](https://start.exactonline.nl/docs/HlpRestAPIResourcesDetails.aspx?name=AccountancyAccountOwners) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "division" as a path. That is why we set the "division" inside the path key in the Data. We also need to provide the body of the request, add it inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Exact Online with URL /api/v1/3389687/accountancy/AccountOwners
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Exact Online.
# FashionMaster
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/fashionmaster
Connect Alumio to FashionMaster.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up SOAP Client FashionMaster Retail
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > SOAP Clients. Create a new SOAP Client and select FashionMaster SOAP Client as the prototype of the SOAP Client.
2. Fill in the WSDL URI, Soap Version (Default is SOAP 1.1), and Storage for cache (Optional).
3. Save and Continue.
Note: The authentications needs the Alumio IP to be whitelisted, to get the IP go to Settings > Info > Environment
# Subscribing to Entities from FashionMaster Retail
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select FashionMaster Retail Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the soap Method you want to subscribe to from FashionMaster Retail.
3. Add any request data needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the FashionMaster Retail SOAP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow FashionMaster Retail documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on FashionMaster Retail API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from FashionMaster Retail. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from FashionMaster Retail API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on FashionMaster Retail API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing GetCustomerDetails entity
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**SOAP Client**
It’s the SOAP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access FashionMaster Retail.
# Publishing Entity to FashionMaster Retail
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select FashionMaster Retail Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the FashionMaster Retail entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the SOAP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most FashionMaster Retail endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the FashionMaster Retail API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a AmendCustomer. Please select “CreateAmendCustomer” as the entity of the publisher.
Here is the example of the Payload in JSON that we tried.
```
{
"Town": "Boryspil",
"Email": "Alumiotest@test.com",
"Title": "Mister",
"County": "Maten",
"Surname": "Smith",
"Address1": "London",
"Address2": "Kyiv",
"Forename": "John",
"PostCode": "1005",
"Telephone1": "+44123456789",
"Telephone2": "+380123456789",
"CompanyName": "Alumio",
"CountryCode": "44",
"FMCustomerCode": "news",
"WebCustomerCode": 33,
"LoyaltyCardNumber": "123321",
"WhereHeardAboutUs": 2,
"WholesaleCustomer": false,
"CustUpdateLog_User": "This customer is a test customer",
"CustUpdateLog_Utility": "Facebook internation ads",
"WhereHeardAboutUsSpecific": "Facebook Ads"
}
```
You can put the payload you want to send to FashionMaster Retail into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
**SOAP Client**
It’s the SOAP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access FashionMaster Retail.
# FastSpring
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/fastspring
Connect Alumio to FastSpring.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[FastSpring API Reference]
**FastSpring**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client FastSpring
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select FastSpring HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from FastSpring
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select FastSpring Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from FastSpring .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the FastSpring HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow FastSpring documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on FastSpring API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from FastSpring . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from FastSpring API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on FastSpring API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get an account.
That’s why we need to define the **account\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get an account.
/accounts/Alumio
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access FastSpring .
# Publishing Entity to FastSpring
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select FastSpring Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the FastSpring entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to FastSpring .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most FastSpring endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the FastSpring API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new account. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create an account” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to FastSpring into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to FastSpring with URL /accounts
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access FastSpring .
# FreeAgent
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/freeagent
Connect Alumio to FreeAgent.
## Extra information
System documentation: [FreeAgent API Reference](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/index)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client FreeAgent
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from FreeAgent
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to FreeAgent
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client FreeAgent
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select FreeAgent HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID and Client Secret.
(For more information, see [FreeAgent Authentication Reference](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/quick_start))
4. Click on "Grant access to FreeAgent" and you will be redirected to approve the grant.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from FreeAgent
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "FreeAgent Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from FreeAgent.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the FreeAgent HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from FreeAgent.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow FreeAgent documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [FreeAgent API Reference](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/index).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to FreeAgent. Please refer to the entities from [FreeAgent API Reference](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/index) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [FreeAgent API Reference](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/index) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Contacts - Show Contact"](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/contacts) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to FreeAgent with the URL /v2/contacts/15978986
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access FreeAgent.
### 3. Publishing Entity to FreeAgent
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "FreeAgent Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the FreeAgent entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to FreeAgent.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most FreeAgent endpoints.
Please refer to [FreeAgent API Reference](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/index) page.
For example, we want to add a new contact. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Contacts - Create Contact"](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/contacts) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a payload with root contact element. That is why we set the payload inside the payload key in the data with a root contact element.
Alumio will send an API request to FreeAgent with URL /v2/contacts
Another example is when we want to delete a contact. Please select “Delete” as the Method and ["Contacts - Delete Contact"](https://dev.freeagent.com/docs/contacts) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to FreeAgent with the URL /v2/contacts/15978986
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access FreeAgent.
# Freshbooks
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/freshbooks
Connect Alumio to Freshbooks.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Freshbooks**
# Setting up HTTP Client Freshbooks
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Freshbooks HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret and Scopes (Optional)
3. Press, “Grant Access to Freshbooks”.
4. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Freshbooks
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Freshbooks Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Freshbooks.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Freshbooks HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Freshbooks documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Freshbooks API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Freshbooks. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Freshbooks API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Freshbooks API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing List Clients entity
That’s why we need to define the **accountId** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on List Clients entity.
/accounting/account/3p54yo/users/clients
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Freshbooks.
# Publishing Entity to Freshbooks
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Freshbooks Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Freshbooks entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Freshbooks.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Freshbooks endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Freshbooks API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create object. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create / Update Credit Note” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Freshbooks into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Freshbooks with URL /accounting/account/3p54yo/credit\_notes/credit\_notes
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Freshbooks.
# Freshdesk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/freshdesk
Connect Alumio to Freshdesk.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Freshdesk**
# Setting up HTTP Client Freshdesk
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Freshdesk HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, API Key/Email, and Password (Optional if you use API Key)
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Setting up Credentials
## Steps
1. API Key
* Log in to your Support Portal
* Click on your profile picture on the top right corner of your portal
* Go to Profile settings Page
* Your API key will be available below the change password section to your right
2. Email & Password
* Simply Register to the environment and use the same email and password that used to login into Freshdesk
# Subscribing to Entities from Freshdesk
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Freshdesk Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Freshdesk.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Freshdesk HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Freshdesk documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Freshdesk API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Freshdesk. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Freshdesk API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Freshdesk API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing View a Product entity.
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on View a Product.
/api/v2/products/SS2B
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Freshdesk.
# Publishing Entity to Freshdesk
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Freshdesk Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Freshdesk entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Freshdesk.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), Put (HTTP PUT method). And Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Freshdesk endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Freshdesk API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Delete a Contact. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Soft Delete a Contact” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Freshdesk into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Freshdesk with URL /api/v2/contacts/123
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Freshdesk.
# Google Calendar
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/google-calendar
Connect Alumio to Google Calendar.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Google Calendar API Reference](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/guides/overview)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Google Calendar
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Google Calendar
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Google Calendar
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Google Calendar
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Google Calendar HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Token URL, Authorize URL, Client ID, Client Secret and Scopes.
(See the [Google Calendar Authentication Documentation](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/auth) for more information)
4. Click on "Grant access to Google Calendar" and you will be redirected to Google Authentication to get the key for the client.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Google Calendar
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Google Calendar Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Method that you want the subscriber to fetch the data.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Google Calendar.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. Select the Google Calendar HTTP Client to use.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Google Calendar.
7. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Google Calendar documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Google Calendar API Reference](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/guides/overview).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Google Calendar. Please refer to the entities from [Google Calendar API Reference](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/guides/overview) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Google Calendar API Reference](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/guides/overview).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve a Calendar by subscribing ["Calendar - Get Calendar"](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/v3/reference/calendars/get) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the calendar id as parameters. That is why we set the "calendarId" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Google Calendar with the URL `/calendars/12345`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Google Calendar.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Google Calendar
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Google Calendar Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Google Calendar entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Google Calendar.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Google Calendar endpoints.
Please refer to [Google Calendar API Reference](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/guides/overview) page.
For example, we want to create a calendar. Please select “Create data using POST” as the Method and ["Calendar - Create Calendar"](https://developers.google.com/calendar/api/v3/reference/calendars/insert).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a body parameters. That is why we set the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Google Calendar with URL `/calendars`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Google Calendar.
# Google Gemini
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/google-gemini
Connect Alumio to Google Gemini.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Google Gemini API Reference](https://ai.google.dev/api/models)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Google Gemini
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Google Gemini
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Google Gemini
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Google Gemini
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Google Gemini HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Gemini API Keys.
(See the [Google Gemini Authentication Documentation](https://ai.google.dev/gemini-api/docs/api-key) for more information)
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Google Gemini
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Google Gemini Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Method that you want the subscriber to get the data.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Google Gemini.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. Select the Google Gemini HTTP Client to use.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Google Gemini.
7. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Google Gemini documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Google Gemini API Reference](https://ai.google.dev/api/models).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Google Gemini. Please refer to the entities from [Google Gemini API Reference](https://ai.google.dev/api/models) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Google Gemini API Reference](https://ai.google.dev/api/models).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve list comments by subscribing ["Method: models.get"](https://ai.google.dev/api/models) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the model as parameters. That is why we set the "model" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Google Gemini with the URL `https://generativelanguage.googleapis.com/v1beta/gemini-1.5-flash-latest`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Google Gemini.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Google Gemini
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Google Gemini Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Google Gemini entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Google Gemini.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Google Gemini endpoints.
Please refer to [Google Gemini API Reference](https://ai.google.dev/api/models) page.
For example, we want to generate content by a model. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Method: models.generateContent"](https://ai.google.dev/api/generate-content).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameters. That is why we set the "model" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Google Gemini with URL `https://generativelanguage.googleapis.com/v1beta/models/gemini-1.5-flash-latest:generateContent`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Google Gemini.
# Google Merchant
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/google-merchant
Connect Alumio to Google Merchant.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, Code, and Scopes (optional).
3. Press “Grant access to [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant Center” and save.
# Subscribing to Entities from [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant
## Steps
1. Go to Connections → Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to accounts.get entity.
That’s why we need to define **merchantId and accountId** properties inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on accounts.get entity.
/content/v2.1/1/accounts/1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant.
# Publishing Entity to [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant
## Steps
1. Go to Connections → Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method),Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Accounts. Please select “Create” as the action and “accounts. insert” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant with URL /content/v2.1/1/accounts
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access [Google](https://google.com/) Merchant.
# Important Notes
**Documentation Mistake**
* Product insert: the parameter “offerId” is needed and this is not mentioned in the documentation. Also the documentation mentions that we should insert the parameters in this format for example: “image\_link” but it should be “imageLink” and for example the as per the documentation it says “is\_bundle” but the parameter should be “isBundle”. This goes for all parameters.
* Create Region: The payload should have the following parameters unlike the documentation
```
{
"displayname": "TestRegion_Alumio",
"postalCodeArea": {
"regionCode": "US",
"postalCodes": [
{
"end": "98112",
"begin": "98064"
}
]
},
"shippingEligible" : true,
"regionalInventoryEligible" : true
}
```
# HaloITSM
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/haloitsm
Connect Alumio to HaloITSM.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[HaloITSM API Reference]
# Setting up HTTP Client HaloITSM
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select HaloITSM HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Authentication type.
* Username & Password : Fill in Client ID, Username, Password, and Scopes.
* Client Credentials : Fill in Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes.
* Save the Client for use later.
Currently we Support only Username & Password, and Client Credentials for Authentication.
# Subscribing to Entities from HaloITSM
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select HaloITSM Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from HaloITSM .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the HaloITSM HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow HaloITSM documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on HaloITSM API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from HaloITSM . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from HaloITSM API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on HaloITSM API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when Returns a single action object.
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Returns a single action object.
/Actions/AC12
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access HaloITSM .
# Publishing Entity to HaloITSM
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select HaloITSM Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the HaloITSM entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to HaloITSM .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most HaloITSM endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the HaloITSM API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new assets. Please select “Post” as the action and “Adds or updates one or more Assets…….” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to HaloITSM into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to HaloITSM with URL /Assets
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access HaloITSM .
# How to use connector packages
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/how-to-use
A general guide to using any Alumio connector package: incoming and outgoing configurations, and request parameters.
## Introduction
If you have been using Alumio, you would know that connections across various data points play an important role in many operational scenarios. From retrieving products/collections to getting product variants and much more, the Alumio connector package allows you to establish connections smoothly. This article will shed light on how to establish a connection with any of the platforms that you would like to connect with.
Let's suppose that you have a Shopify connector that you would like to integrate with the help of Alumio. You can name it Shopify- Get Products Connector Package. To begin with, you must start with creating a template within the Incoming Configuration.
The features are the same for all the Alumio connector packages. If you grasp the nitty-gritties of one package, you will sail smoothly with the others.
## Your specific connector package
You can find documentation specific to your connector package on its own page under [Connectors](/connectors).
Questions about a specific connector package can be asked on the [Alumio forum](https://forum.alumio.com/c/ipaas-connector-packages/27).
## Incoming configurations
Here is how Alumio users can set the incoming configurations of the Alumio connector packages.
**Step 1:** Select Shopify Subscriber within Subscriber and move on to the Entity field, where the full API functionalities are listed as options.
**Step 2:** An Alumio user can dictate terms while making the connection. For instance, you can search for the specific end-point (customers, products, etc.) you wish to trace and connect with.
**Step 3:** For example, you can pick Retrieve a list of products as the end-point.
You can check the Request Parameters below. There are 3 parameters - path, query, and payload - that you must mandatorily include.
```json theme={null}
{
"path": [],
"query": [],
"payload": []
}
```
### A brief explanation of request parameters
Here is an explanation of how the Request Parameters are used.
Let's consider that `http://example.com/api/customers` is the URL from where you want to receive information from all the customers. Now, what if you are looking for a specific customer numbered as 1?
We can do that by using it within the path of the URL by adding a slash followed by a 1 to the URL. Let's say that the URL is `http://example.com/api/customers/1` where 1 is being used as an id.
In this case, the Request Parameter must also reflect the change in path. The array must be changed to an object where the id has to be specified.
```json theme={null}
{
"path": {
"id": "1"
},
"query": [],
"payload": []
}
```
Now, what if there is a certain API key/API token for that specific customer, and you want to get that? Let's say that the URL is `http://example.com/api/customers/1?api_key=qwe123` where qwe123 is the API key. That is something we must input in the query of the Request Parameter as well.
```json theme={null}
{
"path": {
"id": "1"
},
"query": {
"api_key": "qwe123"
},
"payload": []
}
```
Let's consider a scenario where there is a specific customer within the customer base denoted as 1 who has contacts. Now, those contacts also have their specific ids since one customer can have multiple contacts. Consider this URL:
`http://example.com/api/customers/1/contacts/?api_key=qwe123`
In this case, the Request Parameter will look something like this after the inclusion of the extra objects (contact\_id):
```json theme={null}
{
"path": {
"id": "1",
"contact_id": "123"
},
"query": {
"api_key": "qwe123"
},
"payload": []
}
```
The last parameter is the payload. It can be utilized if you wish to post data into the system. It is set within the outgoing configuration, which is discussed later in this article.
**Step 4:** Moving on, you have to select the HTTP Client field where you have to select Shopify Client. This allows the connector to locate the system, its authentication criteria, and other such details.
**Step 5:** Click on the Save button and a pop-up will appear confirming the same.
**Step 6:** Click on Run Incoming to run the incoming configuration.
A "Subscriber has been consumed" pop-up box will also appear if everything goes right. Hit Click to view more information just beneath it to check the Logs.
**Step 7:** Hit the Refresh button at the top-right corner and the logs will load.
Here, you will see that a get request has been created for the products. Subsequently, a response will be received which contains all of the products that are currently present within the Shopify environment. Once retrieved, the product data can be used in multiple ways as per requirement.
**Bonus step:** In case you wish to retrieve a specific product, you can do that as well. Simply change the path of the Request Parameter (step 3) from an array to an object that specifies the product id. You can choose the product id from the response.
This is how the Request Parameter will look:
```json theme={null}
{
"path": {
"product_id": "8777085369"
},
"query": [],
"payload": []
}
```
Here, 8777085369 is the product id (example).
It is important to note here that the variables used within the Request Parameter must adhere to the documentation of the specific software (recommended).
You can use the API reference shown just below the Request Parameters segment (within the Incoming Configurations). For a better understanding, go to 4:35 of the [How To Use An Alumio Connector Package](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RZ1XiO-VIcU) video.
Once you save the Incoming Configuration and hit Run Incoming, the "Subscriber has been consumed" pop-up box will appear once more. Hit Click to view more information > Logs. Click on the Refresh button at the top-right corner and this time you will see that a product call (get request) has been made to the product id 8777085369. Subsequently, the product response will also include that specific product exclusively.
## Outgoing configurations
This is where the subscriber package is set for the outgoing configuration (meant for the publisher). It works a bit differently than the incoming configuration.
Once again, let's suppose that you have a Shopify connector named Shopify- Create Product Connector Package.
**Step 1:** Select Shopify Publisher within Publisher and move on to the Action field, where there are options to Update, Delete, and Create the HTTP requests.
**Step 2:** Next, you must define the HTTP Client field, which is obviously Shopify Client in this case.
**Step 3:** In this case, we are configuring the Outgoing configuration for a Route named Products from Akeneo to Shopify which has a pre-defined task, where data from a specific product is pulled from the system.
You can go to the Shopify environment and you will see that the specific product has not been made yet.
**Step 4:** Subsequently, you have to fill the field of Entity transformers (if necessary). In this case, you can select Shopify- Prepare Data for Connector Package. By clicking on View configuration just beneath it, you can see what it takes to prepare the data for a connector package.
**Step 5:** Similar to the Incoming Configuration, you have to specify the path, query, and payload once again as it is a key requirement for the connector packages. In scenarios where they are not required, you can simply designate them as empty arrays.
In this case, the connector package is interacting with an end-point that does not have a path or query. Nevertheless, you have to specify the payload, which will include the information of the product (step 3) that will be sent to Shopify.
```json theme={null}
{
"product": "&{product}"
}
```
**Step 6:** You can test how the product data will look based on the entity transformer, by clicking on the Run Test button on the right-hand panel.
**Step 7:** Save the entity transformer and the outgoing configuration and you are ready to go.
You can now run the Route- Products from Akeneo to Shopify and a "Publisher has been exported" pop-up message will appear. You can go to Tasks, refresh the page, where a finished task will appear.
Go to Export Messages, which will reflect a request that was sent to products.json with a specific payload of the product. It will be followed by a response from Shopify where the product will get created.
You can also re-visit the Shopify environment and refresh the page. The product will be reflected here as well, created through the API call.
## Closing note
This is how you can receive any of the subscribers from any of the connector packages that Alumio provides. The platform makes it super easy to create incoming and outgoing configurations. This article provides a step-by-step insight on how to configure them.
# HubSpot
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/hubspot
Connect Alumio to HubSpot.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://developers.hubspot.com/docs/api/overview](https://developers.hubspot.com/docs/api/overview)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client HubSpot
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from HubSpot
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to HubSpot
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client HubSpot
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients.
2. Create a new HTTP Client and select HubSpot Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
3. Select the preferred authentication type.
4. We provide three authentication types you can use to connect to HubSpot.
* To use API Key, please refer to [https://developers.hubspot.com/docs/api/working-with-oauth](https://developers.hubspot.com/docs/api/working-with-oauth) to get the API key.
Fill in the API Key accordingly
* To use OAuth 2.0, please refer to this [https://knowledge.hubspot.com/integrations/how-do-i-get-my-hubspot-api-key?\_ga=2.60143279.341006870.1586180142-500942594.1573763828&\_gac=1.159575759.1585929963.CjwKCAjwsMzzBRACEiwAx4lLGyhm1kRPOqA4ECRGjXC9E1lqLmkjAkm\_n327nPunuhr5z2D0LTrIyhoCCX0QAvD\_BwE](https://knowledge.hubspot.com/integrations/how-do-i-get-my-hubspot-api-key?_ga=2.60143279.341006870.1586180142-500942594.1573763828&_gac=1.159575759.1585929963.CjwKCAjwsMzzBRACEiwAx4lLGyhm1kRPOqA4ECRGjXC9E1lqLmkjAkm_n327nPunuhr5z2D0LTrIyhoCCX0QAvD_BwE) to get the OAuth 2.0 credentials.
Fill in the Client id, Client Secret and Scopes.
Click the Grant access to HubSpot button and follow the instructions to let Alumio start the authentication and get the access token.
* To use Private Apps Access Token, please refer to this [https://developers.hubspot.com/docs/api/private-apps](https://developers.hubspot.com/docs/api/private-apps) to get the Access Token.
Fill in the Access Token accordingly
5. Please ignore the Grant access to HubSpot button when you select other than Oauth 2.0.
6. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
7. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting a HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field.
8. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from HubSpot
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select HubSpot Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the action you want to do.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the HubSpot HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities. For HubSpot case, you should use Follow next links as pagination type.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow HubSpot API documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on HubSpot API Docs.
**Action**
It’s the action you want to do (fetching data from HubSpot). Please refer to HubSpot API Docs page.
**Request Parameters**
It’s the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on HubSpot API Docs. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing CRM Contacts entity.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
It means that we want to subscribe to contact with ID 51 and we want to fetch only email property of the contact. We can see in the documentation that contact entity requires contactId as a path parameter to define which product we want to fetch the images from.
That’s why we need to define the contactId property inside path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters (in this example would be properties) will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field.
/crm/v3/objects/contacts/51?property=email
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access HubSpot.
**Follow Pagination**
If we want to fetch a list of entities, some systems have pagination to limit the entities returned in one call. HubSpot is one of the systems and it uses the next links included in every list that still has more page(s). By selecting any pagination type in HubSpot subscriber, Alumio will fetch a number of pages according to the number entered in maximum number of pages to fetch field, instead of fetching only one page. Of course, such behavior happens if the next link exists in the previous fetch response. For HubSpot, please set paging.next.link to the Pattern to the link for the next page field. One more step to enable the pagination is by selecting the storage to track the process. You can create a new storage and use it here in the incoming configuration.
### 3. Publishing Entity to HubSpot
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select HubSpot – Entity Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the HubSpot entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to HubSpot.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support POST, PUT, PATCH and DELETE methods when writing/publishing data to HubSpot.
**Action**
We support publishing to most HubSpot endpoints. Please refer to HubSpot API Docs page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
Please look at the example below. For example, we want to update first and last name of a specific contact. Please select PATCH as the method and CRM - Contacts – Update a contact as the action of the publisher.
The documentation describes that we need contactId as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide contactId property into the path property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in the Outgoing Configuration. And you can put the payload you want to send to HubSpot into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the required data.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to HubSpot with URL /crm/v3/objects/contacts/51 and below request body.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access HubSpot.
# Ibexa
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/ibexa
Connect Alumio to Ibexa.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Ibexa API Reference](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up the HTTP Client Ibexa
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Ibexa
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Ibexa
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the HTTP Client Ibexa
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Ibexa Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Select the JWT Token Authentication to use
3. Fill in the Base URL, Username, and Password according to your Ibexa account.
(For more information, see [Ibexa JWT Token Reference](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html#managing-users-create-jwt-token))
4. You can optionally enable the logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Ibexa
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Ibexa Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Ibexa.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Ibexa.
5. Select the Ibexa HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Ibexa documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the [Ibexa API Reference](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Ibexa. Please refer to the entities from [Ibexa API Reference](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Ibexa API Reference](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html)
Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing ["Load Content"](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html#managing-content-load-content) entity.
We can see in the documentation that the end point requires "contentId" as a path parameter to define which content we want to fetch.
We set the "contentId" by providing it inside the path key in the Request Parameters,
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will send the request as /content/objects/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Ibexa.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Ibexa
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Ibexa Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Ibexa entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Head (HTTP HEAD method), Delete (HTTP DELETE method), Copy (HTTP COPY method), Publish (HTTP PUBLISH method), Move (HTTP MOVE method), Swap (HTTP SWAP method), and Patch (HTTP PATCH method) on submitting data to Ibexa.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Ibexa endpoints.
Please refer to [Ibexa API Reference](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html) page.
Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to use ["Delete Product"](https://doc.ibexa.co/en/latest/api/rest_api/rest_api_reference/rest_api_reference.html#product-catalog-delete-product).
Please select "Delete" as the action and "Delete Product" as the entity of the publisher.
The documentation says that we need "identifier" as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide "identifier" data into the path key in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. And you can put the data you want to send to Ibexa into the payload key in the data.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will then send the request as /product/catalog/products/123
Examples of the Possible Response after deletion are
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Ibexa.
# Icecat
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/icecat
Connect Alumio to Icecat.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://iceclog.com/manual-for-icecat-json-product-requests/](https://iceclog.com/manual-for-icecat-json-product-requests/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Icecat
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Icecat
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Icecat
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Icecat HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
We can choose Live Icecat or Data Icecat.
Both Live Icecat or Data Icecat have two different purposes and you can view their documention here:
* Live Icecat : [https://iceclog.com/manual-for-icecat-json-product-requests/](https://iceclog.com/manual-for-icecat-json-product-requests/) at chapter 1.
* Data Icecat : [https://iceclog.com/open-catalog-interface-oci-open-icecat-xml-and-full-icecat-xml-repositories/](https://iceclog.com/open-catalog-interface-oci-open-icecat-xml-and-full-icecat-xml-repositories/) at chapter 2.3 and 2.4
2. Fill in the Base URI either [https://live.icecat.biz](https://live.icecat.biz) or [https://data.icecat.biz](https://data.icecat.biz)
3. We can choose the authentication type of this client. There are two options: “No Authentication” and “Basic Authentication”.
* On “Basic Authentication” a username and password of Icecat account will be provided.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Icecat
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select the Icecat Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Icecat.
3. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to modify the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Icecat HTTP Client to use.
6. You can add a pagination feature to allow Alumio to fetch a paginated entity.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Icecat documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Icecat API Reference](https://iceclog.com/open-catalog-interface-oci-open-icecat-xml-and-full-icecat-xml-repositories/).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from Icecat. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Icecat API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Icecat API reference.
* Live Icecat Incoming/Subscriber
Example:
* Data Icecat Incoming/Subscriber
(Notes: Data Icecat can only be accessed using whitelisted IP/Perimeter81)
As their documentation at [Icecat API Reference](https://iceclog.com/open-catalog-interface-oci-open-icecat-xml-and-full-icecat-xml-repositories/)
* Chapter 2.2 Individual Product XML (Meta) Requests (real-time)
* Chapter 2.3 Open Icecat (free) directories for batch processing
* Chapter 2.4 Full Icecat directories for batch processing
Example:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and modify the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Icecat.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/index
Documentation for Alumio's iPaaS connector packages: how to set up each connector's HTTP client, subscribe to entities, and publish data.
Alumio connector packages provide ready-to-use HTTP clients, subscribers, and publishers for connecting to third-party systems. Each page below explains how to set up and use a connector.
New to connector packages? Start with [How to use connector packages](/connectors/how-to-use) for a general walkthrough of incoming and outgoing configurations.
Select a connector from the navigation menu on the left to get started.
# InFlow
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/inflow
Connect Alumio to InFlow.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[InFlow API Reference]
**InFlow**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client InFlow
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select InFlow HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Api Key, and Accept Versioning Parameter (Default 2024-03-12, feel free to change the version).
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from InFlow
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select InFlow Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from InFlow .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the InFlow HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow InFlow documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on InFlow API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from InFlow. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from InFlow API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from InFlow . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from InFlow API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on InFlow API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get a category.
That’s why we need to define the **categoryId** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get a category.
/companyId/categories/abc123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access InFlow .
# Publishing Entity to InFlow
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select InFlow Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the InFlow entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to InFlow .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most InFlow endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the InFlow API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create product. Please select “Put” as the action and “Insert or update product” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to InFlow into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to InFlow with URL /products
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access InFlow .
# InRiver
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/inriver
Connect Alumio to InRiver.
## Extra information
System documentation: [InRiver API Reference](https://apieuw.productmarketingcloud.com/swagger/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client InRiver
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from InRiver
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to InRiver
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client InRiver
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "InRiver HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL and API Key.
(For more information, see [InRiver Reference](https://community.InRiver.com/hc/en-us/signin?return_to=https%3A%2F%2Fcommunity.Inriver.com%2Fhc%2Fen-us%2Farticles%2F360023000354))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from InRiver
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "InRiver Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from InRiver.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from InRiver.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the InRiver HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow InRiver documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [InRiver API Reference](https://apieuw.productmarketingcloud.com/swagger/index.html).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to InRiver. Please refer to the entities from [InRiver API Reference](https://apieuw.productmarketingcloud.com/swagger/index.html) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [InRiver API Reference](https://apieuw.productmarketingcloud.com/swagger/index.html).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["GetChannelsForEntityId"](https://apieuw.productmarketingcloud.com/swagger/index.html#/Channel/GetChannelsForEntityId) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point has optional query parameters. That is why we can set the "forEntityId", "includeChannels" and "includePublications" inside the query key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{channelId}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to InRiver with the URL /channels?forEntityId=1\&includeChannels=true\&includePublications=true
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access InRiver.
### 3. Publishing Entity to InRiver
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "InRiver Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the InRiver entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP POST method, HTTP PUT method and HTTP DELETE method on submitting data to InRiver.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most InRiver endpoints.
Please refer to [InRiver API Reference](https://apieuw.productmarketingcloud.com/swagger/index.html) page.
For example, we want to delete a link. Please select “DELETE” as the Action and ["Delete Link"](https://apieuw.productmarketingcloud.com/swagger/index.html#/Link/DeleteLink) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "linkId" as a path. That is why we set the "linkId" inside the path key in the Data.
Alumio will send an API request to InRiver with URL /links/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access InRiver.
# Intercom
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/intercom
Connect Alumio to Intercom.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Intercom API Reference](https://developers.intercom.com/intercom-api-reference/reference/welcome)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Intercom
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Intercom
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Intercom
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Intercom
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Intercom HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step
3. Fill in the Base URI and then Choose the Authentication Type.
4. If you choose Oauth, fill in Authorize URL, Access Token URL, Client ID, and Client Secret.
(For more information, see [Intercom Oauth Authentication Reference](https://developers.intercom.com/docs/build-an-integration/learn-more/authentication/#oauth))
Click on "Grant access to Intercom" and you will be redirected to approve the grant.
5. Fill in the Access token if you prefer to choose Access Token as an Authentication Type.
(For more information, see [Intercom Access Token Authentication Reference](https://developers.intercom.com/docs/build-an-integration/learn-more/authentication/#access-tokens))
6. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
7. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Intercom
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration, and select "Intercom Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Intercom.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Intercom HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Intercom.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Intercom documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Intercom API Reference](https://developers.intercom.com/intercom-api-reference/reference/welcome).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Intercom. Please refer to the entities from [Intercom API Reference](https://developers.intercom.com/intercom-api-reference/reference/welcome) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Intercom API Reference](https://developers.intercom.com/intercom-api-reference/reference/welcome) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing ["Tickets - retrieve a ticket."](https://developers.intercom.com/docs/references/rest-api/api.intercom.io/Tickets/getTicket/) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Intercom with the URL /tickets/3
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Intercom.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Intercom
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "Intercom Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Intercom entity in which you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method, and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Intercom.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Intercom endpoints.
Please refer to [Intercom API Reference](https://developers.intercom.com/intercom-api-reference/reference/welcome) page.
For example, we want to add a tag to the ticket. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Tags - Add tag to a ticket"](https://developers.intercom.com/docs/references/rest-api/api.intercom.io/Tickets/attachTagToTicket/) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a path ticket\_id and a request body. That is why we set the ticket\_id inside the path key and the request body inside the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Intercom with URL /tickets/3/tags
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Intercom.
# Intuit Mailchimp
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/intuit-mailchimp
Connect Alumio to Intuit Mailchimp.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Intuit Mailchimp API Reference]
**Intuit Mailchimp**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Intuit Mailchimp
## Steps
* In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Intuit Mailchimp HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Authentication type.
* Oauth2.0
* Fill the `Client ID`, and `Client Secret` (Token URL and Authorize are set on Default).
* Press, Grant access to Intuit Mailchimp and Key will be retrieved.
* Api Key
* Fill in the `Password`
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Intuit Mailchimp
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Intuit Mailchimp Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Intuit Mailchimp .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Intuit Mailchimp HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Intuit Mailchimp documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Intuit Mailchimp API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Intuit Mailchimp. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Intuit Mailchimp API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Intuit Mailchimp . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Intuit Mailchimp API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Intuit Mailchimp API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get campaign content.
The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get campaign content.
/campaigns/abc123/content
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Intuit Mailchimp .
# Publishing Entity to Intuit Mailchimp
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Intuit Mailchimp Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Intuit Mailchimp entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Intuit Mailchimp .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), Put (HTTP PUTmethod), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Intuit Mailchimp endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Intuit Mailchimp API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Campaign. Please select “Post” as the action and “Add campaign” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Intuit Mailchimp into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Intuit Mailchimp with URL /campaigns
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Intuit Mailchimp .
# Ironclad
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/ironclad
Connect Alumio to Ironclad.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Ironclad API Reference](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/getting-started-api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Ironclad
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Ironclad
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Ironclad
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Ironclad
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Ironclad HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Select a server where you want to use Ironclad.
4. Select authentication type you want for the OAuth 2.
5. Fill in the Client ID, Client Secret and Scope.
(See the [Ironclad Authentication Documentation](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/authentication-api))
6. Click on "Grant access to Ironclad" and you will be redirected to approve the grant for Authorization Code Grant. The key will be generated after this process complete.
7. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
Note
* You will need to add special header of `x-as-user-id` or `x-as-user-email` in the Subscriber or Publisher if you choose the Client Credentials Grant. You can do this by adding plugins in Advanced tab in the Subscriber or Publisher.
* The scope of the OAuth need to be defined first when creating Apps inside Ironclad.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Ironclad
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Ironclad Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Ironclad.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Ironclad HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Ironclad.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Ironclad documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Ironclad API Reference](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/getting-started-api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Ironclad. Please refer to the entities from [Ironclad API Reference](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/getting-started-api) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [Ironclad API Reference](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/getting-started-api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve list of comments on a workflow by subscribing ["Workflows - List all Comments on a Workflow"](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/list-all-comments-in-a-workflow) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the id as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
You can also notice that Ironclad requires a specific OAuth scope in for the end points to work, so please add the scope `public.workflows.readComments` to use this end point.
Alumio will then make a request to Ironclad with the URL `/public/api/v1/workflows/67b5efa6ca7ddad515c1e57b/comments`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Ironclad.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Ironclad Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Ironclad entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify body parameters on key "payload" from the data.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Ironclad.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Ironclad endpoints.
Please refer to [Ironclad API Reference](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/getting-started-api) page.
For example, we want to create a comment on a workflow. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Workflows - Create a Comment on a Workflow"](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/create-a-comment-on-a-workflow).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
You can also notice that Ironclad requires a specific OAuth scope in for the end points to work, so please add the scope `public.workflows.createComments` to use this end point.
Alumio will send an API request to Ironclad with URL `/public/api/v1/workflows/67b5efa6ca7ddad515c1e57b/comments`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Ironclad.
# Jumpseller
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/jumpseller
Connect Alumio to Jumpseller.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Jumpseller API Reference](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Jumpseller
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Jumpseller
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Jumpseller
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Jumpseller
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Jumpseller HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI
4. Select the Authentication Type
* Basic Authentication
* Fill in the Login and Auth Token
(See the [Jumpseller Basic Authentication Documentation](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/#section/Authentication/Basic-Authentication) for more information)
* Oauth 2.0 Authentication
* Fill in the Token URL, Authorize URL, App ID, App Secret and Scopes.
* Click on "Grant access to Jumpseller" and you will be redirected to Jumpseller website to get the key for the client.
(See the [Jumpseller Oauth 2.0 Authentication Documentation](https://jumpseller.com/support/oauth-2/)
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Jumpseller
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Jumpseller Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Jumpseller.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Jumpseller HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Jumpseller.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Jumpseller documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Jumpseller API Reference](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Jumpseller. Please refer to the entities from [Jumpseller 1.0.0 API Reference](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Jumpseller API Reference](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve a product by subscribing ["Products - Retrieve a single Product"](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/#tag/Products/paths/~1products~1%7Bid%7D.json/get) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the product id as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Jumpseller with the URL `/products/27170106.json`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Jumpseller.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Jumpseller Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Jumpseller entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Jumpseller.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Jumpseller 1.0.0 endpoints.
Please refer to [Jumpseller API Reference](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/) page.
For example, we want to update a product. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Products - Modify an existing Product"](https://jumpseller.com/support/api/#tag/Products/paths/~1products~1%7Bid%7D.json/put).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Jumpseller with URL `/products/27170106.json`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Jumpseller.
# Katana PIM
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/katana-pim
Connect Alumio to Katana PIM.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Katana PIM Documentation](https://www.help.me.katanapim.com/pages/api-documentation)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Katana PIM
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to Entities from Katana PIM
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General Concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Katana PIM
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client.
Create a new HTTP Client and select Katana PIM HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and API Key.
3. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Katana PIM
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new [incoming configuration](https://forum.alumio.com/t/incoming-in-alumio/174) and select Katana PIM Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Katana PIM.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. Select the Katana PIM HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Katana PIM documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on [Katana PIM Documentation](https://www.help.me.katanapim.com/pages/api-documentation).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Katana PIM. Please refer to the entities in [Katana PIM Documentation](https://www.help.me.katanapim.com/pages/api-documentation).
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Katana PIM Documentation. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
This is an example to get manufacturers with the name Alumio. We provide the same query title as the [Katana PIM Documentation](https://www.help.me.katanapim.com/pages/api-documentation) provided which is “manufacturerFilterModel.name”.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Katana PIM.
# KCS Wholesale
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/kcs-wholesale
Connect Alumio to KCS Wholesale.
Previously known as Unit4 Wholesale, now Kerridge CS Wholesale.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale API Reference](https://www.kerridgecs.nl/page/oplossingen/integratie)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Authentication type and Environment Type.
Then complete the field base on the Authentication Type you choose.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale API Reference](https://www.kerridgecs.nl/page/oplossingen/integratie).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale. Please refer to the entities from [Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale API Reference](https://www.kerridgecs.nl/page/oplossingen/integratie) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale API Reference](https://www.kerridgecs.nl/page/oplossingen/integratie) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Products ID" entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale with the URL /products/100000%2CAACCXW%2CP%2C1
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method) and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale endpoints.
Please refer to [Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale API Reference](https://www.kerridgecs.nl/page/oplossingen/integratie) page.
For example, we want to add a new contact. Please select “Update” as the Method and "Products" as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a path "id" and a request body. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key and the request body inside the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale with URL /products/1
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Kerridge Unit4 Wholesale.
# Klarna
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/klarna
Connect Alumio to Klarna.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Klarna API Reference](https://docs.klarna.com/api/api-urls/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Klarna
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Klarna
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Klarna
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Klarna
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Klarna HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Username and Password.
(For more information, see [Klarna Authentication Reference](https://docs.klarna.com/api/authentication/))
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Klarna
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select either "Klarna - Checkout Subscriber", "Klarna - Disputes Subscriber", "Klarna - Hosted Payment Page Subscriber", "Klarna - Merchant Card Service Subscriber","Klarna - Order Management Subscriber", "Klarna - Payments Subscriber", "Klarna - Settlements Subscriber" or "Klarna - Shipping Service Callback Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Klarna.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Klarna HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Klarna.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Klarna documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Klarna API Reference](https://docs.klarna.com/api/api-urls/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Klarna. Please refer to the entities from [Klarna API Reference](https://docs.klarna.com/api/api-urls/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Klarna API Reference](https://docs.klarna.com/api/api-urls/) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["sessions - Read an existing payment session"](https://docs.klarna.com/api/payments/#operation/readCreditSession) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "session\_id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "session\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Klarna with the URL /payments/v1/sessions/2db0ec9c-8531-5027-abec-85664f281fe7
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Klarna.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Klarna
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select either "Klarna - Checkout Publisher", "Klarna - Disputes Publisher", "Klarna - Hosted Payment Page Publisher", "Klarna - Merchant Card Service Publisher","Klarna - Order Management Publisher", "Klarna - Payments Publisher" or "Klarna - Shipping Service Callback Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Klarna entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Klarna.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Klarna endpoints.
Please refer to [Klarna API Reference](https://docs.klarna.com/api/api-urls/) page.
For example, we want to create a Payment Session. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["sessions - Create a new payment session"](https://docs.klarna.com/api/payments/#operation/createCreditSession) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a request body. That is why we set the request body inside the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Klarna with URL /payments/v1/sessions
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Klarna.
# Klipfolio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/klipfolio
Connect Alumio to Klipfolio.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Klipfolio API Reference](https://apidocs.klipfolio.com/reference/getting-started)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Klipfolio
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Klipfolio
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Klipfolio
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Klipfolio
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Klipfolio HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, and API Key.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Klipfolio
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Klipfolio Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Klipfolio.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Klipfolio HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Klipfolio.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Klipfolio documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Klipfolio API Reference](https://apidocs.klipfolio.com/reference/getting-started).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Klipfolio. Please refer to the entities from [Klipfolio API Reference](https://apidocs.klipfolio.com/reference/getting-started) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Klipfolio API Reference](https://apidocs.klipfolio.com/reference/getting-started).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Groups - Get the details for the specific group"](https://apidocs.klipfolio.com/reference/groups#get-groupsid) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "id" as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Klipfolio with the URL /groups/6c8e67da624da053998c7a907d587a81
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Klipfolio.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Klipfolio
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Klipfolio Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Klipfolio entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Klipfolio.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Klipfolio endpoints.
Please refer to [Klipfolio API Reference](https://apidocs.klipfolio.com/reference/getting-started) page.
For example, we want to delete a group. Please select “Delete” as the Method and ["Groups - Delete a group"](https://apidocs.klipfolio.com/reference/groups#delete-groupsid) as the entity of the publisher.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "id" as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Klipfolio with URL /groups/6c8e67da624da053998c7a907d587a81
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Klipfolio.
# Kogan
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/kogan
Connect Alumio to Kogan.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Kogan**
# Setting up HTTP Client Kogan
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Kogan HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Seller ID, and Seller Token.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Creating Credentials from Kogan
## Steps
1. Start by signing up using the [Kogan.com Marketplace Application Form](https://www.kogan.com/au/kogan-supplier-application-form/).
2. Once you have been approved, your account manager will send you Credentials to access the API.
# Subscribing to Entities from Kogan
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Kogan Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Kogan.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Kogan HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Kogan documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Kogan API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Kogan. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Kogan API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Kogan API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get Order by ID entity
That’s why we need to define the **kogan\_order\_ref** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get Order by Id.
/api/marketplace/v2/orders/AULZ
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Kogan.
# Publishing Entity to Kogan
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Kogan Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Kogan entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Kogan.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), and Patch (HTTP PATCH method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Kogan endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Kogan API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Product. Please select “Post” as the action and “Product Create” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Kogan into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Kogan with URL /api/marketplace/v2/products/
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Kogan.
# Kustomer
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/kustomer
Connect Alumio to Kustomer.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Kustomer API Reference](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/introduction)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Kustomer
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Kustomer
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Kustomer
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Kustomer
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Kustomer HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Bearer Token.
(For more information, see [Kustomer Authentication Reference](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/authentication))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Kustomer
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Kustomer Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Kustomer.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Kustomer.
5. Select the Kustomer HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Kustomer documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Kustomer API Reference](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/introduction).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Kustomer.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Kustomer. Please refer to the entities from [Kustomer API Reference](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/introduction) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Kustomer API Reference](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/introduction).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Get attachments by ID"](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/getattachmentsbyidoutboundonly) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Kustomer with the URL /v1/attachments/123
### 3. Publishing Entity to Kustomer
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Kustomer Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Kustomer entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Kustomer.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Kustomer endpoints.
Please refer to [Kustomer API Reference](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/introduction) page.
For example, we want to use ["Delete Klass"](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/deleteaklass). Please select “Delete” as the Action and ["Delete Klass"](https://developer.kustomer.com/kustomer-api-docs/reference/deleteaklass) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Kustomer with URL /v1/klasses/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Kustomer.
# Lightspeed eCommerce
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/lightspeed-ecommerce
Connect Alumio to Lightspeed eCommerce.
## Extra information
System documentation: [REST API Documentation](https://ecom-support.lightspeedhq.com/hc/en-us/articles/220320568-API-documentation)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Lightspeed E-Commerce
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to Entities from Lightspeed E-Commerce
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General Concept
* **3.** Publishing Entity to Lightspeed E-Commerce
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General Concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Lightspeed Ecommerce
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients → HTTP Clients.
2. Create a new HTTP Client and select Lightspeed E-Commerce HTTP Client as the prototype.
3. Fill in the Base or Cluster URL, API Key, API Secret, and Shop language.
4. Refer to this [article](https://ecom-support.lightspeedhq.com/hc/en-us/articles/1260804034770) to get the API key and API secret.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Lightspeed Ecommerce
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new [incoming configuration](https://forum.alumio.com/t/incoming-in-alumio/174) and select Lightspeed E-Commerce Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe.
3. Select the Lightspeed E-Commerce HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Lightspeed E-Commerce documentation for building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the Lightspeed E-Commerce Reference.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined as a set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to from Lightspeed E-Commerce.
Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Lightspeed E-Commerce API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Lightspeed E-Commerce API Docs.
Follow the instructions below for filling it in to get a Quote with Id **1016615295**.
**Input Transformer**
Any [transformers](https://forum.alumio.com/t/where-to-place-your-entity-transformer-at-a-glance/203) set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can basically add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Lightspeed E-Commerce.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Lightspeed Ecommerce
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new [outgoing configuration](https://forum.alumio.com/t/outgoing-in-alumio/175) and select Lightspeed E-Commerce Publisher as the publisher.
2.Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
2. Select the Lightspeed E-Commerce entity you want the data to be published towards.
3. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it.
The difference is the payload. The payload used by a publisher originates from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE Method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Lightspeed E-Commerce endpoints. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Lightspeed E-Commerce.
# Lightspeed Retail
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/lightspeed-retail
Connect Alumio to Lightspeed Retail.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://developers.lightspeedhq.com/retail/introduction/introduction/](https://developers.lightspeedhq.com/retail/introduction/introduction/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up the Lightspeed HTTP Client
* **1.1** Interactive Authentication
* **1.2** Bearer Token Authentication
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Lightspeed
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entities to Lightspeed
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the Lightspeed HTTP Client
**1.1 Interactive Authentication**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Lightspeed Retail Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL, App Token, and Staff Token according to your Lightspeed Retail account, you can enable logging with the following options: Long, Full, Simple, and Custom.
3. After all fields are filled, the last step of the Interactive Authentication type is "Grant Access to Lightspeed". It will redirect you to the Lightspeed page and authorize the application by signing in using your credentials.
4. Save the HTTP Client.
Notes:
* Client ID and Client secret are provided by Lightspeed Retail, you can register your account and get them here: [https://cloud.lightspeedapp.com/oauth/register.php](https://cloud.lightspeedapp.com/oauth/register.php)
* Token URL: [https://cloud.lightspeedapp.com/oauth/access\_token.php](https://cloud.lightspeedapp.com/oauth/access_token.php)
* Authorize URL: [https://cloud.lightspeedapp.com/oauth/authorize.php](https://cloud.lightspeedapp.com/oauth/authorize.php)
* Scopes: employee: all
**1.2 Bearer Token Authentication**
1. We can also select another method of authentication using Bearer Token.
2. Fill in the Base URL, App Token, and Staff Token according to your Lightspeed Retail account, you can also enable logging with the following options: Long, Full, Simple and Custom.
3. Save the HTTP Client.
Note: Please ignore the "Grant Access to Lightspeed" button for this authentication.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Lightspeed
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select the LightSpeed Retail Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from LightSpeed Retail.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity. Please refer to an example in the General Concept section.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something of your choice.
5. Select the Lightspeed Retail HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow the fetching of paginated entities. In the case of LightSpeed Retail, you should use the "Increase query parameter" as the pagination type (only available for some entities).
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Lightspeed Retail documentation for building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the Lightspeed Retail API Reference.
**Account ID**
You can easily retrieve the needed entity from the base URL of the Lightspeed Retail API reference by providing the parameters listed. Once logged in to Lightspeed, obtaining an Account ID is a simple process.
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to from Lightspeed Retail. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Lightspeed Retail API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Lightspeed Retail API reference.
Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to the "Get All Categories" entity. We can see in the documentation that setting entity by ID requires ID as a path parameter to define which order we want to fetch the details from.
Besides ID in path parameters, the documentation also has endpoints that use query parameters. For example, "Limit" Query parameters describe that query parameters: limit is required and should be defined in the query parameters. So, we need to define it inside the query property in the Request Parameters field. In this example, the limit will be parsed as query parameters. Here is how we should fill the Request Parameters field.
Example Request Parameter:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Lightspeed Retail.
### 3. Publishing Entities to Lightspeed
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Lightspeed Retail Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Lightspeed Retail endpoint where you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originates from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configurations), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support POST methods for submitting data to Lightspeed Retail.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Lightspeed Retail endpoints. Please refer to the Lightspeed Retail API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to Post - Create a category.
The documentation says that we need "acountID" as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide the "accountID" property into the "path" property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. You can also add the payload that you want to send to Lightspeed Retail into the payload key in the data. Here is an example of the required data.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Lightspeed Retail with URL /API/v3/Account/12345/Category.json
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Lightspeed Retail.
# LimeCRM
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/limecrm
Connect Alumio to LimeCRM.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Lime CRM API Reference](https://docs.lime-crm.com/integration/rest-apis/start)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Lime CRM
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Lime CRM
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Lime CRM
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the HTTP Client Lime CRM
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Lime CRM Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and X API Key.
(For more information, see [Lime CRM Authentication Reference](https://docs.lime-crm.com/integration/rest-apis/start#authentication))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Lime CRM
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select the Lime CRM Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Lime CRM HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Lime CRM.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. (Optional) Add a transformer to modify the request parameters into something you will request from Lime CRM.
6. (Optional) Enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Lime CRM documentation for building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the [Lime CRM API Reference](https://docs.lime-crm.com/integration/rest-apis/start).
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Lime CRM.
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to Lime CRM. Please refer to the entities from the [Lime CRM API Reference](https://docs.lime-crm.com/integration/rest-apis/start) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Lime CRM API Reference](https://docs.lime-crm.com/integration/rest-apis/start).
Follow the example below to fill the path field when subscribing to "Retrieve a company" entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Lime CRM with the URL /company/123
### 3. Publishing Entity to Lime CRM
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Lime CRM Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Lime CRM entity you want the data to be published to.
4. (Optional) Add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. (Optional) Add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. (Optional) Add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Lime CRM.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Lime CRM endpoints.
Please refer to the [Lime CRM API Reference](https://docs.lime-crm.com/integration/rest-apis/start) page.
For example, we want to update a person. Please select “Update” as the Action and “Update an existing person” as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "id" as a path. This is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the data. Based on the documentation as well, it requires a "Request Body". That is why we set the "Request Body" inside the payload key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will send an API request to Lime CRM with URL /person/1
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Lime CRM.
# Magento 1
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/magento-1
Connect Alumio to Magento 1.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://devdocs-openmage.org/guides/m1x/api/rest/introduction.html](https://devdocs-openmage.org/guides/m1x/api/rest/introduction.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Magento 1
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Magento 1
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Magento 1
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Magento 1
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select the Magento 1 Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL and API key.
3. You can optionally enable the logging of the request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Click on "Grant access to Magento 1" to get the Key.
5. Save the HTTP Client after the key has been provided.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Magento 1
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration and select the Magento 1 Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Magento 1.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Magento 1 HTTP Client to use.
6. You could also enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Magento 1 API documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the official Magento 1 API Reference.
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to from Magento 1. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Magento 1 API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the additional parameters you can provide with the API request, to get the needed entities based on the Magento 1 API reference.
Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to Get Customer by customer\_id entity. We can see in the documentation that there are some parameter values in path URL such as customer\_id.
We only set values below on the request parameter below.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
We structured the path to include the customer\_Id. This will be sent to Magento 1 as /customers/1
Note: we convert all paths to snake\_case for uniformity.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. You can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Magento 1.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Magento 1
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Magento 1 Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Choose the Magento 1 entity to which you would like to publish the data.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is, the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originates from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configurations), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support POST, PUT, and DELETE methods for submitting data to Magento 1.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Magento 1 endpoints. Please refer to the Magento 1 API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, using the Create Customer endpoint.
You can put the payload you want to send to Magento 1 into the payload property in the data.
Here's an example of a payload in the publisher:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Magento 1 with URL /customers
**HTTP Client**
This refers to the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Magento 1.
# Connection guide
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/magento-2/connection-guide
Guide: connect Alumio to Magento 2 using bearer-token or request authentication.
### **Table Of Contents**
* Introduction
* Step 1: Create an HTTP Client
* Step 1a: Setting the basics
* Step 1b.1: Setting up authentication: Bearer token authentication
* Step 1b.2: Setting up authentication: Request authentication
* Step 2: Interacting with the HTTP client
* Step 2a: Creating an incoming configuration
* Step 2b: Creating an outgoing configuration
### **Introduction**
Magento 2 is an e-commerce software solution that is used to sell products for both B2C and B2B customers all around the world.
When connecting with the Magento 2 API you are required to provide some form of authentication. This can either be:
* (static) API key authentication
* (dynamic) token-based authentication
Alumio offers you the ability to provide these authentications to a web service when making requests, this is done through *HTTP Authentications*.
For this guide, we will explain to you how to connect Alumio to Magento 2.
### **Step 1: Create an HTTP Client**
This section will explain how to set up an *HTTP Client* that can be used to consume one or more endpoints of Magento 2.
#### **Step 1a: Setting the basics**
To understand how to create an HTTP client you may follow the steps outlined within the following article: [Connecting to a REST API](https://forum.alumio.com/t/connecting-to-a-rest-api/216).
You will at least need the following three plugins:
* **Add base URI to requests**
* **Log requests**
* Formatter: *Long*
* **Add content-type headers to requests**
Other plugins may be added as you see fit.
#### **Step 1b.1: Setting up authentication: Bearer token authentication**
The most simple way to authenticate to Magento 2 is through a bearer token, as this contains a static API token that only has to be set up once.
To achieve this way of authentication you need to follow these steps:
* Within Magento 2, navigate to *System -> Extensions -> Integrations*
* Click on the upper-right orange button: *Add New Integration*
* Start by filling out the *name* for the integration, i.e. *Alumio*, and *password*
* Go to the API tab and assign all relevant APIs
* Hit *save*
* Go back to the *Integrations* overview page hit *Activate*
* On the pop-up press *Allow*
* You will now be given 4 tokens. Take note of the *Access token* and hit *Done*
*
*
* Within the HTTP client, hit *Add new HTTP Authentication*
* Select *Bearer token authentication*
* Paste the *Access token* within the *Token* field within Alumio
* Alternatively, you may set up a separate *HTTP Authentication* configuration to hold this information and use the reference here.
#### **Step 1b.2: Setting up authentication: Request authentication**
In case you do not want to work with a static API token, you may opt to go with the token-based authentication functionality offered by Magento 2. This requires you to first fire a request using user credentials which will return an access token that can be used in subsequent requests. Currently, the *Request authentication* method does not cache the token generated, so it is regenerated every time an API call is being done through the HTTP client.
* Within the HTTP client, hit *Add new HTTP Authentication*
* Select Request *authentication*
* The *Request URI* field should contain the URL to the authentication endpoint
* The *Request Method* needs to be *post* for Magento 2
* The *Request Parameters* should be a *object* and contain the *username* and *password* of the user you want to use to authenticate.
* *HTTP Client* should be *Default client*
* A seperate *HTTP Client* may be needed when there is additional authentication required for the authentication endpoint configured within the *Request URI*
* The *Header* name we want to add to subsequent requests is *Authorization*
* The *Source* should be from the *Request body* as Magento 2 returns the generated authentication token within the body of the response
* The *Template* determines what value the header will be populated with. In our case this should be *Bearer &\{@\[0]}*.
* *Bearer -* This part is static as it determines we want to authorize ourselves using a Bearer token (similarly to the bearer token authentication, but this uses a dynamic token opposed to a static one).
* *&\{@\[0]} -* The *&\{}* part indicates a placeholder, or a variable, and indicates to Alumio we want to take data of the response of the authentication call. *@* indicates we want to take the entire response. Magento 2 returns a string that contains the token. Alumio interprets this as an array so we use *\[0]* to select this first and only item.
### **Step 2: Interacting with the HTTP client**
Now that you have set up the HTTP client, you can interact with it through an incoming or outgoing configuration. Incoming configurations allow you to read data from Magento 2, while an outgoing configuration will enable you to send data to a Magento 2.
#### **Step 2a: Creating an incoming configuration**
[Click here to review the general guide on incoming configurations in order to get familiar with their purpose.](https://forum.alumio.com/t/outgoing-in-alumio/175)
Using the HTTP subscriber: [Connecting to a REST API](https://forum.alumio.com/t/connecting-to-a-rest-api/216)
#### **Step 2b: Creating an outgoing configuration**
[Click here to review the general guide on outgoing configurations in order to get familiar with their purpose.](https://forum.alumio.com/t/outgoing-in-alumio/175)
Using the (Chain) HTTP publisher: [Connecting to a REST API](https://forum.alumio.com/t/connecting-to-a-rest-api/216)
# Connector reference
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/magento-2/reference
Connect Alumio to Magento 2 (Adobe Commerce): HTTP client, subscriber, and publisher.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Magento 2 API Reference](https://developer.adobe.com/commerce/webapi/rest/quick-reference/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Adobe Commerce (Magento 2)
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Adobe Commerce (Magento 2)
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Adobe Commerce (Magento 2)
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the HTTP Client Adobe Commerce (Magento 2)
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Adobe Commerce (Magento 2) Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL
3. Choose the authentication type. Currently, Alumio supports Request Authentication and Bearer Authentication for authentication type.
(For more information, see [Magento 2 Get Started](https://developer.adobe.com/commerce/webapi/get-started/))
4. Fill in the required fields based on the authentication type chosen.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Adobe Commerce (Magento 2)
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Adobe Commerce (Magento 2) Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Magento 2.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Magento 2.
5. Select the Magento 2 HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Magento 2 documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Magento 2 API Reference](https://developer.adobe.com/commerce/webapi/rest/quick-reference/).
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to Magento 2. Please refer to the entities from [Magento 2 API Reference](https://developer.adobe.com/commerce/webapi/rest/quick-reference/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Magento 2 API Reference](https://developer.adobe.com/commerce/webapi/rest/quick-reference/).
Refer to the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing "Product" entity:
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "sku" as a path. That is why we set the "sku" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Magento 2 with the URL /pub/rest/default/v1/products/12345
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Adobe Commerce (Magento 2).
### 3. Publishing Entity to Adobe Commerce (Magento 2)
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Adobe Commerce (Magento 2) Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Magento 2 entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Magento 2.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Magento 2 endpoints.
Please refer to [Magento 2 API Reference](https://developer.adobe.com/commerce/webapi/rest/quick-reference/) page.
For example, we want to delete a product. Please select “Delete” as the Action and “Product” as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "sku" as a path. That is why we set the "sku" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Magento 2 with URL /pub/rest/default/v1/products/12345.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Adobe Commerce (Magento 2).
# ManageEngine
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/manageengine
Connect Alumio to ManageEngine.
## Extra information
System documentation: [ManageEngine API Reference](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client ManageEngine
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from ManageEngine
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to ManageEngine
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client ManageEngine
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select ManageEngine HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Token URL, Authorize URL, Client ID, Client Secret and Scopes.
(See the [ManageEngine Authentication Documentation](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/getting-started/oauth-2.0.html) for more information)
4. Click on "Grant access to ManageEngine" and you will be redirected to ManageEngine page to get the key for the client.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from ManageEngine
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "ManageEngine Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from ManageEngine.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the ManageEngine HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from ManageEngine.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow ManageEngine documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [ManageEngine API Reference](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to ManageEngine. Please refer to the entities from [ManageEngine API Reference](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [ManageEngine API Reference](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve a product by subscribing ["Admin - Get Product"](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/admin/product.html#get-product) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the product id as parameters. That is why we set the "product\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to ManageEngine with the URL `api/v3/products/218291000000292605`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ManageEngine.
### 3. Publishing Entity to ManageEngine
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "ManageEngine Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the ManageEngine entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to ManageEngine.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most ManageEngine endpoints.
Please refer to [ManageEngine API Reference](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/) page.
For example, we want to edit a product. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Admin - Edit Product"](https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk/sdpod-v3-api/admin/product.html#edit-product).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameters. That is why we set the "product\_id" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
ManageEngine require us to send the payload in serialized JSON please refer to [https://forum.alumio.com/t/how-to-use-value-mapper/290](https://forum.alumio.com/t/how-to-use-value-mapper/290) for more information about serializing a JSON.
Please be aware to set "Advanced" -> "Request Encoder" at "Form URL encoded" when sending payload to ManageEngine.
Alumio will send an API request to ManageEngine with URL `api/v3/products/218291000000292605`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ManageEngine.
# Marello
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/marello
Connect Alumio to Marello.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client Marello
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Marello HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Authentication Type, Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes (Optional).
3. Press “Grant access to Marello CRM”.
4. Save when the Key is already provided.
# Subscribing to Entities from Marello
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Marello Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Marello.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Marello HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Marello documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Marello API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Marello. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Marello API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Marello API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define **id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve a specific country record entity.
/api/countries/AD
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Marello.
# Publishing Entity to Marello
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Marello Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Marello entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), PATCH (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Marello endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Marello API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new customer record. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create a new customer record” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Marello into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Marello with URL
/api/marellocustomers
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Marello.
# Marketo
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/marketo
Connect Alumio to Marketo.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://developers.marketo.com/rest-api/endpoint-reference/](https://developers.marketo.com/rest-api/endpoint-reference/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up the Marketo HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Marketo
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Marketo
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the Marketo HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select the Marketo HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Account ID, Client ID, and Client Secret.
3. Press “Grant Access to Marketo”.
4. The Key will show up and you can save the Client for further use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Marketo
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select the Marketo Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Marketo.
3. (Optional) Add any specific request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into anything you need if necessary.
5. Select the Marketo HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Marketo documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the Marketo API Reference.
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to from Marketo. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Marketo API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entities based on the Marketo API Reference documents. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters when subscribing to "Get Static List by id".
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
To understand Marketo's definition of the endpoint, we can consult their documentation.
Alumio will send an API request to Marketo with the URL /rest/asset/v1/staticList/1009.json
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. This means that you can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Marketo.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Marketo
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select the Marketo Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Marketo entity where you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can add transformers to manipulate the data into anything you need before submitting it to Marketo.
6. Select the Marketo HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in the outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Entity Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post and Delete Methods.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Marketo endpoints, but not with publishing Bulk End Points for now. Please refer to the entities from the Marketo API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
You can put the query id you want to send to Marketo into a payload key in the data, as follows:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Marketo to add the Lead id 22490 into a listId 1575.
The request to Marketo will be sent with URL /rest/v1/lists/1575/leads.json?id= 22490
**HTTP Client**
This the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Marketo.
# MFTGateway
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/mftgateway
Connect Alumio to MFTGateway.
## Extra information
System documentation: [MFT Gateway API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client MFT Gateway
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from MFT Gateway
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to MFT Gateway
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client MFT Gateway
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select MFTGateway Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL, Username, and Password.
(For more information, see [MFT Gateway API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66))
3. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from MFT Gateway
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select MFTGateway Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the MFT Gateway HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from MFT Gateway.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from MFT Gateway.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow MFT Gateway documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [MFT Gateway API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access MFT Gateway.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to MFT Gateway. Please refer to the entities from [MFT Gateway API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [MFT Gateway API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing ["Retrieve Inbox (Received) Message"](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66#e404292b-1361-49b5-935e-cb8647f2ac51) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires an "identifier" as a path. That is why we set the "identifier" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to MFT Gateway with the URL /message/inbox/%3C15947211062750%40mftgateway.com%3E
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
### 3. Publishing Entity to MFT Gateway
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select MFTGateway Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the MFT Gateway entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the POST method, PUT method, and DELETE method in submitting data to MFT Gateway.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most MFT Gateway endpoints.
Please refer to [MFT Gateway API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66) page.
For example, we want to use [“Create Station”](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66#14438dad-244b-4154-8845-aa726515e5ac) entity. Please select “POST” as the Method and [“Create Station”](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/12285357/UV5WEe66#14438dad-244b-4154-8845-aa726515e5ac) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint doesn't require a path but need a "Request Body". That is why we set the "Request Body" inside the payload key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will send an API request to MFT Gateway with URL /station
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access MFT Gateway.
# Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/microsoft-dynamics-365-crm
Connect Alumio to Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/customerengagement/on-premises/developer/use-microsoft-dynamics-365-web-api?view=op-9-1)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM
**1.1 Steps**
1. Please refer to this page to register Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Operations to Azure Active Directory. Follow the guide and save the tenant ID, client ID, and client secret of the app registration.
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
3. Select Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step
4. Fill in the Base URI, Tenant ID, Client ID, and Client Secret of your Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM instance and app credentials.
5. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting an HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field
6. Click the Grant access to Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM button to get the access token.
7. You can optionally change how Alumio logs every HTTP request made by the HTTP client
8. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. Select the Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM HTTP Client to use
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow OData Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM API documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on [Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/customerengagement/on-premises/developer/use-microsoft-dynamics-365-web-api?view=op-9-1).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to do (fetching data from Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM). Please refer to the [Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/customerengagement/on-premises/developer/use-microsoft-dynamics-365-web-api?view=op-9-1) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Microsoft D365 CRM API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Accounts
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM entity to which the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support POST and PUT methods.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Microsoft D365 CRM endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Microsoft D365 CRM API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Update an Account. Please select “Update” as a method and “Account” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Microsoft D365 CRM into the payload property in the data. In order to update the account, you can fill the payload with the account data.
**Action**
Currently, we support Method POST as the API only needs this method to Create or Update the data.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype that you will use to access Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM.
# Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Mgmt
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/microsoft-dynamics-365-finance-supply-chain-mgmt
Connect Alumio to Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Mgmt.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/services-home-page)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management
**1.1 Steps**
1. Please refer to this page to register Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Operations to Azure Active Directory. Follow the guide and save the tenant ID, client ID, and client secret of the app registration.
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
3. Select Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
4. Fill in the Base URI, Tenant ID, Client ID, and Client Secret of your Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM instance and app credentials.
5. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting an HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field.
6. Click the Grant access to Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM button to get the access token.
7. You can optionally change how Alumio logs every HTTP request made by the HTTP client
8. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin API documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on [Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/services-home-page).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to do (fetching data from Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin). Please refer to the [Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/services-home-page) page.
**Request Parameters**
It’s the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Alumio - Microsoft Dynamics F\&SCM - API Plugin Documentation. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to a Sales Order entity.
It means that we want to subscribe to a Sales Order entity with ID 000783. We can see in the documentation that the Sales Order entity requires the salesOrder property as a payload parameter to define which object we want to fetch the data from.
That’s why we need to define the salesOrder property inside the payload property in the Request Parameters field.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access the Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin.
**Follow Pagination**
We can only use pagination for Delivery Information Overview and Delivery Information Detail entities. The entities use OData and
### 3. Publishing Entity to Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Supply Chain Management
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin entity to which the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
We support publishing to most Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin endpoints. Please refer to Alumio - Microsoft Dynamics F\&SCM - API Plugin Documentation page.
Please look at the example below. For example, we want to create a sales order. Please select Create sales order as the action of the publisher.
The documentation describes that we need salesOrder property as a request body. In that case, you need to provide the salesOrder property into the payload property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in the Outgoing Configuration. Here is an example of the required data.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access the Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin.
# Microsoft Dynamics 365 F&O
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/microsoft-dynamics-365-fo
Connect Alumio to Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Operations.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/odata)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O
**1.1 Steps**
1. Please refer to this page to register Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Operations to Azure Active Directory. Follow the guide and save the tenant ID, client ID, and client secret of the app registration.
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
3. Select Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step
4. Fill in the Base URI, Tenant ID, Client ID, and Client Secret of your Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O instance and app credentials.
5. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting an HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field
6. Click the Grant access to Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O button to get the access token.
7. You can optionally change how Alumio logs every HTTP request made by the HTTP client
8. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. Select the Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O HTTP Client to use
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow OData Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O API documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on [Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/odata).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to do (fetching data from Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O). Please refer to the [Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/odata) page.
**OData Request Parameters**
It’s the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on [Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/odata) Documentation. For example, if we want to subscribe to Product Ratings with endpoint /data/ProductRatings with data using ID = 123 and Name = ‘Lorem’, we simply add this Json at the Request parameter area.
It will transform to /data/ProductRatings(ID=123,Name=’Lorem’)
That’s why we need to define the ProductRatings property inside the payload property in the Request Parameters field.
Alumio will then make a request to Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O entity to which the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support POST and PUT methods.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities from the Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
**Action**
We support publishing to most Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O endpoints. Please refer to [Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/fin-ops-core/dev-itpro/data-entities/odata) Documentation page.
Please look at the example below.
For example, we want to update a sales order line. Please select the PATCH method, then the sales order line as the entity action of the publisher.
The documentation describes that we need SalesOrderLine property as a request body. In that case, you must provide the SalesOrderLine property into the payload property in the data, either as an output from Routes or from Transformers in the Outgoing Configuration. Here is an example of the required data.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype that you will use to access Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O.
# Microsoft Dynamics 365 NAV/Business
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/microsoft-dynamics-365-nav-business
Connect Alumio to Microsoft Dynamics 365 NAV/Business.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/api-reference/v2.0/](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/api-reference/v2.0/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client D365 Business Central
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from D365 Business Central
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to D365 Business Central
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client D365 Business Central
**1.1 Steps**
1. Before we begin please enable the APIs for Dynamics 365 Business Central base on this guide [https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/api-reference/v2.0/enabling-apis-for-dynamics-nav](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/api-reference/v2.0/enabling-apis-for-dynamics-nav).
2. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select D365 Business Central HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
3. Fill in the Base URL,Tenant ID, Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Press "Grant access to Microsoft D365 Business Central".
6. The Key will show up and you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from D365 Business Central
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "D365 Business Central" Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the module you want to subscribe from D365 Business Central.
3. Fill in the "Company ID" you want to use on the request.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
6. Select the D365 Business Central HTTP Client to use
7. You can add a pagination feature to allow Alumio to fetch a paginated entity.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow D365 Business Central documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on D365 Business Central API Reference.
**Module**
It’s the list of end points you can subscribe from D365 Business Central. Please refer the end points from [https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/api-reference/v2.0/dynamics-open-api](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/api-reference/v2.0/dynamics-open-api).
**Company ID**
It's the Company ID in D365 Business Central that you want to request to.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on D365 Business Central API Reference.
Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing "Details of employee".
The end point in D365 is using oData input, so for the end point /employees(\{\{employee\_id}}) we need to provide the ID inside the odata key as an array.
Alumio will transform it into /employees(555)
Another example is when we want to filter a certain phone number from the end point of "Returns a list of employees".
We can add the filter at the query like
* Odata is the odata data of the url. For example the (id).
* Query is defined set of data attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
D365 Business Central will filter with the field phoneNumber equal 4567.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed before the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Business Central.
### 3. Publishing entity to D365 Business Central
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "D365 Business Central" Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the "D365 Business Central" entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to D365 Business Central.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most D365 Business Central endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from D365 Business Central API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more odata parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to use “Create customerReturnReasons”.
You will need to make sure there is a payload key inside the data like
Another example, when we need to use “Update vendorPaymentJournals”.
We need to add the ID inside the key odata as an array and make the update data inside the payload key like
* Odata is the odata data of the url. For example the (id).
* Query is defined set of data attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**Company ID**
It's the Company ID in D365 Business Central that you want to process.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access D365 Business Central.
# Microsoft Power BI
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/microsoft-power-bi
Connect Alumio to Microsoft Power BI.
## Extra information
System documentation: [PowerBI API Reference](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client PowerBI
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from PowerBI
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to PowerBI
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client PowerBI
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select PowerBI Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Tenant ID, Client ID and Client secret according to your PowerBI account.
(For more information, see [PowerBI API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/)
3. Click “Grant Access to PowerBI”.
4. Fill in your credential in the newly opened tab then proceed.
5. The key will show up when you get back into Alumio Dashboard.
6. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
7. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from PowerBI
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select PowerBI Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from PowerBI.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from PowerBI.
5. Select the PowerBI HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow PowerBI documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on [PowerBI API Reference](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to PowerBI. Please refer to the entities from [PowerBI API Reference](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [PowerBI API Reference](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing [Get App By Id](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/apps/get-app) entity. We can see in the documentation that setting by Id entity requires "appId" as a path parameter to define which order we want to fetch the details from.
We set the "appId" by providing it inside the path key in the Request Parameters
Besides "appId" in path parameters, the endpoints can use query parameters. For example, [Group - Get Groups](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/groups/get-groups) It describes that query parameters: columns are required should be defined in the query parameters. So, we need to define it inside the query key in the Request Parameters field. The data inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters.
In Alumio we do it as follows
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access PowerBI.
### 3. Publishing Entity to PowerBI
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select PowerBI Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the PowerBI entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support Post, Patch, Put and Delete methods on submitting data to PowerBI.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most PowerBI endpoints.
Please refer to [PowerBI API Reference](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/) page.
Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to [Group - Get Group Users](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/power-bi/groups/get-group-users).
The documentation says that we need "groupId" as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide "groupId" data into the path key in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. And you can put the payload you want to send to PowerBI into the payload key in the data. Here is an example of the required data
Alumio will send an API request to PowerBI as /myorg/groups/example01/users
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access PowerBI.
# Microsoft Teams
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/microsoft-teams
Connect Alumio to Microsoft Teams.
## Extra information
System documentation: [\[Microsoft Teams API Reference\]](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/graph/use-postman)
# Setting up HTTP Client Microsoft Teams
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Microsoft Teams HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Tenant ID, Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Microsoft Teams
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Microsoft Teams Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Microsoft Teams.
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Microsoft Teams HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Microsoft Teams documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Microsoft Teams API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Microsoft Teams. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Microsoft Teams API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Microsoft Teams API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get list Items entity.
That’s why we need to define the **ListId** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get list Items.
/sites/root/lists/1sa2/items
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Microsoft Teams.
# Publishing Entity to Microsoft Teams
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Microsoft Teams Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Microsoft Teams entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Microsoft Teams.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Microsoft Teams endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Microsoft Teams API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Calendar. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create calendar” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Microsoft Teams into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Microsoft Teams with URL /me/calendars
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Microsoft Teams.
# Mirakl
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/mirakl
Connect Alumio to Mirakl.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Mirakl**
# Setting up HTTP Client Mirakl
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Mirakl HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and API Key.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Mirakl
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Mirakl Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Mirakl.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Mirakl HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Mirakl documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Mirakl API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Mirakl. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Mirakl API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Mirakl API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Retrieve a thread entity.
That’s why we need to define the **thread\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve a thread.
/api/inbox/threads/123bact
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Mirakl.
# Publishing Entity to Mirakl
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Mirakl Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Mirakl entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Mirakl.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Mirakl endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Mirakl API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create offer. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create, update, or delete offers” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Mirakl into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Mirakl with URL /api/offers
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Mirakl.
# MistralAI
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/mistralai
Connect Alumio to MistralAI.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Mistral AI API Reference]
# Setting up HTTP Client Mistral AI
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Mistral AI HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Api Key.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Mistral AI
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Mistral AI Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Mistral AI .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Mistral AI HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Mistral AI documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Mistral AI API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Mistral AI. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Mistral AI API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Mistral AI . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Mistral AI API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Mistral AI API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Retrieve Model.
That’s why we need to define the **model\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve a model.
/v1/models/open-mistral-7b
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Mistral AI .
# Publishing Entity to Mistral AI
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Mistral AI Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Mistral AI entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Mistral AI .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Mistral AI endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Mistral AI API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Delete a Model. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Delete Model” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Mistral AI into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Mistral AI with URL /v1/models/\{model\_id\_input}
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Mistral AI .
# Mollie
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/mollie
Connect Alumio to Mollie.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Mollie API Reference]
**Mollie**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Mollie
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Mollie HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Authentication Type.
* Api keys / Access tokens : Fill in the Organization access tokens / API keys.
* Oauth2.0 : fill in the Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Mollie
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Mollie Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Mollie .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Mollie HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Mollie documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Mollie API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Mollie. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Mollie API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Mollie . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Mollie API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Mollie API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get payment.
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get payment.
/v2/Payments/13Alumio2asd
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Mollie .
# Publishing Entity to Mollie
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Mollie Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Mollie entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Mollie .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Mollie endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Mollie API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Payment. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create payment” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Mollie into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Mollie with URL /v2/payments
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Mollie .
# Monday.com
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/monday-com
Connect Alumio to Monday.com.
## Extra information
System documentation:
**Monday.com**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Monday.com
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Monday.com HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI (Recommended : [https://api.monday.com/v2](https://api.monday.com/v2)).
3. Choose the Authentication Type
* Api Key > Fill the Api Key and Api Version (Optional)
* Oauth2 > Fill the Client ID and Secret > Press “Grant access to Monday.com” > Authorize
4. Save and Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from Monday.com
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Monday.com - GraphQL Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the HTTP Method you want to subscribe to from Monday.com (Recommended POST).
3. Add any Query Variable and Request Headers in the request parameter that you needed to subscribe to the Monday.com.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Monday.com Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Monday.com documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Monday.com API Reference.
**Request Method**
It’s the HTTP Method that you want to use, we recommend using post as default method.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Monday.com GraphQL API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Account.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Monday.com GraphQL.
# Publishing Entity to Monday.com
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Monday.com Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Request URI you want the data to be published.
3. Select the Request Method that you want the publisher to do with the data.
4. Add any request data in the request parameter that you needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Monday.com GraphQL endpoints.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Query User Account
You can put the payload you want to send to Monday.com GraphQL into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Monday.com GraphQL.
# MontaWMS
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/montawms
Connect Alumio to MontaWMS.
## Extra information
System documentation: [MontaWMS API Reference](https://api-v6.monta.nl/swagger/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client MontaWMS
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from MontaWMS
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to MontaWMS
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client MontaWMS
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select MontaWMS HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Username and Password.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from MontaWMS
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "MontaWMS Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from MontaWMS.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the MontaWMS HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from MontaWMS.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow MontaWMS documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [MontaWMS API Reference](https://api-v6.monta.nl/swagger/index.html).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to MontaWMS. Please refer to the entities from [MontaWMS API Reference](https://api-v6.monta.nl/swagger/index.html) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [MontaWMS API Reference](https://api-v6.monta.nl/swagger/index.html).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve an order by subscribing "Order - Fetches order information for given order ID" entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set order id as parameters. That is why we set the "webshoporderid" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to MontaWMS with the URL /order/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access MontaWMS.
### 3. Publishing Entity to MontaWMS
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "MontaWMS Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the MontaWMS entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to MontaWMS.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most MontaWMS endpoints.
Please refer to [MontaWMS API Reference](https://api-v6.monta.nl/swagger/index.html) page.
For example, we want to delete an order. Please select “Delete” as the Method and "Order - Delete eorder".
From the end point, we can see that we need to set order id as parameters. That is why we set the "webshoporderid" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to MontaWMS with URL /order/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access MontaWMS.
# MyDeal
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/mydeal
Connect Alumio to MyDeal.
## Extra information
System documentation: [MyDeal Universal API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/5616750/TVzPkdQs#0a7bf212-24eb-471f-ae30-ca9916031d8e)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client MyDeal Universal
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from MyDeal Universal
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to MyDeal Universal
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client MyDeal Universal
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select MyDeal Universal HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Seller ID, Seller Token, Client ID and Client Secret.
4. Click on "Grant access to MyDeal Universal" and key will be generated.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from MyDeal Universal
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "MyDeal Universal Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from MyDeal Universal.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the MyDeal Universal HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from MyDeal Universal.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow MyDeal Universal documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [MyDeal Universal API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/5616750/TVzPkdQs#0a7bf212-24eb-471f-ae30-ca9916031d8e).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to MyDeal Universal. Please refer to the entities from [MyDeal Universal API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/5616750/TVzPkdQs#0a7bf212-24eb-471f-ae30-ca9916031d8e) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [MyDeal Universal API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/5616750/TVzPkdQs#0a7bf212-24eb-471f-ae30-ca9916031d8e) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Retrieve Single Order" entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "id" as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to MyDeal Universal with the URL /orders/136539120
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access MyDeal Universal.
### 3. Publishing Entity to MyDeal Universal
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "MyDeal Universal Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the MyDeal Universal entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method on submitting data to MyDeal Universal.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most MyDeal Universal endpoints.
Please refer to [MyDeal Universal API Reference](https://documenter.getpostman.com/view/5616750/TVzPkdQs#0a7bf212-24eb-471f-ae30-ca9916031d8e) page.
For example, we want to Cancel Order. Please select “Post” as the Method and "Cancel Order" as the entity of the publisher.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "id" as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the data.
Based on the documentation, it requires a request body. That is why we set the request body in the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to MyDeal Universal with URL /orders/136539120/cancel
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access MyDeal Universal.
# OAuth 2.0 setup
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/netsuite/oauth2-setup
Set up OAuth 2.0 client credentials (M2M) authentication for Oracle NetSuite.
### Table of Contents
* Purposes
* Introduction
* Generating Key Pairs
* Creating an Integration Record in the NetSuite Dashboard
* Creating a Client Credentials (M2M) Setup in the NetSuite Dashboard
* Setting Up the HTTP Authentication in the Alumio Dashboard
* What to Do When the Current Pair of Certificates is Expiring
## Purposes
This article explains how to connect Alumio to NetSuite using Client Credentials Flow.
## Introduction
Oracle NetSuite provides a few authentication options to access its API. One of them is the Client Credentials Flow. The flow allows you to get the OAuth2.0 access token without interacting with the NetSuite authorization page. That is why the flow is labeled Machine to Machine.
## Supported Algorithms
NetSuite OAuth 2.0 supports the following JWT signing algorithms:
* **RSA-PSS (Probabilistic Signature Scheme)**
* PS256
* PS384
* PS512
* **EC (Elliptic Curve)**
* ES256
* ES384
* ES512
## Generating Key Pairs
### RSA-PSS Key Generation
To generate an RSA-PSS key pair with the PS256 algorithm.
```
openssl req -new -x509 -newkey rsa:4096 -keyout private.pem -sigopt rsa_padding_mode:pss -sha256 -sigopt rsa_pss_saltlen:64 -out public.pem -nodes -days 730
```
> **Note:** NetSuite has announced that RSA PKCSv1.5 will be deprecated by **March 1, 2025**. Use the RSA-PSS scheme (PS256, PS384, or PS512) instead.
### EC Key Generation
To generate an EC key pair with the EC256 algorithm.
```
openssl req -new -x509 -newkey ec -pkeyopt ec_paramgen_curve:prime256v1 -nodes -days 730 -out public.pem -keyout private.pem
```
## Creating an Integration Record in the NetSuite Dashboard
1. Go to Setup > Integration > New.
2. Enter a name for your application in the Name field.
3. Enter a description in the Description field, if preferred.
4. Select Enabled in the State field.
5. Enter a note in the Note field, if preferred.
6. Uncheck all options in the Token-based Authentication section.
7. Check only Client Credentials (Machine to Machine) Grant, and check all preferred scopes.
8. Click **Save**.
9. Copy the generated **Consumer key** and **Consumer secret** and keep them safe.
## Creating a Client Credentials (M2M) Setup in the NetSuite Dashboard
1. Go to *Setup > Integration > Manage Authentication > OAuth 2.0 Client Credentials (M2M) Setup*. The OAuth 2.0 Client Credentials Setup page appears.
2. To create a new mapping, click the **Create New** button.
3. In the popup window, choose the entity, role, and application to be mapped (the previous Integration Record created). Upload the public key from your computer.
4. Click **Save**.
5. Keep the **Certificate ID** as it is needed in the next phase.
## Setting Up the HTTP Authentication in the Alumio Dashboard
1. Go to Clients > HTTP Authentications > New.
2. Choose "Oauth2 authentication as the Settings.
3. Choose "Netsuite" as the Provider.
4. Choose the preferred JWT algorithm.
5. Enter the **Certificate ID** copied previously.
6. Enter the **Consumer Key** copied previously.
7. Enter the required scopes (comma-separated).
8. Enter the Authentication URL, for example, `https://yourid.suitetalk.api.netsuite.com/services/rest/auth/oauth2/v1/token`
9. Enter the private key that has been created previously.
10. Click the **Retrieve an access token key** button.
11. Once the access token key is retrieved, save the HTTP authentication.
You can choose the HTTP authentication you created in an HTTP client or any configurations you need to allow you to fetch resources from NetSuite API.
## What to Do When the Current Pair of Certificates is Expiring
1. Create a new pair of certificates
2. Create a new Client Credentials (M2M) Setup as described in the previous section. Choose the same entity, role, and application as the same as the previous one created, but this time, upload the newly created certificate.
3. In the Alumio dashboard, update the private key of the HTTP authentication with the newly created private key.
4. Save the HTTP authentication.
Alumio will then use the new private key to retrieve the token from NetSuite when the current access token expires.
# Connector reference
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/netsuite/reference
Connect Alumio to Oracle NetSuite: HTTP client, subscriber, and publisher.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://system.netsuite.com/help/helpcenter/en\_US/APIs/REST\_API\_Browser/record/v1/2021.2/index.html](https://system.netsuite.com/help/helpcenter/en_US/APIs/REST_API_Browser/record/v1/2021.2/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Oracle NetSuite
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Oracle NetSuite
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Oracle NetSuite
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Oracle NetSuite
**1.1 Steps**
1. Follow the instructions on the [https://docs.oracle.com/en/cloud/saas/netsuite/ns-online-help/section\_157771733782.html](https://docs.oracle.com/en/cloud/saas/netsuite/ns-online-help/section_157771733782.html) page to get the REST API credentials.
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Oracle NetSuite HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
3. Fill in these fields:
* Account ID: you can find it in the URL of your Oracle NetSuite dashboard. For example, the URL to your Oracle NetSuite dashboard is [https://1234567.app.netsuite.com/](https://1234567.app.netsuite.com/). So,\
your Account ID is 1234567.
* Client ID
* Client Secret
* HTTP Client (optional, default: Default client)
* Enable logging of requests (optional, set the formatter if you choose to enable logging)
4. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting an HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field.
5. Click "Grant Access to the Oracle NetSuite" button to let Alumio get the token to access Oracle NetSuite REST web services.
6. You’ll be able to save the configuration after Alumio successfully gets the token and the Key field is filled
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Oracle NetSuite
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select the Oracle NetSuite Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Get Record(s) action and select the record you want to subscribe to. Or, you can select SuiteQL Query action and write your own query.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (the path and query parameters should always be present, you can leave them as empty objects if needed).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Oracle NetSuite HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We support subscribing resources from Oracle NetSuite through record endpoints and SuiteQL. So, whenever you’re unable to get the data you need through record endpoints, you can write your own SuiteQL query to suit your need.
**Action**
We follow the Oracle NetSuite documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on Oracle NetSuite API Reference when using Get Record(s) action. Or, you can write your own query using SuiteQL Query action based on the SuiteQL Syntax and Examples page.
**Record**
*Available when choosing Get Record(s) action.*
This is the record you want to subscribe to from Oracle NetSuite. Please refer to the Oracle NetSuite API Reference page.
**Query**
*Available when choosing SuiteQL Query action.*
You can write your own query to get the data you need. Please refer to the SuiteQL Syntax and Examples page on how to write the query. You can only write a SELECT statement for your SuiteQL query. For example, you may write SELECT id, name FROM department to fetch a list of departments and only include the id and name properties of each department.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed records based on the Oracle NetSuite API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to a single department record.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
This means that we want to subscribe to a department with ID 123 and we want to fetch only the id and name properties from the record. We can see in the documentation that a single department record requires the id as a path parameter to define which department we want to fetch.
That’s why we need to define the id property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters (fields in this example) will be parsed as query parameters.
The final URL of the request is /department/123?fields=id,name
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can basically add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of a record.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Oracle NetSuite.
**Follow Pagination**
If we want to fetch a list of entities, some systems have pagination to limit the entities returned in one call. Oracle NetSuite is one of these systems and it uses the next links included in every list which still has more page(s). By selecting any pagination type in the Oracle NetSuite subscriber, Alumio will fetch a number of pages according to the number entered in a maximum number of pages to fetch the field, instead of fetching only one page. Of course, such behavior happens if the next link exists in the previous fetch response. For Oracle NetSuite, please set links\[?rel == 'next'].href | \[0] to the Pattern to the link for the next page field. One more step to enable the pagination involves selecting the storage to track the process. You can create a new storage and use it here in the incoming configuration.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Oracle NetSuite
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Oracle NetSuite Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method and action you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Method**
We support creating, updating, upserting (insert or update), and deleting records from/to Oracle NetSuite.
**Action**
Currently, we support all the actions described in the Oracle NetSuite API Reference page.
For example, we want to replace sales order items in a sales order. Please select the method PATCH and the action Update Sales Order.
The documentation says that we need an internal ID as the path parameters. In that case, you need to provide the id property inside the path property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. Here is an example of the required data:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Oracle NetSuite with the URL /salesOrder/123?replace=item with the following request body.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Oracle NetSuite.
# NewRelic
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/newrelic
Connect Alumio to NewRelic.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[NewRelic API Reference]
**NewRelic**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client NewRelic
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select NewRelic HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Api Key, NewRelic Partner ID (optional), and NewRelic Account ID (optional).
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from NewRelic
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select NewRelic Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from NewRelic .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the NewRelic HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow NewRelic documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on NewRelic API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from NewRelic. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from NewRelic API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from NewRelic . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from NewRelic API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on NewRelic API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing List Deployements.
That’s why we need to define the **application\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on List Deployements.
/v2/applications/1/deployements.json
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access NewRelic .
# Publishing Entity to NewRelic
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select NewRelic Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the NewRelic entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to NewRelic .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most NewRelic endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the NewRelic API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Alert Policies. Please select “Post” as the action and “Alert Policies - Create” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to NewRelic into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to NewRelic with URL /alerts\_policies.json
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access NewRelic .
# NextChapter
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/nextchapter
Connect Alumio to NextChapter.
## Extra information
System documentation: [NextChapter API Reference](https://nextchapter-api.readme.io/reference/nextchapter-api-developer-documentation)
## Connector package documentation
**NextChapter**
# Setting up HTTP Client NextChapter
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select NextChapter HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and Access token URL.
3. Next, fill in the Client ID, Client Secret, and the scopes.
4. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from NextChapter
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select NextChapter Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from NextChapter.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the NextChapter HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow NextChapter documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on NextChapter API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from NextChapter. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the NextChapter API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on NextChapter API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill out the Request Parameters field when subscribing to retrieve a list of shipments from a location.
That’s why we must define the **code** property as a location\_code inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL called when using the Request Parameters field on Retrieve a thread.
api/v1/locations/**YOUR\_LOCATION\_CODE**/shipments
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access NextChapter.
# Publishing Entity to NextChapter
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select NextChapter Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the NextChapter entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to NextChapter.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Patch (HTTP PATCH method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most NextChapter endpoints. Please refer to the entities in NextChapter API from the NextChapter API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create stocks (Bulk). Please select “Patch” as the action and “Stock - Bulk create stock” as the publisher's entity.
You can put the payload you want to send to NextChapter into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to NextChapter with URL **/api/v1/stock**
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access NextChapter
# nShift
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/nshift
Connect Alumio to nShift.
## Extra information
System documentation nShift v1:
System documentation nShift v2:
## Connector package documentation
\[details="nShift API Version 1"]
# Setting up HTTP Client for NShift
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select nShift V1 HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI.
3. Save and Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from NShift
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select NShift V1 Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Command you want to subscribe from NShift.
3. Add “Key” and “Actor” before Subscribing,
Recommended to create Environment Variable as **nShift\_key** and **nShift\_actor**.
* Create [Environment Variable](https://forum.alumio.com/t/environment-variables-in-alumio/188) go to Settings > Environment Variables > Create new Environment Variable > Insert Name & Value (Name as nShift\_key/nShift\_actor) > Save.
4. Add any “Data” and “Options” needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
6. Select the NShift HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow NShift documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on NShift API Reference.
**Command**
It’s the Command you want to subscribe from NShift. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the NShift API Reference page.
**Key**
It’s the Key for Authentication of nShift.
**Actor**
It’s the Actor for Authentication of nShift.
**Data & Options**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on NShift API Reference. Please look at the example below when subscribing to “Get All shopments from a Stacks’
That’s why we need to define **StackCSID , StartIndex, Count, SortField, and SortDirection** properties.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access NShift.
# Publishing Entity to NShift
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select NShift Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the NShift entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most NShift Command. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the NShift API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some Command may need one or more path parameters.
For Command that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new Stack. Please select “Create a new Stack” as the entity of the publisher.
Heres an Example of Entity Data for Publisher
Same as Example Above we only need to insert Entity and Client as the Data is already carried from Route.
You can put the payload object as **actor, key, data, and options**. Other than 4 of this key in the payload will not be processed, as for the command is already inputted in Publisher.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access NShift.
\[/details]
\[details="nShift API Version 2"]
\[/details]
# Occtoo
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/occtoo
Connect Alumio to Occtoo.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Occtoo API Reference]
# Setting up HTTP Client Occtoo
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Occtoo HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, DATA PROVIDER ID, and DATA PROVIDER SECRET.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Publishing Entity to Occtoo
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Occtoo Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Occtoo entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Occtoo.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method)
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Occtoo endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Occtoo API Reference page.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to import Data into Data Source. Please select “Post” as the action and “Import Data Source” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Occtoo into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Occtoo with URL /import/datasourcetest
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Occtoo.
# Ocoya
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/ocoya
Connect Alumio to Ocoya.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Ocoya API Reference]
**Ocoya**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Ocoya
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Ocoya HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, and Client Secret (Token URL and Authorize are set on Default).
* Press, Grant access to Ocoya and Key will be retrieved.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Ocoya
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Ocoya Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Ocoya .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Ocoya HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Ocoya documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Ocoya API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Ocoya. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Ocoya API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Ocoya . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Ocoya API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Ocoya API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get schedules.
The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get schedules.
/api/\_public/v1/schedules
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Ocoya .
# Publishing Entity to Ocoya
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Ocoya Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Ocoya entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Ocoya .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Ocoya endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Ocoya API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create an AI copy. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create an AI copy using our templates” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Ocoya into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Ocoya with URL /api/\_public/v1/copy
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Ocoya .
# JSON-2 API
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/odoo/json-2
Connect Alumio to Odoo through the JSON-2 API.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Odoo External API Documentation](https://www.odoo.com/documentation/master/developer/reference/external_api.html)
## Connector Package Documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to Entities from Odoo through JSON-2 API
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General Concept
* **3.** Publishing Entity to Odoo through JSON-2 API
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General Concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client
#### 1.1 Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Odoo JSON-2 HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, API Key, and Database name (Optional).
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Odoo through JSON-2 API
#### 2.1 Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Odoo JSON-2 Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Odoo JSON-2 HTTP Client to use.
3. Fill in the Model Name field with the model you want to fetch.
4. Fill in the Method Name field with the method name you want to call.
5. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
#### 2.2 General Concept
We follow Odoo JSON-2 API documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on the [Odoo External API Documentation](https://www.odoo.com/documentation/master/developer/reference/external_api.html).
**Model Name**
The name of the model you want to subscribe to from Odoo.
**Method Name**
The name of the method you want to execute in Odoo through the JSON-2 API.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Odoo External API Documentation](https://www.odoo.com/documentation/master/developer/reference/external_api.html). Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Odoo through JSON-2 API.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Odoo through JSON-2 API
#### 3.1 Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Odoo JSON-2 Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use.
3. Fill in the Model name that you want the publisher to use.
4. Fill in the Method name that you want to use.
5. Set up the Payload data or theQuery parameter.
#### 3.2 General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Model Name**
The name of the model you want to subscribe to from Odoo.
**Method Name**
The name of the method you want to execute in Odoo through the JSON-2 API.
You can put the payload you want to send to Odoo into the `payload` property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Odoo through JSON-2 API.
# XML-RPC
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/odoo/xml-rpc
Connect Alumio to Odoo through the XML-RPC API.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Odoo External RPC API Documentation](https://www.odoo.com/documentation/master/developer/reference/external_rpc_api.html)
## Connector Package Documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to Entities from Odoo through XML-RPC
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General Concept
* **3.** Publishing Entity to Odoo through XML-RPC
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General Concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client
#### 1.1 Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Odoo XML-RPC HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Database, Username, and Password.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Odoo through XML-RPC
#### 2.1 Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Odoo XML-RPC Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Fill in the Request URI field with `/xmlrpc/2/common` or `/xmlrpc/2/object`.
3. Fill in the Model Name field with the model you want to fetch.
4. Fill in the Method Name field with the method name you want to call.
5. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
7. Select the Odoo XML-RPC HTTP Client to use.
#### 2.2 General Concept
We follow Odoo XML-RPC documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on the [Odoo External API Documentation](https://www.odoo.com/documentation/master/developer/reference/external_rpc_api.html).
**Request URI**
It’s the URI you want the RPC call to be made to Odoo. There are only two URIs, they are `/xmlrpc/2/common` or `/xmlrpc/2/object`.
**Model Name**
The name of the model you want to subscribe to from Odoo.
**Method Name**
The name of the method you want to execute in Odoo through the XML-RPC.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Odoo External RPC API Documentation](https://www.odoo.com/documentation/master/developer/reference/external_api.html). Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Odoo through XML-RPC.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Odoo through XML-RPC
#### 3.1 Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Odoo XML-RPC Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Odoo XML-RPC entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
#### 3.2 General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Request URI**
It’s the URI you want the RPC call to be made to Odoo. There are only two URIs. They are `/xmlrpc/2/common` or `/xmlrpc/2/object`.
**Model Name**
The name of the model you want to subscribe to from Odoo.
**Method Name**
The name of the method you want to execute in Odoo through the XML-RPC.
You can put the payload you want to send to Odoo into the `payload` property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Odoo through XML-RPC.
### NOTES
In the Odoo XML-RPC Subscriber, you can see the input field with the help text "Starts with the 5th Array", it's from the [Odoo External RPC API documentation](https://www.odoo.com/documentation/master/developer/reference/external_rpc_api.html#calling-methods), see below.
You don’t need to input the Database, User ID, model name, and method name into the Request Parameter. Instead, put it in where we already provide it.
As for the model name, and method name, you can input them in the UI of the Odoo XML-RPC Subscriber. See below.
While for the Database, user ID, and user password, you only need to input it in the Odoo XML-RPC Client. See below.
The request parameter usually looks like this.
And this works the same in the Publisher as well.
# Onshape
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/onshape
Connect Alumio to Onshape.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Onshape API Reference](https://onshape-public.github.io/docs/api-intro/explorer/)
### Setting up HTTP Client Onshape
**Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Connections → HTTPS (API). Create a new HTTP Client and select Onshape HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Api Key, and Secret Key.
### Subscribing to Entities from Onshape
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations → Incoming and create a new Incoming configuration and select Onshape Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Onshape.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Onshape HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
We follow Onshape documentation for building this connector, so you can easily use it based on the Onshape API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from Onshape. Please refer to the entities in the Management APIs from the Onshape API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Onshape API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{cid}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
That’s why we need to define **cid** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the get company information entity.
`/companies/123456`
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Onshape.
### Publishing Entity to Onshape
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations → Outgoing, create a new Outgoing configuration, and select Onshape Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Onshape entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in the outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Onshape endpoints, but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in the Management APIs from the Onshape API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to create a new publication. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a new publication” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Onshape into the payload property in the data (go to Advanced).
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Onshape with URL `/publications`
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Onshape.
# OpenAI
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/openai
Connect Alumio to OpenAI.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://beta.openai.com/docs/introduction](https://beta.openai.com/docs/introduction)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client OpenAI
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from OpenAI
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** Select the OpenAI HTTP Client to use.
* **3.** Publishing entity to OpenAI
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client OpenAI
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select OpenAI HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Token, and Organization ID (optional).
* Organization ID is only used for users who belong to multiple organizations to specify which organization is used for an API request.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from OpenAI
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select OpenAI Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from OpenAI.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
**2.2 Select the OpenAI HTTP Client to use. General Concept**
We follow OpenAI documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on OpenAI API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from OpenAI. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the OpenAI API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on OpenAI API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
That’s why we need to define **engine\_id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the coupon entity.
`/v1/engines/babbage`
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access OpenAI.
### 3. Publishing Entity to OpenAI
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select OpenAI Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the OpenAI entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most OpenAI endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from OpenAI API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Thread. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create moderation” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to OpenAI into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to OpenAI with URL `/v1/moderations`
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access OpenAI.
# OpenCart
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/opencart
Connect Alumio to OpenCart.
## Extra information
System documentation: [OpenCart API Reference](https://docs.opencart.com/en-gb/system/users/api/)
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client OpenCart
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from OpenCart
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to OpenCart
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client OpenCart
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients → HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select OpenCart HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URL, Username and API Key.
(See the [OpenCart Documentation](https://docs.opencart.com/en-gb/system/users/api/))
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
Note : It is recommended to use Alumio Environment variables as the example shown.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from OpenCart
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections → Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select “OpenCart Subscriber” as the subscriber.
2. Select the OpenCart HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from OpenCart.
4. Fill any data that you want to send to OpenCart.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from OpenCart.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow OpenCart documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [OpenCart API Reference](https://docs.opencart.com/en-gb/system/users/api/).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access OpenCart.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to OpenCart. Please refer to the entities from [OpenCart API Reference](https://docs.opencart.com/en-gb/system/users/api/) page. As this Connector Package created OpenCart only accept POST method for the request.
Please look at the example below on how to retrieve available shipping methods by using “Shipping - Returning available shipping methods” entity.
Alumio will then make a request to OpenCart with the URL
`index.php?route=api/shipping/methods`
### 3. Publishing entity to OpenCart
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections → Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select “OpenCart Publisher” as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the OpenCart entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Fill any data that you want to send to OpenCart.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access OpenCart.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all OpenCart endpoints.
Please refer to [OpenCart API Reference](https://docs.opencart.com/en-gb/system/users/api/) page.
As this Connector Package created OpenCart only accept POST method for the request.
For example, we want to apply an existing coupon. Please select “Coupon - Apply existing coupon” and add data with Key “coupon” and the value of the code after OpenCart Data type.
Alumio will send an API request to OpenCart with URL
`index.php?route=api/coupon`
# Orderchamp
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/orderchamp
Connect Alumio to Orderchamp.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
# Setting up HTTP Client Orderchamp
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Orderchamp HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Bearer Token.
# Subscribing to Entities from Orderchamp
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Orderchamp Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. add Request Method as post.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the orderchamp.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Orderchamp HTTP Client to use
## General Concept
We follow Orderchamp documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Orderchamp API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Orderchamp. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Orderchamp API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Orderchamp API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request.
```
query{
account{
name
type
slug
}
}
```
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Orderchamp.
# Publishing Entity to Orderchamp
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Orderchamp Publisher as the publisher.
2. Add any Request URI that you want to add (optional).
3. Fill the Request Parameters with the data you want to do.
4. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Orderchamp.
5. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Orderchamp endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Orderchamp API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Orderchamp.
## Important Note
* Heres an example on using placeholder inside the query parameter.
```
query {
products(
first: 1,
query: "sku:&{sku}"){
edges{
node{
id updatedAt totalInventory status
variants(first: 1){
edges{
node{
idinventoryItem{
id
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
)
}
```
* You can left the Request Uri empty, the Request Uri will be taken from HTTP Client.
# Orderwise
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/orderwise
Connect Alumio to Orderwise.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client Orderwise ERP
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Orderwise ERP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Username, Password.
3. On Top right, press Save & Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from Orderwise ERP
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Orderwise ERP Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Orderwise ERP.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity using Template.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Orderwise ERP HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Orderwise ERP documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Orderwise ERP API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Orderwise ERP. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Orderwise ERP API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Orderwise ERP API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define **id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Gets a List of CRM record entity.
/crm/1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Orderwise ERP.
# Publishing Entity to Orderwise ERP
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Orderwise ERP Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Orderwise ERP entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Orderwise ERP. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Orderwise ERP API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new CRM record. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a new CRM record” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Orderwise ERP into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Orderwise ERP with URL
/crm
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Orderwise ERP.
# Orisha
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/orisha
Connect Alumio to Orisha.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Orisha API Reference](https://docs.core-suite.io/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Orisha
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Orisha
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Orisha HTTP Client as Platform and click Next Step
3. Fill in the Base URL, Client ID, Client Secret, API Key, Access token URL and Audience.
4. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the HTTP requests.
5. Click next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Orisha
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Orisha Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Orisha HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Orisha.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Orisha.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Orisha documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Orisha. Please refer to the entities from [Orisha API Reference](https://api.core-suite.io/swagger/index.html) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [Orisha API Reference](https://api.core-suite.io/swagger/index.html).
Please look at the example below on how to fetch all items by subscribing to the "List Items by skip & take" entity.
From the endpoint, we can see that we need to set the database id as a parameter. That is why we set the "skip" and "take" inside the query key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Orisha with the URL `https://api.core-suite.io?skip=0&take=10`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL.
* A query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?skip=0&take=10`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Orisha.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Orisha
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "Orisha Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
4. Select the entity you want the data to be published to.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods for using it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the HTTP Post, Put, and Delete method on submitting data to Orisha.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Orisha endpoints.
Please refer to the Orisha API Reference
For example, we want to update a profile. Please select “Post” as the Method and "Create a Webhook".
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a body parameter. That is why we see body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Orisha with URL `POST https://api.core-suite.io/v1/webhooks` with the defined payload.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Orisha.
# Outlook
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/outlook
Connect Alumio to Outlook.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Outlook API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/outlook/rest/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Outlook
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Outlook
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Outlook
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Outlook
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Outlook HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Token URL, Authorize URL, Client ID, Client Secret and Scopes.
(See the [Outlook Authentication Documentation](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/outlook/rest/get-started) for more information)
4. Click on "Grant access to Outlook" and you will be redirected to Microsoft Authentication to get the key for the client.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Outlook
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Outlook Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Method that you want the subscriber to fetch the data.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Outlook.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. Select the Outlook HTTP Client to use.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Outlook.
7. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Outlook documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Outlook API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/outlook/rest/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Outlook. Please refer to the entities from [Outlook API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/outlook/rest/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Outlook API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/outlook/rest/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve an email by subscribing ["Mail - Get a message"](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/graph/api/message-get?view=graph-rest-1.0\&tabs=http) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the message id as parameters. That is why we set the "MessageId" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Outlook with the URL `https://graph.microsoft.com/v1.0/me/messages/123`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Outlook.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Outlook
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Outlook Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Outlook entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Outlook.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Outlook endpoints.
Please refer to [Outlook API Reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/outlook/rest/) page.
For example, we want to send an email. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Mail - Send mail"](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/graph/api/user-sendmail?view=graph-rest-1.0\&tabs=http).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a body parameters. That is why we set the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Outlook with URL `https://graph.microsoft.com/v1.0/me/sendMail`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Outlook.
# Pandadoc
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/pandadoc
Connect Alumio to Pandadoc.
## Extra information
System documentation: [PandaDoc API Reference](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/about)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client PandaDoc
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from PandaDoc
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to PandaDoc
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client PandaDoc
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select PandaDoc HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and Authentication Type
(For more information, see [PandaDoc Authentication Reference](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/authentication-process))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from PandaDoc
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select PandaDoc Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the PandaDoc HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from PandaDoc.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from PandaDoc.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow PandaDoc documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [PandaDoc API Reference](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/about).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access PandaDoc.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to PandaDoc. Please refer to the entities from [PandaDoc API Reference](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/about) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [PandaDoc API Reference](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/about).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Documents - List Documents"](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/list-documents-folders) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point doesn't require a path, but we can add query params inside of it. We can set the query params inside the query key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to PandaDoc with the URL /public/v1/documents/folders?parent\_uuid=test\_123\&count=1\&page=1
### 3. Publishing Entity to PandaDoc
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select PandaDoc Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the PandaDoc entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP POST method, HTTP PUT method, HTTP PATCH method, and HTTP DELETE method on submitting data to PandaDoc.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most PandaDoc endpoints.
Please refer to [PandaDoc API Reference](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/about) page.
For example, we want to use ["Create Documents Folder"](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/create-documents-folder). Please select “POST” as the Action and ["Folder - Documents Folders - Create Documents Folder"](https://developers.pandadoc.com/reference/create-documents-folder) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a "Request Body". That is why we set the "Request Body" inside the payload key in the data.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to PandaDoc with URL /public/v1/documents/folders
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access PandaDoc.
# Pay.nl
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/pay-nl
Connect Alumio to Pay.nl.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Pay.NL API Reference](https://developer.pay.nl/reference/get_services-config)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Pay.NL
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Pay.NL
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Pay.NL
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Pay.NL
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Pay.NL HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Username and Password.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Pay.NL
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Pay.NL Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Pay.NL.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Pay.NL HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Pay.NL.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Pay.NL documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Pay.NL API Reference](https://developer.pay.nl/reference/get_services-config).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Pay.NL. Please refer to the entities from v2.0 [Pay.NL API Reference](https://developer.pay.nl/reference/get_services-config) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Pay.NL API Reference](https://developer.pay.nl/reference/get_services-config).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["MERCHANT MANAGEMENT - Fetch a service"](https://developer.pay.nl/reference/get_services-serviceid) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "serviceId" as parameters. That is why we set the "serviceId" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Pay.NL with the URL `https://rest.pay.nl/v2/services/SL-9999-9999`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pay.NL.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Pay.NL
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Pay.NL Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Pay.NL entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Pay.NL.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Pay.NL v2.0 endpoints.
Please refer to [Pay.NL API Reference](https://developer.pay.nl/reference/get_services-config) page.
For example, we want to create a payment page. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["MERCHANT MANAGEMENT - PaymentLink:Create"](https://developer.pay.nl/reference/post_services-serviceid-paymentlink) as the entity of the publisher.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "serviceId" as parameters. That is why we set the "serviceId" inside the path key in the data.
Based on the documentation, it requires a request body. That is why we set the request body in the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Pay.NL with URL `https://rest.pay.nl/v2/services/SL-9999-9999/paymentlink`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pay.NL.
# PayPal
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/paypal
Connect Alumio to PayPal.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client PayPal
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from PayPal
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to PayPal
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client PayPal
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select PayPal HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Access Token URL, Client ID, Client Secret and scopes.
(For more information, see [PayPal Authentication Reference](https://developer.paypal.com/api/rest/authentication/))
4. Click on the "Grant access to Paypal" button to get the key.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from PayPal
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select either "PayPal Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from PayPal.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the PayPal HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from PayPal.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow PayPal documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [PayPal API Reference](https://developer.paypal.com/api/rest/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to PayPal. Please refer to the entities from [PayPal API Reference](https://developer.paypal.com/api/rest/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [PayPal API Reference](https://developer.paypal.com/api/rest/) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Catalog Products - Show product details"](https://developer.paypal.com/docs/api/catalog-products/v1/#products_get) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "product\_id" as a path. That is why we set the "product\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to PayPal with the URL /v1/catalogs/products/PROD-4RL39819VJ076433A
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access PayPal.
### 3. Publishing Entity to PayPal
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select either "PayPal - Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the PayPal entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to PayPal.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most PayPal endpoints.
Please refer to [PayPal API Reference](https://developer.paypal.com/api/rest/) page.
For example, we want to update a product. Please select “Patch” as the Method and ["Catalog Products - Update product"](https://developer.paypal.com/docs/api/catalog-products/v1/#products_patch) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires require "product\_id" as a path and request body. That is why we set the "product\_id" inside the path key and the request body inside the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to PayPal with URL /v1/catalogs/products/PROD-4RL39819VJ076433A
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access PayPal.
# Payt
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/payt
Connect Alumio to Payt.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Payt API Reference](https://api.paytsoftware.com/docs/api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Payt
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Payt
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Payt
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Payt
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Payt HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, API Key and API Secret.
(See the [Payt Authentication Documentation](https://docs.paytsoftware.com/#/api/authorization) for more information)
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Payt
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Payt Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Payt.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Payt HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Payt.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Payt documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Payt API Reference](https://api.paytsoftware.com/docs/api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Payt. Please refer to the entities from [Payt API Reference](https://api.paytsoftware.com/docs/api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Payt API Reference](https://api.paytsoftware.com/docs/api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill request parameters when we want retrieve an administration debtors by subscribing ["Get administration debtor by id"](https://api.paytsoftware.com/docs/api#!/debtors/getV1Debtors) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the "id" as a path and "administration\_id" as a query. That is why we set them inside the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Payt with the URL
`/v1/debtors/3349059?administration_id=2813`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Payt.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Payt
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Payt Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Payt entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method and HTTP Patch method on submitting data to Payt.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Payt endpoints.
Please refer to [Payt API Reference](https://api.paytsoftware.com/docs/api) page.
For example, we want to create administrationq contacts. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Create or update administration contacts"](https://api.paytsoftware.com/docs/api#!/contacts/postV1Contacts).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a body parameters. That is why we set the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Payt with URL `/v1/contacts`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Payt.
# Perplexity
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/perplexity
Connect Alumio to Perplexity.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Perplexity API Reference]
**Perplexity**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Perplexity
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Perplexity HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Api Key.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Perplexity
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Perplexity Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Perplexity .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Perplexity HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Perplexity documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Perplexity API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Perplexity. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Perplexity API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Perplexity . Perplexity only has one Endpoint to support. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Perplexity API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Perplexity API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Stream – Chat Completions.
Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve a single field.
/chat/completions
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Perplexity .
# Publishing Entity to Perplexity
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Perplexity Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the Method that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Perplexity entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Perplexity .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. Normally the difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration) but for perplexity we only support one endpoint to use on subscriber and publisher (same endpoint), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we only support Post (HTTP POST method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Perplexity endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Perplexity API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Generate a model response for the given chat conversation. Please select “Post” as the action and “Chat Completions” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Perplexity into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Perplexity with URL /chat/completions
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Perplexity .
# Picqer
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/picqer
Connect Alumio to Picqer.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Picqer API Reference](https://picqer.com/en/api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Picqer
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Picqer
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Picqer
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Picqer
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Picqer HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI and API Keys.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Picqer
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Picqer Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Picqer.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Picqer HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Picqer.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Picqer documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Picqer API Reference](https://picqer.com/en/api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Picqer. Please refer to the entities from [Picqer API Reference](https://picqer.com/en/api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Picqer API Reference](https://picqer.com/en/api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve details of a client by subscribing ["Get single customer"](https://picqer.com/en/api/customers#get-all-customers) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the customer ID as parameters. That is why we set the "idcustomer" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Picqer with the URL `/api/v1/customers/89338142`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Picqer.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Picqer
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Picqer Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Picqer entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Picqer.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Picqer endpoints.
Please refer to [Picqer API Reference](https://picqer.com/en/api) page.
For example, we want to create a user. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Update customer"](https://picqer.com/en/api/customers#update-customer).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path for customer ID and a body parameter. That is why we set the path "idcustomer" in the path in the data and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Picqer with URL `/api/v1/customers/89338142`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Picqer.
# Pimcore GraphQL
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/pimcore-graphql
Connect Alumio to Pimcore GraphQL.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://pimcore.com/docs/data-hub/current/Basic\_Principle.html](https://pimcore.com/docs/data-hub/current/Basic_Principle.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Pimcore
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Pimcore
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Pimcore
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Pimcore
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Pimcore GraphQL Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and API Key.
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Pimcore
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Pimcore Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Add Request URI for special end point. (Optional)
3. Add Request Method for the request.
4. Add Request Parameters needed to subscribe.
5. Select the Pimcore HTTP Client to use.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Pimcore.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Pimcore documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Pimcore API Reference](https://pimcore.com/docs/data-hub/current/Basic_Principle.html).
**Request URI**
The configuration name you want to subscribe from Pimcore will be added to the end of the Base URI set in the HTTP Client.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Pimcore API Reference](https://pimcore.com/docs/data-hub/current/Basic_Principle.html).
For example when we try subscribing to "getAsset".
We can add the request parameter as follows.
You will get the response like shown.
Pimcore is using custom Query that can be changed from their dashboard, follow this [Pimcore API Reference](https://pimcore.com/docs/data-hub/current/Basic_Principle.html) page for details.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pimcore.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Pimcore
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Pimcore Publisher as the publisher.
2. Add Request URI for special end point. (Optional)
3. Fill in the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
4. Add Request Parameters needed to publish.
5. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it.
The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the data using transformers.
**Request URI**
The configuration name you want to subscribe from Pimcore, it will be added to the end of the Base URI set in the HTTP Client.
**Method**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) for publishing data to Pimcore.
**Request Parameters**
Pimcore is using custom Query that can be changed from their dashboard, follow this [Pimcore API Reference](https://pimcore.com/docs/data-hub/current/Basic_Principle.html) page for details.
For example, this is when we try to create a document page.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pimcore.
# Pipedrive
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/pipedrive
Connect Alumio to Pipedrive.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Pipedrive API Reference](https://developers.pipedrive.com/docs/api/v1)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Pipedrive
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Pipedrive
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Pipedrive
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Pipedrive
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Pipedrive HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI and API Token.
(See the [Pipedrive Authentication Documentation](https://pipedrive.readme.io/docs/how-to-find-the-api-token) for more information)
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Pipedrive
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Pipedrive Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Pipedrive.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Pipedrive HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Pipedrive.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Pipedrive documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Pipedrive API Reference](https://developers.pipedrive.com/docs/api/v1).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Pipedrive. Please refer to the entities from [Pipedrive API Reference](https://developers.pipedrive.com/docs/api/v1) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Pipedrive API Reference](https://developers.pipedrive.com/docs/api/v1).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want get a user by subscribing ["Users - Get one user"](https://developers.pipedrive.com/docs/api/v1/Users#getUser) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the user id as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Pipedrive with the URL `/v1/users/22013967`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pipedrive.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Pipedrive
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Pipedrive Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Pipedrive entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Pipedrive.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Pipedrive endpoints.
Please refer to [Pipedrive API Reference](https://developers.pipedrive.com/docs/api/v1) page.
For example, we want to edit an user. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Users - Update user details"](https://developers.pipedrive.com/docs/api/v1/Users#updateUser).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Pipedrive with URL `/v1/users/22013967`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pipedrive.
# Protime
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/protime
Connect Alumio to Protime.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Protime API Reference](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Protime
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Protime
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Protime
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Protime
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Protime HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Access token URL, ClientID, ClientSecret and enter the required scopes. (See the [Protime Authentication Documentation](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi/authentication) for more information)
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Protime
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Protime Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Protime.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Protime HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Protime.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Protime documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Protime API Reference](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Protime. Please refer to the entities from [Protime API Swagger](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi/swagger-ui/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Protime API Swagger](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi/swagger-ui/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill request parameters when we want retrieve an administration debtors by subscribing ["Get a list of clockings"](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi/#/Clockings/get_connector_protimeapi_api_v1_clockings) entity.
From the documentation page, we can see that we need to set the query parameters. In this case we insert it into "Request parameters" input.
Alumio will then make a request to Protime with the URL
`/connector/protimeapi/api/v1/clockings?filter=date+ge+%272025-01-01%27+and+date+le+%272025-07-05%27`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example `/connector/protimeapi/api/v1/clockings/{id}`.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Protime.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Protime
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Protime Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Protime entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post, Put and Delete method for submitting data to Protime.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Protime endpoints.
Please refer to [Protime API Reference](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi) page.
For example, we want to create a new clockings. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Add a clocking"](https://documentation.myprotime.eu/protimeapi/#/Clockings/post_connector_protimeapi_api_v1_clockings).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a body parameters. That is why we set the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Protime with URL `POST /connector/protimeapi/api/v1/clockings`
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Protime.
# PulpoWMS
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/pulpowms
Connect Alumio to PulpoWMS.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Pulpo WMS API Reference](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Attachment)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Pulpo WMS
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Pulpo WMS
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Pulpo WMS
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Pulpo WMS
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Pulpo WMS HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Token URL, Username, Password and Scopes.
(See the [Pulpo WMS Token Documentation](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Auth/Wms_Auth_AuthController_request_token)
4. Click on "Grant access to Pulpo WMS" and you will get the key for the client.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Pulpo WMS
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Pulpo WMS Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Method that you want the subscriber to fetch the data.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Pulpo WMS.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. Select the Pulpo WMS HTTP Client to use.
6. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Pulpo WMS.
7. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Pulpo WMS documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Pulpo WMS API Reference](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Attachment).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Pulpo WMS. Please refer to the entities from [Pulpo WMS API Reference](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Attachment) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Pulpo WMS API Reference](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Attachment).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve a Product by subscribing ["Inventory - Fetch a product"](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Inventory/Wms_Inventory_ProductController_show) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the product id as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Pulpo WMS with the URL `/inventory/products/12345`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request (Currently only supported on Post Method).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pulpo WMS.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Pulpo WMS
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Pulpo WMS Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Pulpo WMS entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put Method, HTTP Patch Method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Pulpo WMS.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Pulpo WMS endpoints.
Please refer to [Pulpo WMS API Reference](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Attachment) page.
For example, we want to update a field inside a warehouse. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Warehouse - Update fields of warehouse by given id"](https://eu-show.pulpo.co/api/v1/swagger/index.html#/Warehouse/Wms_Warehouse_WarehouseController_update).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path and a body parameters. That is why we set the path id and the body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Pulpo WMS with URL `/warehouses/1916`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Pulpo WMS.
# Pulseway
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/pulseway
Connect Alumio to Pulseway.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Pulseway API Reference]
**Pulseway**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Pulseway
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Pulseway HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Pulseway
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Pulseway Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Pulseway .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Pulseway HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Pulseway documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Pulseway API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Pulseway. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Pulseway API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Pulseway . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Pulseway API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Pulseway API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get a Specific Device.
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get a Specific Device.
/v3/devices/REST\_API\_D384...
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Pulseway .
# Publishing Entity to Pulseway
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Pulseway Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Pulseway entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Pulseway .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Pulseway endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Pulseway API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Publish Device Please select “Post” as the action and “Publish Device” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Pulseway into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Pulseway with URL /v3/Devices
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Pulseway .
# Qapla
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/qapla
Connect Alumio to Qapla.
## Extra information
System documentation:
**Qapla**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Qapla
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Qapla HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Api Key.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Qapla
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Qapla Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Qapla.
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Qapla HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Qapla documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Qapla API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Qapla. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Qapla API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Qapla API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Shipments – getShipment (v1.3)
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the query property in the Request Parameters field. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on getShipment.
/1.3/getShipment/?apiKey=abc\&id=99969179
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Qapla.
# Publishing Entity to Qapla
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Qapla Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Qapla entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Qapla.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Qapla endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Qapla API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Push Shipment. Please select “Post” as the action and “Shipments - pushShipment” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Qapla into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Qapla with URL /1.3/pushShipment/
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Qapla.
# QuickBooks Online Plus
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/quickbooks
Connect Alumio to QuickBooks Online Plus.
## Extra information
System documentation: [QuickBooks Online Plus API Reference](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/all-entities/account)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client QuickBooks Online Plus
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from QuickBooks Online Plus
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to QuickBooks Online Plus
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client QuickBooks Online Plus
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "QuickBooks Online Plus HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes (Optional).
(For more information, see [QuickBooks Online Plus Reference](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/most-commonly-used/account))
3. Click on "Grant access to QuickBooks Online Plus" to get the Key.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from QuickBooks Online Plus
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "QuickBooks Online Plus Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from QuickBooks Online Plus.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from QuickBooks Online Plus.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the QuickBooks Online Plus HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow QuickBooks Online Plus documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [QuickBooks Online Plus API Reference](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/all-entities/account).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to QuickBooks Online Plus. Please refer to the entities from [QuickBooks Online Plus API Reference](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/all-entities/account) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [QuickBooks Online Plus API Reference](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/all-entities/account).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Read an Account"](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/all-entities/account#read-an-account) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "accountId" as a path. That is why we set the "accountId" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
We can ignore the realmID because we set them in the HTTP Client.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{channelId}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to QuickBooks Online Plus with the URL /v3/company/123/account/33
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access QuickBooks Online Plus.
### 3. Publishing Entity to QuickBooks Online Plus
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "QuickBooks Online Plus Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the QuickBooks Online Plus entity you want the data to be published to.
3. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most QuickBooks Online Plus endpoints.
Please refer to [QuickBooks Online Plus API Reference](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/all-entities/account) page.
For example, we want to update a customer. Please select ["Create or Update Customer"](https://developer.intuit.com/app/developer/qbo/docs/api/accounting/all-entities/customer#the-customer-object) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we need to add a Body Request. So we put the body inside the payload key in the Data.
Alumio will send an API request to QuickBooks Online Plus with URL /v3/company/123/customer
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access QuickBooks Online Plus.
# Reamaze
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/reamaze
Connect Alumio to Reamaze.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Reamaze API Reference](https://www.reamaze.com/api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Reamaze
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Reamaze
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Reamaze
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Reamaze
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Reamaze HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Email and Token.
(For more information, see [Reamaze API Reference](https://www.reamaze.com/api))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Reamaze
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Reamaze Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Reamaze HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Reamaze.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Reamaze.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Reamaze documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Reamaze API Reference](https://www.reamaze.com/api).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Reamaze.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Reamaze. Please refer to the entities from [Reamaze API Reference](https://www.reamaze.com/api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Reamaze API Reference](https://www.reamaze.com/api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Articles - Get Article"](https://www.reamaze.com/api/get_article) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "slug" as a path. That is why we set the "slug" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Reamaze with the URL /articles/the-federalist-papers
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
### 3. Publishing Entity to Reamaze
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Reamaze Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Reamaze entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support POST, PUT, and DELETE on submitting data to Reamaze.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Reamaze endpoints.
Please refer to [Reamaze API Reference](https://www.reamaze.com/api) page.
For example, we want to use ["Articles - Updating Articles"](https://www.reamaze.com/api/put_article). Please select “PUT” as the method and ["Articles - Updating Articles"](https://www.reamaze.com/api/put_article) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a "Request Body". That is why we set the "Request Body" inside the payload key in the data. It also require the path of "slug" that is why we set so in the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Reamaze with URL /articles/foo
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Reamaze.
# Reloadify
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/reloadify
Connect Alumio to Reloadify.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Reloadify API Reference](https://app.reloadify.com/api-docs/index.html?urls.primaryName=API%20V2%20Docs)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Reloadify
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Reloadify
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Reloadify
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Reloadify
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Reloadify HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Token URI, Client ID and Client Secret.
4. Click on "Grant access to Reloadify" and key will be generated.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Reloadify
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Reloadify Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Reloadify.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Reloadify HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Reloadify.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Reloadify documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Reloadify API Reference](https://app.reloadify.com/api-docs/index.html?urls.primaryName=API%20V2%20Docs).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Reloadify. Please refer to the entities from [Reloadify API Reference](https://app.reloadify.com/api-docs/index.html?urls.primaryName=API%20V2%20Docs) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Reloadify API Reference](https://app.reloadify.com/api-docs/index.html?urls.primaryName=API%20V2%20Docs) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Products - Return a list of products for a language" entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "language\_id" as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
We can also fill the query in JSON that will be translated by Alumio into Query Parameters in the query key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Reloadify with the URL /v2/languages/Nederlands/products?page=1\&per\_page=0
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Reloadify.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Reloadify
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Reloadify Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Reloadify entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Reloadify.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Reloadify endpoints.
Please refer to [Reloadify API Reference](https://app.reloadify.com/api-docs/index.html?urls.primaryName=API%20V2%20Docs) page.
For example, we want to create a brand. Please select “Put” as the Method and "Brands - Create or update a brand for a language" as the entity of the publisher.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "language\_id" as parameters. That is why we set the "language\_id" inside the path key in the data.
Based on the documentation, it requires a request body. That is why we set the request body in the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Reloadify with URL /v2/languages/Nederlands/brands
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Reloadify.
# Remote.com
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/remote-com
Connect Alumio to Remote.com.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Remote.com API Reference]
**Remote.com**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Remote.com
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Remote.com HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Token.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Remote.com
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Remote.com Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Remote.com.
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Remote.com HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Remote.com documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Remote.com API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Remote.com. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Remote.com API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Remote.com API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Show employment entity.
That’s why we need to define the **employment\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Show Employment.
/v1/employements/Alumio-1a2e-****-bd2c-****
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Remote.com.
# Publishing Entity to Remote.com
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Remote.com Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Remote.com entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Remote.com.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Remote.com endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Remote.com API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Employment. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create employment” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Remote.com into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Remote.com with URL /v1/employment
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Remote.com.
# Returnless
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/returnless
Connect Alumio to Returnless.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Returnless API Reference](https://api.returnless.com/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Returnless
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Returnless
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Returnless
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the HTTP Client Returnless
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Returnless Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, API user, and API Password
(For more information, see [Returnless API Reference](https://api.returnless.com/))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Returnless
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Returnless Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Returnless.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to modify the request parameters into something you will request from Returnless.
5. Select the Returnless HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Returnless documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Returnless API Reference](https://api.returnless.com/).
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to Returnless. Please refer to the entities from [Returnless API Reference](https://api.returnless.com/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Returnless API Reference](https://api.returnless.com/).
Please refer to the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing "Get single request" entity:
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "request\_id" as a path. That is why we set the "request\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Returnless with the URL /requests/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Returnless.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Returnless
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select the Returnless Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Returnless entity you want the data to be published to.
4. (Optional) Add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. (Optional) Add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. (Optional) Add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Update (HTTP PUT method) on submitting data to Returnless.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Returnless endpoints.
Please refer to [Returnless API Reference](https://api.returnless.com/) page.
For example, we want to update a return to status complete. Please select “Put” as the Action and “Update Return” as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "return\_id" as a path. That is why we set the "return\_id" inside the path key in the data. It also needs a query for "status". So, we also need to add the "status" key inside the query key in the data.
It doesn't require a body, so we set the payload empty for this request.
Alumio will send an API request to Returnless with URL /returns/123?status=complete
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Returnless.
# SageX3
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sagex3
Connect Alumio to SageX3.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
**SageX3**
**Default Documentation**
**This Documentation is Written Based on Alumio and SageX3 API Reference**
# Setting up HTTP Client SageX3
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Default prototype.
* Add an Authentication > Oauth2 authentication and select the Provider as Generic.
* On the Grant Type Select Interactive Autorization.
* Fill in the Required Fields (Client ID, Client Secret, Token URL, Authorize URL), and press Retrieve an access token key.
* Save
# Subscribing to Entities from SageX3 Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select HTTP Subscriber.
* Fill in the Endpoint that you want to call on Request URI.
* Fill in The Method of the Endpoint that you want to call on Request Method.
* Fill in the Request Parameter (Optional).
* On the HTTP Client, select the Client that we have created before.
* Save.
# Publishing Entity to SageX3
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select HTTP Publisher.
* Fill in the Request URI with endpoint that you want to call from SageX3.
* Fill in the Request Method with Method that you want to Call from the Endpoint.
* You can optionally add any parameters to the request.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
# Notes and FAQ
* How do you Get the JWT Token?
* Based on what Written [Here](https://developer.sage.com/x3/authorization-token-endpoints/token-api/), it says that
* “Tokens obtained through our authorization process are JSON Web Token (JWT) signed tokens”
* It Means that the JWT Token are from the *Authorization process* gives you the JWT Token.
in Simple Terms you only need to proceed with Oauth2 and will retrieve something like this :
* Note : The **access\_token** is the JWT Token
# Sales Layer
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sales-layer
Connect Alumio to Sales Layer.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://support.saleslayer.com/category/api](https://support.saleslayer.com/category/api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Sales Layer
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Sales Layer
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Sales Layer
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the Sales Layer HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients.
2. Create a new HTTP Client and select Sales Layer Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
3. Sales Layer has default configuration that does not require to be changed to use.
4. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Sales Layer
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Sales Layer Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Fill in the Channel Custom Connector ID and Channel Custom Connector Private Keys for the connector you created in Sales Layer Dashboard.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Sales Layer HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Sales Layer API documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the [Sales Layer API Docs](https://support.saleslayer.com/category/api).
Sales Layer uses different custom connectors to import and to export data, so please fill in the connector code and keys for export, to get data from Sales Layer.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the official [Sales Layer API Docs](https://support.saleslayer.com/category/api). Sales Layer can work with empty default values for subscribing.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Sales Layer.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Sales Layer
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Sales Layer – Entity Publisher as the publisher.
2. Fill in the Channel Custom Connector ID and Channel Custom Connector Private Keys for the connector you have created in Sales Layer Dashboard.
3. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Sales Layer.
4. Select the Sales Layer HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
The Sales Layer uses different custom connectors to import and to export data, so please fill in the connector code and keys for import, to put data into the Sales Layer.
To fill data using Alumio Sales Layer connector, we need to use the path key and fill the payload key with the data we want to add to Sales Layer as an example
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Sales Layer.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Sales Layer.
# Salesforce
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/salesforce
Connect Alumio to Salesforce.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api\_rest.meta/api\_rest/intro\_rest.htm](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api_rest.meta/api_rest/intro_rest.htm)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up the Salesforce HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Salesforce
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing an entity to Salesforce
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the Salesforce HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. Please refer to [https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.connected\_app\_create.htm\&type=5](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.connected_app_create.htm\&type=5) page to create a connected app for connecting Alumio to Salesforce.
* **make sure to uncheck "Require Proof Key for Code Exchange (PKCE) Extension for Supported Authorization Flows"**
* make sure to relax IP restrictions under "IP Relaxation"
* the callback URL can be found in Alumio under Settings->Info->OAuth Redirecht URL
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients.
3. Create a new HTTP Client and select Salesforce HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
4. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID and Client Secret of your Salesforce instance and app credentials.
5. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting an HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field.
6. Click the Grant access to Salesforce button and follow the instructions to let Alumio start the authentication and get the access token.
7. You can optionally change how Alumio logs every HTTP request made by the HTTP client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Salesforce
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Salesforce Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can also add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Salesforce HTTP Client to use.
6. You can optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Salesforce API documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the Salesforce REST API Developer Guide.
**Action**
This is the action you want to do (fetching data from Salesforce). Please refer to the Salesforce REST API Developer Guide page. We currently support Salesforce REST API v54.0 and earlier versions.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Salesforce REST API Developer Guide. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing "sObject Rows" entity.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
This means that we want to subscribe to an Account object with ID 0015i000006JHL1AAO, and we want to fetch only the Name and Website properties of the object. We can see in the documentation that sObject Rows entity requires sObject and id as path parameters to define which object we want to fetch the data from.
That’s why we need to define the sObject and id properties inside the path key in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters (in this example it would be fields) will be parsed as query parameters.
The Final URL is /services/data/v54.0/sobjects/Account/0015i000006JHL1AAO
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Salesforce.
### 3. Publishing an Entity to Salesforce
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Salesforce Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the action you want the publisher to do to Salesforce.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also add any transformers to manipulate the data into anything you need before submitting it to Salesforce.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support POST, PUT, PATCH and DELETE methods when writing/publishing data to Salesforce.
**Action**
We support publishing to most Salesforce endpoints. Please refer to the Salesforce REST API Developer Guide page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
Please look at the example below. For example, we want to update the name and website of a specific account object. Please select PATCH as the method and "sObject – Update a Record" as the action of the publisher.
The documentation describes that we need sObject and id as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide sObject and id properties into the path property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in the Outgoing Configuration. And you can put the payload you want to send to Salesforce into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the required data.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Salesforce with URL /services/data/v54.0/sobjects/Account/0015i000006JHL1AAO and below request body.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Salesforce.
# Salsify
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/salsify
Connect Alumio to Salsify.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Salsify API Reference](https://developers.salsify.com/reference)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Salsify
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Salsify
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Salsify
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
* **4.** Common Issue in Salsify
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Salsify
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Salsify HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and Authentication Type.
Please fill the base URI as [https://app.salsify.com/api/v1/orgs/\\\{org\_id\\}](https://app.salsify.com/api/v1/orgs/\\\{org_id\\}) and replace the \{org\_id} with your organization\_id to make this connector working.
(For more information, see [Salsify Oauth Authentication Reference](https://developers.salsify.com/reference/oauth2))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Salsify
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Salsify Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Salsify.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Salsify.
5. Select the Salsify HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Salsify documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Salsify API Reference](https://developers.salsify.com/reference).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Salsify. Please refer to the entities from [Salsify API Reference](https://developers.salsify.com/reference) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Salsify API Reference](https://developers.salsify.com/reference).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Read Record"](https://developers.salsify.com/reference/read-record) entity.
Please note that the \{org\_id} will be filled from the HTTP Client and we replace any ":" into "\_" from Salsify documentation.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "salsify\_id" as a path. That is why we set the "salsify\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{salsify\_id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Salsify with the URL /records/102918
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Salsify.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Salsify
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Salsify Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Salsify entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Salsify.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Salsify endpoints.
Please refer to [Salsify API Reference](https://developers.salsify.com/reference) page.
For example, we want to use ["Delete Product"](https://developers.salsify.com/reference/delete-product). Please select “Delete” as the Action and ["Delete Product"](https://developers.salsify.com/reference/delete-product) as the entity of the publisher.
Please note that the \{org\_id} will be filled from the HTTP Client and we replace any ":" into "\_" from Salsify documentation.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "product\_id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the data.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Salsify with URL /products/123
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Salsify.
### 4. Common Issue in Salsify
Note : Please Read this before creating.
There’s an endpoints which require different clients.
**There is a difference between normal endpoints and Export/Import Endpoints**
The normal Endpoints would looks like this,
[https://app.salsify.com/api/v1/orgs/\{org\_id}/products/](https://app.salsify.com/api/v1/orgs/%7Borg_id%7D/products/)
see the v1 is being used here,
And the Export/Import endpoints look like this
[https://app.salsify.com/api/orgs/\{org\_id}/export\_runs](https://app.salsify.com/api/orgs/%7Borg_id%7D/export_runs)
See the V1 is not there anymore.
In this case we decided the Developer/user to create 2 clients for himself with different URI, one of the Client will looks like this :
This is client for normal Entity like products and other, and this :
This is the client for Export/Import entity used, in this case whenever user want to use Export/Import user have to use different client from the normal one.
**Theres a endpoints that we do not support at the moment**
[https://salsify-dandelion.s3-external-1.amazonaws.com](https://salsify-dandelion.s3-external-1.amazonaws.com/)
This is one of the Endpoints that we do not support at the moment, the purpose of this endpoints is to create a mount point, and then import the file to.
So in order to use this Endpoints, you have to use the normal Prototypes in alumio, or maybe Postman.
# SAP Business One
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sap-business-one
Connect Alumio to SAP Business One (B1).
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Working\_with\_SAP\_Business\_One\_Service\_Layer.pdf](https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Working_with_SAP_Business_One_Service_Layer.pdf)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client SAP Business One
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from SAP Business One
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to SAP Business One
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client SAP Business One
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select SAP B1 HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Username, Password, and CompanyDB name. Select the version of the REST API.
3. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from SAP Business One
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select SAP B1 Subscriber as the subscriber. You can select *SAP B1 Subscriber,* *SAP B1 Subscriber (Service Layer)* or *SAP B1 UDO Subscriber.*
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from SAP B1. Exception for *SAP B1 UDO Subscriber*, you’ll need to input the endpoint into the “End Point (UDO Name)” field.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional), but path and query properties should exist, you can leave them as empty objects).
Refer to their documentation for input query parameters.
* [https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Service%20Layer%20API%20Reference.html](https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Service%20Layer%20API%20Reference.html)
* [https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Working\_with\_SAP\_Business\_One\_Service\_Layer.pdf](https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Working_with_SAP_Business_One_Service_Layer.pdf)
4. Optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from SAP Business One.
5. Select the SAP Business One HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow SAP Business One documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [SAP Business One API Reference](https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Service%20Layer%20API%20Reference.html).
**Entity**
It's the entity you want to subscribe to from SAP Business One. Please refer to the entities from the [SAP Business One API Reference](https://sap.highwaytwo.com/Service%20Layer%20API%20Reference.html) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters based on the SAP Business One API Reference to get the needed entity. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to an entity of Pricelist(id).
The endpoint in SAP Business One uses oData input, so for the endpoint/Pricelist(id), we need to provide the ID value inside the oData key as an array.
Alumio will transform it into /PriceLists(100)
There's an exception for SAP B1 UDO Subscriber. You’ll need to put the Odata path into the corresponding field called “Odata Input for UDO” for this subscriber.
More examples on SAP Business One Odata:
* /v1/Currencies('CNY')
In Alumio we input as
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It's the HTTP Client configuration that you will use to access SAP Business One.
### 3. Publishing Entity to SAP Business One
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select SAP B1 Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the SAP B1 entity where the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any oData data to the request on the key odata.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods for using it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes and transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE Method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most SAP B1 endpoints. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.\
Exception for SAP B1 UDO Subscriber, you must input the endpoint into the “End Point (UDO Name)” field.
* Odata is the odata data of the URL. For example the (id).
* Query is a defined set of data attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
It's the HTTP Client configuration that you will use to access SAP Business One.
# SAP ECC
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sap-ecc
Connect Alumio to SAP ECC.
## Extra information
No Extra information
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP/SOAP Client SAP ECC
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from SAP ECC
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to SAP ECC
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP/SOAP Client SAP ECC
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> SOAP Clients. Create a new SOAP Client.
2. Select SAP ECC SOAP Client as the prototype of the SOAP client.
3. Fill in the WSDL content.
4. Select the SOAP version
5. Select the HTTP Client.
6. You can optionally change the SOAP headers.
7. Save the SOAP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from SAP ECC
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select SAP ECC Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the method you want to subscribe from SAP ECC.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. Select the SAP ECC SOAP Client to use
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from SAP ECC.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow SAP ECC documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on SAP ECC API Reference
**Method**
It’s the method you want to subscribe from SAP ECC. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the SAP ECC API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on SAP ECC API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing using **getCustomerAddresses**.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**SOAP Client**
It’s the SOAP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SAP ECC.
### 3. Publishing Entity to SAP ECC
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select SAP ECC Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the SOAP Client entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to SAP ECC.
5. Also, you can use a Response validator to validate the respond
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
We support publishing to most SAP ECC methods. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the SAP ECC API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more parameters.
**SOAP Client**
It’s the SOAP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SAP ECC.
# SAP S/4 HANA
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sap-s4-hana
Connect Alumio to SAP S/4 HANA via the OData API.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Table of Contents**
1. Setting up HTTP Client SAP S/4 Hana Odata
* Steps
2. Subscribing to Entities from SAP S/4 Hana Odata
* Steps
* General Concept
3. Publishing Entity to SAP S/4 Hana Odata
* Steps
* General Concept
# Setting up HTTP Client SAP S/4 Hana Odata
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select SAP S/4 Hana Odata HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Api Key.
* On the top right, press Save & Continue, after you received the key.
# Subscribing to Entities from SAP S/4 Hana Odata
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select SAP S/4 Hana Odata Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from SAP S/4 Hana Odata.
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the SAP S/4 Hana Odata HTTP Client to use
## General Concept
We follow SAP S/4 Hana Odata documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on SAP S/4 Hana Odata API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from SAP S/4 Hana Odata. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from SAP S/4 Hana Odata API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on SAP S/4 Hana Odata API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Read Bank by Details
That’s why we need to define the **BankCountry, and BankInternalID** property inside the **odata** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. The properties inside **path** parameters will be parsed as path parameters. The properties inside **payload** parameters will be parsed as payload. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field.
/odata/sap/API\_BANKDETAIL\_SRV/A\_BankDetail(BankCountry='US',BankInternalID='444444')
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SAP S/4 Hana Odata.
# Publishing Entity to SAP S/4 Hana Odata
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select SAP S/4 Hana Odata Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the SAP S/4 Hana Odata entity you want the data to be published.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP Patch method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most SAP S/4 Hana Odata. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from SAP S/4 Hana Odata API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more odata parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Add new entity to related to\_BatchPlant. Please select “Create” as the action and “Add new entity to related to\_BatchPlant” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to SAP S/4 Hana Odata into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to SAP S/4 Hana Odata with URL
odata/sap/API\_BATCH\_SRV/Batch(Material=%27Polyester%27,BatchIdentifyingPlant=%27Arsenal%27,Batch=%270234567%27)/to\_BatchText
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SAP S/4 Hana Odata.
# Scayle
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/scayle
Connect Alumio to Scayle.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Scayle API Reference](https://scayle.dev/api/admin/latest)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Scayle
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Scayle
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Scayle
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Scayle
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Scayle HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and API Key.
(For more information, see [Scayle Authentication Reference](https://scayle.dev/en/dev/admin-api/api-authentication))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Scayle
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Scayle Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Scayle HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Scayle.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Scayle.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Scayle documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Scayle API Reference](https://scayle.dev/api/admin/latest).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Scayle.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Scayle. Please refer to the entities from [Scayle API Reference](https://scayle.dev/api/admin/latest) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Scayle API Reference](https://scayle.dev/api/admin/latest) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Products - Get a product"](https://scayle.dev/api/admin/latest/getProduct) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "productIdentifier" as a parameter. That is why we set the "productIdentifier" inside the payload key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Scayle with the URL `/products/141`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Scayle
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Scayle Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Scayle entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP POST method, HTTP PUT method, HTTP PATCH method and HTTP DELETE method on submitting data to Scayle.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Scayle endpoints.
Please refer to [Scayle API Reference](https://scayle.dev/api/admin/latest) page.
For example, we want to update an existing brand. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Brands - Update an existing brand"](https://scayle.dev/api/admin/latest/updateBrand) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a path of "brandId" and a "Request Body". That is why we set the path "Request Body" inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Scayle with URL `/brands/11347`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Scayle.
# Sendcloud
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sendcloud
Connect Alumio to Sendcloud.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Sendcloud API Reference](https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles/360024967012)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Sendcloud
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Sendcloud
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Sendcloud
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Sendcloud
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Sendcloud HTTP Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and Authentication Type
(For more information, see [Sendcloud API Reference](https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles/360024967012))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Sendcloud
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Sendcloud Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Sendcloud.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Sendcloud.
5. Select the Sendcloud HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Sendcloud documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Sendcloud API Reference](https://developer.Sendcloud.com/Sendcloud-api-docs/reference/introduction).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Sendcloud.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Sendcloud. Please refer to the entities from [Sendcloud API Reference](https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles/360024967012) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Sendcloud API Reference](https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles/360024967012).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Get a spesific parcel" entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Sendcloud with the URL /parcels/123
### 3. Publishing Entity to Sendcloud
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Sendcloud Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Sendcloud entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Sendcloud.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Sendcloud endpoints.
Please refer to [Sendcloud API Reference](https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles/360024967012) page.
For example, we want to use "Create parcel (Single & Multiple)". Please select “Create” as the Action and "Create parcel (Single & Multiple)" as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a "Request Body". That is why we set the "Request Body" inside the payload key in the data.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Sendcloud with URL /parcels
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Sendcloud.
# SendGrid
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sendgrid
Connect Alumio to SendGrid.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[SendGrid API Reference]
**SendGrid**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client SendGrid
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select SendGrid HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and API Key.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from SendGrid
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select SendGrid Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from SendGrid.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the SendGrid HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow SendGrid documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on SendGrid API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from SendGrid. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from SendGrid API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on SendGrid API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get Details for an IP Adress entity.
That’s why we need to define the **ip** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get Details for an IP Address.
/v3/send\_ips/ips/\{ip}
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SendGrid.
# Publishing Entity to SendGrid
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select SendGrid Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the SendGrid entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to SendGrid.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most SendGrid endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the SendGrid API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Request CSV file to worker. Please select “Post” as the action and “Request a CSV” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to SendGrid into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to SendGrid with URL /v3/messages/download
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SendGrid.
# Sherpaan
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sherpaan
Connect Alumio to Sherpaan.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://sherpaan.nl/api/](https://sherpaan.nl/api/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Sherpaan
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Sherpaan
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Sherpaan
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Sherpaan
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > SOAP Client. Create a new SOAP Client and select the Sherpaan Soap Client as the prototype of the SOAP Client.
2. Fill in the WSDL URI, SOAP Version, Storage for Cache (Optional), HTTP Client (use Default if none)
3. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Sherpaan
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Sherpaan Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Method you want to subscribe from Sherpaan.
3. (Optional) Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Sherpaan HTTP Client to use for the SOAP Client.
**2.2 General Concept**
We followed the Sherpaan documentation when building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the Sherpaan API Reference.
**Method**
This is the operation you can subscribe to from Sherpaan.
Please refer to the reference in [https://services3.sherpaan.nl/317/Sherpa.asmx](https://services3.sherpaan.nl/317/Sherpa.asmx).
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the required method based on the Sherpaan API Reference, the Request Parameters provided in the JSON Schema, and it will be encoded into XML based on the SOAP Version. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing to the "GetResponse" Method.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded.
So, you can basically add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need.
**SOAP Client**
This is the SOAP Client configuration you will use to access Sherpaan.
### 3. Publishing entity to Sherpaan
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Sherpaan Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Sherpaan Method you want the data to be published to.
3. Select the Sherpaan HTTP Client to use for the SOAP Client.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it.
The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Method**
This is the operation you can subscribe to from Sherpaan. Please refer to the reference in [https://services3.sherpaan.nl/317/Sherpa.asmx](https://services3.sherpaan.nl/317/Sherpa.asmx).
For Methods that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Thread. Please select “Orderinfo”” as the Method of the publisher.
Alumio will send all the data into Sherpaan, here is an example of the Method we just used.
**SOAP Client**
This is the SOAP Client configuration you will use to access Sherpaan.
# Shipstation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/shipstation
Connect Alumio to Shipstation.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client Shipstation
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Shipstation HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, API Key, and API Secret
3. Save.
# Subscribing to Entities from Shipstation
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Shipstation Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Shipstation.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Shipstation HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Shipstation documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Shipstation API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Shipstation. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Shipstation API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Shipstation API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when Retrieve Get Order entity
That’s why we need to define the **orderId** property inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the Get Order entity.
/orders/94113592
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Shipstation.
# Publishing Entity to Shipstation
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Shipstation Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Shipstation entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Shipstation endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Shipstation API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Update Warehouse. Please select “Put” as the action and “Update Warehouse” as the entity of the publisher.
```
PUT /warehouses/warehouseId HTTP/1.1
Host: ssapi.shipstation.com
Authorization: __YOUR_AUTH_HERE__
Content-Type: application/json
{
"warehouseId": 12345,
"warehouseName": "API Ship From Location",
"originAddress": {
"name": "API Warehouse",
"company": "ShipStation",
"street1": "2815 Exposition Blvd",
"street2": null,
"street3": null,
"city": "Austin",
"state": "TX",
"postalCode": "78703",
"country": "US",
"phone": "512-555-5555",
"residential": true,
"addressVerified": null
},
"returnAddress": {
"name": "API Ship From Location",
"company": "ShipStation",
"street1": "2815 Exposition Blvd",
"street2": null,
"street3": null,
"city": "Austin",
"state": "TX",
"postalCode": "78703",
"country": "US",
"phone": "512-555-5555",
"residential": null,
"addressVerified": null
},
"createDate": "2015-07-02T08:38:31.4870000",
"isDefault": true
}
```
You can put the payload you want to send to Shipstation into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Shipstation with URL /warehouses/12345
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Shipstation.
# Shopify
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/shopify
Connect Alumio to Shopify.
## Extra Information
System documentation: [Shopify API Reference](https://forum.alumio.com/\[https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-rest#top]\(https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-rest#top\))
* **1.** Retrieving Shopify Credentials
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Connector Package Documentation
* **2.1** Setting up Shopify HTTP Client
* **2.2** Subscribing to entities from Shopify
* **2.3** Publishing entities to Shopify
* **2.4** Using Query in Alumio
#### 1. Retrieving Shopify Credentials
**1.1 Steps**
1. Go to Shopify Admin.
2. Navigate to: Settings → Apps and sales channels → Develop apps.
3. Enable Allow custom app development.
4. Click Create app.
5. Go to API credentials.
6. Configure Admin API scopes (select the entities you want to access).
7. Save → Install app.
8. Copy the Admin API access token.
You will need this token when configuring the HTTP Client in Alumio.
#### 2. Connector Package Documentation
**2.1. Setting up Shopify HTTP Client**
Before using the Shopify connector, you must create a Shopify App and generate an Admin API access token.
1. In Shopify Admin, create a Custom App: Apps → Develop apps → Create app.
2. After the app is created:
* Go to API credentials
* Configure Admin API scopes
* Save and Install app
* Copy the Admin API access token.
3. In Alumio Dashboard:
* Go to Clients → HTTP Clients
* Create a new HTTP Client
* Select Shopify Client as the prototype.
4. Fill in:
* Base URI (e.g. `https://{store-name}.myshopify.com`)
* X-Shopify-Access-Token (from Shopify),
5. (Optional) Enable request logging for debugging,
6. Save the HTTP Client.
**2.2 Subscribing to entities from Shopify**
1. Go to Connections → Incoming.
2. Create a new Incoming configuration.
3. Select Shopify Subscriber (v/2026-01).
4. Choose the entity you want to subscribe to,
5. (Optional) Add Request Parameters.
6. (Optional) Add an Input Transformer.
7. Select the Shopify HTTP Client.
8. (Optional) Enable pagination if the endpoint supports it.
**General Concept**
The Shopify Subscriber follows the official Shopify REST Admin API.
This allows you to map Alumio entities directly to Shopify endpoints.
**Entity**
The entity represents the Shopify endpoint you want to retrieve data from.
Refer to the Management APIs section in the Shopify API documentation.
**Request Parameters**
Request Parameters define how the request URL is constructed.
There are two main types:
**Path parameters**
Used for dynamic parts of the URL.
Example endpoint:
```
/admin/api/2026-01/products/{id}.json
```
In Alumio, you must provide:
```
{
"path": {
"id": 15630211481925
}
}
```
Final URL:
```
/admin/api/2026-01/products/15630211481925.json
```
***
**Query parameters**
Used for filters and search options.
Example URL:
```
/customers/search.json?query=Bob+country:United+State
```
In Alumio:
```
{
"query": {
"query": "Bob country:United State"
}
}
```
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer added here runs before Request Parameters are applied.
Typical use cases:
* Generating IDs dynamically
* Mapping fields from previous routes
* Normalizing incoming data.
**HTTP Client**
This defines how Alumio authenticates and communicates with Shopify.
Always select the Shopify HTTP Client created earlier.
#### 2.3. Publishing Entities to Shopify
1. Go to Connections → Outgoing.
2. Create a new Outgoing configuration.
3. Select Shopify Publisher (v/2026-01).
4. Choose an Action.
5. Select the Entity.
6. (Optional) Add query parameters.
7. (Optional) Add transformers.
8. Select the Shopify HTTP Client.
**General Concept**
The Publisher sends data from Alumio to Shopify.
**Supported Actions**
* **Create** → HTTP `POST`
* **Update** → HTTP `PUT`
* **Delete** → HTTP `DELETE`
**Entity & Payload Handling**
Some Shopify endpoints require path parameters and payload data.
**Example: Update a Product**
Endpoint:
```
PUT /admin/api/2026-01/products/{product_id}.json
```
In Alumio data:
```
{
"path": {
"product_id": 15630211481925
},
"payload": {
"product": {
"title": "Updated Product Name"
}
}
}
```
***
**Example: Create Discount Code**
Endpoint:
```
POST /admin/api/2026-01/price_rules/{price_rule_id}/discount_codes.json
```
Alumio data:
```
{
"path": {
"price_rule_id": 123456789
},
"payload": {
"discount_code": {
"code": "SUMMER2026"
}
}
}
```
**Data Structure Summary**
* **path** → URL parameters (e.g. `{id}`)
* **query** → URL query string parameters
* **payload** → Request body data
#### 2.4. Query in Alumio
In Alumio, queries are defined as JSON objects.
**Example: Search Customers**
Shopify endpoint:
```
/admin/api/2026-01/customers/search.json?query=Bob+country:United+State
```
Alumio query configuration:
```
{
"query": {
"query": "Bob country:United State"
}
}
```
This query is appended automatically to the request URL.
# Shopify GraphQL
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/shopify-graphql
Connect Alumio to Shopify GraphQL.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Shopify GraphQL API Reference](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-graphql/latest#endpoints-and-queries)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Shopify GraphQL
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing using Shopify GraphQL
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing using Shopify GraphQL
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Shopify GraphQL
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Shopify GraphQL HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URL and X-Shopify Access Token.
(See the [Shopify GraphQL Documentation](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-graphql/latest#authentication)
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
Note : It is recommended to use Alumio Environment variables as the example above
### 2. Subscribing using Shopify GraphQL
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Shopify GraphQL Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the Shopify GraphQL HTTP Client to use.
3. You can optionally change the logging behavior for the Subscriber.
4. Fill any data that you want to request to Shopify GraphQL in the request parameters.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Shopify GraphQL.
6. You can also optionally enable follow pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Shopify GraphQL documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Shopify GraphQL API Reference](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-graphql/latest#endpoints-and-queries).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Shopify GraphQL.
As this Connector Package created Shopify GraphQL only accept POST method for the request.
For example, we want to fetch 5 products data. We can use the queries GQL documentation that Shopify provided
Then we directly fill in the query inside Alumio Request Parameter like
Alumio will send an API request method POST to Shopify GraphQL with URL `/admin/api/2026-01/graphql.json`
### 3. Publishing using Shopify GraphQL
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Shopify GraphQL Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the HTTP Client to use.
3. You can optionally change the logging behavior for the Publisher.
4. Fill any data that you want to send to Shopify GraphQL in the Request Paramaters.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar use case on how to use it.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Shopify GraphQL.
As this Connector Package created Shopify GraphQL only accept POST method for the request.
For example, we want to create a product data. We can refer to the mutation documentation that Shopify provided
Then we directly fill in the mutation query inside Alumio Request Parameter like
If the mutation query contain variables then we can fill them in the Variables section
Please note that the Variables format are in JSON.
Alumio will send an API request method POST to Shopify GraphQL with URL `/admin/api/2026-01/graphql.json`
# Shopline
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/shopline
Connect Alumio to Shopline.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Shopline API Reference](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/JeIKq5Oi?version=v20230901)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
**1.** Setting up HTTP Client Shopline
**1.1** Steps
**2.** Subscribing to entities from Shopline
**2.1** Steps
**2.2** General concept
**3.** Publishing entity to Shopline
**3.1** Steps
**3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Shopline
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Shopline HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step.
3. Fill in the Base URI. Replace \{handle} with your custom application URL
(For more information, see [Shopline Application Management](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/3cv5d7wpfgr6a8z5/cm8x8nyfgwvd4svf?version=v20231201)).
4. Fill in the Token that is generated by your custom application.
5. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the authentication log.
6. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Shopline
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming -> create a new incoming configuration and select "Shopline Admin Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Shopline.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Shopline HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Shopline.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Shopline documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Shopline API Reference](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/JeIKq5Oi?version=v20230901).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Shopline. Please refer to the entities from the [Shopline API Reference](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/JeIKq5Oi?version=v20230901) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Shopline API Reference](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/JeIKq5Oi?version=v20230901).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing to [Product - Bulk Query Products](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/P0FAlOwy?version=v20230901) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can query a single product by setting the "product\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
[Product - Query Single Product](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/GiOQ66py?version=v20230901)
Alumio will then make a request to Shopline with the URL `/admin/openapi/v20230901/products/{product_id}.json`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{product\_id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Shopline.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Shopline
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Shopline Admin Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Shopline entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Shopline.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Shopline endpoints.
Please refer to [Shopline API Reference](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/JeIKq5Oi?version=v20230901) page.
For example, we want to add a new product. Please select “Post” as the Method and [Product - Create Product](https://developer.myshopline.com/docsv2/ec20/cdb180dc069f7d8d6877c0cdffe96f73/7EBTln5x?version=v20230901) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a payload with a root product element. Set that root element inside the payload key.
For example:
```
{
"path": [],
"query": [],
"payload": {
"product": {
"foo": "bar"
}
}
}
```
Alumio will send an API request to Shopline with the URL `/admin/openapi/v20230901/products/products.json`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{product\_id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Shopline.
# Shopware 6
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/shopware-6
Connect Alumio to Shopware 6: HTTP client, subscriber, and publisher.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Shopware 6 API Reference](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/8d53c59b2e6bc-shopware-admin-api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Shopware 6
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Shopware 6
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Shopware 6
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Shopware 6
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Shopware 6 HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID and Client Secret for Client Credential Authentication.
Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, Client Secret, Username and Password for Password Authentication
(For more information, see [Shopware 6 Authentication Reference](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/8e1d78252fa6f-authentication))
4. Click on "Grant access to Shopware 6" and you will be redirected to approve the grant.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Shopware 6
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Shopware 6.5 Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Shopware 6.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Shopware 6 HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Shopware 6.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Shopware 6 documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Shopware 6 API Reference](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/8d53c59b2e6bc-shopware-admin-api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Shopware 6. Please refer to the entities from [Shopware 6 API Reference](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/8d53c59b2e6bc-shopware-admin-api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Shopware 6 API Reference](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/8d53c59b2e6bc-shopware-admin-api) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Product By ID"](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/5909a3d00ce8f-detailed-information-about-a-product-resource) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Shopware 6 with the URL /api/product/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Shopware 6.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Shopware 6
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Shopware 6.5 Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Shopware 6 entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP POST method, HTTP PATCH method and HTTP DELETE method on submitting data to Shopware 6.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Shopware 6 endpoints.
Please refer to [Shopware 6 API Reference](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/8d53c59b2e6bc-shopware-admin-api) page.
For example, we want to add a new contact. Please select “POST” as the Method and ["Product"](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/1c10c832ff905-create-a-new-product-resources) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a body data for the request. That is why we set the body data inside the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Shopware 6 with URL /api/product
Another example is when we want to delete a contact. Please select “DELETE” as the Method and ["Product"](https://shopware.stoplight.io/docs/admin-api/74c20b1f1e46d-delete-a-product-resource) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Shopware 6 with the URL /api/product/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Shopware 6.
# Sinch Mailjet
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sinch-mailjet
Connect Alumio to Sinch Mailjet.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Sinch Mailjet API Reference](https://dev.mailjet.com/email/reference/overview/)
### Setting up HTTP Client Sinch Mailjet
**Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Connections > HTTPS (API). Create a new HTTP Client and select Sinch Mailjet HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Api Key, and Secret Key.
### Subscribing to Entities from Sinch Mailjet
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations-> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Sinch Mailjet Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the method and entity you want to subscribe to from Sinch Mailjet.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Sinch Mailjet HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
We follow Sinch Mailjet documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Sinch Mailjet API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Sinch Mailjet. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Sinch Mailjet API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Sinch Mailjet API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{contact\_id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
That’s why we need to define **contact\_ID** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the coupon entity.
`/v3/REST/contact/123123123123`
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Sinch Mailjet.
### Publishing Entity to Sinch Mailjet
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations-> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Sinch MailjetPublisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Sinch Mailjet entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method),Put (HTTP PUTmethod), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Sinch Mailjet endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Sinch Mailjet API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Contact. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a new contact” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Sinch Mailjet into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Sinch Mailjet with URL `/v3/REST/contact`
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Sinch Mailjet.
# Skunexus
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/skunexus
Connect Alumio to Skunexus.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Skunexus API Reference](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Skunexus
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Skunexus
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Skunexus
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Skunexus
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Skunexus HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Email, and Password.
(For more information, see [Skunexus Authentication Reference](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/#/auth/loginUser))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Skunexus
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Skunexus Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Skunexus.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Skunexus.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the Skunexus HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Skunexus documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Skunexus API Reference](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Skunexus. Please refer to the entities from [Skunexus API Reference](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Skunexus API Reference](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Find product by ID"](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/#/products/getProductById) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Skunexus with the URL /products/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Skunexus.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Skunexus
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Skunexus Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Skunexus entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method) and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Skunexus.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Skunexus endpoints.
Please refer to [Skunexus API Reference](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/) page.
For example, we want to add a new product. Please select “Create” as the Action and ["Adds new product to the system"](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/#/products/addProduct) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a "Request Body". That is why we set the "Request Body" inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Skunexus with URL /products
Another example is when we want to delete a product by id. Please select “Delete” as the Action and ["Deletes product by ID"](https://demo-stage.skunexus.com/docs/#/products/deleteProduct) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Skunexus with the URL /products/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Skunexus.
# Snowflake
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/snowflake
Connect Alumio to Snowflake.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
**Snowflake**
# Setting up HTTP Client Snowflake
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Snowflake HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Choose the Authentication Type.
* External Oauth2
* Fill in the Client ID, Client Secret, Username, Password, Token URL, and Scopes (optional)
* Snowflake Oauth2
* Fill in the Client ID, Client Secret, Token URL, and Scopes (Optional)
3. Press “Grant Access to Snowflake”
4. Save
# Subscribing to Entities from Snowflake
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Snowflake Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Snowflake.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Snowflake HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Snowflake documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Snowflake API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Snowflake. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Snowflake API Reference page. (For more information about Entity Check Extra Notes Below)
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Snowflake API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when making a statement entity
The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field.
/api/v2/statements
Heres the Payload that we use
```
{
"path": [],
"query": [],
"payload": {
"schema": "LOCATION",
"timeout": 60,
"database": "TEST_DB",
"statement": "select * from MAIN",
"warehouse": "COMPUTE_WH",
"resultSetMetaData": {
"format": "json"
}
}
}
```
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Snowflake.
# Publishing Entity to Snowflake
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Snowflake Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Snowflake entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Snowflake endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Snowflake API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Make Statements. Please select “Statements” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Snowflake into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Snowflake with URL /api/v2/statements
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Snowflake.
# Extra Notes
This is the Endpoint on Subscriber
```
"endpoint": [
"POST###/api/v2/statements/",
"GET###/api/v2/statements/{{statementHandle}}"
],
"Names": [
"Statements",
"Statements (w/statementHandle)"
]
```
This is the Endpoint on Publisher
```
"enum": [
"/api/v2/statements/",
"/api/v2/statements/{{statementHandle}}/cancel"
],
"enumNames": [
"Statements",
"Statements (w/statementHandle/cancel)"
]
```
# Integration guide
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/spryker/integration-guide
Guide: integrate Spryker with Alumio using prebuilt sFTP routes.
Spryker facilitates companies to develop astute transactional business models in enterprise marketplaces, B2B & B2C. One of the best cloud-native platform-as-a-service solutions, it helps developers, marketers, and sales teams alike. Alumio, on the other hand, is touted as one of the best iPaaS solutions that make integrations a cakewalk. Integrating Spryker with Alumio is as easy as it can get, and anyone can do it within minutes!
This guide takes a swipe at how to integrate Spryker with sFTPs. For understanding, we will consider four integrations which are created and we will tour through them one by one. Out of these four, three are **unique entities** while one replicates **bulk capabilities**.
Two routes retrieve data from the SFTPs and send them to Spryker - **Merchant Data from sFTP to Spryker** and **Product Offer from sFTP to Spryker**.
Also, the product data routes are duplicated (or replicated) to show batch processing- **\[Bulk] Product Offer from sFTP to Spryker**.
There are the four integrations that we will discuss in this guide.
## **How To Integrate Spryker With Alumio?**
To begin with, go to **Connections** (on the left panel) of Alumio.
**Step X1:** Click on **Routes** (under **Connections**).
**Step X2:** Utilize the filter Name and search for **Spryker**.
**Step X3:** The four routes created for Spryker will be shown.
### **Merchant Data from sFTP to Spryker**
**Step 1:** Click on **Merchant Data from sFTP to Spryker**
* You will observe that there are routes consisting of **Incoming Configuration** as well as **Outgoing Configuration**. While the former is responsible for data import, the latter is responsible for data export.
* There is also an option to **Activate retrying of failed tasks**. Should you choose to activate it, you can customize its settings on various parameters such as **Number of attempted retries, Retry interval in minutes, Statuses (Failed/Skipped), Enable realtime processing.**
**Note:** If you choose to enable realtime processing, you simply need to establish data imports and the export will happen automatically from the data imports.
Here’s how to do that.
#### **Enabling Real Time Processing (Going The Manual Way)**
**Step 1:** Go to Connections and click on **Routes** again and run the Incoming Configuration (**sFTP- Get Merchant Data**).
**Step 2:** Click on **Logs** and then on the **refresh button** at the top right corner.
**Step 3:** You will observe that a new process has started. Click on the **Logs** button for the new process. The logs will open and you will see the **tasks that are created, Alumio exercising API calls to the end-points which are accepted by Spryker, the finished tasks,** etc)
**Step 4:** You can also take a deeper look at the incoming configuration by clicking on the **Edit** button.
* You can view the **Subscriber, Filesystem, Patterns** (for example, merchant\_data.csv), **Parser,** etc.
* There is also an option to **Limit the number of files** and **Limit the number of parsed items.** The latter can come handy if the file size is very big. For example, if you want to read 10,000 files at a time, then it can be configured from here (**Limit the number of parsed items)**.
* You can also add **Plugins** for the incoming configuration to activate some extra functionalities whenever required.
* There is also an option to **Add Entity Transformers.**
**Step 5:** Now, click on **Tasks** (on the left panel). You can see all the merchant tasks listed there.
#### **Not Enabling Real Time Processing**
Let’s consider a scenario where we do not **Enable real time processing**. In this case, when you pull some information, new tasks will be reflected when you go back to the **Dashboard**. If you open it, all merchant data will pop up in a list.
* If you open a task and click on **Entity Data**, you can visualize the data pulled from the CSV, translated to a JSON format by Alumio. It makes data processing easy for the data strip when the router starts functioning.
Here’s how to process it manually.
**Step 1:** Click on **Routes** (under **Connections**).
**Step 2:** Click on the “…” **button** on the top-right corner and click on **Run Route**.
**Step 3:** Click on **Logs** and then on the **refresh button** at the top-right corner.
**Step 4:** You will see that tasks with status (NEW) disappear from the list (or queue) as they are getting processed and eventually being sent to Spryker.
**Step 5:** Deactivate the **New** filter (top-left corner) and you will see that the tasks have been completed.
**Step 6:** Open one of the tasks to verify and go to **Export Messages**. You will see that the specific merchant data has been sent to Spryker.
If you observe closely, sometimes you will notice that the data that was sent to Spryker is slightly different from the data that was originally retrieved from the CSV.
To mitigate this, you can map the data from the incoming schema to where it is destined for using a transformer. Here is how to do it!
**Step 6.1:** Simply copy the **Entity Data.**
**Step 6.2:** Click on **Routes** (under **Connections**) and go to **Outgoing configuration** for the merchant data.
**Step 6.3:** Head for **Entity Transformers** and click on **View configuration** underneath it. You can visualize the transformer that has been configured here.
There might be some data transformers reflecting move actions.
**Step 6.4:** For the Value mapper transformer, you will see an opening\_hours key, for which you need to implement the transformer called **Json: Decode to array**.
**Note:** This transformer is designed to take a Json string and convert it to an array, as required by Spryker.
**Step 6.5:** If you wish to test the transformer, paste the \*\*Entity Data (\*\*that you had copied on step 6.1 ) under **Transformer tester > Entity Data** (on the left) and hit the **Run Test** button.
You will see that the incoming data is converted to an array which will eventually be sent to Spryker.
### **Order Data from Spryker to sFTP**
**Step 1:** Repeat the steps X1, X2, and X3 (mentioned in the beginning)
**Step 2:** Click on **Order Data from Spryker to sFTP**
**Step 3:** Once again, you will come across the **Incoming Configuration** and **Outgoing Configuration** to pull the order information from Spryker and create the orders on sFTP respectively.
The entire process will run automatically if you **Enable real-time processing**.
**Step 4:** Click on **Scheduled Jobs**. There will be a scheduled job present attached to this route - **Order Data from Spryker to SFTP- Incoming & Outgoing**.
From here, you can set the time interval for the tasks executed. For example, you can set it at 1 minute, 2 minutes, and so on.
**Step 5:** Now, click on **Logs.** Here, you can view all the tasks that are being executed for the time interval you have set.
### **Product Offer from sFTP to Spryker**
**Step 1:** Repeat the steps X1, X2, and X3 (mentioned in the beginning).
**Step 2:** Click on the **Incoming Configuration** of **Product Offer from sFTP to Spryker** to begin with.
**Step 3:** Click on the “…” **button** on the top-right corner and click on **Run Route**. A pop-up will appear at the top which says “**Subscriber has been consumed**”.
**Step 3:** Now, click on the **Dashboard** (on the left panel) of Alumio. You will see that there are zero **New Tasks** being shown.
If you click on **Click to view more information** on the pop-up being shown above. You will see every iota of data is being filtered since the Delta Storage mechanism is being implemented (in this scenario). It is used to detect changes.
**Step 4:** Click on the **Storages** (on the left panel) of Alumio and then on **Storages** again\*\*.\*\*
**Step 5:** Click on **\[Spryker PoC] Consumed Product Offers** and open it.
**Step 6:** Next, click on the **Entities**. It lists all the product offers. If you open any of the **Identifier**s, you will see it encapsulates the entirety of data.
Now, it compares whether there has been a change in the data. If yes, it will filter the data, or else, it will simply update the storage and create a new dial.
For a test run, here is what you can do.
For example,
1. You can change the value of the variable **quantity\_max** to **14** and click on the **Save** button. This will make the identifier data different from what had been retrieved from the CSV.
2. You can also delete an **Identifier** of your choice.
**Step 7:** Now, you can revisit the Incoming Configuration (step 2) and re-run it. Subsequently, go back to the **Dashboard** again. Now, you will see two **New Tasks** have been created, courtesy to our changes in one identifier and the deletion of the other.
**Step 8:** On clicking the **New Tasks**, you can view them. Click on the **Route** for the first one. Click on the “…” **button** on the top-right corner and click on **Run Route** to run it.
**Step 9:** Go back to the Tasks segment and deactivate the **New** filter (top-left corner) and hit the **refresh button** at the top-right corner. Now, you will see that the task is being processed
**Step 10:** Revisit the **Route** (step 8) and click on **Logs** to view the tasks that are being processed. The frequency of the tasks accomplished is dependent on the systems being communicated.
To speed up the process, you can implement Build Processing since it is supported by Spryker. Instead of transferring entities separately, this approach makes it possible to send the entire file at once or in batches **(in bulk)**.
### **\[Bulk] sFTP- Get Product Offer Data**
**Step 1:** Repeat the steps X1, X2, and X3 (mentioned in the beginning).
**Step 2:** Click on the **Incoming Configuration** of **Product Offer from sFTP to Spryker** and then run it by clicking on the “…” **button** > **Run Route**.
**Step 3:** Go to **Tasks** (on the left panel) of Alumio. You will see that a new task has been created.
**Step 4:** Click on the task (the **Identifier**) to open it. Then, click on **Entity Data.** Here, you will see that it contains all the offers wrapped under it and it has been transformed to the data format that Spryker requires.
**Step 5:** Click on **Connections > Outgoing**. Click on **\[Bulk] Product Price - Create**. Scrolling down, you will see that it has a transformer (**List: split into chunks**) which is responsible for splitting the list into chunks.
You can change the **Length** field as per your requirements (let’s say 200).
**Step 6:** Run the route again by repeating (**Step 2)**. Open the task again **(Step 4)** and click on the **Export Messages** and check the data logs. You will see that there are multiple API calls with 200 products each as per the length set by you **(Step 5)**.
For example if there are 1018 products, there will be **6 API calls** with **5 of them having 200 products each** while the **last one will have the remaining 18 products**.
## **Closing Note!**
Alumio is an industry-leader when it comes to providing top-notch iPaaS solutions to help companies and businesses integrate numerous systems seamlessly while having a centralized control and management for those. As this guide shows, whether it is one-to-one or one-to-many integrations, bulk-processing, real-time integrations, etc Alumio. To learn more, stay tuned to our other documentations and guides and feel free to contact our experts today!
# Connector reference
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/spryker/reference
Connect Alumio to Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange: HTTP client, subscriber, and publisher.
## Extra information
System documentation: Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange API Reference
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Username, Password.
3. You can optionally enable caching the token to save the token(using Alumio storage).
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange.
5. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
6. Select the Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange API Reference.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange. Please refer to the entities from Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange API Reference.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange API Reference.
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Get Item of product-abstracts" entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange with the URL /dynamic-entity/product-abstracts/1234
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support POST, PUT and PATCH methods on submitting data to Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange endpoints.
For example, we want to save collection of product-abstracts. Please select "POST" for the method then "Save collection of product-abstracts" as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we need to add data. So we put the data inside the payload key in the Alumio Data.
Alumio will send an API request to Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange with URL /dynamic-entity/product-abstracts
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange.
# SPS Commerce
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sps-commerce
Connect Alumio to SPS Commerce.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**SPS Commerce**
# Setting up HTTP Client for SPS Commerce
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select SPS Commerce HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI (Example : [https://api.spscommerce.com](https://api.spscommerce.com)).
3. Fill in the Client ID and Secret.
4. Press “Grant access to SPS Commerce”
5. Save and Continue.
# Subscribing to Entities from SPS Commerce
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select SPS Commerce Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from SPS Commerce.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the SPS Commerce HTTP Client to use
## General Concept
We follow SPS Commerce documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on SPS Commerce API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from SPS Commerce. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from SPS Commerce API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on SPS Commerce API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing “Get Shipping Labels by label ID”
That’s why we need to define the **label-id** property inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. The properties inside **payload** parameters will be parsed as payload. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field.
/label/v1/1234567
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SPS Commerce.
# Publishing Entity to SPS Commerce
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select SPS Commerce Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the SPS Commerce entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most SPS Commerce Command. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the SPS Commderce API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For Endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Delete Transaction. Please select “Delete Transaction” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the Path object as **file-path.**
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access SPS Commerce.
# Square
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/square
Connect Alumio to Square.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
# Setting up HTTP Client Square
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Square HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Authentication Type
3. If you Picked Token, Fill in the Token.
4. If you Picked the Oauth2 Code, Fill in the Client ID, Client Secret, Code and Scopes (optional).
# Subscribing to Entities from Square
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Square Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Square.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Square HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Square documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Square API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Square. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Square API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Square API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define **group\_id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field.
/v2/customers/groups/6X2498EPBWFMZW7RQJW4ZFZZAA
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Square.
# Publishing Entity to Square
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Square Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Square entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Square endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Square API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Delete Customer Group. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Delete Customer Group” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Square into payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Square with URL /v2/customers/groups/6X2498EPBWFMZW7RQJW4ZFZZAA
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Square.
# Extra Note
## Payload in Incoming
For Incoming that is using POST Method.
Ex: Search Vendors
in the docs they give example on payload like this.
Take a look at the Data given.
this will give an error, where the query is unknown.
Instead remove the Query like this.
```
{
"filter": {
"status": [
"ACTIVE"
]
},
"sort": {
"field": "CREATED_AT",
"order": "ASC"
}
}
```
Or in Alumio like this
```
{
"path": [],
"query": [],
"payload": {
"filter": {
"status": [
"ACTIVE"
]
},
"sort": {
"field": "CREATED_AT",
"order": "ASC"
}
}
}
```
# Squarespace
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/squarespace
Connect Alumio to Squarespace.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Squarespace**
# Setting up HTTP Client Squarespace
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Squarespace HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Authentication Type
* Oauth2
* Fill in Client ID, Client Secret, Authorize URL (optional), Access Token URL (optional), and Scopes.
* Press “Grant access to Squarespace”.
* Token
* Fill in the Api Key
3. Save.
# Subscribing to Entities from Squarespace
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Squarespace Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Squarespace.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Squarespace HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Squarespace documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Squarespace API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Squarespace. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Squarespace API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Squarespace API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when calling “Retrieve a specific order” entity
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the Retrieve a specific order.
/commerce/orders/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Squarespace.
# Publishing Entity to Squarespace
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Squarespace Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Squarespace entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Squarespace endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Squarespace API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that drequire an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Product. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a Product” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Squarespace into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Squarespace with URL /commerce/products
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Squarespace.
# Startdeliver
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/startdeliver
Connect Alumio to Startdeliver.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Startdeliver API Reference]
**Startdeliver**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Startdeliver
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Startdeliver HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Choose the Authentication Type, and Api key.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Startdeliver
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Startdeliver Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Startdeliver .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Startdeliver HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Startdeliver documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Startdeliver API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Startdeliver . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Startdeliver API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Startdeliver API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Fetch a single user with id.
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Fetch a single user with id.
/api/v1/user/1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Startdeliver .
# Publishing Entity to Startdeliver
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Startdeliver Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Startdeliver entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Startdeliver .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Startdeliver endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Startdeliver API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new customer. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create new customer” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Startdeliver into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Startdeliver with URL /client/v4/zones/Alumio/purge\_cache
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Startdeliver .
# Storyblok
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/storyblok
Connect Alumio to Storyblok.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[ Put topics about this connector package here.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Storyblok API Reference]
# Setting up HTTP Client Storyblok
# Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Storyblok HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Choose the Authentication Type.
* Content Delivery API V2 (Token) : Fill in the Token
* Management API (Personal Access Token) : Fill in the Personal Access Token
Note : Storyblok has 2 API, make sure put the right Base URI with the correct Authentication API based on the Documentation by Storyblok.
3. Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Storyblok
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Storyblok Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Storyblok .
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Storyblok HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Storyblok documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Storyblok API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Storyblok . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Storyblok API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Storyblok API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Retrieve a Single Story (Content Delivery API).
That’s why we need to define the id property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Retrieve a Single Story.
/v2/cdn/stories/AUWNX51
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Storyblok .
# Publishing Entity to Storyblok
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Storyblok Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Storyblok entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Storyblok .
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), , and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Storyblok endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Storyblok API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a Task using Management API. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a Task (Management API)” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Storyblok into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Storyblok with URL /v1/spaces/spaceidinput/tasks/
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Storyblok .
# Streak
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/streak
Connect Alumio to Streak.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Streak API Reference]
**Streak**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Streak
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Streak HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, and Username.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Streak
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Streak Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Streak .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Streak HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Streak documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Streak API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Streak. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Streak API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Streak . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Streak API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Streak API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing userKey.
That’s why we need to define the **userKey** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Get User.
/api/v1/users/agx...
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Streak .
# Publishing Entity to Streak
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Streak Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Streak entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Streak .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Content-Type and Request Encoder**
We Support publishing Streak endpoints with form-urlencoded format and json format, Make sure Content-Type for Header and Request Encoder is the same format.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Streak endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Streak API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a stage. Please select “Put” as the action and “Create a stage” as the entity of the publisher.
curl --request PUT \
\--url [https://api.streak.com/api/v1/pipelines/pipelineKey/stages](https://api.streak.com/api/v1/pipelines/pipelineKey/stages) \
\--header 'accept: application/json' \
\--header 'content-type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded' \
\--data name=string
You can put the payload you want to send to Streak into the payload property in the data, don’t forget that this endpoint use application/x-www-form-urlencoded, that’s why we set the Content-Type and Request Encoder to **Form URL Encoded**
Alumio will send an API request to Streak with URL /api/v1/pipelines/……./stages
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Streak .
# Stripe
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/stripe
Connect Alumio to Stripe.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Stripe API Reference](https://docs.stripe.com/api)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Stripe
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Stripe
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Stripe
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Stripe
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Stripe HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI and API key.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Stripe
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Stripe Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Stripe.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Stripe HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Stripe.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Stripe documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Stripe API Reference](https://docs.stripe.com/api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Stripe. Please refer to the entities from [Stripe API Reference](https://docs.stripe.com/api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Stripe API Reference](https://docs.stripe.com/api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve a tax code by subscribing ["GetTaxIdsId"](https://docs.stripe.com/api/tax_codes/object) entity.
`Note : We currently use OperationId for the entity, if you need a different label on the entity please call our support`
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "id" as parameters. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Stripe with the URL /v1/tax\_ids/txcd\_99999999
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Stripe.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Stripe
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Stripe Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Stripe entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Stripe.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Stripe endpoints.
Please refer to [Stripe API Reference](https://docs.stripe.com/api) page.
For example, we want to delete a customer. Please select “Delete” as the Method and ["DeleteCustomersCustomer"](https://docs.stripe.com/api/customers/delete) as the entity of the publisher.
`Note : We currently use OperationId for the entity, if you need a different label on the entity please call our support`
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "customer" as parameters. That is why we set the "customer" inside the path key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Stripe with URL `/v1/customers/cus_Q3svH9nprXKz9u`
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Stripe.
# SuperOffice
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/superoffice
Connect Alumio to SuperOffice.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://docs.superoffice.com/en/api/reference/restful/rest/index.html](https://docs.superoffice.com/en/api/reference/restful/rest/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client SuperOffice
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from SuperOffice
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to SuperOffice
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client SuperOffice
**1.1 Steps**
1. Before we begin, please make sure that our Oauth redirect URL (Settings > Info > Environment > 0Auth Redirect URL) is whitelisted in your SuperOffice system.
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select the SuperOffice HTTP Client as the prototype for the HTTP Client.
3. Fill in the Environment, Customer ID, Client ID, and Client Secret. (For more information, see [SuperOffice Authentication Guide](https://docs.superoffice.com/apps/getting-started/what-api-to-use.html)). Alumio uses interactive authentication to connect.
4. Click “Grant Access to SuperOffice”.
5. Fill in the username and password in the newly opened tab, then proceed.
6. The key will show up when you get back into Alumio Dashboard.
7. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from SuperOffice
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select SuperOffice Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from SuperOffice.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from SuperOffice.
5. Select the SuperOffice HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow SuperOffice documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [SuperOffice API Reference](https://docs.superoffice.com/en/apps/getting-started/what-api-to-use.html).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from SuperOffice. Please refer to the entities from the [SuperOffice API Reference](https://docs.superoffice.com/en/apps/getting-started/what-api-to-use.html) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the SuperOffice API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters when subscribing to "Gets an AppointmentEntity object."
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
We can refer to how SuperOffice defines the endpoint in their documentation:
That is how we set the id in the path. It will be sent to SuperOffice as /Appointment/1 from Alumio
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access SuperOffice.
### 3. Publishing Entity to SuperOffice
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select SuperOffice Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the SuperOffice entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method, HTTP Patch, and HTTP Delete method.
**Entity**
Please refer to the entities from [SuperOffice API Reference](https://docs.superoffice.com/en/apps/getting-started/what-api-to-use.html) page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to Update a Contact. Please select “Put” as the action and “Update the existing ContactEntity” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to SuperOffice into the payload key in the data. And you need to specify a path key called “id” with the contact id you want to update, such as below.
Alumio will send an API request to SuperOffice with PUT method and URL of /api/v1/Contact/611
* Path is the path data of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of data attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access SuperOffice.
# Sylius
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/sylius
Connect Alumio to Sylius.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://docs.sylius.com/en/latest/book/api/index.html](https://docs.sylius.com/en/latest/book/api/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up the Sylius HTTP Client
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Sylius
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entities to Sylius
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the Sylius HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Sylius HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI
3. Choose the “Authentication Type”. You can use “Request Authentication” (JWT Authentication) or “Bearer Token” for this part.
For more information regarding authentication please refer to this [https://docs.sylius.com/en/latest/book/api/authorization.html](https://docs.sylius.com/en/latest/book/api/authorization.html) page.
4. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Sylius HTTP Client.
5. If you choose “Request Authentication, " you’ll need to fill in Username and Password. For “Bearer Token” you’ll need to fill in the Token.
6. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
7. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Sylius
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Sylius Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Sylius.
3. Add the public key and secret key.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
5. If necessary, you can add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something you need.
6. Select the Sylius HTTP Client to use.
7. You can add a pagination feature to allow Alumio to fetch a paginated entity.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Sylius documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on Sylius API Reference.
**Entity**
This is the entity you want to subscribe to from Sylius. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Sylius API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on Sylius API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters when subscribing to "Retrieves All Administrator"
Another example is when we want to retrieve a single customer, we can use the Entity "Retrieves Customer by ID".
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
We can add the id into Path in the Request Parameters, and Alumio will request with URL /admin/customers/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. You can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need if necessary, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Sylius.
### 3. Publishing entity to Sylius
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Sylius Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Sylius entity where you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also add any transformers to manipulate the data into anything you need before submitting it to Sylius.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) entities.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Sylius endpoints. Please refer to the entities from the Sylius API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, when we want to create a product, we select the Action "Create" and the Entity "Product".
We also need to provide payload in the data like
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will request this to Sylius with the URL /admin/products
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Sylius.
# Symson
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/symson
Connect Alumio to Symson.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://dev-data.symson.com/swagger/index.html](https://dev-data.symson.com/swagger/index.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Symson
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Symson
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Symson
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Symson
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Symson HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL and API key.
3. Save and this HTTP client will be ready to use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Symson
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Symson Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Symson.
3. Add any specific request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You could also add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something you need later on.
5. Select the Symson HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Symson documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on Symson API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from Symson. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Symson API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Symson API Reference.
You can see in the example below how we add Request Parameters into Symson "GET all Customers":
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will send the request to Symson as /api/v1/customers?pageSize=1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Symson.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Symson
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Symson Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to perform on the data.
3. Pick the Symson entity that will receive the published data.
4. You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
5. You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Symson.
6. Select the Symson HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from the route, from transformers in the outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the PUT and DELETE method.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Symson endpoints. Please refer to the Symson API Reference page.
For example, we want to Insert/Update a Product. Please select “Put” as the method and “INSERT or UPDATE a Product” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Symson into the payload key in the data as an example:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Symson as /api/v1/products
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Symson.
# Tableau
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/tableau
Connect Alumio to Tableau.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest\_api/en-us/REST/rest\_api\_ref.htm](https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest_api/en-us/REST/rest_api_ref.htm)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Tableau
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Tableau
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Tableau
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the HTTP Client Tableau
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select the Tableau Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL, Content URL, Username, and Password.
3. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Tableau
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select the Tableau Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Tableau.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity. Please refer to an example in the General Concept section.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Tableau.
5. Select the Tableau HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Tableau documentation for building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Tableau API Reference](https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest_api/en-us/REST/rest_api_ref.htm).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from Tableau. Please refer to the entities from the [Tableau API Reference](https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest_api/en-us/REST/rest_api_ref.htm) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Tableau API Reference.
Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Query Flows for a Site entity. We can see in the documentation there are some parameter values in path URL such as api-version and site-id, our system provides support for tableau api version 3.6 and the site-id is provided by the HTTP Client.
We can set values like the request parameter below:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Tableau.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Tableau
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Tableau Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Tableau entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support POST, PUT, and DELETE methods for submitting data to Tableau.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Tableau endpoints. Please refer to [Tableau API Reference](https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest_api/en-us/REST/rest_api_ref.htm) page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to Send [Create Group](https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest_api/en-us/REST/rest_api_ref_users_and_groups.htm#create_group).
You can put the payload you want to send to Tableau into a payload key in the data. Find below an example of the required data.
Note: for now we only support JSON payload for this connector and a reference on how to convert XML to JSON can be found at [https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest\_api/en-us/REST/rest\_api\_concepts\_fundamentals.htm#using\_JSON\_with\_the\_REST\_API](https://help.tableau.com/current/api/rest_api/en-us/REST/rest_api_concepts_fundamentals.htm#using_JSON_with_the_REST_API)
And, here is example data for the publisher :
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Tableau.
# Teamleader
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/teamleader
Connect Alumio to Teamleader.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Teamleader API Reference](https://developer.teamleader.eu/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Teamleader
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Teamleader
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Teamleader
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Teamleader
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "Teamleader HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI
3. Choose the “Authentication Type”, you can use “Interactive” (Oauth 2 Authentication) or “Bearer Token” for this part.
For more information regarding authentication please refer to this [https://developer.teamleader.eu/#/introduction/authentication](https://developer.teamleader.eu/#/introduction/authentication) page.
4. If you choose “Interactive” then you’ll need to fill Client id and Client secret.
* Press “Grant Access to Teamleader”, it will be redirecting you to Teamleader page.
* Please authorize application by sign in using your credential.
5. For “Bearer Token” you’ll need fill the Token.
6. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
7. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Teamleader
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Teamleader Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Teamleader.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Teamleader.
5. Select the Teamleader HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Teamleader documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Teamleader API Reference](https://developer.teamleader.eu/).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Teamleader.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Teamleader. Please refer to the entities from [Teamleader API Reference](https://developer.teamleader.eu/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Teamleader API Reference](https://developer.teamleader.eu/) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Get details for a single contact by ID"](https://developer.teamleader.eu/#/reference/crm/contacts/contacts.info) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "id" as a body. That is why we set the "id" inside the payload key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Teamleader with the URL /contacts.info
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Teamleader
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Teamleader Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Teamleader entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method) on submitting data to Teamleader.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Teamleader endpoints.
Please refer to [Teamleader API Reference](https://developer.teamleader.eu/) page.
For example, we want to add a new product. Please select “Create” as the Action and ["Add a new contact"](https://developer.teamleader.eu/#/reference/crm/contacts/contacts.add) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires an attributes. That is why we set the attributes inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Teamleader with URL /contacts.info
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Teamleader.
# Timely
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/timely
Connect Alumio to Timely.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Timely API Reference]
**Timely**
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Timely
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Timely HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, and Client Secret (Token URL and Authorize are set on Default).
* Press, Grant access to Timely and Key will be retrieved.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from Timely
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Timely Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from Timely .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the Timely HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Timely documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Timely API Reference.
**Method**
It’s the Method you want to subscribe from Timely. Based on the Method, the Entity will change. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Timely API Reference page.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Timely . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Timely API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Timely API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing All Reports.
That’s why we need to define the **account\_id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on All Reports.
/1.1/61234/reports
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Timely .
# Publishing Entity to Timely
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Timely Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the Timely entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to Timely .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Timely endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Timely API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a client. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a client” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Timely into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Timely with URL /1.1/123123/clients
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Timely .
# TopDesk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/topdesk
Connect Alumio to TopDesk.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[TopDesk API Reference]
# Setting up HTTP Client TopDesk
## Steps
* In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select TopDesk HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
* Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password.
* Save the Client for use later.
# Subscribing to Entities from TopDesk
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select TopDesk Subscriber as the subscriber.
* Select the entity you want to subscribe from TopDesk .
* Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
* You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
* Select the TopDesk HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow TopDesk documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on TopDesk API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from TopDesk . Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from TopDesk API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on TopDesk API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when Returns an incident.
That’s why we need to define the **id** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Returns an incident.
/incidents/id/1ef358f7-b413-42f1-b50b-94dfa9ec535d
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access TopDesk .
# Publishing Entity to TopDesk
## Steps
* Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select TopDesk Publisher as the publisher.
* Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
* Select the TopDesk entity you want the data to be published.
* You can optionally add any query parameters to the request.
* You can also optionally add any transformers to transform the data into anything you need before submitting it to TopDesk .
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most TopDesk endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the TopDesk API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a new asset. Please select “Post” as the action and “Creates a new asset” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to TopDesk into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to TopDesk with URL /assets
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access TopDesk .
# Totango
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/totango
Connect Alumio to Totango.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Totango API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/sections/360005893212-Totango-API)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Totango
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Totango
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Totango
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
* **4.** Subscribing to Totango Search GraphQl API Subscriber
* **4.1** Steps
* **4.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Totango
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Totango HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Authentication type and Environment Type.
Then complete the field base on the Authentication Type you choose.
(For more information, see [Totango Authentication Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/articles/14475645271956))
4. Click on "Grant access to Totango" to get the key.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Totango
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Totango Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Totango.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Totango HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Totango.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Totango documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Totango API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/sections/360005893212-Totango-API).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Totango. Please refer to the entities from [Totango API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/sections/360005893212-Totango-API) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Totango API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/sections/360005893212-Totango-API) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["SCIM - Get a User"](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/articles/360031891612-Manage-Totango-users-via-API#h_01ESCKJT4BG0C5Q3SQ76K9X96F) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "service-id" and "user-id" as parameters. That is why we set the "service-id" and "user-id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Totango with the URL /api/v2/scim/services/271446/Users/321441
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Totango.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Totango
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Totango Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Totango entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Patch method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Totango.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Totango endpoints.
Please refer to [Totango API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/sections/360005893212-Totango-API) page.
For example, we want to add a new contact. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Touchpoints API - Create New TP"](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/articles/115000597266-Touchpoints-API#h_01FSHGEJRDYZ5X37A0CQ00CR8R) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a post data. That is why we set the post data in the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Totango with URL /api/v3/touchpoints
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Totango.
### 4. Subscribing to Totango Search GraphQl API Subscriber
**4.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Totango Search GraphQl API Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Totango.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Totango HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Totango.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**4.2 General Concept**
We follow Totango documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Totango Search API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/articles/204174135-Search-API-accounts-and-users-).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Totango. Please refer to the entities from [Totango Search API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/articles/204174135-Search-API-accounts-and-users-) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Totango Search API Reference](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/articles/204174135-Search-API-accounts-and-users-) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Search API - Search for users"](https://support.totango.com/hc/en-us/articles/204174135-Search-API-accounts-and-users-#h_01G2VEGYZE684C6MJS8XK66KE0) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that we need to set the query. That is why we set the query in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Totango with the URL /api/v1/search/users
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Totango.
# TradeByte
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/tradebyte
Connect Alumio to TradeByte.
## Extra information
System documentation: [https://www.tradebyte.io/apireference.html](https://www.tradebyte.io/apireference.html)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Tradebyte
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Tradebyte
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Tradebyte
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up the Tradebyte HTTP Client
**1.1 Steps**
1. Follow the instructions on [https://www.tradebyte.io/how-to/generate-rest-api-credentials-in-tb-one/](https://www.tradebyte.io/how-to/generate-rest-api-credentials-in-tb-one/) page to get the REST API credentials.
2. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Tradebyte HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
3. Fill in the Base URI, Merchant ID, Username, and Password of the credential you set on Tradebyte.
4. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
5. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Tradebyte
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Tradebyte Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Tradebyte.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional, but path and query properties should exist, you can leave them as empty objects).
4. You can additionally add a transformer to manipulate the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Tradebyte HTTP Client to use.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Tradebyte documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on the Tradebyte API Reference.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to from Tradebyte. Please refer to the entities on the Tradebyte API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
The parameters you can provide to get the needed entities are based on the Tradebyte API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Single order entity.
This means that we want to subscribe to an order with ID 1234567 and use the tborder transfer format. We can see in the documentation that a single order entity requires orderId as a path parameter to define which order we want to fetch.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
That is why we need to define the orderId property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters (like mode in this example) will be parsed as query parameters.
The final URL that will be called is /orders/1234567?mode=tborder
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Tradebyte.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Tradebyte
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Tradebyte Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support the following actions:
* Send TB.Cat product-catalogue
* Send an order
* Mark order as processed
* Send messages about order-status changes
* Mark message as exported
* Mark message as processed
* Send information on article stock
Please refer to the Tradebyte API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some actions may need one or more path parameters.
For actions that don't require a payload on the request body, please look at the following example: we want to mark a message as processed. Please select “Mark message as processed” as the action of the publisher.
The documentation says that we need messageId as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide the messageId property inside the path property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. Here is an example of the required data.
Alumio will send an API request to Tradebyte with URL /messages/5678/processed?channel=1234, and the body will be empty.
For actions that require us to put payload into the request ([https://www.tradebyte.io/apireference.html#/Stocks/sendStock](https://www.tradebyte.io/apireference.html#/Stocks/sendStock)), you can just put the data into the payload property like the example below.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Tradebyte on URL /articles/stock with the request body below.
**HTTP Client**
This is the HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Tradebyte.
# Tweakwise
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/tweakwise
Connect Alumio to Tweakwise.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Tweakwise Navigator Backend API Reference](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend#/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Tweakwise Navigator Backend
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Tweakwise Navigator Backend
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Tweakwise Navigator Backend
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Tweakwise Navigator Backend
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Tweakwise Navigator Backend Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URL, Access Token, and Instance Key to your Tweakwise account.
(For more information, see [Tweakwise Backend Support](https://support.tweakwise.com/en/cat/rest-api/1259))
3. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the authentication log.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Tweakwise Navigator Backend
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Tweakwise Navigator Backend Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Tweakwise.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Tweakwise.
5. Select the Tweakwise Navigator Backend HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Tweakwise Navigator Backend documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Tweakwise Navigator Backend API Reference](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend#/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Tweakwise Navigator Backend. Please refer to the entities from [Tweakwise Navigator Backend API Reference](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend#/) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [Tweakwise Navigator Backend API Reference](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend#/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing ["Gets an attribute by id"](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend/#/Attribute/Attribute_GetAttribute).
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "id" as a path. That is why we set the id inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to Tweakwise with the URL /attribute/1
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed before the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Tweakwise Navigator Backend.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Tweakwise Navigator Backend
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Tweakwise Navigator Backend Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Tweakwise Navigator Backend entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Post, Patch, Put, and Delete methods on submitting data to Tweakwise Navigator Backend.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Tweakwise Navigator Backend endpoints.
Please refer to [Tweakwise Navigator Backend API Reference](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend#/) page.
For example, we want to Create a new category. Please select “Post” as the Method and [“Creates a new category”](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend/#/Category/Category_AddCategory) as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Tweakwise into the payload key in the data. Here is an example of the possible Data for [“Creates a new category”](https://developers.tweakwise.com/api-backend/#/Category/Category_AddCategory).
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Tweakwise with URL /category
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Tweakwise Navigator Backend.
# Veeqo
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/veeqo
Connect Alumio to Veeqo.
## Extra information
System documentation: \[Veeqo API Reference]
# Setting up HTTP Client Veeqo
Veeqo provides two methods for authentication when integrating with its API: **OAuth2.0** and **API Keys**. Below are the steps to configure the Veeqo HTTP client in the Alumio dashboard.
## Steps
1. **Navigate to Alumio Dashboard**:
* Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
* Go to **Clients** > **HTTPS Client**.
* Click **Create a New HTTP Client**.
2. **Select Veeqo as the HTTP Client Prototype**:
* From the list of available HTTP client prototypes, select **Veeqo HTTP Client**.
3. **Base Configuration**:
* In the **General** tab, fill in the **Base URI** with the Veeqo API URL:
[https://api.veeqo.com](https://api.veeqo.com).
4. **Authentication Configuration**:
* **For API Key Authentication**:
* Select **API Keys** from the **Authentication Type** dropdown.
* Enter the **API Key** provided by Veeqo in the **API Keys** field.
* **For OAuth2.0 Authentication**:
* Select **OAuth2.0** from the **Authentication Type** dropdown.
* Enter the following details:
* **Authorize URL**: `https://app.veeqo.com/oauth/authorize` (Set Default)
* **Access Token URL**: `https://app.veeqo.com/oauth/token` (Set Default)
* **Client ID**: Enter your Veeqo Client ID.
* **Client Secret**: Enter your Veeqo Client Secret.
* **Scopes**: Define the scopes for your OAuth token, if necessary (optional).
5. **Optional Logging**:
* If needed, enable **Request Logging** by checking the box for **Enable Logging of Requests**.
* Choose a formatter for the log data. It’s recommended to use **Full Request (Headers & Body)** for debugging purposes.
6. **Save the Client**:
* Once all details are filled in, click **Save** to store the HTTP Client configuration.
* The Veeqo client is now ready for use in Alumio integrations.
7. **Testing the Client** (Optional):
* You may test the connection by triggering an API call to ensure that the HTTP client is set up correctly and that the authentication is working as expected.
# Subscribing to Entities from Veeqo
This section explains how to subscribe to entities from the Veeqo API by configuring an **Incoming** connection in the Alumio platform.
## Steps
1. **Create Incoming Configuration:**
* Go to Connections > Incoming and create a new configuration.
* Select Veeqo Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. **Select an Entity:**
* Choose the Veeqo entity (e.g., orders, products) you want to subscribe to.
3. **Add Request Parameters (Optional):**
* if needed, provide any request parameters (e.g., order\_id) to customize the data retrieval.
4. **Pick the Veeqo HTTP Client:**
* Select the Veeqo HTTP client you’ve already set up for authentication (OAuth2 or API Key).
5. **Save the configuration.**
## General Concept
We follow Veeqo documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Veeqo API Reference.
### Method
This defines the HTTP method (e.g., `GET`, `POST`) to use when subscribing to Veeqo. The method will change based on the entity you're working with.
### Entity
The entity refers to the resource you are subscribing to in Veeqo (e.g., orders, products). Refer to the Management APIs section in the Veeqo API Reference for more information.
### Request Parameters
Request parameters allow you to customize your API requests. You can define path variables and query parameters in this section.
For example, on subscribing "View an Order Detail", you can include the `order_id` in the path parameter like so:
This will result in the following API call:
`GET /orders/415442518`
### Input Transformer
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
### HTTP Client
This is the pre-configured HTTP Client that will handle the actual API request to Veeqo. It ensures proper authentication (either through **OAuth2.0** or **API Keys**) and manages the connection to Veeqo's API.
# Publishing Entity to Veeqo
This section shows how to publish data from Alumio to Veeqo.
## Steps
* **Create an Outgoing Configuration**:
* Go to **Connections** > **Outgoing**, and create a new configuration.
* Select **Veeqo Publisher** as the publisher.
* **Choose the Method**:
* Select the method you want to perform (e.g., `Post`, `Put`, `Delete`).
* **Pick the Veeqo Entity**:
* Choose the Veeqo entity you want to publish data to (e.g., products, orders).
* **Add Query Parameters** (Optional):
* If needed, add query parameters to the request.
* **Transform Data** (Optional):
* Optionally, use transformers to modify the data before sending it to Veeqo.
* **Select the HTTP Client**:
* Choose the Veeqo HTTP client that you’ve set up for authentication.
* **Save** the configuration.
### **General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
### Method
This defines the type of HTTP method you want to use when interacting with Veeqo. We currently support the following methods:
* **Post**: Used to create new data, such as creating a new product or order.
* **Put**: Used to update existing data, such as modifying an existing product or updating order details.
* **Delete**: Used to remove or delete data from Veeqo, such as deleting an order or product.
The method directly correlates with the type of action being performed on the data, Note that it is possible the purpose of the method might be different (example : post used for updating), please refer to the Veeqo API Documentation.
### Entity
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create a New Product. Please select “Post” as the action and “Create a New Product” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Veeqo into the payload property in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Veeqo with URL `/products`
**HTTP Client**
This is the pre-configured HTTP Client that will handle the actual API request to Veeqo. It ensures proper authentication (either through **OAuth2.0** or **API Keys** ) and manages the connection to Veeqo’s API.
# Vend
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/vend
Connect Alumio to Vend.
Previously known as VendHQ, now LightSpeedHQ.
## Extra information
System documentation: [LightSpeedHQ API Reference](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client LightSpeedHQ
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from LightSpeedHQ
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to LightSpeedHQ
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client LightSpeedHQ
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select "LightSpeedHQ HTTP Client" as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and Bearer Token.
(For more information, see [LightSpeedHQ Authentication Reference](https://docs.vendhq.com/docs/authorization#personal-tokens))
3. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from LightSpeedHQ
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "LightSpeedHQ Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the LightSpeedHQ HTTP Client to use.
3. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from LightSpeedHQ.
4. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from LightSpeedHQ.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow LightSpeedHQ documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [LightSpeedHQ API Reference](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access LightSpeedHQ.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to LightSpeedHQ. Please refer to the entities from [LightSpeedHQ API Reference](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [LightSpeedHQ API Reference](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Get a single brand"](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference/getbrandbyid) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "brand\_id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "brand\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to LightSpeedHQ with the URL /brands/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
### 3. Publishing Entity to LightSpeedHQ
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "LightSpeedHQ Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Action that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the LightSpeedHQ entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method) and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to LightSpeedHQ.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most LightSpeedHQ endpoints.
Please refer to [LightSpeedHQ API Reference](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference) page.
For example, we want to add a new product. Please select “Create” as the Action and ["Create brand"](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference/createbrand) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a "BODY PARAMS". That is why we set the "BODY PARAMS" inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to LightSpeedHQ with URL /brands
Another example is when we want to delete a product by id. Please select “Delete” as the Action and ["Delete a serial number"](https://docs.vendhq.com/reference/delete-serialnumber) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "serialnumber\_id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "serialnumber\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to LightSpeedHQ with the URL /serialnumbers/1506951202871443456
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access LightSpeedHQ.
# Vendiro
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/vendiro
Connect Alumio to Vendiro.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Vendiro API Reference](https://api.vendiro.nl/docs/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Vendiro
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Vendiro
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Vendiro
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Vendiro
**1.1 Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Vendiro Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Bearer Toke according to your Vendiro account.
3. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Vendiro
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select Vendiro Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to Vendiro.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity. Please refer to an example in the General Concept section.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Vendiro HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Vendiro documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [https://api.vendiro.nl/docs/](https://api.vendiro.nl/docs/).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to Exact Global. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from [Vendiro API Reference](https://api.vendiro.nl/docs/) page.
**Request Parameters**
It’s the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on [Vendiro API Reference](https://api.vendiro.nl/docs/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Get Account Information entity. We can see in the documentation that setting by ID entity requires ID as a path parameter to define which order we want to fetch the details from.
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
You will use the HTTP Client configuration or prototype to access Vendiro.
### 3. Publishing entity to Vendiro
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Vendiro Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Vendiro entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support POST, PUT methods for submitting data to Vendiro.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Vendiro endpoints. Please refer to [Vendiro API Reference](https://api.vendiro.nl/docs/) page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to "Send Update Stock".
The documentation says that we need SKU and stock in the payload. In that case, you need to provide SKU and stock property into the payload property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. Here is an example of the required data.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Vendiro with URL /client/products/reserved-stock
**HTTP Client**
You will use the HTTP Client configuration or prototype to access Vendiro.
# Visma.net ERP
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/visma-net-erp
Connect Alumio to Visma.net ERP.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Visma API Reference](https://integration.visma.net/API-index/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Visma
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Visma
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Visma
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Visma
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Visma HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Authentication type and Environment Type.
Then complete the field base on the Authentication Type you choose.
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Visma
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select either "Visma ERP Service Subscriber" or "Visma ERP SalesOrder Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Visma.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Visma HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Visma.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Visma documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Visma API Reference](https://integration.visma.net/API-index/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Visma. Please refer to the entities from [Visma API Reference](https://integration.visma.net/API-index/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Visma API Reference](https://integration.visma.net/API-index/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing "Vat - Get a specific Vat" entity from "Visma ERP Service Subscriber".
Based on the end point, we can see that the end point require "vatId" as a parameter. That is why we set the "vatId" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Visma with the URL /controller/api/v1/vat/01 and Visma will give response like (you can enable logging in the HTTP Client to see this log)
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Visma.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Visma
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select either "Visma ERP Service Publisher" or "Visma ERP SalesOrder Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Visma entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP Patch method) and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to Visma.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Visma endpoints.
Please refer to [Visma API Reference](https://integration.visma.net/API-index/) page.
For example, we want to add a new sales order to the system on "Visma ERP SalesOrder Publisher". Please select “Post” as the Method and "Add a new sales order to the system" as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a request body. That is why we set the request body inside the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Visma with URL /api/v3/SalesOrders
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Visma.
# Vplan
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/vplan
Connect Alumio to Vplan.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
# Setting up HTTP Client Vplan
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select Vplan HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Authentication Type, and choose between API-Key or Oauth2.
3. Save.
* If API-Key, fill in the X-Api-Env and X-Api-Key,
* If Oauth2, fill in the Client Id and Client Secret, and Press “Grant access to Vplan CRM”
# Subscribing to Entities from Vplan
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Vplan Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Vplan.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Vplan HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Vplan documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Vplan API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Vplan. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Vplan API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Vplan API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define **board\_id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on Single Board Entity.
/v1/board/ 4566d4f4-c0fa-4c72-a0ec-4e208affaaf5
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Vplan.
# Publishing Entity to Vplan
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Vplan Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Vplan entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Vplan endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Vplan API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create New Board. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create New Board” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Vplan into payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Vplan with URL
/v1/board
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Vplan.
# VTEX
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/vtex
Connect Alumio to VTEX.
## Extra information
System documentation: [VTEX API Reference](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client VTEX
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from VTEX
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to VTEX
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client VTEX
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select the VTEX Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Application Key, and Application Token according to your VTEX account and the application keys created on VTEX.
(For more information, see [VTEX Application Keys](https://help.vtex.com/en/tutorial/application-keys--2iffYzlvvz4BDMr6WGUtet)
3. You can optionally enable the logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from VTEX
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select the VTEX Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from VTEX.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity. Please refer to an example in the General Concept section.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from VTEX.
5. Select the VTEX HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities. For VTEX case, you should use Increase query parameter as pagination type (only available for some entities).
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow VTEX documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on the [VTEX API Reference](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to VTEX. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from [VTEX API Reference](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [VTEX API Reference](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the "Request Parameters" field when subscribing to the ["Retrieve user order details"](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference/userorderdetails) entity. We can see in the documentation that the ["Retrieve user order details"](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference/userorderdetails) entity requires orderId as a path parameter to define which order we want to fetch the details from.
To fill the "orderId" with the actual order ID you want to get the details from, we need to define the "orderId" key inside path key in the Request Parameters field. Besides orderId in path parameters, the documentation also describes that the clientEmail is also a required parameter, but it should be defined in the query parameters. So, we need to define it inside the query key in the Request Parameters field. The keys inside query parameters (in this example would be "clientEmail") will be parsed as query parameters. Here is how we should fill the Request Parameters field:
Alumio will then send this to the VTEX as
/api/oms/user/orders/12345?clientemail=[john@example.com](mailto:john@example.com)
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and manipulate the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access VTEX.
**Follow Pagination**
If we want to fetch a list of entities, some systems have pagination to limit the entities returned in one call. VTEX is one of the systems, but not all VTEX entities support pagination. Some entities that support pagination are [Catalog - Get Brand List Per Page](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference/brandlistperpage), [Orders - List Orders](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference/getorder), etc. By selecting any pagination type in VTEX subscriber, Alumio will fetch a number of pages according to the number entered in the "Maximum number of pages to fetch" field, instead of fetching only one page. Of course, such behavior happens if the response matches the criteria configured in the subscriber.
For example, we want to fetch a paginated list of orders. Please select "Orders – List orders" entity and fill the form such as below.
By defining "per\_page" property under query parameter, it means we want to fetch 5 orders per page. By referring to the documentation, the parameter to define which page we want to fetch is named "page". We need to define it in the "Query parameter to set for paging" field. We also need to specify the value of "per\_page" into the "Expected number of items" field. Fill in the "Maximum number of pages to fetch" with the number of how many pages you want to fetch. When Alumio fetched the number of pages, it will stop fetching pages. One more step to enable the pagination is by selecting the "Storage to track the process". You can create a new storage and use it here in the incoming configuration.
### 3. Publishing Entity to VTEX
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select VTEX Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the VTEX entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently we support POST, PUT, PATCH and DELETE methods on submitting data to VTEX.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most VTEX endpoints.
Please refer to [VTEX API Reference](https://developers.vtex.com/vtex-rest-api/reference) page.
Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to update a brand. Please select "PUT" as the method and ["Catalog – Update Brand"](https://developers.vtex.com/docs/api-reference/catalog-api#put-/api/catalog/pvt/brand/-brandId-) as the entity of the publisher.
The documentation says that we need "brandId" as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide the "brandId" key into the path key in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in the Outgoing Configuration. And you can put the payload you want to send to VTEX into the payload key in the data. Here is an example of the required data:
Alumio will send an API request to VTEX with URL /api/catalog/pvt/brand/123 and the body will be like this:
* "Path" is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* "Query" is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* "Payload" is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access VTEX.
# Webflow
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/webflow
Connect Alumio to Webflow.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
**Webflow**
# Setting up HTTP Client Webflow
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Webflow HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Authentication Type
* Oauth2
* Fill in Client ID, Client Secret, and Scopes (V2 only).
* Press “Grant access to Webflow”.
* Token (V1 only)
* Fill in the Token
3. Save.
# Subscribing to Entities from Webflow
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Webflow Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Webflow.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Webflow HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Webflow documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Webflow API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Webflow. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Webflow API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Webflow API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when calling “Retrieve Get Collection Details” entity
That’s why we need to define the **collection\_id** property inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the Retrieve Get Collection Details.
/v2/collections/321321
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Webflow.
# Publishing Entity to Webflow
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Webflow Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Webflow entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Webflow endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Webflow API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Delete Collection Field. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Delete Collection Field” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Webflow into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Webflow with URL /v2/collections/321321/fields/111
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Webflow.
# WhatsApp
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/whatsapp
Connect Alumio to WhatsApp.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
**Whatsapp**
**Connector Package Documentation**
**Table of Contents**
[1 Setting up HTTP Client Whatsapp. 2](#_Toc148352260)
[1.1 Steps. 2](#_Toc148352261)
[2 Subscribing to Entities from Whatsapp. 2](#_Toc148352262)
[2.1 Steps. 2](#_Toc148352263)
[2.2 Select the Whatsapp HTTP Client to use. General Concept. 2](#_Toc148352264)
[3 Publishing Entity to Whatsapp. 5](#_Toc148352265)
[3.1 Steps. 5](#_Toc148352266)
[3.2 General Concept. 5](#_Toc148352267)
# Setting up HTTP Client Whatsapp
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Whatsapp HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Bearer Token according to your Whatsapp Cloud API Account.
3. Press Save Button on the Top-Right.
# Subscribing to Entities from WhatsApp
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Whatsapp Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the Entity you want to subscribe to from WhatsApp.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
## Select the WhatsApp HTTP Client to use. General Concept
We follow WhatsApp documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on WhatsApp API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from WhatsApp. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the WhatsApp API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on WhatsApp API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define the **PHONE\_NUMBER\_ID** property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such a Request Parameters field.
/xxxx/whatsapp\_business\_profile
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access WhatsApp.
# Publishing Entity to Whatsapp
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Whatsapp Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Whatsapp entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently, we support POST, PUT, and DELETE methods for submitting data to Whatsapp Cloud API.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Whatsapp endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Whatsapp API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Send Messages. Please select “POST” as the action and “Messages - Send” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to WhatsApp into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Whatsapp with URL /xxxx/messages
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access WhatsApp.
# WICS WMS
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/wics
Connect Alumio to WICS WMS.
## Extra information
System documentation: [WICS WMS API Reference](https://docs.wics.nl/#introduction)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client WICS WMS
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from WICS WMS
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to WICS WMS
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client WICS WMS
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select WICS WMS HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, API Key and API Secret.
(See the [WICS WMS Token Authentication Documentation](https://docs.wics.nl/#authentication) for more information)
4. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from WICS WMS
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "WICS WMS Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from WICS WMS.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the WICS WMS HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from WICS WMS.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the WICS WMS documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [WICS API Reference](https://docs.wics.nl/#introduction).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to WICS WMS. Please refer to the entities from [WICS 2.0 API Reference](https://docs.wics.nl/#introduction) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [WICS WMS API Reference](https://docs.wics.nl/#introduction).
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when we want retrieve list of task by subscribing ["Stock - Get stock item"](https://docs.wics.nl/#stock-get-stock-item) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the item code as a parameter. That is why we set the "itemCode" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to WICS with the URL ` /api/stock/12345`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access WICS WMS.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "WICS WMS Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the WICS entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to WICS.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all WICS WMS 2.0 endpoints.
Please refer to [WICS WMS API Reference](https://docs.wics.nl/#introduction) page.
For example, we want to update an item. Please select “Put” as the Method and ["Items - Update Item"](https://docs.wics.nl/#items-update-item).
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameter. That is why we set the "identifier" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to WICS with URL `/api/item/12345`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access WICS WMS.
# Windchill
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/windchill
Connect Alumio to Windchill.
## Extra information
System documentation: Windchill API Reference (`https:///Windchill/netmarkets/html/wrs/jsdoc/index.html`)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Windchill
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Windchill
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Windchill
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Windchill
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Windchill HTTP Client as Platform and click Next Step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Username, and Password.
4. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
5. Click next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Windchill
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Windchill Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Windchill.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Windchill HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Windchill.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow the Windchill documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Windchill API Reference](https://docs.wics.nl/#introduction).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Windchill. Please refer to the entities from Windchill API Reference (`https:///Windchill/netmarkets/html/wrs/jsdoc/index.html`) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the Windchill API Reference (`https:///Windchill/netmarkets/html/wrs/jsdoc/index.html`).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when we want to retrieve a list of tasks by subscribing "DataAdmin Get Folder" entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set the ContainerId as a parameter. That is why we set the "ContainerId" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Windchill with the URL ` /servlet/odata/v7/DataAdmin/Containers('123')/Folders.`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Windchill.
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Windchill Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Windchill entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods for using it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the HTTP Post, Put, and Delete method on submitting data to Windchill.
**Entity**
We support publishing to all Windchill endpoints.
Please refer to Windchill API Reference
For example, we want to create a folder. Please select “Post” as the Method and "DataAdmin - Create Folder".
From the documentation, we can see that we need to set a path parameter and a body parameter. That is why we set the "ContainerId" inside the path key and body parameters inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Windchill with URL `/servlet/odata/v7/DataAdmin/Containers('OR:wt.inf.container.OrgContainer:123')/Folders`
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example the \{ContainerId}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Windchill.
# WooCommerce
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/woocommerce
Connect Alumio to WooCommerce: set up the HTTP client, subscribe to entities, and publish data.
## Extra information
System documentation: [WooCommerce API Reference](https://woocommerce.github.io/woocommerce-rest-api-docs/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client WooCommerce
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from WooCommerce
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to WooCommerce
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client WooCommerce
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client and select WooCommerce Client as the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, Consumer Key, and Consumer Secret.
(For more information, see [WooCommerce Authentication Reference](https://woocommerce.github.io/woocommerce-rest-api-docs/#authentication)
3. You can optionally enable logging of requests to get the log of the authentication.
4. Save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from WooCommerce
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select WooCommerce Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from WooCommerce.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from WooCommerce.
5. Select the WooCommerce HTTP Client to use.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow WooCommerce documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [WooCommerce API Reference](https://woocommerce.github.io/woocommerce-rest-api-docs/).
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access WooCommerce.
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to WooCommerce. Please refer to the entities from the [WooCommerce API Reference](https://woocommerce.github.io/woocommerce-rest-api-docs/) page.
**Request Parameters**
You can provide these parameters to get the needed entity based on the [WooCommerce API Reference](https://woocommerce.github.io/woocommerce-rest-api-docs/).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing "Retrieve a coupon" entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
Alumio will then make a request to WooCommerce with the URL /wp-json/wc/v3/coupons/719
### 3. Publishing Entity to WooCommerce
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select WooCommerce Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the Action the publisher wants to perform with the data.
3. Select the WooCommerce entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any path data to the request on the key path.
5. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
6. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
7. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Update (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method) on submitting data to WooCommerce.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most WooCommerce endpoints.
Please refer to the [WooCommerce API Reference](https://woocommerce.github.io/woocommerce-rest-api-docs/) page.
For example, we want to delete a coupon. Please select “Delete” as the Action and “Delete a Coupon by id” as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the endpoint requires "id" as a path. That is why we set the "id" inside the path key in the data. Based on the documentation, it also requires a query of force in true if we want to delete the coupon permanently. So, we add the force data in query key inside our data.
Alumio will send an API request to WooCommerce with URL
/wp-json/wc/v3/coupons/719?force=true
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example, the \.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access WooCommerce.
# Wordpress
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/wordpress
Connect Alumio to Wordpress.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
**1.** Setting up HTTP Client Wordpress
**1.1** Steps
**2.** Subscribing to entities from Wordpress
**2.1** Steps
**2.2** General concept
**3.** Publishing entity to Wordpress
**3.1** Steps
**3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Wordpress
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients → HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Wordpress HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step.
3. Fill in the Base URI with `https://{{your_wordpress_domain}}/wp-json/wp/v2`
4. Fill in the Username with your Wordpress username.
5. Fill in the Password with your Wordpress password.
6. You can optionally enable the logging of requests to get the authentication log.
7. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client to use
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Wordpress
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections → Incoming → create a new incoming configuration and select “Wordpress Subscriber” as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Wordpress.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Wordpress HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Wordpress.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Wordpress documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Wordpress API Reference](https://developer.wordpress.org/rest-api).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Wordpress. Please refer to the entities from the [Wordpress API Reference](https://developer.wordpress.org/rest-api) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Wordpress API Reference](https://developer.wordpress.org/rest-api).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing to the [Posts](https://developer.wordpress.org/rest-api/reference/posts) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can query a single post by setting the post ID inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Wordpress with the URL `/posts/{id}`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Wordpress.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Wordpress
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections → Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select “Wordpress Publisher” as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Wordpress entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the HTTP Post and Delete method on submitting data to Wordpress.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Wordpress endpoints.
Please refer to [Wordpress API Reference](https://developer.wordpress.org/rest-api/reference/posts) page.
For example, we want to add a new Post. Please select “post” as the Method.
with this payload:
```
{
"title": "Draft Lathif December 8",
"status": "draft"
}
```
Alumio will send an API request to Wordpress with the URL `/posts`, and here is the response example:
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Wordpress.
# Wrike
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/wrike
Connect Alumio to Wrike.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Wrike API Reference](https://developers.wrike.com/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Wrike
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Wrike
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Wrike
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Wrike
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Wrike HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Authorize URL, Access Token URL, Client ID and Client Secret.
(For more information, see [Wrike Authentication Reference](https://dev.Wrike.com/docs/quick_start))
4. Click on "Grant access to Wrike" and you will be redirected to approve the grant.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Wrike
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Wrike Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Wrike.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Wrike HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Wrike.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Wrike documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Wrike API Reference](https://developers.wrike.com/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Wrike. Please refer to the entities from [Wrike API Reference](https://developers.wrike.com/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Wrike API Reference](https://developers.wrike.com/) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Users - Returns information about single user."](https://developers.wrike.com/api/v4/users/#query-user) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "userId" as a parameter. That is why we set the "userId" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Wrike with the URL /users/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Wrike.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Wrike
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Wrike Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Wrike entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Wrike.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Wrike endpoints.
Please refer to [Wrike API Reference](https://developers.wrike.com/) page.
For example, we want to add a new contact. Please select “Post” as the Method and ["Tasks - Create task in folder."](https://developers.wrike.com/api/v4/tasks/#create-task) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a path folderId and a request body. That is why we set the folderId inside the path key and the request body inside the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Wrike with URL /folders/IEAF772LI5EUXAA7/tasks
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Wrike.
# Writer
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/writer
Connect Alumio to Writer.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Writer AI Studio API Reference](https://dev.writer.com/api-reference/api-keys)
### Setting up HTTP Client Writer AI Studio
**Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Connections → HTTPS (API). Create a new HTTP Client and select Writer AI Studio HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI and API Key.
### Subscribing to Entities from Writer AI Studio
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations → Incoming and create a new Incoming configuration and select Writer AI Studio Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Writer AI Studio.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Writer AI Studio HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
We follow the Writer AI Studio documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on the Writer AI Studio API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe to from Writer AI Studio. Please refer to the entities in the Management APIs from the Writer AI Studio API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the Writer AI Studio API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity.
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
That’s why we need to define **application\_id** property inside **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the dataset entity.
`https://api.writer.com/v1/applications/1234`
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Writer AI Studio.
### Publishing Entity to Writer AI Studio
**Steps**
1. Go to Integrations → Outgoing, create a new Outgoing configuration, and select Writer AI StudioPublisher as the publisher.
2. Select the method that you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the Writer AI Studio entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in the Outgoing configuration).
**Method**
Currently, we support Post (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Writer AI Studio endpoints. Please refer to the entities in the Management APIs from the Writer AI Studio API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to create a new Graph.
Please select “Post” as the action and “Knowledge Graph API - Create Graph” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Writer AI Studio into the payload property in the data (go to Advanced).
* Path is the path parameter of the URL. For example, the \{id}.
* Query is a defined set of parameters attached to the end of a URL.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
Alumio will send an API request to Writer AI Studio with URL `/v1/graphs`
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Writer AI Studio.
# Xero
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/xero
Connect Alumio to Xero.
## Extra information
System documentation:
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
**1.** Setting up HTTP Client Xero
**1.1** Steps
**2.** Subscribing to entities from Xero
**2.1** Steps
**2.2** General concept
**3.** Publishing entity to Xero
**3.1** Steps
**3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Xero
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients → HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Xero HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step.
3. Fill in the Base URI with `https://api.xero.com/api.xro/2.0.`
4. Fill in the Authorize URI with `https://login.xero.com/identity/connect/authorize.`
5. Fill in the Token URI with `https://identity.xero.com/connect/token`
6. Create your custom application (For more information, see [Xero App Launcher](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/guides/how-to-guides/xero-app-launcher).
7. Fill in the Client ID and Client Secret generated by your custom application.
8. Fill in the Tenant ID (For more information, see [Xero Tenants](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/guides/oauth2/tenants/).
9. Fill in the scopes (For more information, see [Xero Scopes](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/guides/oauth2/scopes/).
10. You can optionally enable the logging of requests to get the authentication log.
11. Click the "Grant access to Xero" button to get the key.
12. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client to use
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Xero
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections → Incoming → create a new incoming configuration and select “Xero Accounting Subscriber (v2.0)” as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Xero.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Xero HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Xero.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Xero documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Xero API Reference](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/api/accounting/overview).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Xero. Please refer to the entities from the [Xero API Reference](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/api/accounting/overview) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Xero API Reference](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/api/accounting/overview).
Please look at the example below on how to fill the path field when subscribing to the [Accounts](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/api/accounting/accounts) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can query a single account by setting the “AccountID” inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Xero with the URL `/Accounts/{AccountID}`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Xero.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Xero
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections → Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select “Xero Accounting Publisher (v2.0)” as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Xero entity you want the data to be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support the HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Xero.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Xero endpoints.
Please refer to [Xero API Reference](https://developer.xero.com/documentation/api/accounting/overview) page.
For example, we want to add a new Account. Please select “Put” as the Method.
Based on the documentation, it requires a payload for example:
Alumio will send an API request to Xero with the URL `/Accounts`
The response example:
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Xero.
# Yotpo
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/yotpo
Connect Alumio to Yotpo.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation:
**Connector Package Documentation**
# Setting up HTTP Client Yotpo
## Steps
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Yotpo HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI, and Client Secret
3. Save.
# Subscribing to Entities from Yotpo
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Yotpo Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from Yotpo.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Yotpo HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
We follow Yotpo documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Yotpo API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Yotpo. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Yotpo API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Yotpo API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when Retrieve order by ID entity
That’s why we need to define the **yotpo\_order\_id** property inside the **path** property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside **query** parameters will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request Parameters field on the Retrieve order by ID entity.
/orders/123
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Yotpo.
# Publishing Entity to Yotpo
## Steps
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select Yotpo Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data.
3. Select the Yotpo entity you want the data to be published.
4. Select the HTTP Client to use.
## General Concept
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Patch (HTTP PATCH method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Yotpo endpoints. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from the Yotpo API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require an object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For example, we want to Create Order. Please select “Create” as the action and “Create Order” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Yotpo into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Yotpo with URL /orders
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Yotpo.
# Zendesk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/zendesk
Connect Alumio to Zendesk.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Zendesk API Reference](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/introduction/)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Zendesk
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Zendesk
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Zendesk
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Zendesk
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Zendesk HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI Client ID and authentication based on your selected type.
(For more information, see [Zendesk Postman Reference](https://developer.zendesk.com/documentation/api-basics/working-with-the-zendesk-apis/exploring-zendesk-apis-with-postman/))
4. For Oauth only, please click on "Grant access to Zendesk" and you will be provided with the key to continue.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Zendesk
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Zendesk Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Zendesk.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Zendesk HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Zendesk.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Zendesk documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Zendesk API Reference](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/introduction/).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Zendesk. Please refer to the entities from [Zendesk API Reference](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/introduction/) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Zendesk API Reference](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/introduction/) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["List Ticket By Organization ID"](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/tickets/tickets/#list-tickets) entity.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "organization\_id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "organization\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Zendesk with the URL /api/v2/organizations/123/tickets
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Zendesk.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Zendesk
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Zendesk Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Zendesk entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP POST method, HTTP PUT method, HTTP PATCH method and HTTP DELETE method on submitting data to Zendesk.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Zendesk endpoints.
Please refer to [Zendesk API Reference](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/introduction/) page.
For example, we want to create many tickets. Please select “POST” as the Method and ["Create Many Tickets"](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/tickets/tickets/#create-many-tickets) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, it requires a body request. That is why we set the body request inside the payload key in the data.
Alumio will send an API request to Zendesk with URL /api/v2/tickets/create\_many
Another example is when we want to delete a ticket. Please select “DELETE” as the Method and ["Delete Ticket"](https://developer.zendesk.com/api-reference/ticketing/tickets/tickets/#delete-ticket) as the entity of the publisher.
Based on the documentation, we can see that the end point require "ticket\_id" as a parameter. That is why we set the "ticket\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Zendesk with the URL /api/v2/tickets/123
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: [www.url.com?type=true\&start=0](http://www.url.com?type=true\&start=0)
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Zendesk.
# Zoho Creator
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/zoho-creator
Connect Alumio to Zoho Creator.
## Extra information
System documentation: [ZOHO Creator API Reference](https://www.zoho.com/creator/help/api/v2)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client ZOHO Creator
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from ZOHO Creator
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to ZOHO Creator
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client ZOHO Creator
**1.1 Steps**
1. Please refer to this page to register Microsoft Dynamics 365 Finance & Operations to Azure Active Directory. Follow the guide and save the tenant ID, client ID, and client secret of the app registration.
2. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
3. Select ZOHO Creator HTTP Client as PlatForm and click the next step
4. Fill in the Base URI, Client ID, and Client Secret of your ZOHO Creator instance and app credentials.
5. You can optionally set a base HTTP client to use for the connection by selecting an HTTP client configuration or setting your own HTTP client in the Advanced HTTP client field
6. Click the Grant access to ZOHO Creator button to get the access token.
7. You can optionally change how Alumio logs every HTTP request made by the HTTP client
8. Click the next step, fill in the name of the HTTP Client, and finally, you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from ZOHO Creator
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming, create a new incoming configuration, and select ZOHO Creator Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe from ZOHO Creator.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity (optional).
4. Select the ZOHO Creator HTTP Client to use
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from ZOHO Creator.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio to fetch paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow ZOHO Creator API documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [ZOHO Creator API Reference](https://www.zoho.com/creator/help/api/v2).
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to do (fetching data from ZOHO Creator). Please refer to the [ZOHO Creator API Reference](https://www.zoho.com/creator/help/api/v2) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Zoho Creator API
Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill Request Parameters field when subscribing Single Request entity
That’s why we need to define the account\_owner\_name, app\_link\_name, report\_link\_name, record\_ID
property inside path property in the Request Parameters field. The properties inside query parameters
will be parsed as query parameters. Here is the final URL that will be called when using such Request
Parameters field on coupon entity.
`/api/v2/alumiotest/order-management/report/All_Orders`
**Input Transformer**
Any transformers set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need, either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access ZOHO Creator.
### 3. Publishing Entity to ZOHO Creator
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration, and select "ZOHO Creator Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method you want the publisher to use with the data.
3. Select the ZOHO Creator entity to which the data will be published.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration). However, you can also add or modify the payload using the Request Transformer.
**Action**
Currently, we support Create (HTTP POST method), Put (HTTP PUT method), Patch (HTTP PATCH
method), and Delete (HTTP DELETE method).
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Zoho Creator endpoints but not with publishing binary files at the
moment. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Zoho Creator API Reference page.
Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For endpoints that require object as the request payload, please look at the example below. For
example, we want to Delete a Product. Please select “Delete” as the action and “Assets” as the entity of the publisher.
You can put the payload you want to send to Zoho Creator into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the Possible Response after Creation.
Alumio will send an API request to Zoho Creator with URL /products/123
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype that you will use to access ZOHO Creator.
# Zoho CRM
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/zoho-crm
Connect Alumio to Zoho CRM.
## Extra information
Connector package documentation:
System documentation: [Zoho CRM API Reference](https://www.zoho.com/crm/developer/docs/api/v6/)
# Setting up HTTP Client Zoho CRM
**Steps**
1. In Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients > HTTPS Client. Create a new HTTP Client and select Zoho CRM HTTP Client as the prototype of the HTTP Client.
2. Fill in the Base URI field according to your Zoho CRM account.
3. Check for the Access Token URL and Authorize URL if they are in the right region for your Zoho CRM Account.
4. Fill in the Client ID and Client Secret field based on your credentials.
5. Fill in the Scopes field.
6. You can optionally enable logging of requests.
7. Then, click on “Grant Access to Zoho CRM” and approve the request on page opening.
8. The Key will show up and you can save the Client for use.
# Subscribing to Entities from Zoho CRM
**Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select Zoho CRM Subscriber as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Zoho CRM.
3. The request parameters must have at least two parameters. Path and Query. The Path is used when you need to put parameters into a URL such as ID. And the Query is used when you need to add a request query when submitting a request, like filtering.
4. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you need.
5. Select the Zoho CRM HTTP Client to use
**General Concept**
We follow Zoho CRM documentation on building this connector so you can easily use the connector based on Zoho CRM API Reference.
**Entity**
It’s the entity you want to subscribe from Zoho CRM. Please refer to the entities in Management APIs from Zoho CRM API Reference page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on Zoho CRM API Reference. Please look at the example below on how to fill the Request Parameters field when subscribing Get a User by Identity. We can see in the documentation that setting by Id entity requires user\_id as a path parameter to define which order we want to fetch the details from.
In order to fill the user\_id with the actual User ID you want to get the details from, we need to define the user\_id property inside the path property in the Request Parameters field. And also, as you can see the endpoints requires API version in a call, so you need to define the version.
```
{
"path": {
"user_id": "12345",
"version": "v3"
},
"query": {},
"payload": []
}
```
**Input Transformer**
Any transformer’s set here will be executed after the Request Parameters are loaded. So, you basically can add any transformer to provide and transform the request parameters into anything you need either as path parameters and/or as query parameters of an entity.
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Zoho CRM.
# Publishing Entity to Zoho CRM
**Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select Zoho CRM Publisher as the publisher.
2. Select the action that you want the publisher to do with the data. Alumio support Create (HTTP POST METHOD), Put, Patch and Delete
3. Select the Zoho CRM entity you want the data to be published to.
4. Please note that the data format before sending must in this format:
```
{
"path": {},
"query": {},
"payload": {
//Your data Here
}
}
```
**PATH** is used when you need to add a parameter to the URL where you want to send the data.
**PAYLOAD** contains all of the data which do you want to send.
* Select the HTTP Client to use.
**General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration).
**Action**
Currently, we support action Create (HTTP POST METHOD), Put (HTTP PUT METHOD), Patch (HTTP PATCH METHOD), and Delete (HTTP DELETE METHOD) data to Zoho CRM.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Zoho CRM endpoints. Please refer to Zoho CRM API Reference page. Based on the documentation, some endpoints may need one or more path parameters.
For example, we want to update the user’s data.
The documentation says that we need user id and api version as path parameters. In that case, you need to provide user\_id property into the path property in the data, either as an output from Routes or output from Transformers in Outgoing Configuration. And you can put the payload you want to send to Zoho CRM into the payload property in the data. Here is an example of the required data.
```
{
"path": {
"user_id": "example01",
"version": "v3"
},
"query": {},
"payload": {
//your data here
}
}
```
**HTTP Client**
It’s the HTTP Client configuration or prototype you will use to access Zoho CRM.
# Zoho Desk
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/connectors/zoho-desk
Connect Alumio to Zoho Desk.
## Extra information
System documentation: [Zoho Desk API Reference](https://desk.zoho.com/DeskAPIDocument)
## Connector package documentation
### Table of Contents
* **1.** Setting up HTTP Client Zoho Desk
* **1.1** Steps
* **2.** Subscribing to entities from Zoho Desk
* **2.1** Steps
* **2.2** General concept
* **3.** Publishing entity to Zoho Desk
* **3.1** Steps
* **3.2** General concept
### 1. Setting up HTTP Client Zoho Desk
**1.1 Steps**
1. In the Alumio Dashboard, go to Clients -> HTTP Clients. Create a new HTTP Client.
2. Select Zoho Desk HTTP Client as PlatForm and click next step
3. Fill in the Base URI, Access Token URL, Authorize URL, Client ID, Client Secret and Scopes.
(See [Zoho Desk Oauth](https://desk.zoho.com/DeskAPIDocument#OauthTokens) for more information)
4. Click on "Grant access to Zoho Desk" and you will be redirected to approve the grant.
5. You can optionally enable logging of request to get the log of the authentication.
6. Click next step, fill the name of the HTTP Client and finally you can save the HTTP Client for use.
### 2. Subscribing to Entities from Zoho Desk
**2.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Incoming and create a new incoming configuration and select "Zoho Desk Subscriber" as the subscriber.
2. Select the entity you want to subscribe to from Zoho Desk.
3. Add any request parameters needed to subscribe to the entity.
4. Select the Zoho Desk HTTP Client to use.
5. You can optionally add a transformer to transform the request parameters into something you will request from Zoho Desk.
6. You can also optionally enable pagination to allow Alumio fetches paginated entities.
**2.2 General Concept**
We follow Zoho Desk documentation on building this connector, so you can easily use the connector based on [Zoho Desk API Reference](https://desk.zoho.com/DeskAPIDocument).
**Entity**
The entity you want to subscribe to Zoho Desk. Please refer to the entities from [Zoho Desk API Reference](https://desk.zoho.com/DeskAPIDocument) page.
**Request Parameters**
These are the parameters you can provide to get the needed entity based on the [Zoho Desk API Reference](https://desk.zoho.com/DeskAPIDocument) .
Please look at the example below on how to fill path field when subscribing ["Agents - Get agent"](https://desk.zoho.com/DeskAPIDocument#Agents#Agents_Getagent) entity.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "agent\_id" as parameters. That is why we set the "agent\_id" inside the path key in the Request Parameters.
Alumio will then make a request to Zoho Desk with the URL /api/v1/agents/973717000000259144
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Zoho Desk.
### 3. Publishing Entity to Zoho Desk
**3.1 Steps**
1. Go to Connections -> Outgoing, create a new outgoing configuration and select "Zoho Desk Publisher" as the publisher.
2. Select the Method that you want the publisher to perform with the data.
3. Select the Zoho Desk entity you want the data to be published to.
4. You can optionally add any query data to the request on the key query.
5. You can optionally add any payload data to the request on the key payload.
6. Select the HTTP Client to use.
**3.2 General Concept**
Like the subscriber, the publisher has similar methods on how to use it. The difference is the payload that will be submitted by the publisher originating from the data (from routes, from transformers in outgoing configuration), though you can also add or modify payload using the Request Transformer.
**Method**
Currently, we support HTTP Post method, HTTP Put method, HTTP Patch method and HTTP Delete method on submitting data to Zoho Desk.
**Entity**
We support publishing to most Zoho Desk endpoints.
Please refer to [Zoho Desk API Reference](https://desk.zoho.com/DeskAPIDocument) page.
For example, we want to update an agent. Please select “Patch” as the Method and "Agents - Update agent" as the entity of the publisher.
From the end point, we can see that we need to set "agent\_id" as parameters. That is why we set the "agent\_id" inside the path key in the data.
Based on the documentation, it requires a request body. That is why we set the request body in the payload key inside Alumio data.
Alumio will send an API request to Zoho Desk with URL /api/v1/agents/973717000000259144
* Path is the path parameter of the url. For example the \{id}.
* Query is defined set of parameters attached to the end of a url.\
Example: `www.url.com?type=true&start=0`
* Payload is the data contained within a request.
**HTTP Client**
The HTTP Client configuration you will use to access Zoho Desk.
# API keys
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/administration/api-keys
How to create and use API keys to access Alumio programmatically.
API Keys allow external systems and automations to authenticate against your Alumio environment via the Alumio API. Navigate to **More → Access control → API Keys**.
Each API key is tied to the user who created it. All API activity is logged under that user in the Audit trail. If the user who created a key is deleted from the environment, the key is automatically revoked. For long-lived automations, it is best practice to create keys under a dedicated user account that will not be removed.
The API Keys overview shows the key name, who created it, when it was created, and when it was last used. Keys can be deleted from the Actions menu. The "Last used" column helps identify inactive keys for cleanup.
# Entity schemas
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/administration/entity-schemas
Entity schemas define the structure, validation rules, and identifiable information of data flowing through your integrations. By default, all data is assigned to the default entity type, which has no structure, validation, or identifiable fields. Your Alumio environment comes with a set of standard entity schemas, and you can create your own as needed.
Navigate to **More → System → Entity Schemas** to create and manage entity schemas.
### What Entity schemas can do
* Define the expected structure of data for a specific entity type (e.g. ERP Product, Order).
* Set validation rules on incoming data: required fields, data types, minimum values, and allowed values.
* Define identifier paths that make entities uniquely identifiable across tasks and Storages.
* Automatically filter out data that does not match the defined schema before it reaches the destination system.
* Disable an entity type to pause all integrations that use it.
### Automatic data validation
Entity schemas support JSON schema validation to automatically check incoming data against a predefined structure. A schema can specify:
* Required fields that must be present on every incoming entity.
* Data types per field (e.g. `string`, `integer`, `boolean`).
* Value constraints such as minimum values, maximum values, or a fixed list of allowed values.
Once a schema is defined, validation is applied using two transformers in sequence:
1. **Set the entity type** –– assigns the correct entity schema to the incoming data.
2. **Validates the entity type** –– checks the data against the schema rules.
Data that matches the schema passes through and continues processing. Data that does not match is filtered out and does not create a task.
# Import and export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/administration/import-export
Export configurations from one Alumio environment and import them into another.
Import/Export lets you move configurations between Alumio environments, for example, from UAT to production without having to rebuild anything manually.
Navigate to **More → System → Import/Export**.
### Exporting configurations
Any configuration in Alumio can be exported individually from its overview page using the Actions menu. When you need to move multiple configurations at once, you can select them in bulk and export them as a single file.
### Importing configurations
When uploading an export file, Alumio analyses it before importing and flags any issues that need to be resolved first. There are four possible outcomes:
| Scenario | What it means |
| :- | :- |
| No issues | Everything is in order and you can proceed with the import directly. |
| Missing environment variables | One or more required environment variables do not exist in the target environment yet and need to be created before importing. |
| Missing configurations | One or more configurations that this export depends on are not present in the target environment and need to be linked or created. |
| Invalid configurations | One or more configurations have incomplete required fields that need to be filled in before the import can proceed. |
Once all issues are resolved, the import becomes available.
# Spaces
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/administration/spaces
What spaces are, who can use them, and how to create and manage them.
Spaces allow Alumio partners with a Spaces license to manage multiple end customers within a single Alumio environment. Instead of provisioning a separate environment per customer, you create and manage isolated Spaces within one environment.
All configurations created within a Space are linked to that Space, ensuring clear separation between customers or projects. You can also grant specific users access to a single Space rather than the entire environment.
By default, every environment has one Space –– the Default Space –– which cannot be edited or deleted.
Navigate to **More → Admin panel → Spaces** to create and manage Spaces.
### What Spaces can do
* Isolate configurations and data per customer or project within a single environment.
* Grant users access to a specific Space only, without exposing the rest of the environment.
* Assign dedicated Data Engines per Space based on your license.
* Each Space has its own unique webhook and proxy URLs, viewable under **Access control → Information**.
### Space statuses
| Status | Description |
| :- | :- |
| Pending | Space has been submitted and will be created shortly. |
| Creating | Space is being created. This takes a few minutes. |
| Active | Space is ready to use. |
| Error | An error occurred during creation. Contact support. |
| Deleting | Space is being deleted. |
| Deleted | Space has been deleted and cannot be used. |
### Cancelling and reactivating Spaces
Spaces are contracted annually and renew automatically. System administrators can cancel a Space from the Space Management page. The Default Space cannot be cancelled.
A cancelled Space can be reactivated before its expiry date. If it expires without reactivation, it is automatically deleted and the record will show a Deleted status with the expiration date highlighted in red.
### Granting users access to a Space
Users can be granted access to a Space in two ways: from within the Space via **Access control > Users**, or by a system administrator via the **Admin panel → Spaces → Users tab**. Users added at the Space level have access to that Space only.
### Limits and FAQ
**How many Spaces and Data Engines do I receive?** This depends on your Spaces license. The default includes 32 Spaces and 64 Data Engines, with a maximum of 2 Data Engines per Space.
**Why do I see Audit trail twice in the menu?** One Audit trail is scoped to the currently active Space under Access control. The other, in the Admin panel, covers all Spaces across the entire environment.
**Can I use a VPN connection with a Spaces license?** No. VPN connections are only available for dedicated single-customer Alumio environments.
# Users and roles
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/administration/users-and-roles
Manage users in Alumio and the roles that define what each user can do.
Users control who has access to your Alumio environment and at what level. Navigate to **More → Access control → Users**.
Four roles are available:
* **System administrator** –– the highest level of access within an Alumio environment. They can create, edit, and delete Spaces, assign Data Engines to Spaces, and add users to Spaces. System Administrators also have full access to all Spaces within the environment, regardless of how individual Space access is configured.
* **Administrator** –– full access with no restrictions, including adding and managing other users.
* **Editor** –– can create, edit, delete, and run configurations and processes, but cannot manage users or access the Settings > Users menu.
* **Viewer** –– read-only access. Can view configurations, run processes, export data, and use the Transformer tester, but cannot create, edit, or delete anything.
To add a user, click **+**, enter their email address, and assign a role. Alumio supports multiple login methods, including Google, Microsoft, Azure AD, SAML, Okta, and others. Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) is required for all users.
# Databases
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/database-connection
Alumio supports direct database connectivity for integrations that read from or write to relational databases. A Database Client stores the connection details needed to communicate with an external database and can be reused across multiple integrations.
Navigate to **Connections** → **Database Clients** to create and manage database connections.
### What Database Clients can do
* Connect directly to a relational database as a source or destination in an integration.
* Read data from a database via an Incoming configuration using the Database subscriber.
* Write data to a database via an Outgoing configuration using the Database Batch Publisher.
* Execute queries inline during data processing using the Database Transformer.
### Filtering Database Clients
The overview page lists all Database Clients in your environment. Filters are available for Name, Created at, Updated at, and Labels. Use **+ Add Filter** for additional conditions. Click any column header to sort.
### Creating a Database Client
A Database Client is configured by selecting a prototype that determines which connection fields are available. The following database types are supported:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [IBM DB2](/references/database-connection/ibm-db2) | Database connection for an IBM DB2 server |
| [MSSQL](/references/database-connection/mssql-v2) | Database connection for Microsoft SQL Server (MSSQL) |
| [MySQL](/references/database-connection/mysql) | Database connection for MySQL |
| [Oracle](/references/database-connection/oci-v2) | Database connection for Oracle |
| [PostgreSQL](/references/database-connection/postgresql) | Database connection for PostgreSQL |
Each prototype exposes the connection fields relevant to that database type: server host, port, database name, credentials, and database-specific options such as character set, encryption, and connection timeout.
# Email servers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/email-server
Email servers are used to configure reusable email server connections for sending emails within Alumio. Email
servers can be used within the [Send email](/references/transformer/email-transformer) transformer.
The following email servers are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [SMTP](/references/email-server/smtp) | Send emails using SMTP |
| [SendGrid](/references/email-server/sendgrid) | Send emails using SendGrid |
# Filesystems
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/filesystem
Filesystems are used to configure reusable connections to (external) filesystems.
These connections can be used to read and write files within incoming and outgoing
configurations, and transformers.
Alumio provides filesystem connections to external systems such as AWS S3 and SFTP servers.
Alumio also provides access to a local filesystem.
The following filesystems are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Amazon S3](/references/filesystem/aws-s3) | Provides access to Amazon S3 cloud storage. |
| [Azure Blob Storage](/references/filesystem/azure-blob-storage) | Provides access to Azure Blob Storage. |
| [FTP](/references/filesystem/ftp) | Provides access through the File Transfer Protocol (FTP). |
| [Google Cloud Storage](/references/filesystem/gcloud) | Provides access to Google Cloud storage. |
| [HTTP](/references/filesystem/http) | Provides access to files through HTTP. |
| [Local filesystem](/references/filesystem/local) | Provides access to the local Alumio filesystem. |
| [SFTP](/references/filesystem/sftp) | Provides filesystem access through the Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP). |
| [WebDAV](/references/filesystem/webdav) | Provides filesystem access through the WebDAV protocol. |
# HTTP (API)
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/http-client
Configure HTTP connections.
HTTP (API) connections can be used to configure reusable settings for HTTP requests. These connections can be leveraged throughout Alumio to consume or publish data.
Alumio provides many predefined HTTP (API) connections to external systems such as Shopify, CloudSuite, and Adobe Commerce. Fully custom HTTP connections can also be created by using the "default" prototype to configure an HTTP API connection.
## Plugins
Plugins can modify HTTP requests and adjust the behaviour of the HTTP connection. For example, plugins can add additional HTTP headers, define a default base URL, or enable request logging.
The following plugins are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Add base URI to requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/base-uri) | Set the base URI for the request. |
| [Add content length headers to requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/content-length) | Calculate and add content length header to the request. |
| [Add content type headers to requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/content-type) | Automatic content type detection and add it to the request headers. |
| [Add host to requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/add-host) | Add the supplied host value to the Host header, can be set to overwrite existing Host header. |
| [Add path to requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/add-path) | Add the supplied URI to the request path. |
| [Append request headers](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/header-append) | Append a header to the request as a key value pair. |
| [Cache requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/cache) | Cache the request result for either a user specified time or the cache header value. |
| [Follow redirects](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/redirect) | Follow request redirects with the option to preserve headers and use location headers. |
| [Log requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/logger) | Log requests based on the selected formatter. |
| [Mock requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/mock) | Return a mock response instead of executing the request. |
| [Rate limit based on header](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/rate-limit-header) | Check response headers for the request limit and wait for a set amount of time before resuming. |
| [Remove request headers](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/header-remove) | List of headers that will be removed from the request. |
| [Retry requests on failure](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/retry) | Retry a request when the response code matches the supplied failure range. |
| [Set UTF-8 encoding](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/set-encoding-utf-8) | Set encoding for the request to UTF-8 based on the 'from encoding' with a user selected error option. |
| [Set default headers of requests](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/header-defaults) | Set the default headers for requests. |
| [Set request encoding headers](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/encoding-header-set) | Set encoding headers (TE and Accept-Encoding) for the requests based on user selection. |
| [Set request headers](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/header-set) | Set a specific list of headers for requests based on the user supplied key value pairs. |
| [Store and use cookies](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/cookie) | Store and use cookies for the request. |
| [Validate the response](/references/http-client-plugin-configurator/response-validator) | Validate the response headers and body based on a set criteria. |
## Authentication
Authentication methods can be used to authenticate the HTTP requests performed by the HTTP API connection. Examples include Basic Authentication or OAuth 2.
The following authentication methods are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Amazon Web Service (AWS)](/references/http-authentication-configurator/aws) | Used to authenticate with AWS endpoints. |
| [Amazon Web Service S3 (AWS S3)](/references/http-authentication-configurator/aws-s3) | Used to authenticate with AWS S3 buckets. |
| [Azure Shared Key Authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/azure-shared-key) | Used to authenticate with Azure using a Shared Key. |
| [Basic authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/basic) | Use basic HTTP user/password authentication for the HTTP requests. |
| [Bearer token authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/bearer) | Use a stored or static token in the HTTP Authentication header. |
| [Custom client certificate](/references/http-authentication-configurator/client-certificate) | Use SSL certificate, key and optional password for request authentication. |
| [Google Service Account OAuth2](/references/http-authentication-configurator/google-service-account-oauth2) | Used to authenticate with a Google Service Account. |
| [JWT authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/jwt) | Use a JWT header and payload for request authentication. |
| [Magento 2 integration Oauth1](/references/http-authentication-configurator/magento-2-integration-oauth1) | Authenticate with Magento 2 using OAuth1 |
| [Oauth1 authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/oauth1-bearer) | Used to make for HTTP requests that require OAuth 1 authentication. |
| [Oauth2 authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/oauth2-bearer) | Used to make for HTTP requests that require OAuth 2 authentication. |
| [Query param authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/query-param) | Set a query parameter and value to be used for request authentication. |
| [Request authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/request) | Authenticate by a header value retrieved through a different requests. |
| [Request body signing](/references/http-authentication-configurator/request-signing) | Signs the request body with a key and attaches the signature as a header. Supports HMAC (SHA-256, SHA-512) and RSA (SHA-256, SHA-512). |
| [Wsse authentication](/references/http-authentication-configurator/wsse) | Authenticate the requests using the WSSE standard with a username and password. |
## HTTP API connections
The following HTTP API connections are available.
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| AFAS HTTP Client | |
| AS2 Gateway HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Accelo HTTP Client | |
| Act-On HTTP Client | |
| Adobe Commerce (Magento 2) HTTP Client | |
| Adyen HTTP Client | |
| Aha! HTTP Client | |
| Airfocus HTTP Client | |
| Akeneo GraphQL Client | |
| Akeneo PIM HTTP Client | |
| Algolia HTTP Client | |
| Amazon Selling Partner HTTP Client | |
| App4Sales HTTP Client | |
| Asana HTTP Client | HTTP Client that can be used to connect with Asana system |
| Atlassian Confluence Cloud HTTP Client | |
| Atlassian Jira Cloud HTTP Client | |
| Atlassian Jira Server HTTP Client | |
| Auth0 HTTP Client | |
| Basecamp 4 HTTP Client | |
| BigCartel HTTP Client | |
| BigCommerce HTTP Client | |
| BigQuery HTTP Client | |
| Bigcommerce Bundle B2B HTTP Client | |
| Bitrix24 HTTP Client | |
| BlueSnap HTTP Client | |
| Bol.com v10 HTTP Client | |
| Bol.com v9 HTTP Client | |
| Brightpearl HTTP Client | |
| CS-Cart HTTP Client | |
| Caflou HTTP Client V1 | |
| Catch Of The Day HTTP Client | |
| Centra GraphQL Client | |
| Channable HTTP Client | |
| Channel Engine HTTP Client | |
| Claude by Anthropic HTTP Client | |
| ClickUp HTTP Client (2.0) | |
| Cloudflare HTTP Client | |
| Cloudsuite HTTP Client | |
| Cohere HTTP Client | |
| Commercetools HTTP Client | |
| ConnectWise PSA HTTP Client (3.0) | |
| Copernica HTTP Client | |
| Copper HTTP Client | |
| D365 Business Central HTTP Client | Microsoft Dynamics 365 Business Central Http Client |
| Datadog HTTP Client | |
| Dolibarr HTTP Client (v18.0.4) | |
| DynamicWeb HTTP Client | |
| ERPNext HTTP Client | |
| Ebay HTTP Client | |
| Ecwid - HTTP Client (v3) | |
| EffectConnect HTTP Client | |
| Ergonode GraphQL HTTP Client | |
| Exact Globe API Plugin HTTP Client | |
| Exact Globe HTTP Client | |
| Exact HTTP Client | |
| Exact Online Http Client | |
| FastSpring HTTP Client | |
| FreeAgent HTTP Client (v2.1.0) | |
| Freshbooks HTTP Client | |
| Freshdesk HTTP Client | |
| Google Calendar HTTP Client | |
| Google Gemini HTTP Client | |
| Google Merchant Center HTTP Client | |
| HaloITSM HTTP Client | |
| HubSpot HTTP Client | |
| Icecat HTTP Client | |
| InFlow HTTP Client | |
| InRiver HTTP Client | |
| Intercom - HTTP Client (v2.10) | |
| Intuit Mailchimp HTTP Client | |
| Ironclad HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Jumpseller HTTP Client (1.0.0) | |
| Katana PIM HTTP Client | |
| Kerridge Unit 4 Wholesale HTTP Client | |
| Klarna HTTP Client | |
| Klipfolio HTTP Client (v1.0) | |
| Kogan HTTP Client | |
| Kustomer HTTP Client | |
| Lead Gen CRM HTTP Client | |
| LightSpeedHQ (X-Series) HTTP Client | |
| Lightspeed E-Commerce HTTP Client | |
| Lightspeed Retail HTTP Client | |
| Lime CRM HTTP Client | |
| MFTGateway HTTP Client | |
| Magento 1 HTTP Client | |
| ManageEngine HTTP Client | |
| Marello HTTP Client | |
| Marketo HTTP Client | |
| Microsoft Dynamics 365 CRM HTTP Client | |
| Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&O HTTP Client | |
| Microsoft Dynamics 365 F\&SCM Alumio API Plugin HTTP Client | |
| Microsoft Power BI HTTP Client | |
| Microsoft Teams HTTP Client | |
| Mirakl HTTP Client | |
| Mistral AI HTTP Client | |
| Mollie HTTP Client | |
| Monday.com HTTP Client | |
| Montawms HTTP Client | |
| MyDeal Universal HTTP Client (v3.3) | |
| Netsuite HTTP Client | |
| NewRelic HTTP Client | |
| NextChapter HTTP Client | |
| Occtoo HTTP Client | |
| Ocoya HTTP Client | |
| Odoo JSON-2 HTTP Client | |
| Odoo XMLRPC HTTP Client | |
| Onshape HTTP Client | |
| OpenAI HTTP Client | |
| OpenCart HTTP Client | |
| Oracle NetSuite HTTP Client | |
| Orderchamp HTTP Client | |
| Orderwise ERP HTTP Client | |
| Outlook HTTP Client | |
| Pandadoc HTTP Client | |
| Pay.NL HTTP Client (v2) | |
| PayPal HTTP Client | |
| Payt HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Perplexity HTTP Client | |
| Picqer HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Pimcore GraphQL HTTP Client | |
| Pipedrive HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Pipedrive HTTP Client (v2) | |
| Protime HTTP Client | |
| Pulpo WMS HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Pulseway HTTP Client | |
| Qapla HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Qapla HTTP Client (v2) | |
| QuickBooks Online Plus HTTP Client | |
| Reamaze HTTP Client | |
| Reloadify HTTP Client | |
| Remote.com HTTP Client | |
| Returnless HTTP Client | |
| Returnless HTTP Client (v2) | |
| SAP B1 HTTP Client | |
| SAP ECC HTTP Client | |
| SAP S/4HANA oData HTTP Client | |
| SPS Commerce HTTP Client | HTTP Client that can be used to connect with SPS Commerce system |
| Sales Layer HTTP Client (1.18) | |
| Sales Layer HTTP Client (2.0) | |
| Salesforce HTTP Client (v54) | |
| Salesforce HTTP Client (v59) | |
| Salesforce HTTP Client (v60.0) | |
| Salsify HTTP Client | |
| Scayle Admin API HTTP Client (v2.1.25) | |
| SendCloud v3 HTTP Client | |
| SendGrid HTTP Client | |
| Shipstation HTTP Client | |
| Shopify HTTP Client | |
| Shopline HTTP Client | |
| Shopware 6 HTTP Client | |
| Sinch Mailjet HTTP Client | |
| Skunexus HTTP Client | |
| Snowflake HTTP Client | |
| Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange HTTP Client | |
| Square HTTP Client | |
| Squarespace HTTP Client (v1.0) | |
| Startdeliver HTTP Client | |
| Storyblok HTTP Client | |
| Streak HTTP Client | |
| Stripe HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Stripe HTTP Client (v2) | |
| SuperOffice HTTP Client Dynamic | |
| SuperOffice HTTP Client Manual | |
| Sylius HTTP Client | |
| Symson HTTP Client | |
| Tableau HTTP Client | |
| Teamleader HTTP Client | |
| Timely HTTP Client | |
| TopDesk HTTP Client | |
| Totango HTTP Client | |
| Tradebyte HTTP Client | |
| Tweakwise Navigator Backend HTTP Client | |
| VTEX HTTP Client | |
| Veeqo HTTP Client | |
| VendHQ HTTP Client | |
| Vendiro HTTP Client | |
| Visma ERP HTTP Client | |
| Vplan HTTP Client | |
| WICS WMS HTTP Client | |
| Webflow HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Webflow HTTP Client (v2) | |
| Whatsapp HTTP Client | |
| Windchill HTTP Client | |
| WooCommerce HTTP Client | |
| Wordpress HTTP Client | |
| Wrike HTTP Client (v4.0) | |
| Writer AI Studio HTTP Client (v1) | |
| Xero HTTP Client (v2.0) | |
| Yotpo Http Client | |
| Zendesk HTTP Client | |
| Zoho CRM HTTP Client | |
| Zoho Creator HTTP Client | |
| Zoho Creator HTTP Client (v2.1) | |
| Zoho Desk HTTP Client | |
| eDesk v1.0 HTTP Client | |
| eDesk v2.0 HTTP Client | |
| nShift V1 HTTP Client | |
| nShift V2 HTTP Client | |
# HTTP Proxies
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/http-proxies
Route the outbound HTTP requests Alumio makes through a proxy server.
An HTTP Proxy creates a dedicated API endpoint that an external application can call in real time. Alumio acts as the intermediary: it receives the incoming request, optionally transforms it, forwards it to the target system, and returns the response to the caller.
### What HTTP Proxies can do
HTTP Proxies give you control over how requests are handled between the consumer and the target system. You can:
* Forward requests to a target system using a configured HTTP Client and URI.
* Apply processors to modify the request before it is forwarded and the response before it is returned.
* Restrict access using a Matcher to validate that requests come from a legitimate source.
* Override the HTTP status code returned to the consumer using the `HTTP response code` processor.
* Simulate requests using the built-in Configuration tester without needing an external system to trigger the call.
### Filtering HTTP Proxies
The overview page lists all HTTP Proxies in your environment. Filters are available for Name, Created at, Updated at, and Labels. Use **+ Add Filter** for additional conditions. Click any column header to sort.
### Creating an HTTP Proxy
An HTTP Proxy is configured through two tabs: **General** and **Advanced**.
The **General** tab defines the core connection: the target URI, HTTP method, HTTP Client, body parser format, and an optional Matcher to restrict access.
The **Advanced** tab contains processors. Processors let you modify the request before it is forwarded and the response before it is returned to the consumer. Available processors include removing or setting headers, transforming request or response data, and setting a custom HTTP response code.
### Using the Configuration tester
The Configuration tester is available on both the creation form and the detail page. It lets you send a test request in real time. You can configure the method, URI, headers, and protocol, and choose whether to send a real request or simulate one. The Response tab shows the result, including the response body, status code, and headers.
### Custom HTTP status codes
By default, Alumio passes through the HTTP status code returned by the target system. The `HTTP response code` processor lets you override this with a specific status code (e.g. `201`, `202`, `204`), which is then returned to the consumer for all responses from that HTTP Proxy, regardless of what the target system returns.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/index
Connections store the credentials and settings Alumio uses to reach external systems.
**Connections** define how Alumio communicates with external systems. Each connection type is tailored to a specific protocol or authentication method and can be reused across multiple integrations.
Navigate to **Connections** in the top navigation to access all connection types.
### HTTP (API)
An HTTP client defines how Alumio connects to a REST API. It stores the base URI, authentication details, and default headers used when making requests to the target system. HTTP clients are reused across Incoming and Outgoing configurations, meaning credentials and connection settings are managed in one place.
### HTTP Authentication
HTTP Authentication configurations store authentication credentials separately from the HTTP client. Supported methods include Basic auth, OAuth 2.0, API key, and Bearer token. Decoupling authentication from the HTTP client allows you to reuse the same credentials across multiple connections or swap them without reconfiguring each integration.
### Webhooks
A Webhook creates a dedicated POST endpoint that an external system can push data to in real time. When data arrives, Alumio processes it through the linked Incoming configuration and creates tasks for further processing. See [Webhooks](#) for a full overview.
### SOAP
A SOAP connection defines how Alumio connects to a SOAP-based web service. It stores the WSDL URL and any authentication required to communicate with the service. Used in Incoming and Outgoing configurations the same way as HTTP clients, but tailored to the SOAP protocol.
### HTTP Proxies
An HTTP Proxy creates a dedicated API endpoint that an external application can call in real time. Alumio receives the request, optionally transforms it, forwards it to the target system, and returns the response to the caller. See [HTTP Proxies](#) for a full overview.
### Email servers
An Email server connection stores the SMTP configuration needed to send emails from within an integration. Used in Outgoing configurations when the destination system is an email recipient rather than an API or database.
### Databases
A Database connection stores the credentials and connection details needed to read from or write to an external database directly. Supports common database types. Used in Incoming and Outgoing configurations when the source or destination system is a database rather than an API.
# SOAP connections
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/soap-client
A SOAP Client represents a remote web service that Alumio communicates with using the SOAP protocol. Many enterprise systems, such as ERPs, WMS platforms, and older B2B services, expose their functionality through SOAP rather than REST. Alumio handles WSDL-based request construction and XML-to-JSON translation automatically.
Navigate to **Connections** → **SOAP Clients** to create and manage SOAP Clients.
### What SOAP Clients can do
* Connect to any SOAP-based web service using a WSDL definition.
* Load the WSDL from a URL, a filesystem, or as pasted plain text, or connect without a WSDL entirely.
* Cache the WSDL in an Alumio Storage to reduce repeated requests to the SOAP service.
* Add custom SOAP headers and WS-Addressing headers for services that require them.
* Handle binary data in SOAP responses by keeping it base64 encoded.
* Test the connection directly from the creation form or detail page using the built-in Configuration tester.
### Filtering SOAP Clients
The overview page lists all SOAP Clients in your environment. Filters are available for Name, Created at, Updated at, and Labels. Use **+ Add Filter** for additional conditions. Click any column header to sort.
The **Test all clients** button at the top right runs a connection test against all SOAP Clients simultaneously –– useful for quickly identifying broken connections after a system change or credential rotation.
### Creating a SOAP Client
A SOAP Client is configured by selecting a prototype that determines which fields are available and how the WSDL is provided. The default prototype is the general-purpose option used when no system-specific connector package is available.
Alumio provides a set of predefined SOAP connections. A fully custom SOAP connection can be created by using the default prototype.
The following SOAP connections are available:
1. FashionMaster SOAP Client
2. SAP ECC SOAP Client
3. Sherpaan SOAP Client.
### Configuration tester
The Configuration tester is available on both the creation form and the detail page. It lets you call a specific SOAP method and inspect the full response converted to JSON, without running a full integration.
# Webhooks
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/connections/webhooks
Trigger a route in real time by pushing data into an incoming configuration with a webhook.
A Webhook creates a dedicated API endpoint that an external system can POST data to in real time. When data arrives, Alumio processes it through the linked Incoming configuration and creates tasks for further processing.
### What Webhooks can do
Webhooks give you control over how incoming data from external systems is received and handled. You can:
* Receive real-time data from external systems via a dedicated POST endpoint.
* Link one or more Incoming configurations to route different entities to different Routes from a single Webhook URL.
* Apply pre-processors to validate incoming requests before Alumio accepts the data.
* Apply post-processors to run logic after the data has been consumed and tasks have been created.
* Control the response returned to the caller, including the status code, headers, and body format.
* Validate cryptographic request signatures for secure Webhook integrations.
### Filtering Webhooks
The overview page lists all Webhooks in your environment. Filters are available for Name, Created at, Updated at, and Labels. Use **+ Add Filter** for additional conditions.
### Creating a Webhook
A Webhook is configured through three tabs: **General**, **Processors**, and **Response**.
The **General** tab defines the core connection: the Incoming configuration to trigger when the Webhook is called, optional additional Incoming configurations for multi-entity routing, logging, and job queue priority.
The **Processors** tab contains pre-processors and post-processors. Pre-processors validate the incoming request before Alumio accepts the data, for example, matching a shared-secret header or validating a cryptographic signature. Post-processors run after the data has been consumed and tasks have been created, for example, responding to a Business Central subscription validation request.
The **Response** tab controls what Alumio returns to the caller: the HTTP protocol version, status code, custom headers, and response body format.
### Using a Webhook
To allow an external system to call your Webhook, share the Webhook endpoint URL and any pre-processor details (required headers or signature configuration) with the sending system. The full endpoint URL follows this pattern:
`https://{environment}.alumio.com/api/v1/webhook/{identifier}`
Additional path segments can be appended to the Webhook URL to pass extra variables into the incoming request.
Header data from incoming requests is accessible in Entity transformers using Alumio placeholder syntax (e.g. `&{headers.X-event-type}`) when the Incoming configuration is set up with the **Add headers** option enabled.
### Securing Webhooks
Webhook endpoints in Alumio are publicly accessible URLs. To prevent unexpected or malicious requests from being processed, you should add one or more security layers using pre-processors. Three approaches are available:
#### Token validation
When the external system includes a token in every webhook request, Alumio can validate it before processing. The token can be located in different parts of the request:
| Token location | Validator to use |
| :- | :- |
| Request header | Validate that header matches pattern |
| Query (URI) parameter | HTTP request URI matcher with URI Query String matcher filter |
| Request body/payload | Validate message body |
#### IP address whitelist
If you know the IP addresses the external system sends requests from, you can restrict the Webhook to only accept requests from those addresses. Any request originating from an IP address not on the whitelist is rejected before processing.
#### Signature validation
Signature validation is the most secure approach. When the sending system includes a cryptographic signature in the request headers, Alumio computes the expected signature using a shared secret and compares it against what was received. Requests with an invalid or missing signature are rejected.
Three signature types are supported:
| Signature type | Required fields |
| :- | :- |
| Digest HMAC signature | Header name and shared secret key. |
| Digest signature | Header name only. |
| Custom signature | Header name and algorithm location -- the algorithm can be part of the signature header, provided in a separate header, or set as a fixed value. |
# Data engines
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-processing/data-engines
Data engines are the workers that run your integrations and process tasks.
Data Engines are the workers that pick up and process jobs from the queue. When multiple jobs are queued simultaneously, Data Engines use priority to determine which job to process first.
Navigate to **More → System → Queue** to monitor active jobs and processing times.
### Job priority
Priority is set per Scheduler job and has three levels: High, Medium, and Low. If two jobs are queued at the same time, the one with the higher priority is picked up first. A lower-priority job that is already running will complete before a higher-priority job is picked up. Disabled Schedulers are ignored by Data Engines.
### Common issues and solutions
**Scheduler runs overlap**
This happens when a process takes longer to complete than the interval between runs. For example, an Incoming configuration that takes 10 minutes to complete but is scheduled every 5 minutes will cause a backlog in the queue.
Check the Total throughput time column on the Queue page to see how long a process actually takes, then adjust the Scheduler interval to be longer than the process duration.
**Process runs out of memory**
The default memory limit per process is 384 MB. Common causes and solutions:
| Cause | Solution |
| :- | :- |
| Large files from a filesystem | Configure the deserializer to read the file incrementally rather than loading it all at once. |
| Large API responses | If the endpoint supports pagination, fetch one page per run using the progress tracker storage pattern instead of fetching all records in a single call. |
| Real-time processing | Real-time Routes run both Incoming and Outgoing in a single process, doubling memory usage. Disable real-time processing and create a separate Scheduler for the Route. |
| Too many tasks are exported per run | Reduce the Number of tasks to export settings on the Route Scheduler until the process completes without failing. |
If none of these solutions resolves the issue, a memory limit upgrade can be requested via your Customer Success Manager.
# Queues
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-processing/queues
How the Alumio queuing system schedules and processes tasks.
The Queue page gives you a real-time overview of all jobs being executed by the Scheduler, including their current status and processing times.
Navigate to **More → System → Queue**.
### What the Queue shows
Each entry in the Queue represents one scheduled job and displays the following information:
| Column | Description |
| :- | :- |
| Status | Current state of the job: Scheduled, New, Processing, Killed, Finished, or Failed. |
| Process | Unique identifier for the job. |
| Priority | High, Medium, or Low. |
| Type and configuration | What is being run and which configuration triggered it. |
| Added to queue | When the job was queued. |
| Process time | How long the job took to execute. |
| Total throughput time | Total time from scheduling to completion. |
### Filtering and managing jobs
The Queue can be filtered by type, status, process ID, priority, configuration, and queue date. Active jobs can be killed or skipped directly from the Queue.
Records are retained for a maximum of 30 days or 1000 entries.ill explain how the Alumio queuing system schedules and processes tasks.
# Accessors
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/accessor
This page will explain what accessors are and how they are used to target data inside transformers.
The following accessor are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Apply accessor to child items](/references/accessor/children) | Applies another accessor to each child item matching the supplied pattern. |
| [By key](/references/accessor/key) | Accesses values at the supplied keys. |
| [By key-value structure](/references/accessor/structure) | Accesses values in a list where each item has a configurable key field and value field. |
| [By pattern](/references/accessor/pattern) | Accesses values whose paths match the supplied pattern. |
# Conditions
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/condition
This page will explain what conditions are and how they control when a transformer runs.
The following conditions are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Array or object: Contains](/references/condition/list-contains) | Checks if a value exists within an array or object. |
| [Array or object: Contains wildcard match](/references/condition/list-contains-match) | Checks if an array or object contains a matching value. |
| [Array or object: Does not contain](/references/condition/list-not-contains) | Checks that an array or object does not contain a value. |
| [Array or object: Does not contain wildcard match](/references/condition/list-not-contains-match) | Checks that an array or object does not contain a matching value. |
| [Check conditions on mapped value](/references/condition/mapped-condition) | Applies mappers to the data and checks all conditions on the result. |
| [Does not equal (Loose)](/references/condition/not-equals-adaptive) | Checks if the values are not loosely equal. For example, 12 and '12' are considered equal. |
| [Does not equal (Strict)](/references/condition/not-equals) | Checks if the values are not strictly equal (different value or type). |
| [Equals (Loose)](/references/condition/equals-adaptive) | Checks if the values are loosely equal, allowing type coercion. For example, 12 equals '12'. |
| [Equals (Strict)](/references/condition/equals) | Checks if the values are strictly equal (same value and same type). |
| [Is empty](/references/condition/empty) | Checks if the value is null, an empty string, or an empty array. |
| [Is not empty](/references/condition/not-empty) | Checks if the value is not null, not an empty string, and not an empty array. |
| [Is not one of](/references/condition/not-one-of) | Checks if a value is not one of the given items. |
| [Is one of](/references/condition/one-of) | Checks if a value is one of the given items. |
| [Is valid JSON](/references/condition/format-json) | Checks if the value is valid JSON. |
| [Is valid URL](/references/condition/format-url) | Checks if the value is a valid URL. |
| [Is valid UUID](/references/condition/format-uuid-v2) | Checks if the value is a UUID string, optionally of specific versions. |
| [Is valid credit card number](/references/condition/format-credit-card) | Checks if the value is a valid credit card number. |
| [Is valid date/time](/references/condition/format-datetime) | Checks if the value is a valid date/time. |
| [Is valid email address](/references/condition/format-email) | Checks if the value is a valid email address. |
| [Logic: And](/references/condition/logic-and) | Checks that all conditions match. |
| [Logic: Not](/references/condition/logic-not) | Checks that no conditions match. |
| [Logic: Or](/references/condition/logic-or) | Checks that at least one condition matches. |
| [Logic: Xor](/references/condition/logic-xor) | Checks that exactly one condition matches. |
| [Number: Greater than](/references/condition/number-greater-than) | Checks that a number is greater than the given value. |
| [Number: Greater than or equals](/references/condition/number-greater-than-or-equals) | Checks that a number is greater than or equal to the given value. |
| [Number: Less than](/references/condition/number-less-than) | Checks that a number is less than the given value. |
| [Number: Less than or equals](/references/condition/number-less-than-or-equals) | Checks that a number is less than or equal to the given value. |
| [Storage: Exists in storage](/references/condition/in-storage) | Checks if the value is present in storage. |
| [String: Contains only alphabetic characters](/references/condition/string-alpha) | Checks that a string contains only alphabetic characters. |
| [String: Contains only alphanumeric characters](/references/condition/string-alnum) | Checks that a string contains only alphanumeric characters. |
| [String: Contains only numbers](/references/condition/string-numbers) | Checks that a string contains only numbers. |
| [String: Does not match regular expression](/references/condition/string-not-regex) | Checks that a string does not match the supplied regular expression. |
| [String: Does not match wildcard pattern](/references/condition/string-not-match) | Checks that a string does not match the supplied wildcard pattern. |
| [String: Length between](/references/condition/string-length-between) | Checks that a string's length is between a minimum and maximum value. |
| [String: Length equals](/references/condition/string-length) | Checks that a string's length matches the given value. |
| [String: Matches regular expression](/references/condition/string-regex) | Checks that a string matches the supplied regular expression. |
| [String: Matches wildcard pattern](/references/condition/string-match) | Checks that a string matches the supplied wildcard pattern. |
| [Type: Array](/references/condition/type-array) | Checks that the value is of type array. |
| [Type: Boolean](/references/condition/type-boolean) | Checks that the value is of type boolean. |
| [Type: Float](/references/condition/type-float) | Checks that the value is of type float. |
| [Type: Integer](/references/condition/type-integer) | Checks that the value is of type integer. |
| [Type: Numeric](/references/condition/type-numeric) | Checks that the value is numeric. |
| [Type: Object](/references/condition/type-object) | Checks that the value is of type object. |
| [Type: String](/references/condition/type-string) | Checks that the value is of type string. |
| [Validates against JSON schema](/references/condition/json-schema-validator) | Checks if the data is valid according to the supplied JSON schema. |
# Parsers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/deserializer
The following parsers are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Parse from CSV](/references/deserializer/csv) | Parses CSV data into JSON. |
| [Parse from JSON](/references/deserializer/json) | Takes an input JSON string from the context and converts it to actual JSON. |
| [Parse from URL encoded](/references/deserializer/url-decode) | Takes a URL encoded string and converts it to plain text. |
| [Parse from XML](/references/deserializer/xml) | Converts XML data into JSON. |
| [Parse from YAML](/references/deserializer/yaml) | Converts YAML data into JSON. |
| [Parse from binary data](/references/deserializer/binary) | Parses binary data into the output format. |
| [Parse from cXML](/references/deserializer/cxml) | |
| [Parse from form URL encoded](/references/deserializer/form-urlencoded) | Converts a Form URL encoded string into a JSON object. |
| [Parse from plain text](/references/deserializer/plain-text) | Takes the context data and interprets it as plain text with optional settings for encoding. |
# Filters
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/filter
The following filters are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Condition on field value](/references/filter/value-condition-v2) | Filters items based on the value matching the supplied conditions. |
| [Filter by storage entities](/references/filter/storage-entity-filter) | Filters items based on whether a corresponding entity exists in storage. Can optionally save new entities to storage for tracking. |
| [Filter by transformer result](/references/filter/transformer-filter) | Filters items by applying a transformer and comparing the result. |
| [Key condition](/references/filter/key-condition) | filter items where they key filter matches. |
| [Logic: And](/references/filter/and-condition) | Filters items where all filters match. |
| [Logic: Not](/references/filter/not-condition) | Filters items that do not match the filter. |
| [Logic: Or](/references/filter/or-condition) | Filters items where any of the filters match. |
| [Validates against JSON schema](/references/filter/json-schema-validator) | Filters items by validating against the supplied JSON schema. |
# Mappers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/mapper
This page will explain what mappers are and how they translate values from one system to another.
The following mappers are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Apply operator to value](/references/mapper/operator) | Maps a value based on the supplied operator. |
| [Apply operator with prepared values](/references/mapper/prepared-operator) | Applies the operator on every item of the left and right array values. |
| [Array or object: Count items](/references/mapper/list-count) | Returns the number of items in an array or the number of keys in an object. |
| [Array or object: Diff values](/references/mapper/list-diff) | Returns the values present in the input but not in the supplied data. |
| [Array or object: Flip keys and values](/references/mapper/list-flip) | Swaps the keys and values of an array or object. |
| [Array or object: Get values](/references/mapper/list-values) | Returns the values of an array or object as an indexed array. |
| [Array or object: Inherit from data](/references/mapper/list-inherit-from) | Fills missing keys in the array or object from the supplied data. |
| [Array or object: Join into string (implode)](/references/mapper/list-implode) | Joins array items or object values into a single string using a separator. |
| [Array or object: Keep matching values](/references/mapper/list-intersect) | Returns only the values that exist in both the input and the supplied data. |
| [Array or object: Merge](/references/mapper/list-extend-with) | Merges the supplied data into the array or object. Existing keys are overwritten. |
| [Array or object: Reverse](/references/mapper/list-reverse) | Reverses the order of items in an array or keys in an object. |
| [Array or object: Split into chunks](/references/mapper/list-split) | Splits an array or object into chunks of the specified size. |
| [Array: Extract field](/references/mapper/list-column) | Gets the values for a single key from each item in an array. |
| [Array: Fill with value](/references/mapper/list-fill) | Creates an array filled with a repeated value at the specified length. |
| [Array: Join into string](/references/mapper/list-concat) | Joins array items into a single string using a separator. |
| [Cast: Boolean](/references/mapper/cast-bool) | Converts a value into a boolean (true/false). |
| [Cast: Float](/references/mapper/cast-float) | Converts a value into a float (1.00, 2.05, 10.50, etc). |
| [Cast: Integer](/references/mapper/cast-int) | Converts a value into an integer (1, 2, 3, 10, 25, etc). |
| [Cast: String](/references/mapper/cast-string) | Converts a value into a string ("abc", "example"). |
| [Chain mappers](/references/mapper/chain) | Executes a list of mappers in sequence. |
| [Filesystem: Resolve destination filename conflict](/references/mapper/filesystem-ensure-destination) | Ensures a destination path is available on the filesystem. If a file already exists at the path, applies a conflict resolution strategy (for example, appending a counter: foo.json becomes foo-2.json). |
| [Filter: Allow only digits](/references/mapper/string-filter-numbers) | Takes the input and makes sure all non numeric characters are removed. |
| [Filter: Allow only letters](/references/mapper/string-filter-letters) | Takes the input and makes sure all characters other than letters are removed. It means it will also remove spaces. |
| [Filter: Allow only letters and digits](/references/mapper/string-filter-alnum) | Allows only letters and digits; removes all other characters. |
| [Format date value](/references/mapper/format-date) | Converts a date value to another format based on the given criteria. |
| [Format number value](/references/mapper/format-number) | Applies number formatting to the input. Several arguments can be used to get the desired result. |
| [Format to Form URL encoded](/references/mapper/serialize-form-urlencoded) | Converts a data object or array into a Form URL encoded string. |
| [Format to JSON](/references/mapper/serialize-json) | Converts a data object or array into a JSON formatted string. |
| [Format to URL encoded](/references/mapper/serialize-url-encode) | Converts a data object or array into a URL encoded string. |
| [Format to XLSX](/references/mapper/serialize-xlsx) | Converts a data object or array into a binary XLSX file. |
| [Format to XML](/references/mapper/serialize-xml) | Converts a data object or array into an XML formatted string. |
| [Format to YAML](/references/mapper/serialize-yaml) | Converts a data object or array into a YAML formatted string. |
| [Format to cXML](/references/mapper/serialize-cxml) | Converts a data object or array into a cXML formatted string. |
| [Format to selected format](/references/mapper/serialize) | Converts a data object into the desired output format. |
| [Locale: Display region](/references/mapper/locale-display-region) | Gets the region for the locale string in the supplied language. |
| [Map value using comparator](/references/mapper/standard) | Maps a value to the 'to' value based on the comparator. |
| [Map value using dictionary](/references/mapper/dictionary-map) | Converts input from one value into another using a lookup dictionary. For example, the value “1” into “One”, “Yes” into “Si”, etc. |
| [Map when a condition applies](/references/mapper/conditional) | Applies mappers when the conditions apply. |
| [Math: absolute value](/references/mapper/math-abs) | Gets the absolute value for an integer or float. |
| [Math: ceil](/references/mapper/math-ceil) | Rounds to the next highest integer. |
| [Math: floor](/references/mapper/math-floor) | Rounds to the next lowest integer. |
| [Math: round](/references/mapper/math-round) | Rounds a number to the provided precision. |
| [Object: Diff keys](/references/mapper/list-diff-keys) | Returns the keys present in the object but not in the supplied data. |
| [Object: Get keys](/references/mapper/list-keys) | Returns the keys of an object as an array. |
| [Object: Keep matching keys](/references/mapper/list-intersect-keys) | Returns only the keys that exist in both the object and the supplied data. |
| [Object: Sort keys](/references/mapper/object-sort-keys) | Sorts the keys of an object based on the provided sort method and direction. |
| [Parse from Form URL encoded](/references/mapper/deserialize-form-urlencoded) | Converts a Form URL encoded string into a data object. |
| [Parse from JSON](/references/mapper/deserialize-json) | Parses a JSON string into a data object. |
| [Parse from URL encoded](/references/mapper/deserialize-url-encode) | Decodes a URL encoded string into plain text. |
| [Parse from XML](/references/mapper/deserialize-xml) | Parses an XML string into a data object. |
| [Parse from YAML](/references/mapper/deserialize-yaml) | Converts a YAML string into a data object. |
| [Parse from cXML](/references/mapper/deserialize-cxml) | Parses a cXML string into a data object. |
| [Parse from selected format](/references/mapper/deserialize) | Converts a string in XML, JSON, CSV, or other formats into a data object. |
| [String: Append](/references/mapper/string-append) | Appends a string to the data. |
| [String: Base64 decode](/references/mapper/string-base64-decode) | Decodes a base64 encoded string back to its original value. |
| [String: Base64 encode](/references/mapper/string-base64-encode) | Takes the input string and converts it to a base64 encoded value. It can be used for example to create an identifier based on certain values in the data. |
| [String: Capitalize first word](/references/mapper/string-upper-first) | Takes the given input string and converts the first letter to a capital. This only works when en phrase starts with a lowercase letter. |
| [String: Convert character set of string](/references/mapper/string-iconv) | Converts a string from one encoding to another. |
| [String: Convert encoding](/references/mapper/string-convert-encoding) | Converts a string to the specified encoding. The from encoding must be known. |
| [String: Convert to lowercase](/references/mapper/string-lower) | Takes the given input and casts all letters to a lower case. The given input must be a valid string. |
| [String: Convert to uppercase](/references/mapper/string-upper) | Converts all letters in the input to uppercase. |
| [String: Cut](/references/mapper/string-cut) | Cuts a string at the provided length value starting the count at the start value. |
| [String: Decode HTML entities](/references/mapper/string-html-entity-decode) | HTML decodes a string to human-readable text. |
| [String: Encode HTML entities](/references/mapper/string-html-entity-encode) | Encodes all HTML entities in a string. |
| [String: Explode to an array](/references/mapper/string-explode) | Takes the given input string and converts it to an array/list based on a specified split character. |
| [String: Explode to an array using a regular expression](/references/mapper/string-preg-split) | Explodes a string based on a supplied regex. |
| [String: Extract directory from path](/references/mapper/string-file-dirname) | Extracts the directory portion from a file path. For example, '/uploads/image.jpg' returns '/uploads'. |
| [String: Extract filename from path](/references/mapper/string-file-basename) | Extracts the filename from a file path. For example, '/uploads/image.jpg' returns 'image.jpg'. |
| [String: Generate dispersed file path](/references/mapper/string-dispersion) | Generates a nested directory path from a string, distributing files across subdirectories to avoid large flat directories. |
| [String: Hash](/references/mapper/string-hash) | Hashes a string with the provided algorithm, the output can be a string or binary. |
| [String: Parse file path into parts](/references/mapper/string-file-pathinfo) | Parses a file path into its components (directory, filename, and extension). |
| [String: Prepend](/references/mapper/string-prepend) | Prepends a value onto a string. |
| [String: Replace](/references/mapper/string-replace) | Replaces within a string based on a string comparison. |
| [String: Replace using regular expression](/references/mapper/string-regex-replace) | Replaces part of a string based on the supplied regex. |
| [String: Slugify](/references/mapper/string-slugify) | Removes all non-alphanumeric characters and replaces them with hyphens (-). |
| [String: Strip HTML tags](/references/mapper/string-strip-html) | Removes the HTML tags from a string. A set of tags can be supplied to be excluded. |
| [String: Transliterate](/references/mapper/string-transliterate-id) | Transliterates a string based on the supplied transliterator. Can be used to change UTF-16 code units into single characters. |
| [String: Trim characters](/references/mapper/string-trim) | Trims characters from the left or right side of a string. |
# Operators
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/operator
The comparison operators used to build conditions, such as equals, contains, and greater than.
This page will explain the operators available in Alumio and how they are used to build conditions.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/overview
Transformers are the data manipulation layer in Alumio. They define how data is reshaped, enriched, filtered, or mapped as it moves through an integration. Instead of writing custom code, you configure transformers through the Alumio interface to handle everything from simple field mappings to complex data restructuring.
Navigate to **Transformers** in the top navigation to create and manage transformers.
### What Transformers do
A transformer takes an input –– the entity data at a given point in the integration flow –– and produces a modified output. That output is then passed to the next step in the flow. Transformers can:
* Map fields from one structure to another (e.g. rename, move, or combine fields).
* Filter out records that do not meet a condition.
* Enrich data by pulling in values from Storages or other sources.
* Convert data types and formats.
* Execute logic conditionally based on the content of the data.
* Send emails, write to Storages, or interact with external systems as part of the data flow.
### Where Transformers are used
Transformers can be applied at multiple points in an integration flow:
| Location | What it affects |
| :- | :- |
| Incoming configuration | Transforms data after it is fetched from the source, before tasks are created. |
| Route | Transforms data between the Incoming and Outgoing steps. |
| Outgoing configuration | Transforms data before it is sent to the destination system. |
| HTTP Proxies | Transforms the request before forwarding and the response before returning it to the consumer. |
| Email Transformer | Sends an email at any point in the flow as part of data processing. |
### How Transformers work
Transformers are built by combining individual data transformers into a sequence. Each transformer in the sequence receives the output of the previous one, allowing you to chain multiple operations together into a single processing pipeline.
Transformers reference data using **placeholder syntax**, for example `&{fieldName}`, which allows you to dynamically reference values from the entity data anywhere in your transformer configuration.
Transformers are reusable. A single transformer configuration can be linked to multiple Incoming configurations, Routes, or Outgoing configurations, meaning changes made in one place apply everywhere it is used.
# Formatters
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/serializer
The following formatters are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Format to CSV](/references/serializer/csv) | Converts the context data to CSV with options for the delimiter, enclosure, separator and skipping headers. |
| [Format to JSON](/references/serializer/json) | Converts the context data into JSON. |
| [Format to JSON Lines (NDJSON)](/references/serializer/ndjson) | Converts the context data objects into NDJSON. |
| [Format to URL encoded](/references/serializer/url-encode) | Converts the context into a URL encoded string. |
| [Format to XLSX](/references/serializer/xlsx) | Converts the context data into XLSX binary data. |
| [Format to XML](/references/serializer/xml) | Converts the context data into an XML string. |
| [Format to XML-RPC](/references/serializer/xmlrpc-serializer) | |
| [Format to YAML](/references/serializer/yaml) | Converts the context data into a YAML string. |
| [Format to binary data](/references/serializer/binary) | Converts the context data into binary data. |
| [Format to cXML](/references/serializer/cxml) | |
| [Format to form URL encoded](/references/serializer/form-urlencoded) | Converts the context data into form url encoded string. |
# Transformers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/transformer
This page will explain what transformers are and where they are used.
The following transformers are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Apply in a while loop](/references/transformer/while) | Runs a transformer in a while loop. |
| [Apply operator](/references/transformer/operator) | Apply an operation to fields in the data. |
| [Apply transformer conditionally](/references/transformer/conditional) | Executes a transformer when a condition is met. |
| [Chain transformers](/references/transformer/chain) | Executes a list of data transformers in sequence. |
| [Convert data to arrays](/references/transformer/convert-to-array) | Transforms JSON objects to arrays. |
| [Copy using a path](/references/transformer/pattern-copy) | Takes a part of the entity data and copies it. |
| [Copy using an accessor](/references/transformer/accessor-copy) | Copies a part of the entity data to another location within the entity data, while leaving the original content unchanged. |
| [Execute GraphQL request](/references/transformer/graphql-transformer) | Executes HTTP requests to GraphQL APIs. |
| [Execute HTTP request](/references/transformer/http-transformer) | Executes HTTP requests to web endpoints. |
| [Execute SOAP request](/references/transformer/soap-transformer) | Executes requests to a web service via the SOAP protocol. |
| [Execute SQL query](/references/transformer/pdo-transformer-v2) | Executes an SQL query as a prepared statement and stores the result at a destination path. |
| [Execute XML-RPC request](/references/transformer/xmlrpc-transformer) | Executes requests to an XML-RPC web service. |
| [Execute entity transformers](/references/transformer/list-transformer-wrapper) | Executes one or more entity transformers in sequence. |
| [Expand path](/references/transformer/expand-path) | Combines the existing data and value moving all paths from source to destination pattern. |
| [Filesystem: Copy a file](/references/transformer/filesystem-copy-file) | Copies a file to a specified destination. |
| [Filesystem: Move a file](/references/transformer/filesystem-move-file) | Moves a file to another directory or filesystem. |
| [Filesystem: Read files](/references/transformer/read-files) | Reads the contents of a file from a filesystem and adds it to the data. |
| [Filesystem: Write files](/references/transformer/filesystem-write-file) | Writes data to a file on a filesystem. |
| [Flatten nested structure](/references/transformer/flatten-nested-structure) | Recursively flattens a nested data structure. |
| [For each item](/references/transformer/node) | Loop over items and apply a transformer to each. |
| [Group records](/references/transformer/group-by) | Groups items from a list by the value of a specific key. |
| [Map array or object items](/references/transformer/list-mapper) | Performs actions on arrays and objects. |
| [Map keys](/references/transformer/key-mapper) | Performs actions on keys in the data. |
| [Map values](/references/transformer/value-mapper) | Transforms values in the data. |
| [Merge transformer output](/references/transformer/merger) | Combines the output of a transformer with the existing data. |
| [Move using a path](/references/transformer/pattern-move) | Takes a part of the entity data and moves it to a new location in the entity data. This transformer can be used to move the value of a key, or a nested key, like “product”, or “product.name” into a new key like “itemName”, or “item.itemName”. |
| [Move using an accessor](/references/transformer/accessor-move) | The Accessor-move Transformer is used to take a part from the entity data and move it somewhere else in the structure. |
| [Pause processing](/references/transformer/sleep) | Pause processing for a number of seconds. |
| [Recursively copy values to children](/references/transformer/recursively-copy-values-to-children) | Copies a value to nested child properties recursively. |
| [Remove keys by accessor](/references/transformer/key-filter) | Removes certain parts of the context data based on accessors. |
| [Remove values](/references/transformer/value-remover) | Removes values from the data based on patterns. |
| [Remove values by condition](/references/transformer/value-filter) | Removes values from the data when they meet a specific set of conditions. |
| [Render a template](/references/transformer/template-transformer) | Use a template with expressions and filters to render output based on the supplied data. |
| [Send email](/references/transformer/email-transformer) | Sends an email. |
| [Set global variable](/references/transformer/global-variable-setter) | Sets a variable in the global scope. |
| [Set values](/references/transformer/value-setter) | Adds or updates data at specific keys in the context. Supports placeholders to reference existing data. |
| [Storage: Delete all items](/references/transformer/storage-truncate-storage) | Deletes all items in a storage. |
| [Storage: Delete item](/references/transformer/storage-delete-entity-from-storage) | Deletes an item in a storage based on an identifier. |
| [Storage: Get all items](/references/transformer/storage-all-from-storage) | Gets all items from a storage. |
| [Storage: Get item](/references/transformer/storage-get-entity-from-storage) | Gets an item from a storage based on an identifier. |
| [Storage: Load progress](/references/transformer/storage-tracker-load-from-storage) | Makes the data saved in a storage by the "Storage: Track progress" transformer available in the entity data. |
| [Storage: Remove keys from item](/references/transformer/storage-remove-entity-from-storage) | Removes partial data from an item in a storage. |
| [Storage: Save item](/references/transformer/storage-save-entity-in-storage) | Saves data to a storage with an identifier. |
| [Storage: Track progress](/references/transformer/storage-tracker-save-in-storage) | Tracks the progress of a data synchronization. |
| [Storage: Update item](/references/transformer/storage-update-entity-in-storage) | Updates values of an item saved in a storage. |
| [Throw error](/references/transformer/exception) | Interrupt processing when a condition is met. |
| [Transform using JavaScript](/references/transformer/code-transformer) | Transform data using JavaScript code. |
| [Write log message](/references/transformer/debug) | Logs custom messages during execution. |
# List transformers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/data-transformation/transformer-step
This page will explain what list transformers are and where they are used.
The following list transformers are available:
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| [Alumio - EDI - Acknowledge](/references/transformer-step/alumio-edi-acknowledge-v2) | Generate EDI acknowledgments |
| [Alumio - EDI - Deserialize](/references/transformer-step/alumio-edi-deserialize-v2) | Convert an EDI message to JSON |
| [Alumio - EDI - Serialize](/references/transformer-step/alumio-edi-serialize-v2) | Convert JSON to an EDI message |
| [Alumio - EDI - Validate](/references/transformer-step/alumio-edi-validate-v2) | Validate an EDI message |
| [Alumio - EDIFACT - D96A to JSON](/references/transformer-step/edifact-json-to-schema) | Convert an EDIFACT D96A message to JSON |
| [Chain multiple entity transformers](/references/transformer-step/chain) | The Chain transformer is used to execute a list of data transformers. |
| [Conditional entity transformer](/references/transformer-step/conditional) | The Conditional Transformer enables decision-making within data flows, by allowing you to execute other Transformers when certain pre-configured conditions are met. |
| [Create batches by combining items](/references/transformer-step/batch-creator) | Combines multiple input items into a single output item. |
| [Data, transform data using mappers and conditions](/references/transformer-step/data) | Apply a set transformers based on optional filter condition. |
| [Exact - Customer - Retrieve customer](/references/transformer-step/exact-retrieve-customer) | Checking Existed Customer and Creating Customer in Exact |
| [Exact - Order - Alumio order to Exact](/references/transformer-step/alumio-order-restructure-to-exact) | Alumio Order to Exact restructure |
| [Exact - Order - Getting Item Id from Exact](/references/transformer-step/getting-item-id-from-exact) | Alumiuo Order to Exact restructure |
| [Filter Order By Status](/references/transformer-step/filter-order-by-status) | Filter an order by a status |
| [Filter previously stored entities](/references/transformer-step/storage-filter-stored-entity) | Filter on previously stored entities |
| [Get branches from a pattern](/references/transformer-step/brancher) | Takes a set of entities and branches the data based on the supplied pattern. |
| [Merge input with output](/references/transformer-step/merger) | |
| [Netsuite Create customer that doesn't exist yet](/references/transformer-step/netsuite-create-customer-that-doesnt-exist-yet) | Create customer that doesn't exist yet in Netsuite |
| [Netsuite Currency Dictionary](/references/transformer-step/netsuite-currency-dictionary) | Map Netsuite currencies |
| [Netsuite Getting Customer Id](/references/transformer-step/netsuite-getting-customer-id) | Getting Existed Customer Id in Netsuite |
| [Netsuite Order restructure](/references/transformer-step/order-netsuite-restructure) | Order Schema org to Netsuite Order restructure |
| [Netsuite Shipping Dictionary](/references/transformer-step/netsuite-shipping-dictionary) | Map Netsuite shipments |
| [Node, transform nodes](/references/transformer-step/node) | The node transformer takes the settings in the supplied accessor and filters and applies the data transformer on every matching item. |
| [Set the entity schema](/references/transformer-step/type-setter) | Set the entity type for the data. |
| [Split up: Get items from HTTP request](/references/transformer-step/http) | HTTP Transformers are used to interact with web endpoints. Used to get items from an external endpoint one by one. |
| [Transform schema.org data order to stamped io order](/references/transformer-step/stamped-io-order-restructure) | Transform schema.org data order to stamped io order |
| [Validate by JSON schema](/references/transformer-step/json-schema-validator-filter) | Transformer is used to validate JSON data based on the supplied schema. |
| [Write all items to a file](/references/transformer-step/write-file) | Writes all its input items to a file and returns the path of the created file. |
| [Write all items to a file](/references/transformer-step/write-file) | Writes all its input items to a file and returns the path of the created file. |
# Dashboard
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/getting-started/dashboard
The Dashboard is the first page you see when logging into Alumio. It gives a real-time overview of your environment's health, task statistics, and system resource usage.
### What the Dashboard shows
| Section | Description |
| :- | :- |
| Task statistics | Number of tasks per status: New, Processing, Failed, Skipped, Finished, and Total. Filterable by today, last week, past 30 days, or a custom range. Updated every 60 seconds. |
| Errors and issues | Highlights issues detected in your configurations. |
| Routes overview | Per-route breakdown of tasks created, processed, failed, skipped, and finished. |
| Memory pressure | Shows which configurations consume the most memory in your environment. |
| Data engines | Displays the number of data engines applied to your license and lists scheduled queues. |
| Disk usage | Available to system administrators only. Shows database and filesystem capacity, and limits on email alerts and tasks. |
### Navigation
The main menu sits at the top of the page and provides access to all Alumio functionality. The environment indicator in the top bar shows whether the active environment is **Production** or **UAT**.
* **Tasks** –– overview of all tasks in the environment.
* **Connections**
* HTTP (API)
* Database
* SOAP
* HTTP Proxies
* Webhooks
* Filesystems
* HTTP Authentications.
* **Integrations**
* Routes
* Incoming
* Outgoing
* Schedulers.
* **Transformers** –– entity transformer configurations.
* **Storages** –– key-value data stores.
* **Access control**
* Users
* API Keys
* Audit Trail
* Information.
* **System**
* Entity Schemas
* Alerts
* Environment variables
* Server statistics
* Queue
* Import/Export.
* **Admin panel**
* Spaces
* System administrators
* Audit trail
* Environment details.
* **Notifications** –– all environment notifications.
* **Help**
* Create ticket –– opens a support ticket.
* Forum –– navigates to the forum documentation.
* Release notes –– shows all release notes.
* Getting started –– videos to assist with working in Alumio.
* **User profile** –– switch environments, manage user preferences (cookies, dashboard reload), and log out.
# Glossary
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/glossary
### Integrations
**Task** –– A single record being processed through an integration. For example, one order, one product, or one customer. Every piece of data that flows through Alumio becomes a Task that can be tracked, retried, or inspected.
**Incoming configuration** –– The part of an integration that retrieves data from a source system, such as an API, FTP server, or database to Alumio.
**Source (Subscriber)** –– The component inside an Incoming configuration that connects to a source system and retrieves data from it. The subscriber defines the protocol and method used to fetch data, for example, an HTTP subscriber calls a REST API, a Filesystem subscriber reads files from an FTP server, and a Webhook subscriber listens for incoming data pushed by an external system.
**Outgoing configuration** –– The part of an integration that sends processed data from Alumio to a target system, such as an API, database, or filesystem.
**Destination (Publisher)** –– The component inside an Outgoing configuration that connects to a target system and delivers processed data to it. The publisher defines how data is sent, for example, an HTTP publisher posts data to a REST API, a Database Batch publisher inserts rows into a database, and a Filesystem publisher writes files to an FTP server.
**Route** –– The connection between a source and a target system. A Route defines where data comes from, where it goes, and how it is transformed along the way.
**Scheduler** –– A timer that automatically runs an Incoming configuration or Route at a defined interval, so integrations run in the background without manual triggers.
### Connections
**HTTP (API) connection** –– A connection to a REST or HTTP-based external system. Holds the base URL, authentication, and request settings needed for Alumio to communicate with an API.
**HTTP Authentication** –– The credentials and authentication method used by an HTTP connection. Configured separately and linked to an HTTP client. Supported types include Basic, Bearer Token, OAuth 2.0, OAuth 1.0, API key, and more.
**HTTP Proxy connection** –– A synchronous inbound endpoint in Alumio. An external system sends a request to it and receives a real-time response from a connected target system. Used when the caller needs an immediate data response, not just a confirmation.
**Database** **connection** –– A direct connection to a relational database such as MySQL, PostgreSQL, MSSQL, or Oracle. Used to read rows from or write data to a database as part of an integration.
**SOAP** **connection** –– A connection to a SOAP-based web service. Uses a WSDL definition to describe available operations and communicate using XML-formatted messages.
**Email Servers** –– A connection for sending emails from within integrations. Supports SMTP and SendGrid. Used to deliver notifications, status updates, or reports automatically during data processing.
**Webhook connection** –– An inbound endpoint in Alumio that external systems push data to in real time. Data is received and processed asynchronously as Tasks in the background.
**Filesystem connection** –– A connection to a remote or local file environment such as FTP, SFTP, AWS S3, Azure Blob Storage, or Google Cloud Storage. Used to read files from a source or write files to a destination as part of an integration.
### Other functionality
**Storages** –– A built-in key-value data store that persists data between integration runs. Used for delta filtering, pagination tracking, ID mapping, and caching reference data.
**Entity transformer** –– A configuration that modifies, maps, or filters data as it flows through an integration. Used to convert data from one format or structure into another.
**Space** –– An isolated environment within a single Alumio instance, used to separate configurations and data for different customers or projects.
**Data Engine** –– A worker that picks up jobs from the Scheduler Queue and executes them. The number of Data Engines available depends on your Alumio license.
**Environment variable** –– A securely stored value, such as an API key, that can be reused across multiple configurations without exposing the raw value.
**Alerts** –– Automated email notifications triggered when something goes wrong in an integration. Can be configured to fire when a Task reaches a specific status (e.g. Failed) or when no new Tasks are created within a defined time window.
# Incoming configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/integrations/incoming-configurations
Incoming configurations bring data into Alumio from a source system.
An **Incoming configuration** is the first step of a [Route](/documentation/integrations/routes). It is responsible for getting data into Alumio. For each item it returns, Alumio creates a [Task](/documentation/integrations/tasks).
## **What an Incoming Can Do**
An Incoming configuration can pull data from a wide range of sources. The most common ones are:
* [HTTP / API](/references/http-client) connections, for example to fetch a list of orders from an external API.
* [Database](/references/database-connection) connections, to run a query against a SQL database.
* [Filesystem](/references/filesystem) connections, to read files from local storage, FTP, or cloud storage.
* [SOAP](/references/soap-client) connections, for legacy systems that expose SOAP services.
## **Transformers on the Incoming**
You can add [transformers](/references/transformer) to an Incoming configuration. They run on the data as it comes in, before any tasks are created.
Transformers are typically used to:
* Shape the data so it matches the format you want to store on the task.
* Enrich the data with values from other systems or from Alumio storage.
* Cache values that are reused later in the route.
Detailed documentation on individual transformers will be published separately. For an overview of what is available, see the [Transformers reference](/references/transformer) and the [List transformers reference](/references/transformer-step).
## **Filters on the Incoming**
Adding a [filter](/references/filter) to the Incoming transformers prevents tasks from being created for items that do not match the filter. A common example is to skip orders that have already been processed in a previous run.
## **Task Data**
After the Incoming has run and its transformers have finished, Alumio stores the resulting data on the task. This data is called the **entity data**, and it is what the Outgoing configuration receives later in the route. See [Tasks](/documentation/integrations/tasks) for the full task lifecycle.
## **Reusing an Incoming**
The same Incoming configuration can be used in multiple [routes](/documentation/integrations/routes). When it is reused, Alumio fetches the data only once and then duplicates the resulting tasks for each Route. This is useful when the same source data needs to be sent to several different destinations.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/integrations/index
An overview of how Alumio moves data between systems using routes, configurations, and tasks.
**Integrations** define how data flows between systems in Alumio. Each integration is built from four components: a Route that connects everything together, an Incoming configuration that fetches the data, an Outgoing configuration that sends it to the destination, and a Scheduler that triggers the whole flow automatically.
Navigate to **Integrations** in the top navigation to access Routes, Incoming, Outgoing, and Schedulers.
### What integrations are
An integration in Alumio is a configured data flow between a source system and a destination system. Instead of building point-to-point connections, Alumio breaks each integration into reusable components that can be combined, tested, and monitored independently.
A typical integration flow looks like this:
**Scheduler** triggers the **Route** → **Incoming** fetches data and creates tasks → **Outgoing** picks up tasks and sends data to the destination.
### Setting up a Route
A Route is the backbone of an integration. It connects an Incoming configuration, an Outgoing configuration, and a Scheduler, and controls how data moves from source to destination.
To set up a Route, you need three things in place first:
* An **Incoming configuration** that defines where data comes from and how it is fetched.
* An **Outgoing configuration** that defines where data goes and how it is sent.
* A **Scheduler** that defines when the Route runs.
### Seeing your first results
Once a Route has run, results are visible as tasks. A task is one unit of work created by the Incoming for each item it returns. Tasks are the best place to verify that your integration is working correctly.
Navigate to **Tasks** in the top navigation to see all tasks across your environment. Each task shows:
* The entity data is returned by the Incoming after the transformers have run.
* The current status: `New`, `Processing`, `Finished`, `Failed`, `Skipped`, or `Waiting`.
* Logs for that task, including any error messages.
If tasks are showing a `Failed` status, the logs on the task will indicate what went wrong -- for example, a `500` error from the destination API or a transformer misconfiguration.
### Why you need a Scheduler
Without a Scheduler, a Route does not run automatically. A Scheduler defines the interval at which a Route is triggered, for example, every 5 minutes, hourly, or once a day.
Schedulers are what make integrations continuous. Instead of manually triggering a Route each time, the Scheduler ensures data is fetched and processed on a predictable cadence. For event-driven integrations where the source system pushes data, a Webhook can replace the Scheduler as the trigger.
Each Scheduler is linked to one Route. If you need the same data flow to run on multiple schedules, create separate Schedulers and link each one to its own Route.
# Outgoing configurations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/integrations/outgoing-configurations
Outgoing configurations send data from Alumio to a destination system.
An **outgoing configuration** is the second step of a [route](/documentation/integrations/routes). It picks up [tasks](/documentation/integrations/tasks) created by the incoming and sends their data to a destination system.
## **What an Outgoing Can Do**
An outgoing configuration can send data to the same kinds of systems as an incoming. The most common ones are:
* [HTTP / API](/references/http-client) connections, for example to post an order to an external API.
* [Database](/references/database-connection) connections, to insert or update records in a SQL database.
* [Filesystem](/references/filesystem) connections, to write files to local storage, FTP, or cloud storage.
* [SOAP](/references/soap-client) connections, for legacy systems.
## **How the Outgoing Picks Up Tasks**
When the outgoing runs, it looks for tasks with the status `New`. For each task, it runs the outgoing transformers and then sends the data to the destination system.
After sending, the task status moves to `Finished`, or to `Waiting` when [Enable waiting status](/documentation/integrations/routes#route-options) is set on the route. If sending fails, the status becomes `Failed`. See [Tasks](/documentation/integrations/tasks) for the full status lifecycle.
## **Transformers on the Outgoing**
You can add [transformers](/references/transformer) to an outgoing configuration. They run on the task data right before it is sent, and are typically used for final formatting or for serializing the data into the structure the destination system expects.
Detailed documentation on individual transformers will be published separately. For the available transformers, see the [Transformers reference](/references/transformer).
## **Filters on the Outgoing**
Adding a [filter](/references/filter) to the outgoing transformers does not prevent the task from being created, since the task already exists at this point. Instead, the task is moved to the `Skipped` status and the data is not sent to the destination system.
This is useful when a task should be acknowledged in Alumio but not actually delivered, for example to skip orders below a certain amount.
## **Reusing an Outgoing**
The same outgoing configuration can be used in multiple [routes](/documentation/integrations/routes). This makes it easy to share a destination, such as a single ERP endpoint, across different integration flows.
# Routes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/integrations/routes
A Route connects two systems by combining an Incoming configuration, route transformers, and an Outgoing configuration.
In Alumio, integrations between two systems are built using **Routes**. A Route describes how data moves from a source system into Alumio, how it is transformed, and how it is sent to a destination system.
## **Anatomy of a Route**
Every Route is built from three building blocks:
* An [Incoming configuration](/documentation/integrations/incoming-configurations) that fetches data from a source system.
* Route [transformers](/references/transformer) that shape or enrich the data inside Alumio.
* An [Outgoing configuration](/documentation/integrations/outgoing-configurations) that sends the data to a destination system.
Both the Incoming and Outgoing configurations can also have their own transformers, so a Route has three transformation stages in total: on the Incoming, on the Route itself, and on the Outgoing.
## **How a Route Runs**
A Route runs in two steps:
1. The **Incoming** is executed first. It collects data from the source system. For each item returned, Alumio creates a [Task](/documentation/integrations/tasks) that holds the data for that item.
2. The **Outgoing** is executed next. It picks up the tasks created by the Incoming, runs the outgoing transformers, and sends the data to the destination system.
Tasks move through a status lifecycle (`New`, `Processing`, `Finished`, `Failed`, `Skipped`, `Waiting`). See [Tasks](/documentation/integrations/tasks) for the full lifecycle.
## **Reusing Configurations**
Both Incoming and Outgoing configurations can be used in more than one route. This makes it easy to fan out the same source data to multiple destinations, or to share a destination across several flows.
When the same Incoming configuration is used in multiple Routes, the data is fetched only once. Alumio then duplicates the resulting tasks for each Route that uses the Incoming.
## **Route Options**
A Route exposes several options that control how it runs. You can configure these on the Route detail page.
**Enable task retrying**
When a task fails (for example, the destination API returns an error), Alumio retries the outgoing part of the route on that task. See [Tasks](/documentation/integrations/tasks#failed) for how failed tasks are handled.
**Enable waiting status**
After processing, the task status is set to `Waiting` instead of `Finished`. The task stays in `Waiting` until it is manually moved to `Finished` or `Failed`.
**Enable real-time processing**
The Route automatically runs on each task as soon as the Incoming creates it. With real-time processing enabled, you do not need a [Scheduler](/documentation/integrations/schedulers) on the route.
**Enable parallel processing**
Allows multiple exports to run at the same time. To use this, set up several [Schedulers](/documentation/integrations/schedulers) on the Route. Each Scheduler runs as one parallel process.
Improper configuration may cause race conditions or data inconsistencies, so use this option with care. Parallel processing cannot be combined with real-time processing.
## **Triggering a Route**
A route can be started in several ways:
* A [Scheduler](/documentation/integrations/schedulers) runs the route on a recurring interval. This is the most common setup.
* A [Webhook](/references/webhook) injects data directly into the incoming configuration. The incoming then creates tasks from the webhook payload.
* **Real-time processing** (see above) runs the outgoing automatically as tasks are created.
## Running a Route via Classic mode
## Running a Route via Route Builder
# Schedulers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/integrations/schedulers
Schedulers run a route automatically on a recurring interval.
A **Scheduler** runs a [Route](/documentation/integrations/routes) automatically on a recurring interval, for example every five minutes or once a day. Schedulers are the most common way to keep an integration running without manual intervention.
You can manage schedulers under **Integrations → Schedulers**.
## **What a Scheduler Does**
When a scheduler fires, it runs the Route it is attached to. This means both the [Incoming](/documentation/integrations/incoming-configurations) and the [Outgoing](/documentation/integrations/outgoing-configurations) parts of the route are executed, in that order.
For the available scheduler types and their configuration options, see the [Schedulers reference](/references/scheduler-entry).
## **Multiple Schedulers for Parallel Processing**
A Route can have more than one scheduler. When you combine this with the **Enable parallel processing** option on the Route, each Scheduler runs as one parallel process. For the trade-offs, see the [parallel processing option](/documentation/integrations/routes#route-options) on the Routes page.
## **Other Ways to Trigger a Route**
A Scheduler is not the only way to run a route:
* **Real-time processing** on the route runs the Outgoing automatically as soon as a task is created. See the [route options](/documentation/integrations/routes#route-options).
* A [Webhook](/references/webhook) can inject data directly into the Incoming configuration, creating tasks without waiting for a Scheduler.
## Repairing stuck Tasks via Scheduler
Tasks occasionally get stuck in a **Processing** status when an integration process is interrupted before it completes. Left unresolved, stuck Tasks block the queue and prevent new data from being processed. The **Repair stuck tasks** Scheduler job detects these Tasks automatically and resets them so processing can resume.
***
## Setting up the Repair stuck tasks Scheduler
Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers** and create a new Scheduler. In the **Job** dropdown, select **Repair stuck tasks**.
Three configuration options appear below the Job field:
**Minimum age of tasks**
Defines how long a Task must have been stuck in Processing status before the Scheduler attempts to repair it. Set the **Number** field to a value and select the **Unit** (minutes, hours, or days). This prevents the Scheduler from prematurely interfering with Tasks that are simply taking longer than usual to complete.
**Routes**
Limits the repair job to specific Routes. Select one or more Routes from the dropdown to check only those, or leave the field empty to check all Routes in the environment.
**New task status**
The status to assign to a repaired Task. Three options are available:
* **New** –– resets the Task so it will be picked up and processed again on the next Route run.
* **Failed** –– marks the Task as failed for manual review.
* **Skipped** –– excludes the Task from further processing.
Once configured, set a schedule (e.g. every hour) and save. The Scheduler will run automatically at the defined interval and reset any Tasks that match the criteria.
> Set up this Scheduler proactively on all environments. Stuck Tasks are not always immediately visible and can silently block a queue for extended periods if not caught early.
# Tasks
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/integrations/tasks
Tasks are individual units of work created from items returned by an incoming configuration.
A **task** is one unit of work inside a [route](/documentation/integrations/routes). Tasks are created by the [incoming configuration](/documentation/integrations/incoming-configurations): for each item the incoming returns, Alumio creates one task. The [outgoing configuration](/documentation/integrations/outgoing-configurations) later picks up these tasks and sends their data to the destination system.
Each task stores the **entity data**, which is the data that was returned by the incoming after the incoming and route transformers have run.
## **Task Status Lifecycle**
A task moves through a series of statuses during its life.
**New**
The task has just been created by the incoming and is waiting to be picked up by the outgoing.
**Processing**
The outgoing has picked up the task and is currently running its transformers and sending the data.
**Finished**
The task has been processed successfully. The data was sent to the destination system without errors.
**Failed**
An error occurred during processing, for example a `500` error from the destination API. If [Enable task retrying](/documentation/integrations/routes#route-options) is enabled on the route, Alumio retries the outgoing part of the route on this task.
**Skipped**
A [filter](/references/filter) on the outgoing matched, so the data was not sent to the destination system. The task is kept for visibility but is considered done. See [Filters on the Outgoing](/documentation/integrations/outgoing-configurations#filters-on-the-outgoing).
**Waiting**
The task has been processed but is awaiting manual confirmation. This status only appears when [Enable waiting status](/documentation/integrations/routes#route-options) is enabled on the route. A task in `Waiting` stays there until it is manually moved to `Finished` or `Failed`.
## **Viewing and Managing Tasks**
Tasks are visible from the route, incoming, and outgoing detail pages, as well as from the dedicated tasks views in the Alumio dashboard. From there you can:
* Inspect the entity data of a task.
* See the logs for a task, including any error messages.
* Retry a failed task or manually move a `Waiting` task to a final status.
# Alerting
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/monitoring/alerting
Set up alerts so your team is notified when an integration needs attention.
Alerts notify you by email when something goes wrong in your integrations, so you don't have to monitor them manually.
Navigate to **More → System → Alerts** for the environment-wide overview, or configure alerts directly on the **Alerts** tab within any Route or Incoming configuration.
**Recipients** is a centralised list of reusable notification targets that can be referenced across multiple alert configurations. Navigate to **More → System → Alerts → Recipients**.
To create a recipient, click **Create**, enter a name, optionally add a description, and select a prototype:
* **Email recipient** –– sends alert notifications to an email address.
* **Webhook recipient** –– posts alert notifications to a webhook URL.
Recipients can be filtered by name, creation date, or last updated date, and deleted individually. Creating recipients centrally means you can update a notification target in one place without editing each alert configuration individually.
# Audit trail
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/monitoring/audit-trail
Review a record of the changes and actions taken in your Alumio environment.
The Audit trail is a chronological log of all significant actions taken in your environment. Navigate to **More → Access control → Audit trail**.
It records successful and failed logins, user role changes, configuration creates/edits/deletes, task status changes (Waiting, Skipped, Retried), queue actions (skip/kill), environment variable changes, Space changes, and storage entity updates.
Each entry shows the date, the user who acted, their IP address, the category and action type, a description with links to affected configurations, and the Space in which the action occurred. Entries can be filtered by any column and exported in bulk.
# Logs
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/monitoring/logs
Where to find logs in Alumio and how logging works.
Logs in Alumio give you visibility into what happened during integration processing. They are available at multiple levels, from individual tasks to specific configurations, making it easier to trace errors, monitor activity, and debug issues.
### Where to find logs
Logs are accessible from several places across the platform:
| Location | What it shows |
| :- | :- |
| Tasks | Logs for each individual task, including error messages, transformer output, and processing details. Accessible from the Tasks overview or directly from a Route, Incoming, or Outgoing detail page. |
| HTTP Proxies | History of all past requests processed by a specific HTTP Proxy. Found under the Logs tab on the HTTP Proxy detail page. |
| Webhooks | History of all past requests received by a specific Webhook. Found under the Logs tab on the Webhook detail page. |
| Storages | History of entity-level events (creating, updating, and deleting entities) when logging is enabled. Found under the Logs tab on the Storage detail page. |
| Email Servers | Logs of email send attempts when logging is enabled on the Email Transformer. Configurable per event: sender, recipients, and message body. |
| Queue | Processing and throughput times per job. Found under More > System > Queue. Useful for diagnosing timing and performance issues. |
### How to use logs
Logs are most useful for:
* **Debugging failed tasks** –– a task with a Failed status will have a log entry explaining what went wrong, such as a `500` error from the destination API or a misconfigured transformer.
* **Tracing data flow** –– logs on tasks show the entity data at each stage of processing, making it possible to see exactly what data was sent and what came back.
* **Monitoring Webhook and HTTP Proxy activity** –– the Logs tab on these configurations shows every inbound request, useful for verifying that external systems are connecting correctly.
* **Tracking Storage changes** –– when entity-level logging is enabled on a Storage, you can see a full history of when entities were created, updated, or deleted and by which process.
### Configuring logs
Logs in Alumio are not enabled globally –– each configuration type has its own logging settings that need to be enabled individually.
**Tasks and HTTP Proxies**
Task-level logs and HTTP Proxy request logs are available automatically. No additional configuration is required.
**Webhooks**
Webhook logging is enabled in the **General** tab of the Webhook configuration via the **Enable logging** checkbox. When enabled, the full incoming request data is logged each time the Webhook is called.
**Storages**
Logging on a Storage is configured in the **Edit** tab under the **Enable logging for** field. Three operations can be enabled independently:
| Option | What it logs |
| :- | :- |
| Creating entities | Logs when a new entity is written to the Storage. |
| Updating entities | Logs when an existing entity is modified. |
| Deleting entities | Logs when an entity is removed from the Storage. |
**Email Transformer**
Logging for outgoing emails is configured directly on the Email Transformer. Three fields can be enabled independently:
| Option | What it logs |
| :- | :- |
| Email sender | Logs the sender address used for each email. |
| Email recipients | Logs the recipient addresses. |
| Email message | Logs the full email body. |
### Log retention
* **Queue records** are retained for a maximum of 30 days or 1000 entries, whichever is reached first.
* **Task and configuration logs** –– for retention policies, check your environment settings or contact your Customer Success Manager.
# Environment variables
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/environment-variables
What environment variables are and how to use them across your configurations.
Environment Variables allow you to store sensitive or reusable values, such as API keys, passwords, and tokens, centrally in Alumio. Instead of hardcoding credentials directly into connection or transformer configurations, you reference an environment variable by name. This keeps sensitive data out of your configurations and makes it easier to update a value in one place without touching every integration that uses it.
Navigate to **More → System → Environment Variables** to create and manage environment variables.
### What Environment Variables can do
* Store sensitive values such as API keys, passwords, and tokens securely in one place.
* Reference stored values across any configuration using `${VARIABLE_NAME}` syntax.
* Encrypt values so they are hidden in logs and never exposed in plain text.
* Update a credential once and have the change apply everywhere it is referenced.
### Filtering Environment Variables
The overview page lists all environment variables in your environment. Each row shows the variable name, an optional description, the value (masked if encrypted), and whether encryption is enabled. Filters are available for Name and Description. Use **+ Add Filter** for additional conditions. Click any column header to sort.
### Creating an Environment Variable
An environment variable has three fields:
| Field | Required | Description |
| :- | :- | :- |
| Name | Yes | The variable name used to reference it in configurations (e.g. `${AWS_ACCESS_KEY}`). |
| Value | Yes | The value to store, for example, an API key or password. |
| Encrypted | No | When enabled, the value is encrypted and hidden in logs. Recommended for all sensitive values. |
### Using Environment Variables in configurations
Once created, an environment variable can be referenced anywhere in Alumio that accepts plain text input: connection settings, transformer fields, HTTP headers, and more, using the `${VARIABLE_NAME}` syntax. The platform resolves the variable at runtime and substitutes the stored value automatically.
# Patterns
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/patterns
Overview of all pattern types in Alumio and when to use each.
Patterns are dot-notated paths used throughout Alumio to navigate and select data within an entity. Several features use pattern fields, but their behavior differs per context.
## Pattern syntax
| Syntax | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `product.name` | Access the `name` key nested under `product` |
| `products.0` | Access the first element of the `products` array |
| `products.*` | Match all elements of the `products` array |
| `products.*.name` | Access `name` for every element in `products` |
## Pattern types by feature
### Pattern accessor
Accesses one or more values from entity data. Use `*` to match all array items.
Example: `products.*.sku` returns the `sku` of every product.
[View documentation](/references/accessor/pattern)
***
### Copy / Move using a pattern
Copies or moves data from one location to another. Each `*` in the source pattern becomes a numbered capture group (`$1`, `$2`, ...) that can be referenced in the replacement.
Example:
* **Pattern**: `products.*.name`
* **Replacement**: `product_names.$1`
[View documentation for Copy](/references/transformer/pattern-copy) | [View documentation for Move](/references/transformer/pattern-move)
***
### Get branches from a pattern
Splits one entity into multiple branches based on an array in the data. The pattern **must include `*`** — each element matching `*` becomes its own branch.
Example: `products.*` creates one branch per product.
[View documentation](/references/transformer-step/brancher)
***
### Pattern to items (stream deserializers)
Points to the array within the data that contains the items to process. This field does **not** require `*` — it points to the array itself, and the system automatically iterates over all elements.
Example: `data.products` reads items from `{"data": {"products": [...]}}`
Used in: [JSON](/references/stream-deserializer/json), [XML](/references/stream-deserializer/xml), [YAML](/references/stream-deserializer/yaml), [Form URL encoded](/references/stream-deserializer/form-urlencoded)
***
## Key difference: `*` required vs. not required
| Feature | Requires `*`? | Reason |
| - | :-: | - |
| Pattern accessor | Optional | `*` matches all items; without it, only a single path is accessed |
| Copy / Move using a pattern | Optional | `*` enables capture groups in the replacement |
| Get branches from a pattern | **Yes** | The `*` indicates which array level to split on |
| Pattern to items (deserializer) | **No** | Points to the array; iteration is implicit |
## Placeholders
Placeholders (`&{...}`) are a separate feature that inserts dynamic values from entity data into strings. They are different from patterns and work across most text fields.
Example: `&{product.name}` is replaced by the actual product name at runtime.
[View placeholder documentation](/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/placeholders)
# Placeholders
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/placeholders
Insert dynamic values from entity data into text fields using placeholder syntax.
Placeholders let you insert dynamic values from entity data into text fields at runtime. They use the `&{...}` syntax and work across most text fields in Alumio, such as values in the Value setter, templates in the Merger, and URL paths in HTTP transformers.
Placeholders are different from [patterns](/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/patterns): patterns navigate data, placeholders interpolate values into strings.
## Syntax
| Syntax | Description |
| - | - |
| `&{product.name}` | The value at `product.name` in the entity |
| `&{products.0.sku}` | The `sku` of the first product |
| `&{@}` | The entire output of the current transformer |
| `@{globals.}` | A global variable set by the Global variable setter |
## Examples
### Value setter
Set a field to a concatenated string:
**Key**: `full_name`
**Value**: `&{first_name} &{last_name}`
If the entity contains `first_name: "Jane"` and `last_name: "Doe"`, the result is:
```json theme={null}
{
"full_name": "Jane Doe"
}
```
***
### Merger
Merge HTTP transformer output into the entity using a placeholder:
**Template**: `{ "response": "&{@}" }`
This captures the full output of the HTTP transformer and stores it under `response`.
***
### HTTP transformer URL
Use entity data in a request URL:
**URL**: `https://api.example.com/products/&{product.id}`
If `product.id` is `42`, the request goes to `https://api.example.com/products/42`.
## Notes
* Placeholders resolve at runtime — if the referenced path does not exist in the entity, the placeholder is replaced with an empty string.
* `&{@}` is only available in contexts that wrap a transformer output, such as the Merger.
* Global variables (`@{globals.}`) must be set earlier in the route using the Global variable setter transformer.
# Reducing load on your Alumio environment
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/reducing-load-on-your-alumio-environment
This article covers the most common ways to optimise your Alumio environment and reduce load to guarantee the stability of your integrations.
### Reducing the level of detail in log files
Alumio logs all middleware-related actions by default, such as filtered entities, created tasks, and process information. These cannot be disabled. On top of this, you can enable additional logging for the systems you integrate: authentication logs, API logs, database logs, Webhook logs, and more.
While these logs are useful for debugging, they can cause significant load when volumes are high, for example, when processing 100k products with an individual API call per product, or when log files are very large.
Three logging levels are available:
| Level | What it stores |
| :- | :- |
| Simple | Header information only. Lowest impact on environment load. |
| Long | Up to 10,000 characters per log entry. Sufficient for debugging most issues. |
| Full | Complete requests and responses. Recommended for testing only -- avoid in production. |
It is recommended to use **Simple** or **Long** logging in production environments and reserve **Full** logging for the testing phase only.
### Reducing the number of tasks exported per execution
Most Alumio integrations are asynchronous –– data is synchronised in two steps: filling the queue and processing it. Real-time integrations combine both steps into one, which can cause high load when processing large numbers of complex tasks.
Integrations that require additional API calls per task, or that handle large data objects, are particularly sensitive to this. To reduce load, consider:
* Reducing the number of tasks exported per Scheduler execution via the Route Scheduler settings.
* Reducing the number of entities sent per Webhook call.
* Introducing batch processing to spread the workload.
### Reducing the number of scheduled jobs run in parallel
Running many scheduled jobs at the same time can cause spikes in environment load. It is recommended to spread Scheduler jobs across the hour rather than triggering them all at the same time.
### Upgrading your environment
If the optimisations above do not bring load within acceptable levels, consider upgrading your Alumio environment. Contact the Support team to discuss available options.
# Storages
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/documentation/storages/index
Storages let you save data inside Alumio, for example for caching or reuse across routes.
Storages are key-value data stores built into Alumio that let you persist data between integration runs. They are used for caching, delta filtering, pagination tracking, cross-system ID mapping, and more.
### What Storages can do
Storages give you a way to persist and retrieve data across integration runs. You can:
* Cache data between runs to avoid reprocessing unchanged records (delta filtering).
* Store and retrieve cross-system ID mappings, mutation dates, and lookup values.
* Track pagination state across Scheduler runs to enable incremental data fetching.
* Use a Storage as a data source in an Incoming configuration to process stored entities through a Route.
* Automatically prune entities older than a defined threshold to manage database size.
### Filtering Storages
The overview page lists all Storages in your environment. Filters are available for Name, Created at, Updated at, and Labels. Use **+ Add Filter** for additional conditions. Click any column header to sort.
### Creating a Storage
A Storage is configured with a name, an optional description, a storage type, logging options, and an optional pruning threshold.
**Logging** controls which entity-level events are written to the log: creating, updating, and deleting entities can each be enabled independently.
**Pruning** automatically deletes entities older than a configured threshold (time to live). This is particularly important for high-volume integrations -- running out of database storage will make your Alumio environment unavailable.
### Using Storages in integrations
Storages become useful through dedicated Entity transformers that read from and write to them during integration processing.
**Delta filtering** –– the most common use case. The `Filter previously stored entities` transformer compares each incoming entity against what is already stored. Unchanged entities are filtered out; only new or changed entities pass through and create tasks.
**Writing data** –– the `Write to storage` and `Write content to storage` transformers persist values from the current integration run into a Storage for later retrieval. Used for saving mutation dates, lookup data, pagination state, and cross-system ID mappings.
**Reading data** –– the `Get entity from storage` transformer retrieves a previously stored entity and makes it available in the current run. Used to look up values stored in a previous run, such as an ID created when a record was first written to the target system.
**Pagination tracking** –– the `Track progress in storage` and `Load progress tracker from storage` transformers work together to save and restore pagination state across Scheduler runs, enabling incremental fetching from large APIs.
**Storage subscribers** –– a Storage can act as a data source on an Incoming configuration. The `Storage subscriber` creates one task per entity; the `Merged Storage subscriber` combines all entities into a single task. Useful when downstream processing requires all records together, or when handling very large numbers of entities.
# The Template Export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-bigcommerce/akeneo-bigcommerce-the-template-export
Follow this guide to export the template.
* Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
* Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers**.
* Pick up the Scheduler for export. Currently, 6 Schedulers can be exported.
* You can export single or multiple Schedulers.
1. For a single Scheduler, navigate to one of the configurations in **Scheduler > … (Three dots on the top right) > Export.**
2. To export multiple Schedulers, mark the checkbox **Scheduler > Export (top right).**
**Note: The values under System > Environment Variable are not included when exporting and must be entered manually. These variables are required because they are used in the HTTP (API) Client.**
* You can find the Environment Variable used in \*\*Connections > HTTP (API) Client.
* Here is the list of HTTP (API) Clients used.
* Here is the list of Environment Variables used. You can create it in **System > Environment Variables.**
# Fetching Product Data and Family Attribute Axes from Akeneo to Alumio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-bigcommerce/akeneo-to-bigcommerce-fetching-product-data-and-family-attribute-axes-from-akeneo-to-alumio
## **Fetching Families and Attributes from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"**.
We defined variants as the product of a product model. Before we fetch the product model in Akeneo, we need to prepare the variants first (the product of the product model). This Incoming is designed to get products in Akeneo that have a parent, so we can be sure this will be a variant from the product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of "Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product" with a list of product data in Alumio base product data.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
* We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in "eCommerce", if it has a channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to BigCommerce, we need to convert it to a more workable structure, which is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
* This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to BigCommerce, we need to convert it to a more workable structure, which is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
* This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to BigCommerce, we need to convert it to a more workable structure, which is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {...},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product**
This transformer will create a list of variants from the Alumio base product. It will load the previous iteration of this transformer to merge the list or create a new list. Then the list of variants will be saved in the storage **"Akeneo - Product Model variants - Alumio Base Product"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare update - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Variant merge**
This transformer will merge the list of variants in the transformer **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** to ensure there will be no duplication based on the product code.
## Fetching Parent Product Model from Akeneo
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Product Models without parent"**. Parent product model in Akeneo has a probability to have children, which is another product model or variant, which is the product of the product model. This Incoming is designed to get a list of product models that are the top parent or do not have a parent. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with parent product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localization data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
This transformer filters for localizations specifically associated with the "eCommerce" channel. If you require additional channels, please add the corresponding values to the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo categories:
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [...],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [...]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer will fetch the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attach it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {...},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will save the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
## **Fetching Children Product Model from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models with parent"**. After we got the parent and the variant for a product model, this is the time to fetch children, product model. This Incoming well get the product model with parent to become a children product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of the parent at **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with children product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
* We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in "eCommerce" if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer converts Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [...],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [...]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer fetches the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attaches it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {...},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter and prepare update storage - Filter for product model without variants and update parent**
This transformer filters the product model without a variant and will update the parent if not filtered.
**Akeneo - Update storage - Alumio Base Product Model update children**
This transformer updates the parent product model inside the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with the product model provided in the data.
## **Fetching Simple Product from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products without parent"**. There is some product data without a product model in Akeneo. This Incoming will duplicate the product data into the Alumio base product model and save it into the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer converts localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in **"eCommerce"**. If it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
* This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to BigCommerce, we need to convert it to a more workable structure, which is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
* This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to BigCommerce, we need to convert it to a more workable structure, which is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {...},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Alumio Base Product - To Alumio Base Product Model with variants**
* This transformer will copy the Alumio base product data into the Alumio base product model with variant.
* We add the variant code with "-1" to avoid data duplication.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "78409316",
"groups": [],
"prices": [],
"categories": [],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {},
"variants": [
{
"code": "78409316-1",
"groups": [],
"prices": [],
"categories": [],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {}
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**
This transformer filters previously created tasks into simple products to avoid duplication.
## **Fetching Family Attribute Axes from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Families"**. This incoming is created to get family axes in Akeneo to determine which attribute decides the product variant in BigCommerce. The family axes exist in the family variants, but Akeneo require code in the end point that is why we fetch the family first to get the code.
**Akeneo - Fetch and update storage - Family Variants - Axes**
* This transformer is a custom pagination HTTP call to get family variants.
* It will then save the family axes in the storage "Akeneo - Family Variants - Axes".
## **Automatic Fetching Product Data and Family Attribute Axes from Akeneo to Alumio**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch complex products and family attribute axes"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration
# General Information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-bigcommerce/index
**The Akeneo-BigCommerce Template** facilitates seamless product data retrieval from Akeneo and transfers it to Bigcommerce. \
The Template focuses on using Akeneo and BigCommerce as target applications, with Alumio serving as the middleware to ensure structured data transfer and precise data mapping.
## **The Template Scope**
**Data mapping** includes the following structure:
## **API Documentation:**
Akeneo v1: [https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html](https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html)
Alumio v3.91-RC1: [https://apidocs.alumio.com/](https://apidocs.alumio.com/)
BigCommerce: [https://developer.bigcommerce.com/docs/rest-management](https://developer.bigcommerce.com/docs/rest-management)
## **Business Rules and Assumptions**
Users can import and export the Akeneo-BigCommerce Template via the Alumio UI. Additionally, the template can be imported into other Alumio Spaces.
**The Akeneo-BigCommerce Template is designed for a one-time import and doesn't support repeated imports.**
# Installation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-bigcommerce/installation
To begin using the integration, you need to install the required template in Alumio.
**Step 1: Download the Integration Template.**
Download the latest version of the integration template by clicking on the file below: [https://library.alumio.com/](https://library.alumio.com/)
**Step 2: Import the Template into Alumio.**
1. Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
2. Navigate to System → Import / Export.
3. Upload the downloaded template. You’ll see a list of the configurations ready to import. Select All and click the “Import configuration” button. Verify that all Incoming, Routes, Outgoing, Transformers, and Schedulers are correctly imported.
# Sending Product Data from Alumio to BigCommerce
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-bigcommerce/sending-product-data-from-alumio-to-big-commerce
## **Configuring the Incoming: Synchronize Products ‐ Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the BigCommerce system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage is empty inside the transformer **"Akeneo to BigCommerce - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".**
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **"Synchronize Products - Akeneo to BigCommerce - Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base"** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations "Akeneo to BigCommerce - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".
* Go to the storage “Akeneo to BigCommerce - Products - Delta Storage”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all products from Akeneo to BigCommerce.
## **Configuring the Incoming: Akeneo Fetch Simple Products or Product Without Parent**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the BigCommerce system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage is empty inside this transformer **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product".**
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **"Akeneo - Fetch - Simple products or products without parent"** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**".
Go to the storage “Akeneo - Filter - Simple Products”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all simple products from Akeneo to BigCommerce.
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to BigCommerce**
In the Route "Synchronize Products - Akeneo to BigCommerce", there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the BigCommerce Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to BigCommerce”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to BigCommerce Simple Product**
In the Route "Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to BigCommerce Simple Product", there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the BigCommerce Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to BigCommerce Simple Product”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
# Synchronization of Categories from Akeneo to Bigcommerce
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-bigcommerce/synchronization-of-categories-from-akeneo-to-bigcommerce
## **Fetching Categories from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
* To get all categories from the Akeneo system, use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
This incoming creates a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base categories. There are some transformers inside this Incoming before processing the category.
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter - Category.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
}
}
```
Since the current data structure is incompatible with BigCommerce, the transformer "**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**" is used to convert it into a compatible format.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
....
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**
This transformer converts the entire category data into Alumio Base data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "master",
"parent": null,
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Category**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into task categories to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, you should remove the entity from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Categories"**.
## **Sending Categories to BigCommerce**
The task that was created through Incoming "Akeneo - Fetch - Categories" will then be processed further by the Route "Synchronize Categories - From Akeneo into BigCommerce" and will be sent using this Outgoing.
This Outgoing will transform the Alumio Base Categories into BigCommerce ones and check to create or to update the category with the data from this Outgoing's previous iteration.
Sending the Outgoing will be processed by the following transformers:
1. BigCommerce - Prepare convert - Category - Parent id from Alumio Base Category.
2. BigCommerce - Convert - Category - from Alumio Base Category.
3. BigCommerce - Check and send - Category.
**BigCommerce - Prepare convert - Category - Parent id from Alumio Base Category**
This transformer checks the parent and maps it into the BigCommerce ID.
**BigCommerce - Convert - Category - from Alumio Base Category**
This transformer converts the Category from Alumio Base into BigCommerce.
**BigCommerce - Check and send - Category**
This transformer checks the current BigCommerce id from the previous iteration of this transformer to determine whether we need to create or update the category in the BigCommerce System.
```json theme={null}
[
{
"parent_id": 856,
"name": "AntiVirus",
"description": "AntiVirus",
"is_visible": true,
"default_product_sort": "use_store_setting"
}
]
```
## **Automatic Categories Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Bigcommerce - Send - Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-centra/akeneo-to-centra-fetching-product-data-from-akeneo-to-alumio
## **Fetching Variants of Product from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"**. We defined variants as the product of a product model. Before we fetch the product model in Akeneo, we need to prepare the variants first (the product of the product model). This Incoming is designed to get products in Akeneo that have parent, so we can be sure this will be a variant from the product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** with a list of product data in Alumio base product data.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
This transformer is configured to permit locales associated with the "eCommerce" channel code. If you require additional channels, update the values in the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer converts localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
As this structure is not friendly to Centra, we need to convert it to a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
As this structure is not friendly to Centra, we need to convert it to a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
As this structure is not friendly to Centra, we need to convert it to a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {...},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product**
This transformer will create a list of variants from the Alumio base product. It will load the previous iteration of this transformer to merge the list or create a new list. Then the list of variants will be saved in the storage **"Akeneo - Product Model variants - Alumio Base Product"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare update - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Variant merge**
This transformer merges the list of variants in the transformer **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** to ensure there will be no duplication based on the product code.
## Fetching Parent Product Model from Akeneo
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Product Models without parent"**. Parent product model in Akeneo has a probability to have children, which is another product model or variant, which is the product of the product model. This Incoming is designed to get a list of product models that are the top parent or do not have a parent. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with parent product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localization data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
This transformer filters for localizations specifically associated with the "eCommerce" channel. If you require additional channels, add the corresponding values to the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer converts Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [...],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [...]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer will fetch the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attach it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {...},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will save the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
## **Fetching Children Product Model from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models with parent"**. After we got the parent and the variant for a product model, this is the time to fetch children, product model. This Incoming well get the product model with parent to become a children product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of the parent at **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with children product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo localizations:
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
* We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in "eCommerce", if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [...],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [...]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer will fetch the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attach it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {...},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter and prepare update storage - Filter for product model without variants and update parent**
This transformer filters the product model without a variant and will update the parent if not filtered.
**Akeneo - Update storage - Alumio Base Product Model update children**
This transformer will update the parent product model inside the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with the product model provided in the data.
## **Fetching Simple Product from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products without parent"**. There is some product data without a product model in Akeneo. This Incoming will duplicate the product data into the Alumio base product model and save it into the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer converts localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in "eCommerce", if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Centra, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base Product**
This transformer converts Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [],
"categories": [],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [],
"customAttributes": {},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Alumio Base Product - To Alumio Base Product Model with variants**
This transformer copies the Alumio base product data into the Alumio base product model with a variant. We add the variant code with **"-1"** to avoid data duplication. An example can be found below:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "78409316",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {...},
"variants": [
{
"code": "78409316-1",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [...],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {...}
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**\
Use this transformer to filter previously created task simple products to avoid duplication.
## **Automatic Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch complex products".**
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# The Template Export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-centra/akeneo-to-centra-the-template-export
Follow this guide to export the template.
* Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
* Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers**.
* Pick up the Scheduler for export. Currently, 6 Schedulers can be exported.
* You can export single or multiple Schedulers.
1. For a single Scheduler, navigate to one of the configurations in **Scheduler > … (Three dots on the top right) > Export.**
2. To export multiple Schedulers, mark the checkbox **Scheduler > Export (top right).**
**Note: The values under System > Environment Variable are not included when exporting and must be entered manually. These variables are required because they are used in the HTTP (API) Client.**
* You can find the Environment Variable used in Connections > HTTP (API) Client.
* Here is the list of HTTP (API) Clients used.
Here is the list of Environment Variables used. You can create it in **System > Environment Variables.**
# General Information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-centra/index
## **Introduction**
**The Akeneo-Centra Template** facilitates seamless product data retrieval from Akeneo and transfers it to Centra.
The Template focuses on using Akeneo and Centra as target applications with Alumio serving as the middleware to ensure structured data transfer and precise data mapping.
## **The Template Scope**
**Data mapping** includes the following structure:
## **API Documentation:**
Akeneo v1: [https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html](https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html)
Alumio v3.98-RC1: [https://apidocs.alumio.com/](https://apidocs.alumio.com/)
Centra v3.97 GraphQL: [https://centra.dev/graphql/index.html](https://centra.dev/graphql/index.html)
## **Business Rules and Assumptions**
Users can import and export the Akeneo-Centra Template via the Alumio UI. Additionally, the template can be imported into other Alumio Spaces.
**The Akeneo-Centra Template is designed for a one-time import and doesn't support repeated imports.**
# Installation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-centra/installation
To begin using the integration, you need to install the required template in Alumio.
**Step 1: Download the Integration Template.**
Download the latest version of the integration template by clicking on the file below: [https://library.alumio.com/](https://library.alumio.com/)
**Step 2: Import the Template into Alumio.**
1. Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
2. Navigate to System → Import / Export.
3. Upload the downloaded template. You’ll see a list of the configurations ready to import. Select All and click the “Import configuration” button. Verify that all Incoming, Routes, Outgoing, Transformers, and Schedulers are correctly imported.
# Sending Product Data from Alumio to Centra
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-centra/sending-product-data-from-alumio-to-centra
## **Configuring the Incoming: Synchronize Products ‐ Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Centra system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage is empty inside this transformer **"Akeneo to Centra - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".**
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **"Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Centra - Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base"** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo to Centra - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".**
Go to the storage “Akeneo to Centra - Products - Delta Storage”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all products from Akeneo to Centra.
## **Configuring the Incoming: Akeneo Fetch Simple Products or Product Without Parent**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Centra system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage is empty inside this transformer **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product".**
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **"Akeneo - Fetch - Simple products or products without parent"** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**".
Go to the storage “Akeneo - Filter - Simple Products”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all simple products from Akeneo to Centra.
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Centra**
In the Route **"Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Centra"**, there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the Centra Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Centra”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Centra Simple Product**
In the Route **"Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Centra Simple Product"**, there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the Centra Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Centra Simple Product”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
# Synchronization of Brands from Akeneo to Centra
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-centra/synchronization-of-brands-from-akeneo-to-centra
## **Fetching Brands from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Brands"**. Use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Brands"** to get data from the Akeneo Server.
This incoming creates a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base brands. There are transformers inside this Incoming before processing the brand:
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert - Brand labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Brand - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter previous - Brand.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Brand labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"label": [
{
"locale": "ja_JP",
"channel": null,
"data": "3M"
},
{
"locale": "fr_FR",
"channel": null,
"data": "3M"
},
{
"locale": "en_US",
"channel": null,
"data": "3M"
},
{
"locale": "en_GB",
"channel": null,
"data": "3M"
},
{
"locale": "de_DE",
"channel": null,
"data": "3M"
}
]
}
```
Since the current data structure is incompatible with Centra, you need to convert it to a more workable one.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"customAttributes": {
"label": "Xiaomi"
}
},
....
]
}
```
You can determine the entity records you want to send to the Centra brand by filling in the Environment Variable AKENEO\_REFERENCE\_ENTITY\_BRANDS\_CODE.
**Akeneo - Convert - Brand - To Alumio Base.**
This transformer converts the entire category data into Alumio Base data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "xiaomi",
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"customAttributes": {
"label": "Xiaomi"
}
},
{
"showinstore": {
"channel": "b2b"
}
}
],
"customAttributes": {
"showinstore": "no"
}
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter previous - Brand**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into task Brands to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, remove the entity from the "Akeneo - Filter previous - Brands" storage.
## **Sending Brands to Centra**
Tasks generated by the **"Akeneo - Fetch - Brands"** Incoming configuration are processed via the **"Synchronize Brands - From Akeneo to Centra"** Route and delivered through the **"Centra - Send - Brand"** Outgoing configuration. This Outgoing will transform the Alumio Base Brands into Centra one and check to create or to update the brand with the data from this outgoing's previous iteration.
Sending in the Outgoing will be processed by these transformers:
1. Centra - Add global variables
2. Centra - Check and send - Brand.
**Centra - Add global variables**\
Adding all the data that you want to add to Centra.
**Centra - Check and send - Brand**
This transformer checks the current Centra ID from the previous iteration of this transformer to determine whether you need to create or update the brand in the Centra System. An example of a creation payload:
```json theme={null}
{
"query": "mutation updateExistingBrand($id: Int, $input: BrandUpdateInput!)",
"variables": {
"id": 255,
"input": {
"name": "Xiaomi"
}
}
}
```
## **Automatic Brands Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Brands"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Centra - Send - Brands"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Synchronization of Categories from Akeneo to Centra
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-centra/synchronization-of-categories-from-akeneo-to-centra
## **Fetching Categories from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
* To get all categories from the Akeneo system, use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
This incoming creates a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base categories. There are transformers inside this Incoming before processing the category.
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter - Category.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
}
}
```
Since the current data structure is incompatible with Centra, the transformer "**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**" is used to convert it into a compatible format.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
....
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.** This is the transformer that converts the entire category data into Alumio Base data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "master",
"parent": null,
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Category**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into task categories to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, you should remove the entity from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Categories"**.
## **Sending Categories to Centra**
The task that was created through Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"** will then be processed further by the Route "Synchronize Categories - From Akeneo into Centra" and will be sent using this Outgoing.
This Outgoing will transform the Alumio Base Categories into Centra one and check to create or to update the category with the data from this outgoing's previous iteration.
The sending in the Outgoing will be processed by the transformer:
1. Centra - Add global variables.
2. Centra - Prepare send - Category - Parent ID from Alumio Base Category.
3. Centra - Prepare send - Category - Before from Alumio Base Category.
4. Centra - Check and send - Category.
**Centra - Add global variables**\
Adding all the data that you want to add to Centra.
**Centra - Prepare send - Category - Parent ID from Alumio Base Category**\
This transformer will check the parent and map it into Centra ID.
**Centra - Prepare send - Category - from Alumio Base Category**\
This transformer will finally convert the Category from Alumio Base into Centra.
**Centra - Check and send - Category**
This transformer checks the current Centra ID from the previous iteration of this transformer to determine whether we need to create or update the category in the Centra System. An example of a creation payload:
```json theme={null}
{
"query": "mutation createNewCategory($input: CategoryCreateInput!)",
"variables": {
"input": {
"uri": "Microwave_Parts",
"name": "Microwave Parts",
"store": {
"id": 1
},
"status": "ACTIVE",
"parentCategory": {
"id": 324
},
"beforeCategory": {
"id": 350
}
}
}
}
```
## **Automatic Categories Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Centra - Send - Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools/fetching-product-data-from-akeneo-to-alumio-1
### **Introduction**
Akeneo has a different structure than CommerceTools regarding product data structure. There is some relation between products and product models, which will be transformed into products and product variants in CommerceTools. We make an Alumio-based product model to accommodate this.
```text theme={null}
{
"code": "jacket",
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "men_coats"
},
{
"categoryCode": "women_coats"
}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "cold",
"country": "United_States",
"material": "cotton",
"model_name": "Akeneo's teddy",
"imported": false,
"dry_clean": false
},
"localizations": [
{
"customAttributes": {
"description": "What a wonderful teddy, available in 3 nice colors: purple, red and green"
},
"channelCode": "ecommerce",
"localeCode": "en_US"
},
{
"customAttributes": {
"fit_info": "Our model wears a purple color and a XS"
},
"localeCode": "en_US"
}
],
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null,
"children": [
]
}
```
**Note that a product model in Alumio base can have children, which are different Alumio product models, and can also have a variant, which is the product of that product model.**
### **Fetching Variants of the Product from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"**. We defined variants as the product of a product model. Before we fetch the product model in Akeneo, we need to prepare the variants first (the product of the product model). This Incoming is designed to get products in Akeneo which have a parent, so we can be sure this will be a variant from the product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** with a list of product data in Alumio base product data.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
* Use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in **"eCommerce"** if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer converts localization data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
{
"4": {
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer converts Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```text theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {...},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product**
This transformer creates a list of variants from the Alumio base product. It will load the previous iteration of this transformer to merge the list or create a new list. Then the list of variants will be saved in the storage **"Akeneo - Product Model variants - Alumio Base Product"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare update - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Variant merge**
This transformer merges the list of variants in the transformer **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** to ensure there will be no duplication based on the product code.
### **Fetching parent product model from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Product Models without parent"**. Parent product model in Akeneo has a probability to have children, which is another product model or variant, which is the product of the product model. This Incoming is designed to get a list of product model which is the top parent or doesn't have a parent. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with parent product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer converts localizations data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
{
"4": {
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
Use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in **"eCommerce"** if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"prices" : [
{
"amount" : "354.00",
"currencyCode" : "EUR"
},
{
"amount" : "400.02",
"currencyCode" : "GBP"
},
{
"amount" : "318.60",
"currencyCode" : "USD"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer converts Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```text theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
{ ... }
],
"localizations": [
{ ... },
{ ... },
{ ... },
{ ... }
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [ ... ],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [ ... ]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": NULL
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer retrieves variant data generated by the **'Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent'** incoming configuration and maps it as a variant within the Alumio base product model.
```text theme={null}
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [ ... ],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": { ... },
"localizations": [ ... ],
"prices": [ ... ],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
{ ... },
{ ... }
]
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer saves the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
### **Fetching Children Product Model from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, navigate to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models with parent"**. Once the parent and variant data for a product model are retrieved, this configuration fetches the associated children. Rather than creating new tasks, this "Incoming" updates the **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** storage, appending the child product model data to the existing Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer converts localizations data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
{
"4": {
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
Use this transformer to allow localization only with a channel code in "eCommerce" if it has one. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"prices" : [
{
"amount" : "354.00",
"currencyCode" : "EUR"
},
{
"amount" : "400.02",
"currencyCode" : "GBP"
},
{
"amount" : "318.60",
"currencyCode" : "USD"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer converts Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```text theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
{ ... }
],
"localizations": [
{ ... },
{ ... },
{ ... },
{ ... }
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [ ... ],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [ ... ]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": NULL
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer fetches the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attaches it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```text theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {...},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter and prepare update storage - Filter for product model without variants and update parent**
This transformer filters the product model without a variant and will update the parent if not filtered.
**Akeneo - Update storage - Alumio Base Product Model update children**
This transformer updates the parent product model inside the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with the product model provided in the data.
### Fetching simple products from Akeneo
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Simple products or products without parent"**. There are some product data without a product model in Akeneo. This will become a simple product for other systems.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer converts localizations data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
{
"4": {
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
Use this transformer to allow localisation only with a channel code in "eCommerce" if it has one. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts category data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer converts price data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
],
```
To ensure compatibility with CommerceTools data requirements, we use this transformer to normalize the current structure into a more manageable format.
```text theme={null}
"prices" : [
{
"amount" : "354.00",
"currencyCode" : "EUR"
},
{
"amount" : "400.02",
"currencyCode" : "GBP"
},
{
"amount" : "318.60",
"currencyCode" : "USD"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer converts Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```text theme={null}
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
],
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Alumio Base Product - To Alumio Base Product Model with variants**
This transformer copies the Alumio base product data into the Alumio base product model with a variant. We add the variant code with **"-1"** to avoid data duplication.
```text theme={null}
"prices" : [
{
"amount" : "354.00",
"currencyCode" : "EUR"
},
{
"amount" : "400.02",
"currencyCode" : "GBP"
},
{
"amount" : "318.60",
"currencyCode" : "USD"
}
]
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**
Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into a simple product to avoid duplication.
### **Automatic fetching of product data from Akeneo to Alumio**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch complex products".**
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# General Information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools/index
### **Introduction**
**The Akeneo-CommerceTools Template** facilitates seamless product data retrieval from Akeneo and transfers it to CommerceTools.
The Template focuses on using Akeneo and CommerceTools as target applications, with Alumio serving as the middleware to ensure structured data transfer and precise data mapping.
## **The Template Scope**
**Data mapping** includes the following structure:
### **API Documentation**
Akeneo v1: [https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html](https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html)
Alumio v3.90-RC1: [https://apidocs.alumio.com/](https://apidocs.alumio.com/)
CommerceTools API: [https://docs.commercetools.com/api/general-concepts](https://docs.commercetools.com/api/general-concepts)
### **Business Rules and Assumptions**
Users can import and export the Akeneo-CommerceTools Template via the Alumio UI. Additionally, the template can be imported into other Alumio Spaces.
**The Akeneo-CommerceTools Template is designed for a one-time import and doesn't support repeated imports.**
# Installation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools/installation
To begin using the integration, you need to install the required template in Alumio.
**Step 1: Download the Integration Template.**
Download the latest version of the integration template by clicking on the file below: [https://library.alumio.com/](https://library.alumio.com/)
**Step 2: Import the Template into Alumio.**
1. Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
2. Navigate to System → Import / Export.
3. Upload the downloaded template. You’ll see a list of the configurations ready to import. Select All and click the “Import configuration” button. Verify that all Incoming, Routes, Outgoing, Transformers, and Schedulers are correctly imported.
## **Credentials Setup**
Before running the integration, you must configure credentials for Akeneo and Shopify in Alumio.
**Step 1: Retrieve API Credentials from Akeneo.**
* Log in to Akeneo as an admin user.
* Navigate to **Connect → Connection-settings.**
* Create a new connection (if necessary) and retrieve the following:
1. Client ID.
2. Secret Key.
3. Username.
4. Password.
# Sending Product Data from Alumio to CommerceTools
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools/sending-product-data-from-alumio-to-commerce-tools
### **Configuring the Incoming: Synchronize Products ‐ Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the CommerceTools system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage was empty inside this transformer **"Akeneo to CommerceTools - Products - FIlter By Previous storage entities".**
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to CommerceTools - Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base”** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo to CommerceTools - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".**
* Go to the storage **“Akeneo to CommerceTools - Products - Delta Storage”.**
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage". You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all products from Akeneo to CommerceTools.
### **Configuring the Incoming: Akeneo Fetch Simple Products or Product Without Parent**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the CommerceTools system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage is empty inside this transformer **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product".**
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **“Akeneo - Fetch - Simple products or products without parent”** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product".**
* Go to the storage “Akeneo - Filter - Simple Products”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage". You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all products from Akeneo to CommerceTools.
### **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to CommerceTools**
In the Route **"Synchronize Products - Akeneo to CommerceTools"**, there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the CommerceTools Product schema.
**List of Transformers**
There's quite a list of transformers that are used for the Incoming and Outgoing parts. You can check the table below to see the descriptions and the purpose of the transformers.
**Transformers in the Incoming**
| **Name** | **Description** |
| :- | :- |
| Transformer: Akeneo to CommerceTools - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities | Transformer to filter the previously stored entities in Akeneo Products. |
**Transformers in the Outgoing**
| **Name** | **Description** |
| :- | :- |
| Transformers: Akeneo to CommerceTools Products - Build variants for Alumio Base Simple Product | Transformer to build variants for simple products |
| Transformers: CommerceTools - Product - Convert from Alumio Base Product - Conditional - Base Mapping | This Transformer Checks Whether the product retrieved has children or not before mapping. |
| CommerceTools - Send - Products (Multiple) | Send the Products into CommerceTools (Wrapper) when there're childrens in the Akeneo product |
### **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to CommerceTools Simple Product.**
In the Route **"Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to CommerceTools Simple Product"**, there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the CommerceTools Product schema.
**List of Transformers**
There's quite a list of transformers that are used for the Incoming and Outgoing parts. You can check the table below to see the descriptions and the purpose of the transformers.
### **Transformers in the Incoming**
| **Name** | **Description** |
| :- | :- |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes | This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter | We use this transformer to only allow any localization with channel code in "eCommerce", if it has channel code. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base | Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base | Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product | This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product | We use this transformer to filter previously created into task simple product to avoid duplication. |
### **Transformers in the Outgoing**
| **Name** | **Description** |
| :- | :- |
| Transformers: Akeneo to CommerceTools Products - Build variants for Alumio Base Simple Product | Transformer to build variants for simple products |
| Transformers: CommerceTools - Product - Convert from Alumio Base Product - Conditional - Base Mapping | This Transformer Checks Whether the product retrieved has children or not before mapping. |
| CommerceTools - Send - Products (Multiple) | Send the Products into CommerceTools (Wrapper) when there're childrens in Akeneo product |
# Synchronization of Categories
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools/synchronization-of-categories
### **Fetching Categories from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
You need to get all categories from the Akeneo system to ensure the parent children relation can be sent in the right order. To do so, we use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"** to get data from the Akeneo Server.
This incoming creates a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base categories. There are the following transformers inside this Incoming before processing the category:
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter - Category.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```text theme={null}
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
},
```
Since this structure is not compatible with CommerceTools, this transformer converts it into a more suitable and workable format.
```text theme={null}
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
}
]
```
* You can determine the root category you want to send to CommerceTools by filling the Environment Variable AKENEO\_ROOT\_CATEGORY, you can also empty this to send all categories inside Akeneo
**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**
This transformer converts the whole category data into Alumio Base data.
```text theme={null}
{
"code": "master",
"parent": null,
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "fr_FR",
"translation": "E-commerce"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Category**
Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into categories to avoid duplication.
If you need to recreate a task, remove the entity first from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Categories"**.
### **Fetching Categories from CommerceTools**
* In Alumio, go to **"CommerceTools - Fetch - Categories".** Before deploying product types, fetch the current categories from Commercetools to determine whether a create or update operation is required.
To do so, use the Incoming **"CommerceTools - Fetch - Categories"** to get data from the CommerceTools Server.
The following transformer saves the data inside the Incoming configuration:
1. CommerceTools - Update Storage - Category.
**CommerceTools - Update Storage - Category**
This transformer saves the category data inside Alumio storage for sending the categories.
### **Sending categories to CommerceTools**
The task that was created through Incoming "Akeneo - Fetch - Categories" will then be processed further by the Route "Synchronize Categories - From Akeneo into CommerceTools" and will be sent using this Outgoing.
This Outgoing configuration transforms Alumio Base Categories into the CommerceTools format and determines whether to create or update a category based on data from the previous iteration.
Outgoing data is processed by the following transformers:
1. Alumio Base - Convert value - Localization localeCode into CommerceTools localeCode.
2. CommerceTools - Prepare convert - Category - Parent from Alumio Base Category.
3. CommerceTools - Convert - Category - from Alumio Base Category.
4. CommerceTools - Check and send - Category.
**Alumio Base - Convert value - Localization localeCode into CommerceTools localeCode**
This transformer converts the localCode value inside localizations into the localCode that CommerceTools uses. This will transform local code looking like "en\_US" into "EN-US".
**CommerceTools - Prepare convert - Category - Parent from Alumio Base Category.**
This transformer checks the parent and maps it into the CommerceTools id.
**CommerceTools - Convert - Category - from Alumio Base Category.**
This transformer converts the Category from Alumio Base into CommerceTools.
**CommerceTools - Check and send - Category.**
This transformer references the commercetools ID from the previous iteration to determine whether to create or update the category in the CommerceTools system. An example of a payload creation:
```text theme={null}
{
"parent": {
"typeId": "category",
"id": "1b391ecc-e8ed-4b7c-b5d8-c46fe8c5f7bc"
},
"key": "Avast",
"orderHint": "0.1",
"slug": {
"EN-US": "avast-avast"
},
"name": {
"EN-US": "Avast"
}
}
```
An example of the updated payload:
```text theme={null}
{
"actions": [
{
"slug": {
"DE-DE": "zep-zep",
"EN-GB": "zep-zep",
"EN-US": "zep-zep",
"FR-FR": "zep-zep",
"JA-JP": "zep-zep"
},
"action": "changeSlug"
}
],
"version": 2
}
```
### **Automatic Categories Synchronization Setup**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → CommerceTools - Send - Collection"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Synchronization of CommerceTools Product Types from Akeneo Families and Attributes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools/synchronization-of-commerce-tools-product-types-from-akeneo-families-and-attributes
### **Fetching Families and Attributes from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Families and Attributes".** To sync attribute definitions from Akeneo to CommerceTools, we must account for CommerceTools requirement that attributes be defined within a Product Type. To bridge this gap, we retrieve the Akeneo Family (the closest equivalent to a Product Type) and populate it with its associated attributes. Use the **"Akeneo - Fetch - Families and Attributes"** Incoming to pull this consolidated data from the Akeneo server.
This incoming creates a task inside Alumio with data structured as an Alumio base family. This Incoming includes several transformers that pre-process the family data before final execution:
1. Akeneo - Fetch and convert - Family attributes into Alumio Base attributes.
2. Akeneo - Filter previous - Family.
**Akeneo - Fetch and convert - Family attributes into Alumio Base attributes**
This transformer fetches the attributes data inside a family, then converts them into Alumio Base attributes.
The transformation logic consists of the following steps:
1. **"Akeneo - Fetch and update storage - Family Variants - Axes"** fetches the family variant that will determine the common attribute and variant attribute if exists.
2. It will transform the family structure into Alumio Base by calling the transformer **"Akeneo - Prepare convert - Labels - To localizations"** and **"Akeneo - Convert - Family to Alumio Base".**
3. After you convert the family, you need to get the attribute data that is attached to this family:
* **"Akeneo - Fetch - Attribute by code"** fetches the attribute data from Akeneo.
* **"Akeneo - Prepare convert - Labels - To localizations"** prepares the labels in Alumio Base.
* **"Akeneo - Check and fetch - Attribute options"** fetches the options from the attribute options when the attribute type is simple select or multiselect. This transformer also fetches options from the entity records when the attribute type is reference entity or reference entity.
* **"Akeneo - Convert - Attribute - To Alumio Base Attribute"** converts the attribute structure into Alumio Base.
* **"Akeneo - Map - Type code - To Alumio Base code"** converts the attribute code value into Alumio Base.
* **"Akeneo - Check - Axes - Is Required"** checks the super attribute using storage Akeneo - Family Variants - Axes that was created earlier at **"Akeneo - Fetch and update storage - Family Variants - Axes"**.
**Akeneo - Filter previous - Family**
This transformer filters families from the previous iteration to avoid duplication.
### **Fetching product types from CommerceTools**
* In Alumio, go to **"Commercetools - Fetch - Product types & Attributes".** Before deploying product types, retrieve the current definitions from CommerceTools to determine whether a create or update operation is required.
To do so, use the Incoming **"Commercetools - Fetch - Product types & Attributes"** to get data from the CommerceTools Server.
There are several transformers within this Incoming used to save the data:
1. CommerceTools - Update Storage - Product type.
2. Commercetools - Fetch - Product Types & Attributes - Save to Storage.
**CommerceTools - Update Storage - Product type**
This transformer saves the product types data inside Alumio storage for sending the product types.
**Commercetools - Fetch - Product Types & Attributes - Save to Storage**
This transformer saves the product types data in Alumio storage to send the product.
### **Sending product types into CommerceTools**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Route → Synchronize CommerceTools Product Types - From Akeneo Families and Attributes".** Then go to the outgoing **"CommerceTools - Send - Product types"**. This Outgoing will transform the Alumio Base Families and attributes into CommerceTools product types and check to create or update product types with the data from this Outgoing's previous iteration.
There are several transformers within this Outgoing responsible for the transmission:
1. Alumio Base - Convert Values - Family - Attributes - Options - Localization localeCode into CommerceTools localeCode.
2. CommerceTools - Convert - Product types from the Alumio base Family.
3. CommerceTools - Check and send - Product type.
**Alumio Base - Convert Values - Family - Attributes - Options - Localization localeCode into CommerceTools localeCode**
It converts all localCode into CommerceTools inside the Alumio Base Family and Attributes (including common attributes and variant attributes if they exist).
**CommerceTools - Convert - Product types from Alumio base Family**
This component converts localCode in the Alumio Base schema for CommerceTools compatibility and triggers a specialized transformer for attribute conversion:
* **"CommerceTools - Convert - Attributes from Alumio Base"** converts Alumio base Attributes into CommerceTools Attributes. If applicable, it invokes a secondary transformer to convert the attribute options.
* **"CommerceTools - Convert - Lenum from Alumio Base"** converts the Alumio base option into a lenum value.
* **Note: for now, all file and image attributes are outside this template scope, so they won't be synced.** It calls **"CommerceTools - Convert - Product types attributes from Common Attributes and Variant Attributes"** if there are any common attributes and variant attributes to convert them into payload.
* A simple product that a family doesn't have a variant in Akeneo should only have product-level attributes, but this concept doesn't work well in CommerceTools. To accommodate this issue, we provide a solution to customize this into a variant attribute by changing the list that has the value add\_attribute\_to\_become\_variant\_here. You can build the list here to make it possible to send simple products without family variants into CommerceTools.
**CommerceTools - Check and send - Product type**
* Check and send their payload for Product Type.
* It will call the other transformer for the update process:
* **"CommerceTools - Prepare Update - Product type - Check name"** checks the product type for name change and adds to actions.
* **"CommerceTools - Prepare Update - Product type - Check description"** verifies the product type for description change and adds to actions.
* **"CommerceTools - Prepare Update - Product type - Check attributes"** checks all the attributes for any change and adds them to the actions. It will call several transformers to achieve this.
**Note: Due to the complexity of this integration logic, please consult with Alumio regarding any required modifications. We are currently aware of a timeout issue affecting the update process. A performance enhancement is scheduled for a future release.**
### **Automatic Product Types Synchronization Setup**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch - Families and Attributes"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → CommerceTools - Send - Product types"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# The Template Export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools/the-template-export-1
Follow this guide to export the template.
* Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
* Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers**.
* Pick up Scheduler for export. Currently, 8 Schedulers can be exported, as displayed below.
* You can export single or multiple Scheduler.
1. For a single Scheduler, navigate to one of the configurations in **Scheduler > … (Three dots on the top right) > Export.**
2. To export multiple Schedulers, mark checkbox **Scheduler > Export (top right).**
* A .ndjson file will be downloaded.
**Note: The values under "System > Environment Variable" are not included when exporting and must be entered manually. These variables are required because they are used in the HTTP (API) Client.**
* You can find the Environment Variable used in **Connections > HTTP (API) Client.**
* Here is the list of HTTP (API) Clients used.
* Here is the list of Environment Variables used. You can create it on **System > Environment Variables.**
# Sending Product Data from Alumio to Magento 2
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-magento-2/Sending-Product-Data-from-Alumio-to-Magento-2
## **Base Information Setup**
* Navigate to **Transformer → Akeneo to Magento - Set - Base Information.**
* Go to the “Overview” tab to see what kind of information you can set.
Go to each data transformer and make necessary adjustments. Currently, only stock\_item properties can be set in this transformer.
* Save the transformer.
## **Configuring the Incoming: Synchronize Products ‐ Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Magento 2 system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is ensuring that the delta storage is empty within the **"Akeneo to Magento 2 - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities"** transformer.
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Magento 2 - Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base”** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo to Magento 2 - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities**".
* Go to the storage “Akeneo to Magento 2 - Products - Delta Storage”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all products from Akeneo to Magento 2.
## **Configuring the Incoming: Akeneo Fetch Simple Products or Product Without Parent**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Magento 2 system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is ensuring that the delta storage is empty within the **"Akeneo to Magento 2 - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities"** transformer.
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **“Akeneo - Fetch - Simple products or products without parent”** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**".
Go to the storage “Akeneo - Filter - Simple Products”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all simple products from Akeneo to Magento 2.
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Magento 2**
In the Route "Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Magento 2", there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the Magento 2 Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Magento 2”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Magento 2 Simple Product**
In the Route "Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Magento 2 Simple Product", there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the Magento 2 Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Magento 2 Simple Product”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
# The Template Export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-magento-2/akeneo-magento2-the-template-export
Follow this guide to export the template.
* Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
* Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers**.
* Pick up the Scheduler for export. Currently, 8 Schedulers can be exported.
* You can export single or multiple Schedulers.
1. For a single Scheduler, navigate to one of the configurations in **Scheduler > … (Three dots on the top right) > Export.**
2. To export multiple Schedulers, mark the checkbox **Scheduler > Export (top right).**
**Note: The values under System > Environment Variable are not included when exporting and must be entered manually. These variables are required because they are used in the HTTP (API) Client.**
* You can find the Environment Variable used in \*\*Connections > HTTP (API) Client.
* Here is the list of HTTP (API) Clients used.
* Here is the list of Environment Variables used. You can create it on **System > Environment Variables.**
# General Information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-magento-2/index
## **Introduction**
**The Akeneo-Magento 2 Template** facilitates seamless product data retrieval from Akeneo and transfers it to Magento 2. \
The Template focuses on using Akeneo and Magento 2 as target applications, with Alumio serving as the middleware to ensure structured data transfer and precise data mapping.
## **The Template Scope**
**Data mapping** includes the following structure:
## **API Documentation:**
Akeneo v1: [https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html](https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html)
Alumio v3.95-RC1: [https://apidocs.alumio.com/](https://apidocs.alumio.com/)
Magento 2 v2.4.8-p1: [https://doc.magentochina.org/swagger/](https://doc.magentochina.org/swagger/)
## **Business Rules and Assumptions**
Users can import and export the Akeneo-Magento 2 Template via the Alumio UI. Additionally, the template can be imported into other Alumio Spaces.
**The Akeneo-Magento 2 Template is designed for a one-time import and doesn't support repeated imports.**
# Installation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-magento-2/installation
To begin using the integration, you need to install the required template in Alumio.
**Step 1: Download the Integration Template.**
Download the latest version of the integration template by clicking on the file below: [https://library.alumio.com/](https://library.alumio.com/)
**Step 2: Import the Template into Alumio.**
1. Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
2. Navigate to System → Import / Export.
3. Upload the downloaded template. You’ll see a list of the configurations ready to import. Select All and click the “Import configuration” button. Verify that all Incoming, Routes, Outgoing, Transformers, and Schedulers are correctly imported.
# Synchronization of Akeneo Families and Attributes into Magento 2 Attribute Sets and Attributes
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-magento-2/synchronization-of-akeneo-families-and-attributes-into-magento-2-attribute-sets-and-attributes
## **Fetching families and attributes from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Families and Attributes"**. We need to send attribute definitions from Akeneo into Magento 2. We will sync this by mapping the Akeneo family into the Magento 2 attribute set, and then we map the Akeneo attribute into the Magento 2 attribute.
To do so, use the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Families and Attributes"** to get data from the Akeneo Server.
This incoming will create a task inside Alumio with data structured as the Alumio base family. There is a transformer inside the Incoming before processing this family:
* Akeneo - Fetch and convert - Family attributes into Alumio Base attributes.
* Akeneo - Filter previous - Family.
**Akeneo - Fetch and convert - Family attributes into Alumio Base attributes**
This transformer will fetch the attributes data inside a family, then convert them into Alumio Base attributes.
The step inside this transformer is as follows:
1. It is called the transformer **"Akeneo - Fetch and update storage - Family Variants - Axes"** to determine the super attribute that would translate to an attribute that is required and is filterable in Magento 2.
2. It will transform the family structure into Alumio Base by calling the transformer **"Akeneo - Prepare convert - Labels - To localizations"** and **"Akeneo - Convert - Family to Alumio Base"**.
3. After we convert the family, we need to get the attribute data that is attached to this family. We do it by:
* **"Akeneo - Fetch - Attribute by code"** –– this transformer will fetch the attribute data from Akeneo.
* **"Akeneo - Prepare convert - Labels - To localizations"** –– this transformer will prepare the labels in Alumio Base.
* **"Akeneo - Check and fetch - Attribute options" ––** this transformer will fetch the options from the attribute options when the attribute type is a simple select or a multiselect. This transformer will fetch the options from the entity records when the attribute type is reference entity or reference entity collections.
* **"Akeneo - Convert - Attribute - To Alumio Base Attribute"** –– this transformer will convert the attribute structure into Alumio Base.
* **"Akeneo - Map - Type code - To Alumio Base code"** –– this transformer will convert the attribute code value into Alumio Base.
* **"Akeneo - Check - Axes - Is Super Attribute"** –– this transformer checks the super attribute using storage Akeneo - Family Variants - Axes created earlier at **"Akeneo - Fetch and update storage - Family Variants - Axes"**.
**Akeneo - Filter previous - Family.**
This transformer filters Alumio base families with attributes from the previous iteration to avoid duplication.
## **Fetching Product Types from Magento 2**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Magento 2 - Fetch - Attributes."**
Magento 2 stores have default attributes that can cause issues during attribute synchronization. To prevent duplication of attributes with the same code, we first fetch the existing attributes from the Magento 2 system. This Incoming directly stores the attribute data in Alumio, allowing us to update it during synchronization from Akeneo.
**Magento - Save - Attribute Id.**\
Save the Magento 2 ID based on the attribute code to make it possible to update data from Akeneo.
## **Sending Attribute Sets and Attributes into Magento 2**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Route → Synchronize Akeneo Families and Attributes to Magento 2 Attributes Sets and Attributes"**. Then go to the outgoing **"Magento 2 - Send - Attribute Sets and Attributes"**.
This Outgoing will transform the Alumio base families and attributes into Magento 2 attribute sets, attribute groups and attributes. It will also check the previous iteration to determine whether to create or update.
Here is a list of transformers inside the described Outgoing to send:
1. Magento 2 - Convert - Attributes from Alumio Base Family
2. Magento 2 - Check and Send - Attributes from family with separate Options Send
3. Magento 2 - Convert - Attribute set from Alumio family
4. Magento 2 - Check and send - Attribute set
5. Magento 2 - Prepare send - Attribute Set Group
6. Magento 2 - Send - Attribute Set Group
7. Magento 2 - Prepare send - Attributes Assign to Attribute Set
8. Magento 2 - Send - Attributes Assign to Attribute Set.
**Magento 2 - Convert - Attributes from Alumio Base Family.**\
Convert attributes and attribute options inside the Alumio Base into the Magento 2 Attribute payload.
**Magento 2 - Check and Send - Attributes from family with separate Options Send.**\
This will sync the attribute and each attribute option. An example of the Magento 2 attribute payload looks as follows:
```json theme={null}
{
"attribute": {
"scope": "global",
"is_unique": 0,
"is_visible": 1,
"is_required": 0,
"is_comparable": 1,
"is_searchable": 1,
"attribute_code": "smartwatch_brands",
"frontend_input": "select",
"is_user_defined": 1,
"is_visible_on_front": 1,
"default_frontend_label": "Smartwatch brands"
}
}
```
An example of the Magento 2 attribute option payload looks as follows:
```json theme={null}
{
"option": {
"label" : "Garmin"
}
}
```
**Magento 2 - Convert - Attribute set from Alumio family.**\
This transformer will convert the Alumio family into the Magento 2 attribute set payload. We set the entity type ID and skeleton ID to the default 4.
**Magento 2 - Check and send - Attribute set.**\
This transformer creates or updates the attribute set.
**Magento 2 - Prepare send - Attribute Set Group.**\
This transformer prepares the attribute set group payload based on the attribute set.
**Magento 2 - Send - Attribute Set Group.**\
This transformer creates the attribute set group if none is created.
**Magento 2 - Prepare send - Attributes Assign to Attribute Set.**\
This transformer creates the payload to assign attributes to the attribute set and attribute set group.
**Magento 2 - Send - Attributes Assign to Attribute Set.**\
This transformer assigns the attribute to the attribute set and the attribute set group.
## **Automatic Attribute Sets and Attributes Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch - Families and Attributes"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Magento 2 - Send - Attribute Sets and Attributes"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Synchronization of Categories from Akeneo to Magento 2
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-magento-2/synchronization-of-categories-from-akeneo-to-magento-2
## **Fetching Categories from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
* To get all categories from the Akeneo system, use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
This incoming creates a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base categories. There are some transformers inside this Incoming before processing the category.
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter - Category.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
}
}
```
Since the current data structure is incompatible with Magento 2, the transformer "**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**" is used to convert it into a compatible format.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
....
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.** This transformer converts the entire category data into Alumio Base data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "master",
"parent": null,
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Category**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into task categories to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, you should remove the entity from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Categories"**.
## **Sending Categories to Magento 2**
The task that is created through Incoming "**Akeneo - Fetch - Categories**" should be processed further by the Route "**Synchronize Categories - From Akeneo into Magento 2**" and will be sent using this Outgoing.
This Outgoing transforms Alumio Base Categories into Magento 2 categories and checks whether to create or update each category using data from the previous iteration of this Outgoing.
Sending the Outgoing will be processed by the transformer:
1. Magento 2 - Prepare convert - Category - Parent from Alumio Base Category.
2. Magento 2 - Convert - Category - from Alumio Base Category.
3. Magento 2 - Check and send - Category.
**Magento 2 - Prepare convert - Category - Parent id from Alumio Base Category.**
This transformer checks the parent and maps it into the Magento 2 id.
**Magento 2 - Convert - Category - from Alumio Base Category.**
This transformer converts the Category from Alumio Base into Magento 2.
**Magento 2 - Check and send - Collection**
This transformer checks the current Magento 2 id from the previous iteration of this transformer to determine whether we need to create or update the category in the Magento 2 System.
```json theme={null}
{
"category": {
"name": "Air Purifiers",
"position": "1",
"is_active": true,
"include_in_menu": true,
"parent_id": 1042
}
}
```
## **Automatic Categories Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Magento 2 - Send - Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopify/akeneo-shopify-fetching-product-data-from-akeneo-to-alumio
## **Fetching Variants of Product from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"**. We defined variants as the product of a product model. Before we fetch the product model in Akeneo, we need to prepare the variants first (the product of the product model). This Incoming is designed to get products in Akeneo that have parent, so we can be sure this will be a variant from the product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** with a list of product data in Alumio base product data.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter for Shopify**
This transformer is configured to permit locales associated with the "eCommerce" channel code. If you require additional channels, please update the values in the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localization data from Akeneo.
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {...},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product**
This transformer will create a list of variants from the Alumio base product. It will load the previous iteration of this transformer to merge the list or create a new list. Then the list of variants will be saved in the storage **"Akeneo - Product Model variants - Alumio Base Product"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare update - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Variant merge**
This transformer will merge the list of variants in the transformer **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** to ensure there will be no duplication based on the product code.
## Fetching Parent Product Model from Akeneo
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Product Models without parent"**. Parent product model in Akeneo has a probability to have children, which is another product model or variant, which is the product of the product model. This Incoming is designed to get a list of product models that are the top parent or do not have a parent. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with parent product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localization data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
This transformer filters for localizations specifically associated with the "eCommerce" channel. If you require additional channels, please add the corresponding values to the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [...],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [...]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer will fetch the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attach it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {...},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will save the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
## **Fetching Children Product Model from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models with parent"**. After we got the parent and the variant for a product model, this is the time to fetch children, product model. This Incoming well get the product model with parent to become a children product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of the parent at **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with children product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
* We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in "eCommerce", if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node filter.
The transformers below display the data according to the key naming in them. Be aware that the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify. We use these transformers to convert them into a more workable format.
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model.**
**Akeneo - Filter and prepare update storage - Filter for product model without variants and update parent**
This transformer will filter the product model without a variant and will update the parent if not filtered.
**Akeneo - Update storage - Alumio Base Product Model update children**
This transformer will update the parent product model inside the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with the product model provided in the data.
## **Fetching Simple Product from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products without parent"**. There is some product data without a product model in Akeneo. This Incoming will duplicate the product data into the Alumio base product model and save it into the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localization data from Akeneo. Be aware that the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify; we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in **"eCommerce"** if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
The transformers below display data from Akeneo. Be aware that the original data structure is incompatible with Shopify; we use these transformers to convert it into a more workable format.
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product.**
**Akeneo - Convert - Alumio Base Product - To Alumio Base Product Model with variants**
This transformer copies the Alumio base product data into the Alumio base product model with variant. We add the variant code with **"-1"** to avoid data duplication. An example can be found below:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "78409316",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {...},
"variants": [
{
"code": "78409316-1",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [...],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {...}
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will save the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
## **Automatic Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch complete products".**
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# The Template Export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopify/akeneo-shopify-the-template-export
Follow this guide to export the template.
* Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
* Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers**.
* Pick up the Scheduler for export. Currently, 7 Schedulers can be exported.
* You can export single or multiple Schedulers.
1. For a single Scheduler, navigate to one of the configurations in **Scheduler > … (Three dots on the top right) > Export.**
2. To export multiple Schedulers, mark the checkbox **Scheduler > Export (top right).**
An .ndjson file will be downloaded.
Note: The values under System > Environment Variable are not included when exporting and must be entered manually. These variables are required because they are used in the HTTP (API) Client.
* You can find the Environment Variable used in *Connections > HTTP (API) Client.*
* Here is the list of HTTP (API) Clients used.
* Here is the list of Environment Variables used. You can create it on **System > Environment Variables.**
# General Information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopify/index
## **Introduction**
**The Akeneo-Shopify Template** facilitates seamless product data retrieval from Akeneo and transfers it to Shopify. \
\
The Template focuses on using Akeneo and Shopify as target applications, with Alumio serving as the middleware to ensure structured data transfer and precise data mapping.
## **The Template Scope**
**Data mapping** includes the following structure:
**Out of scope:**
**Akeneo:** Data mapping of Family, Family Variant, Locales, Product Images, and Pricelists. The Shopify data model doesn’t include the functionalities described above that could be mapped to data.
**Shopify:** Product Images and price lists are excluded from the scope. Attributes don’t exist in Shopify, so the data becomes a metafield without definition mapping.
## **API Documentation:**
Akeneo v1: [https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html](https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html)
Alumio v3.82-RC1: [https://apidocs.alumio.com/](https://apidocs.alumio.com/)\\
Shopify GraphQL v2025-01: [https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-graphql](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-graphql)
## **Business Rules and Assumptions**
Users can import and export the Akeneo-Shopify Template via the Alumio UI. Additionally, the template can be imported into other Alumio Spaces.
**The Akeneo-Shopify Template is designed for a one-time import and doesn't support repeated imports.**
# Installation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopify/installation
To begin using the integration, you need to install the required template in Alumio.
**Step 1: Download the Integration Template.**
Download the latest version of the integration template by clicking on the file below: [https://library.alumio.com/](https://library.alumio.com/)
**Step 2: Import the Template into Alumio.**
1. Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
2. Navigate to System → Import / Export.
3. Upload the downloaded template. You’ll see a list of the configurations ready to import. Select All and click the “Import configuration” button. Verify that all Incoming, Routes, Outgoing, Transformers, and Schedulers are correctly imported.
## **Credentials Setup**
Before running the integration, you must configure credentials for Akeneo and Shopify in Alumio.
**Step 1: Retrieve API Credentials from Akeneo.**
* Log in to Akeneo as an admin user.
* Navigate to **Connect → Connection-settings.**
* Create a new connection (if necessary) and retrieve the following:
1. Client ID.
2. Secret Key.
3. Username.
4. Password.
**Step 2: Retrieve API Credentials from Shopify.**
For Shopify, you’ll only need to use your base URL and Personal Access token.
* Base URL.
* Personal access token.
**Step 3: Configure Credentials in Alumio.**
* In Alumio, go to **System → Environment variables.**
* Fill in all credentials based on what you get from Akeneo and Shopify.
* Click Save & Apply.
## **Customization**
**Customizing Akeneo - Fetch complete products**
* Navigate to **"Transformer → Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter"**.
* Please add or remove the channel code in the first Node Filter.
* Save the transformer.
**Customizing Akeneo Synchronize Products to Shopify - Set Base Information**
* Navigate to **Transformer → Shopify - Set - Base Information.**
* Go to the “Overview” tab to see what kind of information you can set.
Go to each data transformer and make necessary adjustments.
* Publish setting. The default value for "published" is false. This means the synchronized products will not be published in any stores. You'll need to set it to true and make sure you put the Store names in the "Channels/Publications" values. If you set it to true, then this route will be able to fetch the Products and publish them to the defined channels/publications inside that transformer.
* Save the transformer.
# Sending Product Data from Alumio to Shopify
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopify/sending-product-data-from-alumio-to-shopify
## **Base Information Setup**
* Navigate to **Transformer → Shopify - Set - Base Information.**
* Go to the “Overview” tab to see what kind of information you can set.
* Publish setting. The default value for "published" is false. This means the synchronized products will not be published in any stores. You'll need to set it to true and make sure you put the Store names in the "Channels/Publications" values. If you set it to true, then this route will be able to fetch the Products and publish them to the defined channels/publications inside that transformer.
* Go to each data transformer and make necessary adjustments.
* Save the transformer.
## **Configuring the Incoming: Synchronize Products ‐ Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Shopify system, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage is empty inside this transformer "Akeneo to Shopify - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities."
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **“Synchronize Products - Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base”** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations "Akeneo to Shopify - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".
* Go to the storage “Akeneo to Shopify - Products - Delta Storage”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all products from Akeneo to Shopify.
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Shopify**
In the Route section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to Shopify, minimal setup is required. You can decide to set the number of parallel jobs that will run simultaneously to speed up the product sync process.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Shopify”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
## **Configure the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Shopify ‐ Publish Products to Shopify Channels**
In the Route "Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Shopify - Publish Products to Shopify Channels".
This Route depends on the "published" and "channels" value inside this transformer, "Shopify ‐ Base information setup". The default value for "published" is false.
When you set it to true, then this route will be active and be able to fetch the synchronized Products and then publish them to the defined channels/publications inside that transformer.\\
# Synchronization of Categories from Akeneo to Shopify
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopify/synchronization-of-categories-from-akeneo-to-shopify
## **Fetching Categories from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
* To get all categories from the Akeneo system, use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
This incoming will create a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base categories. There some transformer inside this Incoming before processing the category.
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter - Category.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
}
}
```
Since the current data structure is incompatible with Shopify, the transformer "**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**" is used to convert it into a compatible format.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
....
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.** This is the transformer that converts the entire category data into Alumio Base data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "master",
"parent": null,
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Category**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into task categories to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, you should remove the entity from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Categories"**.
## **Sending Categories to Shopify**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Route → Synchronize Categories - From Akeneo into Shopify Collections"**. The task in the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"** will be processed in the Route **"Synchronize Categories - From Akeneo into Shopify Collections"** and sent using the Outgoing **"Shopify - Send - Collection"**.
Sending in the Outgoing will be processed with the following transformers:
1. Shopify - Convert - Collection from Alumio Base Category.
2. Shopify - Check and send - Collection.
**Shopify - Convert - Collection from Alumio Base Category**
This transformer converts Alumio category data inside the task into Shopify category data.
**Shopify - Check and send - Collection**
* This transformer will check current Shopify collections from the previous iteration of this transformer to determine whether we need to create or update the category in the Spryker System.
* We use GraphQL to connect with Shopify.
* The data Shopify returned when created will be saved in storage for future update collection.
## **Automatic Categories Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Shopify - Send - Collection"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/akeneo-to-shopware-fetching-product-data-from-akeneo-to-alumio
## **Fetching Variants of Product from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"**. We defined variants as the product of a product model. Before we fetch the product model in Akeneo, we need to prepare the variants first (the product of the product model). This Incoming is designed to get products in Akeneo that have parent, so we can be sure this will be a variant from the product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** with a list of product data in Alumio base product data.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
This transformer is configured to permit locales associated with the "eCommerce" channel code. If you require additional channels, please update the values in the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo.
* Akeneo giving us some localizations that look like this.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to Shopware we need to convert them to a more workable structure, that is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
* This transformer will convert categories data from Akeneo.
* Akeneo giving us some categories that look like this.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to Shopware we need to convert them to a more workable structure, that is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
* This transformer will convert prices data from Akeneo.
* Akeneo giving us some prices that look like this.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
* As this structure is not friendly to Shopware we need to convert them to a more workable structure, that is why we use this transformer to transform it into this instead
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data. An example of the Alumio base product data:
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {...},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product**
This transformer will create a list of variants from the Alumio base product. It will load the previous iteration of this transformer to merge the list or create a new list. Then the list of variants will be saved in the storage **"Akeneo - Product Model variants - Alumio Base Product"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare update - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Variant merge**
This transformer will merge the list of variants in the transformer **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** to ensure there will be no duplication based on the product code.
## Fetching Parent Product Model from Akeneo
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Product Models without parent"**. Parent product model in Akeneo has a probability to have children, which is another product model or variant, which is the product of the product model. This Incoming is designed to get a list of product models that are the top parent or do not have a parent. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with parent product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localization data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo localizations:
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
This transformer filters for localizations specifically associated with the "eCommerce" channel. If you require additional channels, please add the corresponding values to the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo categories:
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo price:
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data. An example of the Alumio base product model data:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [...],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [...]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer will fetch the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attach it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {...},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will save the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
## **Fetching Children Product Model from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models with parent"**. After we got the parent and the variant for a product model, this is the time to fetch children, product model. This Incoming well get the product model with parent to become a children product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of the parent at **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with children product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo localizations:
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
* We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in "eCommerce", if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo categories:
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo price:
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data. An example of the Alumio base product model data:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [...],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": [...]
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer will fetch the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attach it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {...},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter and prepare update storage - Filter for product model without variants and update parent**
This transformer will filter the product model without a variant and will update the parent if not filtered.
**Akeneo - Update storage - Alumio Base Product Model update children**
This transformer will update the parent product model inside the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with the product model provided in the data.
## **Fetching Simple Product from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products without parent"**. There is some product data without a product model in Akeneo. This Incoming will duplicate the product data into the Alumio base product model and save it into the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo localizations:
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter**
We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in **"eCommerce"**, if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo categories:
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo price:
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Shopware, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base Product**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data. An example of the Alumio base product data:
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [],
"categories": [],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [],
"customAttributes": {},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Alumio Base Product - To Alumio Base Product Model with variants**
This transformer copies the Alumio base product data into the Alumio base product model with a variant. We add the variant code with **"-1"** to avoid data duplication. An example can be found below:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "78409316",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [
{...},
{...}
],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {...},
"variants": [
{
"code": "78409316-1",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [...],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {...}
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**\
We use this transformer to filter previously created task simple products to avoid duplication
## **Automatic Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch complex products".**
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Sending Product Data from Alumio to Shopware
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/akeneo-to-shopware-sending-product-data-from-alumio-to-shopware
## **Setup Configurations**
* Navigate to **"Transformer → Shopware - Product - Setup Configurations"** configuration.
* Go to the “Overview” tab to see what kind of information you can set
* Go to each data transformer and make necessary adjustments
* Save the transformer
## **Configuring the Incoming: Synchronize Products ‐ Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Shopware system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage was empty inside this transformer "Akeneo to Shopware - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **"Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Shopware - Fetch Storage Product Model Alumio Base"** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations "Akeneo to Shopware - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities".
Go to the storage “Akeneo to Shopware - Products - Delta Storage”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all products from Akeneo to Shopware.
## **Configuring the Incoming: Akeneo Fetch Simple Products or Product Without Parent**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Shopware system, for the first run, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is to make sure that the delta storage was empty inside this transformer "Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product".
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **"Akeneo - Fetch - Simple products or products without parent"** configuration.
* Open the transformer inside the incoming configurations **"Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product**".
Go to the storage “Akeneo - Filter - Simple Products”.
* At the top right "..." button, select "Empty storage".
You only need to empty storage if this is the first sync of all simple products from Akeneo to Shopware.
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Shopware**
In the Route "Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Shopware", there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the Shopware Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Shopware”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
**List of Transformers**
There're quite a list of transformers that used for the Incoming and Outgoing part. You can check table below to see the descriptions and the purpose of the transformers.
**Transformers in the Incoming**
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| Synchronize Products - Akeneo - Fetch Variant Options | Transformer to fetch variant properties from Akeneo |
| Transformer: Akeneo to Shopware - Products - Filter By Previous storage entities | Transformer to filter the previous stored entities Akeneo Products. |
**Transformers in the Outgoing**
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| Shopware - Product - Setup Configurations | Setup for the Shopware outgoing |
| Transformers: Shopware - Product - Convert from Alumio Base Product - Conditional - Base Mapping | This Transformer Checks Whether the product retrieved has children or not before mapping. |
| Shopware - Product - Convert from Alumio Base Product - Conditional - create payloads | Transformer to build and prepare the payload for products |
| Shopware - Product - Create or Update | Send the Products into Shopware (Wrapper) when there are children in the Akeneo product |
## **Configuring the Route: Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Shopware Simple Product**
In the Route "Synchronize Products ‐ Akeneo to Shopware Simple Product", there is nothing to set up for the Route. Everything will be automatically converted from the Alumio Base Product schema to the Shopware Product schema.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Synchronize Products - Akeneo to Shopware Simple Product”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
**List of Transformers**
There're quite a list of transformers that used for the Incoming and Outgoing part. You can check table below to see the descriptions and the purpose of the transformers.
**Transformers in the Incoming**
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes | This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter | We use this transformer to only allow any localization with channel code in "eCommerce", if it has channel code. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base | Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base | Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base. |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product | This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data. |
| Synchronize Products - Akeneo - Fetch Variant Options | Transformer to fetch variant properties from Akeneo |
| Transformer: Akeneo - Filter - Simple Product | We use this transformer to filter previously created into task simple product to avoid duplication. |
**Transformers in the Outgoing**
| Name | Description |
| - | - |
| Shopware - Product - Setup Configurations | Setup for the Shopware outgoing |
| Transformers: Shopware - Product - Convert from Alumio Base Product - Conditional - Base Mapping | This Transformer Checks Whether the product retrieved has children or not before mapping. |
| Shopware - Product - Convert from Alumio Base Product - Conditional - create payloads | Transformer to build and prepare the payload for products |
| Shopware - Product - Create or Update | Send the Products into Shopware (Wrapper) when there are children in the Akeneo product |
# The Template Export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/akeneo-to-shopware-the-template-export
Follow this guide to export the template.
* Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
* Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers**.
* Pick up the Scheduler for export. Currently, 9 Schedulers can be exported.
* You can export single or multiple Schedulers.
1. For a single Scheduler, navigate to one of the configurations in **Scheduler > … (Three dots on the top right) > Export.**
2. To export multiple Schedulers, mark the checkbox **Scheduler > Export (top right).**
**Note: The values under System > Environment Variable are not included when exporting and must be entered manually. These variables are required because they are used in the HTTP (API) Client.**
* You can find the Environment Variable used in \*\*Connections > HTTP (API) Client.
* Here is the list of HTTP (API) Clients used.
* Here is the list of Environment Variables used. You can create it in **System > Environment Variables.**
# General Information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/index
## **Introduction**
**The Akeneo-Shopware Template** facilitates seamless product data retrieval from Akeneo and transfers it to Shopware.
The Template focuses on using Akeneo and Shopware as target applications, with Alumio serving as the middleware to ensure structured data transfer and precise data mapping.
## **The Template Scope**
**Data mapping** includes the following structure:
## **API Documentation:**
Akeneo v1: [https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html](https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html)
Alumio v3.103-RC1: [https://apidocs.alumio.com/](https://apidocs.alumio.com/)
Shopware v6.7: [https://developer.shopware.com/docs/concepts/api](https://developer.shopware.com/docs/concepts/api)
## **Business Rules and Assumptions**
Users can import and export the Akeneo-Shopware Template via the Alumio UI. Additionally, the template can be imported into other Alumio Spaces.
**The Akeneo-Shopware Template is designed for a one-time import and doesn't support repeated imports.**
# Installation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/installation
To begin using the integration, you need to install the required template in Alumio.
**Step 1: Download the Integration Template.**
Download the latest version of the integration template by clicking on the file below: [https://library.alumio.com/](https://library.alumio.com/)
**Step 2: Import the Template into Alumio.**
1. Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
2. Navigate to System → Import / Export.
3. Upload the downloaded template. You’ll see a list of the configurations ready to import. Select All and click the “Import configuration” button. Verify that all Incoming, Routes, Outgoing, Transformers, and Schedulers are correctly imported.
# Synchronization of Categories from Akeneo to Shopware
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/synchronization-of-categories-from-akeneo-to-shopware
## **Fetching Categories from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
* To get all categories from the Akeneo system, use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
This incoming will create a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base categories. There some transformer inside this Incoming before processing the category.
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter - Category.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo. An example of the Akeneo labels:
```json theme={null}
{
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
}
}
```
Since the current data structure is incompatible with Shopware, the transformer "**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**" is used to convert it into a compatible format.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
....
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.** This is the transformer that converts the entire category data into Alumio Base data. An example of the Alumio base category:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "master",
"parent": null,
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Category**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into task categories to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, you should remove the entity from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Categories"**.
## **Sending Categories to Shopware**
The task that was created through Incoming "Akeneo - Fetch - Categories" will then be processed further by the Route "Synchronize Categories - From Akeneo into Shopware" and will be sent using this Outgoing.
This Outgoing will transform the Alumio Base Categories into Shopware one and check to create or to update the category with the data from this outgoing's previous iteration.
The sending in the Outgoing will be processed by the transformer:
1. Shopware - Prepare convert - Translations from Alumio Base
2. Shopware - Prepare convert - Category - Parent from Alumio Base Category.
3. Shopware - Convert - Category from Alumio Base Category
4. Shopware - Check and send - Category.
**Shopware - Prepare convert - Translations from Alumio Base**\
This transformer will create Shopware translations from Alumio localization.
**Shopware - Prepare convert - Category from Alumio Base Category**\
This transformer will check the parent and map it into the Shopware ID.
**Shopware - Convert - Category - from Alumio Base Category**\
This transformer will finally convert the Category from Alumio Base into Shopware.
**Shopware - Check and send - Category**
* This transformer will check the current Shopware category ID from the previous iteration of this transformer to determine whether we need to create or update the category in the Shopware System.
* An example of a creation payload will look like this.
```json theme={null}
{
"name": "Interior Accessories",
"active": true,
"visible": true,
"external": "interior_accessories",
"metaTitle": "Interior Accessories",
"translations": {
"2fb5fe2e29a4d70aa5854ce7ce3e20b": {
"name": "Interior Accessories",
"metaTitle": "Interior Accessories",
"shopId": "1"
}
},
"parentId": "019ae36535417124bf220aa84f54064b"
}
```
## **Automatic Categories Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Shopware - Send - Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Synchronization of Language from Akeneo to Shopware
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/synchronization-of-language-from-akeneo-to-shopware
## **Fetching Language from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Shopware - Fetch - Language".** To ensure accurate multilingual data synchronization between Akeneo and Shopware, it is essential to fetch the list of languages configured in Shopware and map them against the locale codes defined in Akeneo. Shopware identifies languages using UUID-based language IDs, while Akeneo uses ISO locale codes such as en\_US, de\_DE, or fr\_FR. Because these systems use different identifiers, the integration must first retrieve all languages from Shopware via the Admin API (GET/api/language) and read the associated locale. code value. Once the Shopware locale code is obtained, it can be matched with Akeneo’s locale code, allowing the integration to send translated data under the correct language ID in Shopware’s translations payload. Without this incoming configuration, translations from Akeneo cannot be correctly aligned with the corresponding languages in Shopware.
This Incoming needs to be run once before any synchronization happens or if a new language is added to the Shopware system.
**Shopware - Fetch - Locale** This transformer will fetch the Shopware locale to get the locale code.
**Shopware - Update storage - Locale.** \
This transformer will update Alumio storage with Shopware locale ID based on the locale code
# Synchronize Shopware Property Group or Custom Field from Akeneo Attribute
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-shopware/synchronize-shopware-property-group-or-custom-field-from-akeneo-attribute
This section will explain how to properly sync all families and attributes from Akeneo into the Shopware property group or custom field.
Akeneo and Shopware use fundamentally different data models, which means attributes cannot be transferred directly from one system to the other without structural mapping. Akeneo stores product information as flexible, typed attributes, while Shopware organizes similar data into property groups for filterable or variant-defining attributes and custom fields for additional descriptive or technical information. To preserve functionality such as storefront filtering, variant generation, and multilingual attribute display, Akeneo attributes must be transformed into the appropriate Shopware structures. Simple-select and multi-select attributes that influence product selection or filtering are mapped into Shopware property groups and options, whereas informational, numeric, or free-text attributes are mapped into Shopware custom fields. This mapping ensures that data from Akeneo is represented correctly within Shopware’s ecosystem and behaves consistently in product listings, filters, and detail pages.
The step to do this is by:
1. Fetching attributes from Akeneo by running the Incoming "Akeneo - Fetch - Attributes".
2. Sending property group or custom field into Shopware by running the Route "Synchronize Property Group or Custom Field - from Akeneo Attribute" and the Outgoing "Shopware - Send - Property Group or Custom Field".
## **Fetching attributes from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to "Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Attributes"
This incoming will create a task inside Alumio with data structured as an Alumio base attribute. There are transformers inside this Incoming before processing this attribute:
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert - Labels - To localization.
2. Akeneo - Check and fetch - Attribute options.
3. Akeneo - Convert - Attribute - To Alumio Base Attribute.
4. Akeneo - Map - Type code - To Alumio Base code.
5. Akeneo - Filter previous - Attribute.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Labels - To localization** \
This transformer will prepare the labels in Alumio Base.
**Akeneo - Check and fetch - Attribute options**
* This transformer will fetch the options from the attribute options when the attribute type is a simple select or multiselect.
* This transformer will fetch the options from the entity records when the attribute type is reference entity or reference entity
**Akeneo - Convert - Attribute - To Alumio Base Attribute** \
This transformer will convert the attribute structure into Alumio Base.
**Akeneo - Map - Type code - To Alumio Base code** \
This transformer will convert the attribute code value into Alumio Base.
**Akeneo - Filter previous - Attribute** \
This transformer will filter the Attribute from the previous iteration to avoid duplication.
## **Sending a property group or a custom field into Shopware**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Route → Synchronize Property Group or Custom Field - from Akeneo Attribute".** Then go to the outgoing **"Shopware - Send - Property Group or Custom Field"**.
This Outgoing will transform the Alumio Base attributes into a Shopware property group when it has options and a custom field when it does not.
There are transformers inside the Outgoing configuration. You can begin by selecting which attributes should be processed by the **“Shopware – Check and Send – Property Group or Custom Field”** transformer.
**Shopware - Check and send - Property Group or Custom Field**\
This transformer will check what kind of attribute to determine the Shopware property group when it has options and a custom field when it does not.
**Shopware - Convert - Config label - from Alumio Base Localizations**\
This transformer will make the Shopware config label from Alumio Base Localizations.
**Shopware - Custom field set - Create and send**\
This transformer will prepare a custom field set where the field set will be created, and continue to call the transformer **"Shopware - Check and send - Custom field"** for real creation.
**Shopware - Check and send - Custom field**\
This transformer will check the custom field from the previous iteration and decide to create a new one or update the existing.
**Shopware - Prepare convert - Translations - from Alumio Base localizations**\
Create Shopware translations from Alumio's base localizations.
**Shopware - Prepare convert - Property Group Options - From Alumio Base** **Attribute Options**\
Preparing Shopware property group options from Alumio base attribute options.
**Shopware - Convert - Property group - from Alumio Base Attribute**\
This transformer will convert the property group from Alumio base attributes and previous preparation.
**Shopware - Check and send - Property group**\
This transformer will check the property group from the previous iteration and decide to create a new one or update the existing.
## **Automatic property groups or custom fields synchronization setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch - Attributes"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Shopware - Send - Property Groups or Custom Fields"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-spryker/fetching-product-data-from-akeneo-to-alumio
## **Fetching Variants of Product from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"**. We defined variants as the product of a product model. Before we fetch the product model in Akeneo, we need to prepare the variants first (the product of the product model). This Incoming is designed to get products in Akeneo which have parent, so we can be sure this will be a variant from the product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** with a list of product data in Alumio base product data.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter for Spryker**
This transformer is configured to permit locales associated with the "eCommerce" channel code. If you require additional channels, please update the values in the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer converts localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product data into Alumio base product data.
```json theme={null}
{
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "35523802",
"localizations": [...],
"customAttributes": {},
"code": "35523802",
"attributeSetCode": "smartphones",
"parentCode": "SM-A520F",
"statusCode": true
}
```
**Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product**
This transformer will create a list of variants from the Alumio base product. It will load the previous iteration of this transformer to merge the list or create a new list. Then the list of variants will be saved in the storage **"Akeneo - Product Model variants - Alumio Base Product"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare update - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Variant merge**
This transformer will merge the list of variants in the transformer **"Akeneo - Update Storage - Product Model Variants - Alumio Base Product"** to ensure there will be no duplication based on the product code.
## Fetching Parent Product Model from Akeneo
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Product Models without parent"**. Parent product model in Akeneo has a probability to have children, which is another product model or variant, which is the product of the product model. This Incoming is designed to get a list of product model which is the top parent or do not have a parent. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with parent product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter for Spryker**
This transformer filters for localizations specifically associated with the "eCommerce" channel. If you require additional channels, please add the corresponding values to the Node filter.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert category data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
"samsung",
"smartphones"
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "samsung"
},
{
"categoryCode": "smartphones"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base**
This transformer will convert price data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"price": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currency": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currency": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currency": "USD"
}
]
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"prices": [
{
"amount": "354.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
},
{
"amount": "400.02",
"currencyCode": "GBP"
},
{
"amount": "318.60",
"currencyCode": "USD"
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will convert Akeneo product model data into Alumio base product model data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "aphrodite",
"prices": [
{
"amount": "299.00",
"currencyCode": "EUR"
}
],
"categories": [
{
"categoryCode": "women_shirts"
},
...
],
"localizations": [
{},
{}
],
"customAttributes": {
"washing": "70deg",
"imported": false,
"packshot": [],
"supplier": "zaro",
"dry_clean": false,
"collections": []
},
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": null
}
```
**Alumio - Fetch storage - Alumio Base Product Model attach variants**
This transformer will fetch the data of the variant that was created from the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent"** and attach it as a variant to the Alumio base product model.
```json theme={null}
{
"variants": [
{
"identifier": "aphrodite_0",
"categories": [...],
"groups": [],
"customAttributes": {},
"localizations": [...],
"prices": [...],
"code": "aphrodite_0",
"statusCode": false,
"attributeSetCode": "tops",
"parentCode": "aphrodite"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will save the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
## **Fetching Children Product Model from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models with parent"**. After we got the parent and the variant for a product model, this is the time to fetch children, product model. This Incoming well get the product model with parent to become a children product model. This Incoming will not create any task but will update the storage of the parent at **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with children product model data in the Alumio base product model.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
* This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A520F 4G 32Go Or",
"scope": null,
"locale": "fr_FR",
"attribute_type": "pim_catalog_text"
}
```
Since the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker, we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"customAttributes": {
"name": "Samsung Galaxy A5 (2017) SM-A5 ...",
"form_factor_771": "Barre",
"second_display_3989": "Non",
"zoom_capability_472": "Oui"
},
"localeCode": "fr_FR"
}
```
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter for Spryker**
* We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in "eCommerce" if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node filter.
The transformers below display the data according to the key naming in them. Be aware that the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker, we use these transformers to convert them into a more workable format.
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Convert - Product Model - To Alumio Base Product Model.**
**Akeneo - Filter and prepare update storage - Filter for product model without variants and update parent**
This transformer will filter the product model without variant and will update the parent if not filtered.
**Akeneo - Update storage - Alumio Base Product Model update children**
This transformer will update the parent product model inside the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"** with the product model provided in the data.
## **Fetching Simple Product from Akeneo**
In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Products without parent"**. There is some product data without a product model in Akeneo. This Incoming will duplicate the product data into the Alumio base product model and save it into the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert - Values - To localizations and custom attributes**
This transformer will convert localizations data from Akeneo. Be aware that the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker; we use this transformer to convert it into a more workable format.
**Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter for Spryker**
We use this transformer to only allow any localization with a channel code in **"eCommerce"** if it has the channel code. If you need another channel code, add the value in the Node Filter.
The transformers below display data from Akeneo. Be aware that the original data structure is incompatible with Spryker; we use these transformers to convert it into a more workable format.
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Categories to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Prepare convert - Product and product model - Prices to Alumio Base.**
* **Akeneo - Convert - Product - To Alumio Base product.**
**Akeneo - Convert - Alumio Base Product - To Alumio Base Product Model with variants**
This transformer copies the Alumio base product data into the Alumio base product model with variant. We add the variant code with **"-1"** to avoid data duplication. An example can be found below:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "78409316",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [
{},
{}
],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {},
"variants": [
{
"code": "78409316-1",
"groups": [],
"prices": [...],
"categories": [...],
"identifier": "78409316",
"parentCode": "78409316",
"statusCode": true,
"localizations": [...],
"attributeSetCode": "headphones",
"customAttributes": {}
}
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Update storage - Product Model parent - Alumio Base Product Model**
This transformer will save the product model parent in the storage **"Alumio - Product Model Parent - Alumio Base Product Model"**.
## **Automatic Fetching Product Data from Akeneo to Alumio**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch complete products".**
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# General Information
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-spryker/index
## **Introduction**
**The Akeneo-Spryker Template** facilitates seamless product data retrieval from Akeneo and transfers it to Spryker to make products sellable on the Spryker platform.
The Template focuses on using Akeneo and Spryker as target applications, with Alumio serving as the middleware to ensure structured data transfer and precise data mapping.
## **The Template Scope**
**Data mapping** includes the following structure (greyed-out fields are excluded from scope):
**Out of scope:**
**Akeneo:** Data mapping of Family, Family Variant (see Table 1). The data model of Spryker doesn’t include Family and Family Variant, to which data could be mapped. The Template uses Family Variant (axes) as a part of the Family Variant to create Super Attributes.
**Spryker:** Measurement and packaging Units, Tier Pricing, Bundles, Related Products, Binary Assets.
## **API Documentation**
Akeneo v1: [https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html](https://api.akeneo.com/concepts/products.html)
Alumio v3.82-RC1: [https://apidocs.alumio.com/](https://apidocs.alumio.com/)
Spryker v202404.0: [https://docs.spryker.com/docs/pbc/all/data-exchange/202404.0/sending-requests-with-data-exchange-api.html](https://docs.spryker.com/docs/pbc/all/data-exchange/202404.0/sending-requests-with-data-exchange-api.html)
## **Business Rules and Assumptions**
Users can import and export the Akeneo-Spryker Template via the Alumio UI. Additionally, the template can be imported into other Alumio Spaces.
For Spryker configuration, the B2B business model is used, with the following data mapping settings:
* Stock: static number (configurable, but static);
* Language: German, English.
**The Akeneo-Spryker Template is designed for a one-time import and doesn't support repeated imports.**
# Installation
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-spryker/installation
To begin using the integration, you need to install the required template in Alumio.
**Step 1: Download the Integration Template.**
Download the latest version of the integration template by clicking on the file below: [https://library.alumio.com/](https://library.alumio.com/)
**Step 2: Import the Template into Alumio.**
1. Log in to your Alumio Dashboard.
2. Navigate to System → Import / Export.
3. Upload the downloaded template. You’ll see a list of the configurations ready to import. Select All and click the “Import configuration” button. Verify that all Incoming, Routes, Outgoing, Transformers, and Schedulers are correctly imported.
## **Credentials Setup**
Before running the integration, you must configure credentials for Akeneo and Spryker in Alumio.
**Step 1: Retrieve API Credentials from Akeneo.**
* Log in to Akeneo as an admin user.
* Navigate to **Connect → Connection-settings.**
* Create a new connection (if necessary) and retrieve the following:
1. Client ID.
2. Secret Key.
3. Username.
4. Password.
**Step 2: Retrieve API Credentials from Spryker.**
For Spryker, you’ll only need to use your username and password.
* Username.
* Password.
**Step 3: Configure Credentials in Alumio.**
* In Alumio, go to **System → Environment variables.**
* Fill in all credentials based on what you get from Akeneo and Spryker.
* Click Save & Apply.
## **Customization**
**Customizing Categories Synchronization from Akeneo to Spryker - Set store**
* Navigate to **"Transformer → Spryker - Convert - Alumio Base Category - To Spryker Category"**.
* Find the first value setter and change the array as needed.
* Save the transformer.
**Customizing Categories Synchronization from Akeneo to Spryker - Set locale**
* Navigate to **"Transformer → Spryker - Filter Category - Filter localized attributes by locale"**.
* Add or remove a locale in the first Node filter.
* Save the transformer.
**Customizing Attributes Synchronization from Akeneo to Spryker - Set boolean attribute**
* Navigate to **"Transformer → Akeneo - Check and fetch - Attribute options"**.
* Find the first value setter and change the object's boolean value according to your needs.
* Save the transformer.
**Customizing Attributes Synchronization from Akeneo to Spryker - Set locale**
* Navigate to **"Transformer → Spryker - Filter Attribute - Filter locale name by locale"**.
* Please add or remove a locale in the first Node filter.
* Save the transformer.
**Customizing Akeneo Synchronize Products to Spryker - Set channel code**
* Navigate to **"Transformer → Akeneo - Prepare Convert - Localizations filter for Spryker"**.
* Please add or remove the channel code in the first Node filter.
* Save the transformer.
**Customizing Akeneo Synchronize Products to Spryker - Set Base Information**
* Navigate to **Transformer → Spryker - Set - Base Information.**
* Go to the “Overview” tab to see what kind of information you can set.
* Go to each data transformer and make necessary adjustments.
* Save the transformer.
**Customizing Akeneo Synchronize Products to Spryker - Set How many Products per task**
* Navigate to **Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch Storage - Product Model Alumio Base.**
* Go to the subscriber section.
* Adjust the value for the “Item in group” field. For example, if you set 15, then it’ll be 15 products per task.
* Save the incoming configuration.
## **How to Run the Template**
To ensure proper data synchronization, follow this guide:
**Step 1: Synchronize the Categories.**
This ensures all categories exist in Spryker before importing products.
* Go to **Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories.**
* Run it and wait until the incoming is finished.
* Verify whether the tasks are being created and executed in the Alumio dashboard.
* Make sure all the tasks are finished and verify the result in Spryker.
**Step 2: Synchronize the Attributes.**
Product attributes (e.g., colour, size) need to be imported before products.
* Go to **Incoming → Akeneo Synchronize Attributes to Spryker.**
* Run it and wait until the incoming is finished.
* Verify the tasks are being created and executed in the Alumio dashboard.
* Make sure all the tasks are finished and verify the result in Spryker.
**Step 3: Synchronize the Product from Akeneo to Alumio**.
Run the following Incomings in the following order:
**1. Akeneo - Fetch - Products with parent.**
**2. Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models without parent.**
**3. Akeneo - Fetch - Product Models with parent.**
**4. Akeneo - Fetch - Products without parent.**
These steps manage a structure based on the Akeneo structure and store the product in **Alumio storage** for further processing.
**Step 4: Synchronize the existing ID’s & Code’s from Spryker.**
Before running the product synchronization to Spryker, it is required to fetch all existing IDs/Codes for Abstract/Concrete products, categories, attributes, etc., from Spryker into Alumio storage. This will help Alumio check and fetch IDs from Spryker more quickly during the product synchronization process.
* Run **Incoming → Spryker - Update storages.**
* Wait until the incoming is finished.
**Step 5: Synchronize the Products to Spryker.**
After setting up categories and attributes and structuring the products in Alumio storage, we can then start sending them to Spryker.
* Run **Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch Storage - Product Model Alumio Base.**
* Wait until the incoming is finished.
* Verify whether the tasks are being created and executed in the Alumio dashboard.
* Make sure all the tasks are finished and verify the result in Spryker.
## **Setting Up the Schedulers and Parallel Processing**
**Step 1: Enable Parallel Processing.**
* Go to **Routes → Akeneo - Fetch Storage - Product Model Alumio Base.**
* Enable the “Enable Parallel Execution” checkbox.
* Adjust “Maximum Parallel Executions” to a value that does not exceed your available Data Engines.
**Step 2: Configure the Schedulers in Alumio.**
To automate synchronization, you can set up scheduled jobs. Our template also includes a set of preconfigured job schedulers that are ready for you to enable. You can also modify them as needed to suit your project requirements.
To go to your scheduler's page, follow these steps:
* Navigate to **Integration → Schedulers.**
* Create and modify schedulers for:
**1. Category Sync - Spryker - Send Categories.**
**2. Attribute Sync - Akeneo - Fetch and check Attributes.**
**3. Product Sync - Akeneo - Fetch complete products.**
**4. Product Send to Spryker - Spryker - Send complete products.**
**Set appropriate execution intervals (e.g., hourly, daily)**
To enable parallel processing in a configuration, you need to create multiple schedulers for it. For example, you will see at least five schedulers set up for **“Spryker - Send Complete Products.”** This means the configuration within that scheduler will run with five parallel processes. Enable the schedulers.
## **Monitoring & Troubleshooting**
**Checking Logs**
* Navigate to **Incoming, Route or Task page → Logs** in Alumio.
* Review task execution details and error messages.
* Debug issues by checking logs for **failed transformations or API responses.**
**Common Issues & Fixes**
**Next Steps**
* Verify synchronization results by checking the Spryker backend.
* Adjust data transformation rules if necessary.
* Continue monitoring logs and optimize performance based on scheduler execution times, number of products per task etc.
# Sending Product Data from Alumio to Spryker
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-spryker/sending-product-data-from-alumio-to-spryker
### **Base Information Setup**
* Navigate to **Transformer → Spryker - Set - Base Information.**
* Go to each data transformer and make necessary adjustments.
* Save the transformer.
### **Configuring the Incoming: Akeneo ‐ Fetch Storage ‐ Product Model Alumio Base**
In the Incoming section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Spryker system, minimal setup is required. The key configuration to adjust is the number of products processed per task.
* Navigate to Incoming and locate the **“Akeneo - Fetch Storage - Product Model Alumio Base”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Find the field labelled “Items in group”.
* Enter the desired number of products to be synchronized per task. Example: If you want to process 15 products per task, set the value to 15.
* By adjusting this setting, you can control the batch size for product synchronisation, optimising performance for your system’s needs.
### **Configuring the Route: Akeneo Synchronize Products to Spryker**
In the Route section of data synchronization from the Alumio schema to the Spryker system, minimal setup is required. The main configuration involves setting the number of parallel jobs that will run simultaneously.
* Navigate to Routes and locate the configuration **“Akeneo Synchronize Products to Spryker”** configuration.
* Open the configuration settings.
* Enable the “Enable parallel execution” checkbox.
* Locate the “Maximum parallel executions” field and set the value based on the number of parallel jobs you want to run.
**Important: Ensure that this value does not exceed the maximum number of data engines available in your environment.**
### **Configuring the Scheduler & Parallel Processing**
**Step 1: Enable Parallel Processing.**
* Go to **Routes → Akeneo - Fetch Storage - Product Model Alumio Base.**
* Enable the “Enable Parallel Execution” checkbox.
* Adjust the “Maximum Parallel Executions” field to a value that does not exceed your available Data Engines.
**Step 2: Configure the Schedulers in Alumio.**
To automate synchronization, you can set up scheduled jobs. Our template also includes a set of preconfigured job schedulers that you can enable. You can also modify them as needed to suit your project requirements.
Follow these steps to go to the Schedulers page:
* Navigate to **Integration → Schedulers**.
* Create and modify schedulers for:
**1. Category Sync - Spryker - Send Categories.**
**2. Attribute Sync - Akeneo - Fetch and check Attributes.**
**3. Product Sync - Akeneo - Fetch complete products.**
**4. Product Send to Spryker - Spryker - Send complete products.**
* Set appropriate execution intervals (e.g., hourly, daily).
* To enable parallel processing in a configuration, you need to create multiple schedulers for it. For example, you can see at least five schedulers set up for “Spryker - Send Complete Products.” This means the configuration within that scheduler will run with five parallel processes.
* Enable the schedulers.
# Synchronization of Attributes from Akeneo to Spryker
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-spryker/synchronization-of-attributes-from-akeneo-to-spryker
## **Fetching Families from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Families".** This incoming is created to get family axes in Akeneo to determine a super attribute in Spryker. The family axes exist in the family variants, but Akeneo require code in the endpoint.
**Akeneo - Fetch and update storage - Family Variants - Axes**
This transformer is a custom pagination HTTP call to get family variants. It saves the family axes in the storage **"Akeneo - Family Variants - Axes"**.
## **Fetching Attributes from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Attributes".**
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
}
}
```
Since this structure is not compatible with Spryker, this transformer converts it into a more suitable and workable format.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Check and fetch - Attribute options**
This transformer checks whether an attribute has available options. If the attribute is a boolean, the transformer will generate options based on its value, which can be customised in the Value Setter.
**Akeneo - Fetch and convert - Attribute Options - To Alumio Base Attribute Options**
This transformer performs a custom paginated HTTP request to retrieve attribute options and then converts them into the Alumio base attribute option format.
**Akeneo - Convert - Attribute - To Alumio Base Attribute**
This transformer converts the entire attribute data into Alumio Base data.
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "zoom_capability_472",
"isSuper": false,
"typeCode": "text",
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "Zoom-Fähigkeit"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Map - Type code - To Spryker Code**
This transformer is used to map the type code in Akeneo into a Spryker one. For example,
* pim\_catalog\_boolean → select.
* pim\_catalog\_select → select.
**Akeneo - Check - Axes - Is Super Attribute**
This transformer checks the super attribute using storage **"Akeneo - Family Variants - Axes"** that was created by the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Families".**
**Akeneo - Filter - Attribute**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created task attributes to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, remove the entity from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Attributes"**.
## **Fetching Attributes from Spryker**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Spryker - Fetch - Attributes"**. Before sending attributes to the Spryker system, we first need to determine which attributes already exist. This Incoming configuration fetches attribute data from Spryker and stores it using the **“Spryker - Update storage - Attributes”** transformer. The result is not created as a task but saved in storage under **“Spryker - Attributes.”**
## **Sending Attributes into Spryker**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Route → Akeneo Synchronize Atrributes to Spryker".**
**Spryker - Prepare Convert - Check type code for metric and change into text**
Since the metric type is not currently supported in Spryker, it is converted to text.
**Spryker - Convert - Attribute - From Alumio Base**
This transformer handles the conversion of Alumio attribute data within the task into the appropriate Spryker attribute format.
```json theme={null}
{
"data": {
"id": "envelopes_sizes_3627",
"type": "product-attributes",
"attributes": {
"key": "envelopes_sizes_3627",
"allowInput": false,
"isSuper": false,
"inputType": "multiselect",
"localizedKeys": [
{
"translation": "Umschlaggrößen",
"localeName": "de_DE"
},
{
"translation": "Envelope sizes",
"localeName": "en_GB"
},
{
"translation": "Envelope sizes",
"localeName": "en_US"
},
...
],
"values": []
}
}
}
```
**Spryker - Filter Attribute - Filter locale name by locale**
The Spryker system requires synchronization locales to match those configured in the store to prevent errors. Consequently, this transformer is designed to process only the approved locales. Please update the Node filter to add or remove locales as needed.
**Spryker - Prepare Send Attribute - Check localized keys translation for system and add period**
Due to a bug in Spryker that rejects payloads containing the locale name "System", this logic appends a period (System.) to bypass the validation error.
**Spryker - Check and send - Attribute**
This transformer will check current Spryker attributes from the Incoming **"Spryker - Fetch - Attributes"** to determine whether we need to create or update the attribute in the Spryker System.
**Spryker - Update storage - Attributes**
This transformer will save the current created or updated attribute to be used in future iterations of the transformer **"Spryker - Check and send - Attribute"**.
## **Automatic Attributes Synchronization Setup**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch and check Attributes"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Spryker - Send Attributes"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# Synchronization of Categories from Akeneo to Spryker
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-spryker/synchronization-of-categories-from-akeneo-to-spryker
## **Fetching Categories from Akeneo**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
* To get all categories from the Akeneo system, use an Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"**.
This incoming will create a task inside Alumio with data structured as Alumio base categories. There some transformer inside this Incoming before processing the category.
1. Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations.
2. Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base.
3. Akeneo - Filter - Category.
**Akeneo - Prepare convert category - Labels - To localizations**
This transformer converts label data from Akeneo.
```json theme={null}
{
"labels": {
"de_DE": "E-commerce",
"en_GB": "E-commerce",
"en_US": "E-commerce",
"es_ES": "E-commerce",
"fr_FR": "E-commerce",
"it_IT": "E-commerce",
"nl_NL": "E-commerce",
"pt_PT": "E-commerce"
}
}
```
Since the current data structure is incompatible with Spryker, the transformer "**Akeneo - Convert - Category - To Alumio Base**" is used to convert it into a compatible format.
```json theme={null}
{
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
....
]
}
```
An example of the Alumio base category:
```json theme={null}
{
"code": "master",
"parent": null,
"localizations": [
{
"localeCode": "de_DE",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_GB",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "en_US",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
{
"localeCode": "es_ES",
"translation": "E-commerce"
},
...
]
}
```
**Akeneo - Filter - Category**
* Use this transformer to filter previously created tasks into task categories to avoid duplication.
* To recreate a task, you should remove the entity from the storage **"Akeneo - Filter - Categories"**.
## **Fetching Categories from Spryker**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Incoming → Spryker - Fetch - Categories"**.
* Before sending categories into the Spryker system, you need to know which categories already exist in the Spryker System. This Incoming is intended to fetch the categories data in the Spryker System and save them with the transformer **"Spryker - Update storage - Category full data"**. The result of this Incoming won't be created as a task but will be saved into the storage name **"Spryker - Categories - Full Data"**.
## **Sending Categories to Spryker**
* In Alumio, go to **"Integrations → Route → Akeneo Synchronize Categories to Spryker"**.
* The task in the Incoming **"Akeneo - Fetch - Categories"** will be processed in the Route **"Akeneo Synchronize Categories to Spryker"** and sent using the Outgoing **"Spryker - Send - Category"**.
Sending in the Outgoing will be processed with the following transformers:
1. Spryker - Convert - Alumio Base Category - To Spryker Category.
2. Spryker - Filter Category - Filter localized attributes by locale.
3. Spryker - Prepare Send Category - Check and fill parent sort order.
4. Spryker - Check and send - Category.
5. Spryker - Update storage - Category full data.
**Spryker - Convert - Alumio Base Category - To Spryker Category**
This transformer converts Alumio category data inside the task into Spryker category data.
```text theme={null}
{
"data": {
"id": "master",
"type": "categories",
"attributes": {
"stores": [...],
"isActive": true,
"isInMenu": true,
"categoryKey": "master",
"isClickable": true,
"isSearchable": true,
"localizedAttributes": [...],
"parent": {
"sortOrder": "100",
"categoryKey": "demoshop"
}
}
}
}
```
This transformer requires input on the first Value setter configuration for storing information in the Spryker system and the default root parent for categories without a parent from the Akeneo System. You can modify it according to your needs.
**Spryker - Filter Category - Filter localized attributes by locale**
The Spryker system requires only the store's configured locale to ensure successful synchronisation. This transformer is designed to include only the approved locale, preventing errors during the sync process. Add or remove a locale in the first Node filter.
By default, this transformer is configured for the English and Dutch locales.
**Spryker - Prepare Send Category - Check and fill parent sort order**
The parent sort order is set to 100 by default in the **“Spryker - Convert - Alumio Base Category - To Spryker Category”** transformer. This transformer automatically increases the sort order as additional categories are added.
**Spryker - Check and send - Category**
This transformer checks existing Spryker categories from the **“Spryker - Fetch - Categories”** incoming configuration to determine whether a category should be created or updated in the Spryker system.
**Spryker - Update storage - Category full data**
This transformer stores the created or updated category so it can be reused in subsequent iterations of the **“Spryker - Check and send - Category”** transformer.
## **Automatic Categories Synchronization Setup**
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Akeneo - Fetch Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
* Go to **"Integrations → Schedulers → Spryker - Send Categories"**.
* Set a schedule expression and enable the configuration.
# The Template Export
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/akeneo-to-spryker/the-template-export
Follow this guide to export the template.
* Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
* Navigate to **Integrations > Schedulers**.
* Pick up the Scheduler for export. Currently, 11 Schedulers can be exported.
* You can export single or multiple Schedulers.
1. For a single Scheduler, navigate to one of the configurations in **Scheduler > … (Three dots on the top right) > Export.**
2. To export multiple Schedulers, mark the checkbox **Scheduler > Export (top right).**
Note: The values under System > Environment Variable are not included when exporting and must be entered manually. These variables are required because they are used in the HTTP (API) Client. You can find the Environment Variable used in **Connections > HTTP (API) Client.**
# Build transformers with the Alumio Assistant
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/alumio-assistant
Use the AI chat next to the transformer form to build and change transformers by describing what they should do.
The Alumio Assistant is a **beta feature**. It is not yet available in every environment, its behaviour may change between releases, and it can make mistakes. Always review what it proposes and test the transformer with the Transformer tester before you use it in a live integration.
The Alumio Assistant is an AI chat that opens next to the transformer form. You describe in plain language what a transformer should do, and the assistant builds it for you: it chooses the transformers to use, fills in their fields, names and describes every step and checks that the result is valid. You review the proposal and apply it to the form with one click.
## Open the assistant
1. Go to **Transformers** and create a new transformer or open an existing one.
2. Click the sparkles icon to open the chat. It opens as a panel beside the form. You can drag its edge to make it wider or narrower.
3. Type what you want to build, or pick one of the suggestions shown in an empty chat.
The assistant only works inside a transformer form. On other pages the chat stays readable, but you can't send messages until you open a transformer again.
If you don't see the sparkles icon:
* You may have hidden it. Open **User preferences** from the profile icon in the top-right corner and set **Alumio assistant** to **Show Alumio assistant**.
* Your role may not allow it. The assistant is available to users who can edit configurations, such as Editors and Administrators.
* The assistant may not be enabled for your environment yet.
## What the assistant can do
### Read your current transformer
Every time you send a message, the assistant reads the transformer as it is in the form at that moment, including changes you haven't saved yet.
When the form already holds a configuration, the assistant treats your message as a change to it, even when it reads like a new instruction. It keeps every step you don't mention exactly as it is and adds or changes only what you asked for. If you really want to throw the existing steps away, say so, for example "start over".
This also means you can ask questions about an existing transformer, such as "What does this transformer do?" or "Why are products without a SKU dropped?".
### Read your input data
When the Transformer tester is open and its **Input** tab holds data, the assistant reads that sample. It uses it to get field names, nesting and patterns right, instead of guessing what your data looks like.
For the best results, put a realistic record in the tester before you start the chat. Without a sample, the assistant works from your description and may ask what the data looks like.
You can also attach a file with the paperclip icon in the chat. Use this for example data that isn't the transformer's input, such as an example API response or the format you want to map to. Tell the assistant what the file represents. Attachments:
* must be text files, such as JSON, NDJSON, CSV, XML or YAML;
* can be up to 100 KB;
An attachment belongs to the message you send it with. Attach it again if you need it in a later message.
### Build transformers from your questions
Describe what the transformer should do, in your own words. For example:
| You want to | You could type |
| - | - |
| Reshape data | "Rename `sku` to `product_code` and move `price` into `pricing.amount`." |
| Filter data | "Skip products that have no price." |
| Map values | "Map the order status `processing` to `open` and `complete` to `closed`." |
| Call an API | "Send each order as a POST request to the orders endpoint and read the JSON response." |
| Store data | "Save each product in a storage, using the SKU as the key." |
For a clear task on a single data set, the assistant builds the transformer straight away.
For a mapping between two systems, some choices are yours to make. Which fields should be included, how should existing records be matched, what should happen to data that has no counterpart in the target system? The assistant then proposes a mapping and lists the decisions it can't make for you, up to five at a time. Confirm the proposal or correct it in a single reply, answer the questions, and it builds the transformer.
Before it proposes a transformer, the assistant checks it against the same validation Alumio uses when you import a configuration. It doesn't run the transformer, so a valid transformer can still do something other than you meant. Test it with your own data.
### Name and describe each step
Every step the assistant adds gets a short name and a description of what that step does, so the transformer is easy to follow later. You see the name on the step in the form and the description when the step is collapsed, just like a name and description you set yourself.
Steps it doesn't change keep their existing names and descriptions. You can also ask it to write them for a transformer you built yourself, for example "Give every step a clear name and description".
### Ask you for connections and storages
Some transformers need an existing configuration, such as an HTTP connection to call an API or a storage to save data in. The assistant never guesses which one to use. It asks you, and a picker appears in the chat listing the configurations of that type in your environment.
* **Pick one** from the list. Your choice is sent with your next message. You can add text to that message or send the selection on its own.
* **Create a new one** from the same picker, if your role allows it. A form opens where you set it up, and once you save it, the new configuration is selected.
* **Tell the assistant** when there are none and you can't create one. It then suggests another approach.
You can also name a configuration yourself, for example "Use the Shopify HTTP connection".
When the assistant looks up connections and storages, it only sees their names, not their settings. For API keys, passwords and other secrets it uses an [environment variable](/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/environment-variables), such as `${SHOP_API_KEY}`, and tells you which variable to create.
## Review and apply a proposal
When the transformer is ready, the assistant summarises what it does and which assumptions it made. Two buttons appear below the message:
* **Preview** shows a read-only view of the form with the proposal filled in. You can apply it from there too.
* **Apply** puts the proposal into the form.
Applying only changes the transformer's configuration. Its name, identifier and description stay as they are, and nothing is saved yet. Review the form, test the transformer and save it as usual.
After applying, you can click **Undo** to put the form back the way it was before. Any changes you made to the form since applying are undone too.
A proposal can be applied once. When you send a new message, older proposals are marked **Superseded**. If you opened a different transformer since the conversation started, the assistant asks whether to apply the proposal to the transformer that is open now.
## Keep refining
You don't need to get everything right in the first message. Keep chatting to adjust the result, for example "Also skip products without a price" or "Use the storage for the value mapping instead". Each follow-up works on what is in the form.
If you haven't applied the previous proposal, the assistant builds on it anyway and says that the earlier changes are included.
To start over, click **+** (New chat) in the chat header. This clears the conversation, not the form. Closing the chat after a proposal was applied also starts a new conversation the next time you open it.
## Tips for good results
* Put a realistic record in the Transformer tester before you start.
* Be specific about where the data comes from, where it goes and which fields matter.
* Name the connections and storages you want to use.
* Keep one conversation per transformer and start a new chat for a new topic.
* Read the summary. The assistant states the assumptions it made, and those are the places to check first.
* Test the transformer before you use it in a route.
## Credits and limits
Each reply from the assistant uses AI credits. The chat shows how many credits the current conversation has used. Your environment has a monthly allowance, which you can follow in the **Credits** widget on the Dashboard. It resets at the start of each month. When it is used up, the assistant stops answering until the next month.
Other limits:
* A message can be up to 5,000 characters.
* An attachment can be up to 100 KB.
* A conversation expires after a period without activity. The chat then says it has expired, and **Start fresh** opens a new one.
## What the assistant doesn't do
During the beta, keep in mind that the assistant:
* only builds transformers, not routes, connections, schedulers or other configurations;
* doesn't save, run or test anything; you stay in control of every change;
* doesn't create connections or storages itself; it asks you to pick or create them;
* works only from the transformer in the form, the tester input, attachments, your messages and the names of existing configurations. These are sent to an AI model to produce a reply, so don't paste passwords or API keys into the chat.
# The Configuration Object
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/building-integrations/building-the-configuration-object
Step by step: pick a top-level type, choose a prototype, fill in its parameters, and nest or reference other configurations.
The `object` field is the heart of every line in an import file. It holds the actual configuration and
is where most of the work goes. This page walks through building it from scratch.
## Object structure
The `object` takes one of two shapes, depending on whether the type uses named prototypes or a single default prototype:
```json theme={null}
{
"prototype": "http-subscriber",
"parameters": {
"uri": "https://api.example.org"
}
}
```
```json theme={null}
{
"parameters": {
"uri": "https://api.example.org"
}
}
```
The first form names a prototype explicitly. The second is for types with a single default prototype, so no `prototype` key is needed.
## Step by step
The `type` at the top level of the line decides what you are building. Only the types below are allowed at the top level of an import line.
**The main types you start from:**
| Type | What it is |
| - | - |
| `route-configuration` | Connects one incoming to one outgoing and applies transformers |
| `incoming-configuration` | Pulls data in and creates tasks |
| `outgoing-configuration` | Pushes data out to a destination |
| `scheduler-entry` | Runs an incoming or a route's outgoing on a cron schedule |
| `list-transformer` | A reusable, named data-processing pipeline |
**Connection types**, referenced by the ones above:
| Type | What it is |
| - | - |
| `http-client` | A reusable HTTP connection |
| `http-authentication` | Reusable authentication for HTTP clients |
| `soap-client` | A SOAP connection |
| `database-connection` | A database connection |
| `email-server` | An email server (SMTP or SendGrid) |
| `filesystem` | Remote or local file storage |
**Helper types:**
| Type | What it is |
| - | - |
| `entity` | Defines how items are identified, for deduplication and display |
| `storage` | An internal key-value store |
Each type offers a set of **prototypes** or a **default prototype**: templates with a
JSON schema that lists the fields you fill in. Fetch the supported prototypes for a
type from the Alumio API:
```http theme={null}
GET /api/v1/di/list/{type}/prototypes
```
See [Finding configuration types and schemas](#finding-configuration-types-and-schemas)
below for more information.
Put the chosen prototype identifier in `prototype`, and fill the fields from its schema into `parameters`:
```json theme={null}
{
"prototype": "pattern-move",
"parameters": {
"pattern": "sku",
"replacement": "product_code"
}
}
```
For a type that uses its default prototype, omit the `prototype` key and provide only `parameters`.
Some fields hold another prototype or configuration rather than a plain value. The field's schema
tells you which through its `di:type` and `di:allow` properties
(see [Common schema properties](#common-schema-properties) below). When a reference is allowed,
you have two options.
**Inline** as its own prototype and parameters:
```json theme={null}
{
"serializer": {
"prototype": "json",
"parameters": {
"flags": [128]
}
}
}
```
Or **reference** a configuration that is already saved in the environment
(or defined on another line in the same file), by its identifier:
```json theme={null}
{
"client": {
"identifier":"webshop-http-client"
}
}
```
To see what already exists to reference, list the saved configurations of that type:
```http theme={null}
GET /api/v1/di/list/{type}/configurations
```
Prototypes can hold other prototypes, so the structure nests. In the example below, a `list-transformer` (prototype `data`) contains an `http-transformer`, whose `client` is a **reference** to a saved `http-client` (`webshop`) and whose `request.serializer` is an **inline** `json` prototype:
```json theme={null}
{
"$schema": "https://di.schema.alumio.com/register.configuration.json",
"type": "list-transformer",
"identifier": "transformer-example",
"name": "Transformer Example",
"description": "",
"object": {
"prototype": "data",
"parameters": {
"transformers": [
{
"prototype": "http-transformer",
"parameters": {
"client": {
"identifier": "webshop"
},
"request": {
"uri": "/api/v1/orders",
"method": "GET",
"payload": "&{@}",
"serializer": {
"prototype": "json",
"parameters": { "flags": [128] }
},
"payloadType": "data"
}
}
}
]
}
}
}
```
## ULIDs
Alumio stamps a `ulid` on every prototype object during import validation. Do not generate them yourself.
* **When creating**: omit `ulid` everywhere. The server injects them.
* **When updating**: start from the exported or fetched JSON and keep the `ulid` fields it already contains, so embedded objects keep their identity.
## Finding configuration types and schemas
Use the Alumio API to find prototypes and configurations.
### Search for prototypes of a type
To list all available prototypes for a type use the following API call.
```http theme={null}
GET /api/v1/di/list/{type}/prototypes
```
### List saved configurations
To see what is already configured in the environment (so you reuse instead of duplicate), list the saved configurations of a type.
```http theme={null}
GET /api/v1/di/list/{type}/configurations
```
## Common schema properties
When you read a prototype's schema, a handful of properties tell you how to fill in a field. They live under a field's `ui` object.
### di:type
Marks a field that holds a **nested configuration** of a given type, rather than a plain value. For example, a field with `di:type: subscriber` expects a subscriber prototype (inline) or a reference to a saved subscriber. The value is either an inline prototype object or a reference object, as shown in the steps above.
### di:allow and di:force
These say whether a `di:type` field may point at a **saved configuration**.
* `di:allow: configuration` means a reference to a saved configuration is allowed. Use a reference object `{ "identifier": "..." }`, or inline the prototype if you prefer. The route's `incoming` and `outgoing` fields work this way.
* `di:force: configuration` means the value must be its own saved configuration, referenced by identifier. Every `transformers` array uses this: create a standalone `list-transformer` line and reference it. Inline objects are accepted by the importer but render poorly in the dashboard.
### ui:supportsPlaceholders
Marks a field that accepts a **placeholder**. For example `&{id}`. See [Placeholders](/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/placeholders).
### ui:patterns
Marks a field that uses **path patterns** to select or write data. For example `products.*.sku`. See [Patterns](/documentation/placeholders-and-patterns/patterns).
# Introduction
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/building-integrations/index
Understand how an Alumio integration is put together and how to deliver it as an importable NDJSON file.
This guide explains how to build an Alumio integration manually and package it as an importable configuration file.
You can build everything described here directly in the Alumio dashboard. This guide focuses on the underlying
configurations and the import file.
## Configurations
Every building block (a route, an incoming or outgoing configuration, a transformer, an HTTP client, a schedule, and so on) is a **configuration**. A configuration is a JSON object of a specific **type**, stored under an **identifier**.
Configurations can be imported and exported as **NDJSON** (newline-delimited JSON), with one configuration object per line.
## The NDJSON file
An Alumio import file is newline-delimited JSON (NDJSON): one configuration per line. The export endpoints produce the exact same format, so any file you export is directly re-importable.
Each line wraps a single configuration in a standard envelope:
```json theme={null}
{
"$schema": "https://di.schema.alumio.com/register.configuration.json",
"type": "route-configuration",
"identifier": "example-import-export",
"name": "Example Import Export",
"description": "",
"object": { },
"owner": null,
"disabled": false,
"label": null
}
```
| Field | Required | Notes |
| - | - | - |
| `$schema` | Yes | Always `https://di.schema.alumio.com/register.configuration.json` |
| `type` | Yes | The configuration type, for example `route-configuration` or `http-client` |
| `identifier` | Yes | Unique within the type; see the identifier rules below |
| `name` | Yes | Human-readable display name |
| `object` | Yes | The actual configuration (see below) |
| `description` | No | Free text shown in the dashboard; use it to explain intent |
| `disabled` | No | Defaults to `false` |
| `owner` | No | Identifier of a parent configuration that owns this one (children are cascade-deleted with the parent). Normally `null` for hand-built configurations |
| `label` | No | Array of label-name strings, or `null` |
## Identifier rules
The identifier pattern is `^[a-z0-9]+[a-z0-9\-]*[a-z0-9]+$`: lowercase letters, digits, and hyphens; at least two characters; must start and end with a letter or digit.
Uniqueness is per type. An `http-client` and an `incoming-configuration` may share the same identifier.
## The object field
The `object` field holds the actual configuration: a `prototype` plus its `parameters`. See the
[configuration object](/guides/building-integrations/building-the-configuration-object) page for
a guide on how to build the object field.
# Validating and Importing
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/building-integrations/validating-and-importing
Check an import file, dry-run it against the environment, import it, go live, and safely update existing configurations.
Once your file is written, validate it before importing, then import it. A file can be imported
via the dashboard or via the Alumio API.
## From the dashboard
Go to **System → Import / Export** and upload the file. Before you confirm, the dashboard shows the list of configurations it is about to import and whether each is new or an update. Review that list, and pay attention to anything marked as an update that you did not intend to change.
## From the API
Post the file to the import endpoint. Add `dry-run=1` to validate the file without importing it.
```http theme={null}
POST /api/v1/di/import
```
A dry-run always returns HTTP 201 with per-line results. Inspect the `valid` flag and the `results` array.
See the [API documentation](/api-reference/di/import-object-configurations).
# Database
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/database
### Overview
The Database package provides pre-configured examples for building integrations that interact with database systems. These examples show how Alumio can retrieve data from a database, process and transform it, and write it back to a database using Incoming configurations, Outgoing configurations, and Transformers.
The package helps you quickly set up database integrations by providing reusable templates for common database operations. You can use these examples as a starting point and customize them based on your database structure, queries, and integration requirements.
### General Information
The Database package shows how different Alumio components work together in a database integration flow:
* **Incoming configuration**: retrieves data from a database using a database subscriber.
* **Transformer**: processes, normalizes, or restructures database records before sending them to another system.
* **Outgoing configuration**: writes processed data into a database using a database publisher.
These examples can be used to connect Alumio with various database systems and automate data exchange between databases and external applications.
### Package Contents
The package includes the following example configurations:
**1. Create a Database Generic Subscriber**
Shows how to retrieve data from a database using a generic Database subscriber. Can be used to execute database queries and import records into Alumio for further processing.
Common use cases include:
* Importing records from existing database tables.
* Synchronizing database data with external systems.
* Creating scheduled data extraction processes.
**2. Create a Database Generic Publisher**
Shows how to write processed data into a database using a generic Database publisher. Demonstrates how Alumio can export transformed data and store it in a target database.
Common use cases include:
* Updating database records from external systems.
* Creating new records in database tables.
* Synchronizing data between multiple systems.
**3. Create a Database Generic Transformer**
Shows how to transform and prepare database data before it is published or sent to another system. Helps convert raw database records into the required data structure.
Common use cases include:
* Renaming or mapping fields.
* Formatting database values.
* Removing unnecessary data.
* Preparing data for the target system.
### Typical Use Cases
The Database package can be used for various integration scenarios, including:
* Synchronizing data between databases and external applications.
* Migrating data from one database system to another.
* Importing records from legacy database systems.
* Exporting processed integration data into database tables.
* Automating scheduled database data synchronization.
### Customization
These configurations are designed as reusable templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* Database connection settings.
* SQL queries or database operations.
* Table structures and field mappings.
* Transformers and data processing rules.
* Routes and scheduling settings.
This allows you to adapt the examples to your own database integration requirements while following Alumio's recommended integration approach.
### Integration Flow Example
A typical Database integration flow works as follows:
1. Incoming configuration retrieves data from the source database.
2. Transformer processes and converts the data into the required format.
3. Outgoing configuration sends or stores the processed data in the target database.
4. Route connects all components and manages the data flow between them.
Using these templates, you can quickly create reliable database integrations without building every configuration from scratch.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# Date Formats
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/example_date_formats
Example Transformer: Common Date Formats
Reference walkthrough of the Common date formats example configuration: relative date calculations and standard date/time output formats for transformer chains.
## Overview
This page documents an importable Data Integrator example configuration (`register.configuration.json`) named `[Example] — Common date formats` (identifier `example-common-date-formats`). It is not built to solve one specific integration; it is a reference snippet consultants can copy into a real flow and adapt.
The configuration is a plain `list-transformer` object, so it can be imported directly into a Data Integrator environment and inspected transformer-by-transformer in the flow builder.
The example is a single `data` transformer with two `value-setter` blocks: one that evaluates relative date expressions, and one that reformats the current moment into several standard formats.
The relative expressions (`yesterday`, `next monday`, `first day of this month`, …) and the `toFormat` tokens (`Y`, `m`, `d`, `H`, `i`, `s`, `c`, `r`, `U`, `W`, `P`) follow PHP's `strtotime()` phrasing and `date()` format characters, which is the convention the `format-date` mapper is built on.
## Relative date expressions
Example outputs below assume a flow running on **Monday, 7 September 2026, 14:32 (Europe/Amsterdam, UTC+2)**.
| Key | Input expression | `toFormat` | Example output |
| - | - | - | - |
| `yesterday` | `yesterday` | `Y-m-d H:i:s` | `2026-09-06 00:00:00` |
| `tomorrow` | `tomorrow` | `Y-m-d H:i:s` | `2026-09-08 00:00:00` |
| `7_days_from_now` | `+7 days` | `Y-m-d` | `2026-09-14` |
| `30_days_ago` | `-30 days` | `Y-m-d` | `2026-08-08` |
| `first_day_of_the_current_month` | `first day of this month` | `Y-m-d` | `2026-09-01` |
| `last_day_of_the_current_month` | `last day of this month` | `Y-m-d` | `2026-09-30` |
| `first_day_of_the_previous_month` | `first day of last month` | `Y-m-d` | `2026-08-01` |
| `first_day_of_the_next_month` | `first day of next month` | `Y-m-d` | `2026-10-01` |
| `next_monday` | `next monday` | `Y-m-d` | `2026-09-14` |
`yesterday` and `tomorrow` reset the time portion to `00:00:00`, while `+7 days` / `-30 days` preserve the original time of day. `next monday`, evaluated from a Monday, jumps a full week ahead rather than staying on the same day, this is standard `strtotime()` behavior and easy to trip over when a flow runs on a Monday.
The block also contains a `today_with_timezone` entry with `toFormat` set to `Y-m-d\TH:i:sP\` (note the trailing backslash). That trailing backslash is a harmless leftover, PHP-style date formatting ignores a dangling escape, so the output is identical to the ISO-8601 `c` format shown below: `2026-09-07T14:32:00+02:00`. If reusing this pattern, drop the trailing backslash (`Y-m-d\TH:i:sP`) for clarity.
## Well-known date/time formats
The second block formats "now" (an empty input value) into several standard representations:
| Key | `toFormat` | Format | Example output |
| - | - | - | - |
| `ISO_8601_in_UTC` | `Y-m-d\TH:i:s\Z` | ISO-8601, literal `Z` suffix | `2026-09-07T14:32:00Z` |
| `ISO_8601_with_timezone` | `c` | ISO-8601 with real UTC offset | `2026-09-07T14:32:00+02:00` |
| `RFC_2822_email_format` | `r` | RFC 2822 (email/HTTP header style) | `Mon, 07 Sep 2026 14:32:00 +0200` |
| `unix_timestamp` | `U` | Unix timestamp (seconds) | `1788784320` |
| `week_number` | `W` | ISO-8601 week number | `37` |
`ISO_8601_in_UTC` appends a **literal** `Z`, it does not convert the value to UTC first. Use it only when the underlying date is already in UTC. When the value is in a local timezone (as in this example, Europe/Amsterdam), prefer `ISO_8601_with_timezone` (`c`), which encodes the real offset instead of a false `Z`.
## Format token quick reference
| Token | Meaning |
| - | - |
| `Y` | 4-digit year |
| `m` | 2-digit month |
| `d` | 2-digit day of month |
| `H` | 2-digit hour, 24h |
| `i` | 2-digit minute |
| `s` | 2-digit second |
| `P` | UTC offset with colon, e.g. `+02:00` |
| `\T`, `\Z` | Escaped literal characters `T` / `Z` (not format tokens) |
| `c` | Shorthand for full ISO-8601 (`Y-m-d\TH:i:sP`) |
| `r` | Shorthand for RFC 2822 |
| `U` | Unix timestamp (seconds since epoch) |
| `W` | ISO-8601 week number |
## Transformer prototypes used
| Prototype | Role |
| - | - |
| `data` | Applies a set of transformers to the current record |
| `value-setter` | Writes one or more computed values onto fields, via optional `mappers` |
| `format-date` | Mapper: parses a date expression and renders it with a `toFormat` pattern |
The example is self-contained enough to import as-is, run once, and inspect the output per field, which is the fastest way to confirm a date format behaves the way a ticket or requirement expects before wiring it into a production flow.
# JMESpath
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/example_jmespath
Filter, select, reshape, aggregate, sort, and validate data with JMESPath in Alumio.
### Overview
This guide provides practical JMESPath examples for use in Alumio. In a field that supports placeholders, wrap each JMESPath expression in `&{...}`.
### Filtering items
Use filtering expressions to return only the array entries that meet one or more conditions.
| Use case | Expression |
| - | - |
| Filter active items | `&{items[?active == \`true\`]}\` |
| Filter items by price | `&{items[?price > \`100\`]}\` |
| Filter items by category | `&{items[?contains(categories, 'featured')]}` |
| Filter available items | `&{items[?active == \`true\` && stock > \`0\`]}\` |
| Find an item by SKU | `&{items[?sku == 'SKU-001'] \| [0]}` |
| Filter items with no stock | `&{items[?stock == \`0\`]}\` |
| Filter items whose name contains text | `&{items[?contains(name, 'Laptop')]}` |
For example, `&{items[?active == \`true\` && stock > \`0\`]}`returns only`SKU-001\` from the sample input.
Use backticks for numeric and boolean literals, for example `\`100\``and`\`true\``. Use single quotes for strings, for example `'featured'\`.
###
Select and reshape data
| Use case | Expression |
| - | - |
| Select a field from all items | `&{items[].name}` |
| Select the first item | `&{items[0]}` |
| Select the last item | `&{items[-1]}` |
| Select the first two items | `&{items[:2]}` |
| Select a range of items | `&{items[1:3]}` |
| Create a new customer object | `&{customer.{id: id, email: email, full_name: name}}` |
| Select fields as an array | `&{items[0].[sku, name, price]}` |
| Select a field with a dot in its name | `&{"product.name"}` |
### Work with nested data
| Use case | Expression |
| - | - |
| Extract all SKUs from order lines | `&{orders[].lines[].sku}` |
| Count lines per order | `&{orders[].{order_id: id, line_count: length(lines)}}` |
| Calculate total quantity per order | `&{orders[].{order_id: id, total_quantity: sum(lines[].quantity)}}` |
| Build an order summary | `&{orders[].{id: id, status: status, first_sku: lines[0].sku}}` |
### Aggregate and sort values
| Use case | Expression |
| - | - |
| Count items | `&{length(items)}` |
| Calculate total price | `&{sum(items[].price)}` |
| Calculate average price | `&{avg(items[].price)}` |
| Get the highest price | `&{max(items[].price)}` |
| Get the lowest price | `&{min(items[].price)}` |
| Find the most expensive item | `&{max_by(items, &price)}` |
| Find the lowest-priced item | `&{min_by(items, &price)}` |
| Sort item names | `&{sort(items[].name)}` |
| Sort items by price | `&{sort_by(items, &price)}` |
| Reverse an array | `&{reverse(items)}` |
### Handle and validate values
| Use case | Expression |
| - | - |
| Use the first available value | `&{not_null(customer.phone, customer.mobile, customer.email)}` |
| Convert a value to a string | `&{to_string(items[0].id)}` |
| Convert a value to an array | `&{to_array(customer.email)}` |
| Convert all IDs to strings | `&{map(&to_string(@), items[].id)}` |
| Get object keys | `&{keys(customer)}` |
| Get object values | `&{values(customer)}` |
| Get a value type | `&{type(items[0].price)}` |
| Merge two objects | `&{merge(customer, address)}` |
### Build JSON objects from tabular rows
When a parsed CSV is available in `data` as an array of rows, map each row into an object:
```text theme={null}
&{data[*].{"id": [0], "sku": [1], "name": [2], "qty": [3]}}
```
For example, a row such as `["1", "ABC123", "Product X", "23"]` becomes:
```json theme={null}
{
"id": "1",
"sku": "ABC123",
"name": "Product X",
"qty": "23"
}
```
Use the **Run Test** option in Alumio after each change. This lets you validate the expression against a representative entity before enabling the configuration.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop an **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# Common PCRE Expression
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/example_pcre_expression
Reference walkthrough of the Common PCRE Expression example configuration: reusable regex-based cleanup, extraction, and validation patterns for transformer chains.
## Overview
This page documents an importable Data Integrator example configuration (`register.configuration.json`) named `[Example] - Common PCRE Expression` (identifier `example-common-pcre-expression`). It is not built to solve one specific integration; it is a reference snippet consultants can copy into a real flow and adapt.
The configuration is a plain `list-transformer` object, so it can be imported directly into an environment and inspected transformer-by-transformer in the flow builder.
The chain starts with a `data` transformer containing a single `value-setter`. Each configuration entry pairs a sample input value with a `string-regex-replace` mapper, so the example doubles as a live preview of the pattern.
Alumio's regex mappers use **PCRE** syntax, not JavaScript regex. Patterns are wrapped in `/ /` delimiters and, unlike JavaScript, a match replaces **all** occurrences by default, no trailing `g` flag needed. Inline modifiers such as `(?i)` (case-insensitive) can be embedded directly in the pattern, as used in the country filter below.
## String cleanup and extraction patterns
| Use Case | Sample input | Pattern (PCRE) | Replacement | Result |
| - | - | - | - | - |
| Replace multiple spaces | `Product Name` | `/\s+/` | `" "` | `Product Name` |
| Mask an email address | `john.doe@example.com` | `/^(.{2})[^@]*(@.*)$/` | `$1***$2` | `jo***@example.com` |
| Remove HTML tags | `Product Name
` | `/<[^>]+>/` | `" "` | `" Product Name "` |
| Extract numeric value | `Price: EUR 129.95` | `/.*?(\d+(?:\.\d+)?).*/` | `$1` | `129.95` |
| Extract order number | `ORD-2026-000123` | `/^ORD-\d{4}-(\d+)$/` | `$1` | `000123` |
| Remove non-alphanumeric character | `Product!@# Name #1` | `/[^A-Za-z0-9\s-]+/` | `" "` | `Product Name 1` |
`remove_html_tags` and `remove_non_alphanumeric_characters` replace each matched run with a single space rather than collapsing whitespace afterward, so the result can contain doubled spaces (see the results above). In a real flow, chain the `replace_multiple_spaces` pattern afterward to normalize the output to single spaces.
## Filter use case: validation flags
| Use case | Pattern (PCRE) | Passes for |
| - | - | - |
| Allow selected countries | `/(?i)^(NL\|BE\|DE\|FR)$/` | `NL`, `BE`, `DE`, `FR` (case-insensitive) |
| Validate email address | `/^[A-Za-z0-9._%+-]+@[A-Za-z0-9.-]+\.[A-Za-z]{2,}$/` | A syntactically valid email address |
| Validate EAN-13 barcode | `/^\d{13}$/` | Exactly 13 digits |
| Validate UUID | `/^[0-9a-f]{8}-[0-9a-f]{4}-[1-5][0-9a-f]{3}-[89ab][0-9a-f]{3}-[0-9a-f]{12}$/` | An RFC 4122 v1-v5 UUID (lowercase) |
## Bundled test fixture
The configuration ships with a `transformer-test` fixture (`example-common-pcre-expression--sample-common-pcre-expression`) that runs the whole chain against one sample record:
```json theme={null}
{
"uuid": "550e8400-e29b-41d4-a716-446655440000",
"email": "john.doe@example.com",
"country_code": "NL",
"ean13_barcode": "8712345678901"
}
```
Against this sample record, all four validation flags evaluate to `true`. The fixture's `expected` field is left as an empty placeholder (`[[]]`) in the source example, so anyone copying this test should fill in the actual expected output for their adapted flow before relying on it as a regression test.
# Filesystem
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/filesystem
### Overview
The Filesystem package provides pre-configured examples for building integrations that read from and write to files stored on a local or network filesystem. These examples cover the core components of a complete integration flow, including Incoming configurations, Outgoing configurations, and Transformers.
Whether you need to import files, process their contents, export generated files, or automate file-based workflows, these templates offer a practical starting point that you can customize to fit your specific requirements.
### General Information
The Filesystem package includes examples for the following integration scenarios:
1. Reading data from a specific file
2. Listing and processing multiple files from a directory
3. Transforming file contents before further processing
4. Writing processed data to a file on the filesystem
Each example shows how the different Alumio components work together in a typical file-based integration:
* **Incoming Configuration** –– retrieves files or file contents from the filesystem
* **Transformer** –– processes, normalizes, or restructures the retrieved data
* **Outgoing Configuration** –– writes the transformed data to a target file or directory
These examples cover common filesystem integration use cases and serve as a solid starting point for building your own integrations.
### Package Contents
The package includes the following example configurations:
**1. Filesystem: File Subscriber Incoming**
Shows how to read data from a specific file using a Filesystem Subscriber. Useful when the file location is known and data needs to be imported directly from a single file.
**2. Filesystem: Listing Subscriber Incoming**
Shows how to retrieve multiple files from a directory using a Filesystem Listing Subscriber. Commonly used for batch processing, where all files matching specific criteria are imported automatically.
**3. Write File to a Filesystem Transformer**
Shows how to prepare and transform data before writing it to a file. Demonstrates converting incoming data into the structure or format required by the target file.
**4. Write File to a Filesystem Outgoing**
Shows how to write processed data to the filesystem. Can be used to export integration results, generate reports, or create files consumed by another system.
### Typical Use Cases
The Filesystem package supports a variety of file-based integration scenarios, including:
* Importing CSV, JSON, XML, or text files
* Processing files generated by ERP, PIM, or other business systems
* Exporting processed data for external applications
* Automating file exchange between systems
* Creating scheduled file import and export workflows
### Customization
These configurations are meant to be reused as templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* File and directory paths
* File formats
* Transformers used to process the data
* Scheduling and execution behavior
* Additional routing and mapping logic.
This lets you quickly adapt the examples to your own filesystem integration requirements while following Alumio's recommended integration patterns.
### Integration Flow Example
A typical Filesystem integration flow works as follows:
1. Incoming configuration retrieves file data from the source filesystem or directory.
2. Transformer processes and converts the data into the required format.
3. Outgoing configuration writes the processed data to a target file or directory.
4. Route connects all components and manages the data flow between them.
Using these templates, you can quickly create reliable filesystem integrations without building every configuration from scratch.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# GraphQL
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/graphql-2
### Overview
The GraphQL package provides pre-configured examples for building integrations with GraphQL APIs using Alumio. These examples show how to retrieve structured data from GraphQL endpoints, configure GraphQL queries, and process responses within an integration flow.
GraphQL allows applications to request specific data fields through queries from a single API endpoint. With Alumio, GraphQL Incoming Configurations can be used to connect with GraphQL services and retrieve data efficiently, including handling large datasets through pagination.
This package provides ready-to-use examples that serve as a starting point for creating GraphQL integrations and can be customized based on the GraphQL endpoint, query structure, authentication requirements, and pagination method supported by the API.
### General Information
The GraphQL package focuses on retrieving data from GraphQL APIs through Incoming Configurations. It shows how Alumio can send GraphQL queries, process API responses, and automatically retrieve additional pages of data when the response contains more records.
The package includes two sample GraphQL Incoming Configurations with different pagination methods:
**GraphQL Incoming Configuration with Next Link Pagination**
Shows how to retrieve paginated data by following the next page reference provided in the GraphQL response. Useful for GraphQL APIs that return pagination information, such as a cursor or URL reference, to identify the next set of records.
**GraphQL Incoming Configuration with Increasing GraphQL Variable Pagination**
Shows how to retrieve paginated data by increasing a GraphQL query variable for each request. Useful for APIs that use variables such as page number, offset, or cursor values to control pagination.
These examples show how Alumio can handle different GraphQL pagination approaches and provide a foundation for integrating with various GraphQL-based systems.
### Package Contents
The following GraphQL examples are included in the package:
**1. GraphQL Incoming Configuration: Next Link Pagination**
Shows how to configure an Incoming Configuration that retrieves data from a GraphQL API by following the next page reference returned in the API response. The configuration automatically continues requesting additional pages until all available data has been retrieved.
Use cases:
* Importing large datasets from GraphQL APIs
* Synchronizing data from systems that provide cursor-based pagination
* Processing API responses with dynamic next-page references
**2. GraphQL Incoming Configuration: Increasing GraphQL Variable Pagination**
Shows how to configure an Incoming Configuration that retrieves data from a GraphQL API by increasing a GraphQL variable value for every request. The pagination value is automatically updated during the execution process to retrieve the next set of records until all data has been collected.
Use cases:
* Importing data from GraphQL APIs using page numbers
* Retrieving data using offset-based pagination
* Processing APIs that require pagination variables in GraphQL queries
### Typical Use Cases
The GraphQL package can be used for various integration scenarios, including:
* Connecting Alumio with GraphQL-based applications
* Importing product, customer, or business data from external platforms
* Synchronizing data between GraphQL APIs and other systems
* Handling large datasets through automated pagination
* Building reusable GraphQL API integrations
### Customization
These configurations are designed as reusable templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* GraphQL endpoint URL
* Authentication settings
* GraphQL queries
* Requested data fields
* Pagination configuration
* Response transformation logic
This allows you to adapt the examples to different GraphQL providers and integration requirements while following Alumio's recommended integration approach.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# HTTP API
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/http-api-1
### Overview
The HTTP API package provides pre-configured examples for building integrations with external systems through HTTP-based APIs. These examples show how Alumio can communicate with RESTful services by configuring HTTP connections, authentication methods, and data retrieval strategies.
The package includes examples for creating secure API connections, retrieving data from HTTP endpoints, and handling large datasets using pagination. These templates provide a starting point for building API integrations and can be customized based on your API requirements.
### General Information
The HTTP API package shows how different Alumio components work together when integrating with external HTTP services:
1. **HTTP API Connection**: defines reusable connection settings for communicating with HTTP endpoints, including base URLs, headers, and authentication settings
2. **Incoming Configuration**: retrieves data from external APIs and supports pagination to process large datasets efficiently
3. **Authentication Configuration**: provides examples of securing API requests using different authentication methods
4. **Transformer**: processes and prepares API responses before sending data to another system
These examples help simplify the process of connecting Alumio with external applications, allowing you to securely retrieve and process data from various API providers.
### Package Contents
The package includes the following example configurations:
**1. HTTP Authentication Examples**
Shows how to configure authentication when connecting to secured HTTP APIs. These examples cover different authentication methods commonly used by external services.
Included authentication examples:
* **Basic Authentication**
Shows how to authenticate HTTP requests using a username and password. Commonly used for APIs that require basic credential-based authentication.
* **Bearer Authentication**
Shows how to authenticate requests using a bearer token. Commonly used for APIs that provide access tokens for API authorization.
* **OAuth 2 Authentication**
Shows how to authenticate HTTP requests using the OAuth 2 framework. Commonly used when integrating with APIs that require token-based authorization flows.
**2. HTTP Incoming Configuration: Follow Next Link Pagination**
Shows how to retrieve paginated data from HTTP APIs by following the next page URL provided in the API response. Commonly used by APIs that return a navigation link or cursor for retrieving the next set of results.
Example flow:
1. Send an initial request to the API endpoint.
2. Receive the response containing data and a next page link.
3. Follow the provided link to retrieve the next page.
4. Continue until all pages are processed.
**3. HTTP Incoming Configuration: Increase Query and Body Parameters Pagination**
Shows how to retrieve paginated data by increasing request parameters for each API call. Commonly used by APIs that use parameters such as:
* Page number
* Offset
* Limit
* Cursor values
Example flow:
1. Send the initial API request with pagination parameters.
2. Increase the configured query or body parameter value.
3. Send the next request using the updated parameter.
4. Continue until all available data has been retrieved.
### Typical Use Cases
The HTTP API package can be used for various integration scenarios, including:
* Connecting Alumio with REST APIs
* Synchronizing data between external applications
* Importing large datasets using API pagination
* Integrating with third-party services requiring authentication
* Automating data exchange between business systems
### Customization
These configurations are designed as reusable templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* API base URL and endpoints
* Authentication credentials or tokens
* Request headers and parameters
* Pagination settings
* Response processing logic
* Transformers and data mapping rules
This allows you to quickly adapt the examples to different API providers and integration requirements.
### Integration Flow Example
A typical HTTP API integration flow works as follows:
1. HTTP API Connection establishes communication with the external API.
2. Authentication securely authorizes requests.
3. Incoming Configuration retrieves data from the API endpoint.
4. Pagination automatically retrieves additional pages when required.
5. Transformer processes and prepares the retrieved data.
6. Route manages the data flow between configurations.
Using these templates, you can quickly create reliable HTTP API integrations while following Alumio's recommended integration patterns.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# Proxies
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/proxies
### Overview
The Proxies package provides pre-configured examples for building integrations that route, control, and manage HTTP traffic through a proxy layer in Alumio. These examples show how Alumio can inspect incoming requests, apply matching rules, and enforce limits before forwarding traffic to a target system.
Proxies act as an intermediary layer between external systems and Alumio, allowing you to control how requests are received, validated, and processed. This package includes examples for header-based request matching and method-based request limiting. These templates provide a starting point for building proxy configurations and can be customized based on your routing, security, and traffic control requirements.
### General Information
The Proxies package shows how different Alumio components work together when managing proxied HTTP traffic:
* **Proxy Configuration** –– defines how incoming requests are received and routed through Alumio.
* **Header Matcher** –– inspects incoming request headers and routes or filters traffic based on defined matching rules.
* **Method Limiter** –– restricts or controls which HTTP methods are allowed to pass through the proxy.
These examples help simplify the process of securing and controlling traffic between external systems and Alumio, allowing you to define rules for how requests should be handled before further processing.
### Package Contents
The package includes the following example configurations:
**1. HTTP Proxy Header Matcher**
Shows how to configure a proxy that matches incoming requests based on specific HTTP header values. This example can be used to route, allow, or reject requests depending on whether a defined header condition is met.
Use cases:
* Routing requests based on custom or standard headers.
* Validating that required headers are present before processing.
* Separating traffic from different clients or systems using header values.
* Applying conditional logic based on header content.
**2. HTTP Proxy Limit Method**
Shows how to configure a proxy that restricts incoming requests based on the HTTP method used, such as GET, POST, PUT, or DELETE. This example can be used to control which types of requests are permitted through the proxy.
Use cases:
* Restricting endpoints to specific HTTP methods.
* Preventing unsupported or unwanted request types.
* Enforcing method-based access control.
* Reducing exposure to unnecessary request handling.
### Typical Use Cases
The Proxies package can be used for various integration scenarios, including:
* Controlling and validating inbound HTTP traffic.
* Routing requests based on header conditions.
* Restricting access by allowed HTTP methods.
* Securing endpoints against unsupported request types.
* Building a controlled entry point for external systems calling into Alumio.
### Customization
These configurations are designed as reusable templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* Header names and matching conditions.
* Allowed or blocked HTTP methods.
* Routing and forwarding rules.
* Response handling for non-matching requests.
* Additional validation and security logic.
This allows you to adapt the examples to your own proxy and traffic control requirements while following Alumio's recommended integration approach.
### Integration Flow Example
A typical Proxies integration flow works as follows:
1. Proxy configuration receives the incoming HTTP request.
2. Header Matcher or Method Limiter validates the request against defined rules.
3. Matching requests are forwarded to the target Incoming Configuration or system.
4. Non-matching requests are rejected or handled according to the configured response.
Using these templates, you can quickly create controlled, secure proxy layers in Alumio while following a reusable and configurable integration approach.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# Render a Template
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/render-a-template
> Practical examples for rendering output with the Render a Template Transformer, using variable interpolation, loops, conditionals, and built-in filters.
### Overview
The Render a Template Transformer renders Twig templates using supplied data to produce formatted output strings, such as order confirmations, emails, CSV rows, or HTML/XML blocks. For safety, only the `if` and `for` tags are supported, along with a fixed set of filters: `abs`, `batch`, `capitalize`, `default`, `escape` (`e`), `first`, `format`, `join`, `keys`, `last`, `length`, `lower`, `nl2br`, `number_format`, `replace`, `reverse`, `round`, `striptags`, `title`, `trim`, `upper`, and `url_encode`.
### Render a confirmation message
```twig theme={null}
Dear {{ customer.firstName }} {{ customer.lastName }}, your order #{{ order.id }} totaling {{ order.total|number_format(2) }} {{ order.currency }} has been received and is being processed.
```
Sample data:
```json theme={null}
{
"customer": { "firstName": "Maria", "lastName": "Janssen" },
"order": { "id": "ORD-10293", "total": 149.5, "currency": "EUR" }
}
```
Output:
```text theme={null}
Dear Maria Janssen, your order #ORD-10293 totaling 149.50 EUR has been received and is being processed.
```
### Loop over items to build a CSV block
```twig theme={null}
{% for item in order.items %}{{ item.sku }},{{ item.name }},{{ item.quantity }},{{ item.price|number_format(2) }}
{% endfor %}
```
Sample data:
```json theme={null}
{
"order": {
"items": [
{ "sku": "SKU-001", "name": "Wireless Mouse", "quantity": 2, "price": 19.99 },
{ "sku": "SKU-002", "name": "USB-C Cable", "quantity": 5, "price": 8.5 }
]
}
}
```
Output:
```text theme={null}
SKU-001,Wireless Mouse,2,19.99
SKU-002,USB-C Cable,5,8.50
```
### Use a conditional fallback
```twig theme={null}
{% if customer.address.street is defined %}
{{ customer.address.street }} {{ customer.address.houseNumber }}, {{ customer.address.postalCode }} {{ customer.address.city }}
{% else %}
No address on file
{% endif %}
```
Only the `if` and `for` tags are available in the Render a Template Transformer. Constructs like `{% set %}` are not supported.
### Text formatting filters
| Filter | Example | Result |
| - | - | - |
| `trim` + `title` | `{{ product.name\|trim\|title }}` | `Wireless Keyboard` |
| `default` + `upper` | `{{ product.brand\|default('Unknown Brand', true)\|upper }}` | `UNKNOWN BRAND` |
| `lower` + `capitalize` | `{{ product.category\|lower\|capitalize }}` | `Electronics` |
### List filters
| Filter | Example | Result |
| - | - | - |
| `join` | `{{ order.items\|join(', ') }}` | `Mouse, Keyboard, Monitor` |
| `first` | `{{ order.items\|first }}` | `Mouse` |
| `last` | `{{ order.items\|last }}` | `Monitor` |
| `length` | `{{ order.items\|length }}` | `3` |
| `reverse` | `{{ order.items\|reverse\|join(', ') }}` | `Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse` |
| `batch` | `{% for group in order.items\|batch(2) %}...{% endfor %}` | groups of 2 |
| `keys` | `{{ product.attributes\|keys\|join(', ') }}` | `color, size, material` |
### Numeric filters
| Filter | Example | Result |
| - | - | - |
| `abs` | `{{ invoice.amount\|abs }}` | `149.5678` |
| `round` | `{{ invoice.amount\|abs\|round(2) }}` | `149.57` |
| `number_format` | `{{ invoice.amount\|abs\|number_format(2) }}` | `149.57` |
| `format` | `{{ '%s costs %.2f EUR'\|format(product.name, invoice.amount\|abs) }}` | `Wireless Keyboard costs 149.57 EUR` |
### Safety and escaping filters
| Filter | Example | Result |
| - | - | - |
| `striptags` + `nl2br` | `{{ review.comment\|striptags\|nl2br }}` | HTML tags removed, line breaks kept |
| `escape` (`e`) | `{{ review.comment\|escape }}` | HTML entities escaped |
| `replace` | `{{ review.comment\|replace({'great': 'excellent'}) }}` | word replaced |
| `url_encode` | `{{ review.authorEmail\|url_encode }}` | URL-safe string |
Use the **Run Test** option in Alumio after each change to validate the rendered output against a representative entity before enabling the configuration.
# SOAP
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/soap-3
### Overview
The Generic SOAP package provides pre-configured examples for building integrations with SOAP-based web services using Alumio. These examples show how Alumio can communicate with SOAP endpoints to retrieve data, send SOAP requests, and transform SOAP messages between systems.
The package includes example configurations for Incoming Configuration, Outgoing Configuration, and Transformers, providing a complete foundation for building SOAP integrations. These templates can be used as a starting point and customized based on the SOAP service endpoint, request structure, response format, and integration requirements.
### General Information
The Generic SOAP package shows how Alumio components work together to integrate with SOAP web services.
SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) is a protocol used for exchanging structured data between applications through XML-based messages. Alumio can connect with SOAP services to retrieve information, send data, and process SOAP messages using configurable components.
The package includes the following components:
* **Generic SOAP Incoming Configuration**: retrieves data from a SOAP web service by sending SOAP requests and processing the returned XML response
* **Generic SOAP Outgoing Configuration**: sends data to a SOAP web service by generating and submitting SOAP requests based on the required service structure
* **Generic SOAP Transformer**: transforms and prepares SOAP request or response data into the required format before it is processed or sent to another system
These examples show a complete SOAP integration flow, where data can be retrieved from a SOAP service, transformed according to business requirements, and sent to another system through a SOAP endpoint.
### Package Contents
The following Generic SOAP examples are included in the package:
**1. Generic SOAP Incoming Configuration**
Shows how to retrieve data from a SOAP web service using an Incoming Configuration. The configuration handles sending SOAP requests and processing the returned response, allowing Alumio to import data from SOAP-based systems.
Use cases:
* Retrieving records from SOAP APIs
* Synchronizing data from legacy enterprise systems
* Importing XML-based responses into Alumio for further processing
**2. Generic SOAP Outgoing Configuration**
Shows how to send data to a SOAP web service using an Outgoing Configuration. The configuration prepares and sends SOAP requests to external systems, allowing processed data from Alumio to be published to SOAP-based applications.
Use cases:
* Sending updated records to SOAP services
* Integrating with enterprise applications that require SOAP requests
* Exporting transformed data to external systems
**3. Generic SOAP Transformer**
Shows how to transform SOAP data before it is processed by an Incoming or Outgoing Configuration. The transformer can be used to modify XML-based SOAP messages, map fields, and prepare data structures required by the target system.
Use cases:
* Mapping SOAP response fields
* Preparing SOAP request payloads
* Converting data formats between systems
### Typical Use Cases
The Generic SOAP package can be used for various integration scenarios, including:
* Connecting Alumio with legacy SOAP-based applications
* Synchronizing data between enterprise systems
* Importing data from SOAP web services
* Sending transactions or updates to SOAP endpoints
* Transforming XML-based SOAP messages between systems
### Customization
These configurations are designed as reusable templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* SOAP endpoint URL
* Authentication settings
* SOAP request structure
* XML payload format
* Response mapping
* Transformer logic
* Route and scheduling settings
This allows you to adapt the examples to different SOAP providers and business requirements.
### Integration Flow Example
A typical Generic SOAP integration flow works as follows:
1. Generic SOAP Incoming Configuration retrieves data from the SOAP service.
2. Generic SOAP Transformer processes and transforms the retrieved data.
3. Generic SOAP Outgoing Configuration sends the processed data to another SOAP service or target system.
4. Route manages the data flow between these configurations.
Using these templates, you can quickly create SOAP-based integrations in Alumio while following a reusable and configurable integration approach.This allows you to adapt the examples to different SOAP providers and business requirements.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# Transformers
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/transformers
### Overview
The Transformers package provides pre-configured examples for transforming, processing, and preparing data within Alumio integration flows. These examples show how transformers can be used to modify data structures, apply business logic, validate information, and prepare data before it is sent to another system.
Transformers are an essential part of an integration flow because they allow data to be adjusted between different systems with different data structures or requirements. They can be used to split large datasets, transform values, filter records, generate files, organize data, and perform advanced data manipulation.
This package includes examples covering common transformation scenarios, from basic data mapping to advanced processing operations. These templates can be used as a starting point and customized based on specific integration requirements.
### General Information
In Alumio, Transformers are used to process and modify data during an integration flow. They can be added to Incoming Configurations, Routes, or Outgoing Configurations to change the structure, format, or content of data before it continues to the next processing step.
The Transformers package shows different transformation capabilities, including:
1. Splitting items from API responses into individual records
2. Writing processed data into files
3. Combining records into batches
4. Filtering data based on conditions and validation rules
5. Performing operations on arrays and values
6. Rendering dynamic templates
7. Updating stored values
8. Grouping related records
9. Moving data between different accessors
10. Mapping and modifying data structures
These examples show how Alumio transformers can be combined to create flexible and reusable data processing workflows.
### Package Contents
The following Transformer examples are included in the package:
#### 1. Split Items
**Split Items: Get Items from HTTP Request with Pagination**
Shows how to split multiple items retrieved from an HTTP request into individual records that can be processed separately within an integration flow.
The package includes three transformer examples using different HTTP pagination approaches:
1. **Pagination Follow Next Links in HTTP Header**: shows how to retrieve and split items from an HTTP response where the next page reference is provided through HTTP response headers
2. **Pagination Increase Query Parameter**: shows how to retrieve and split items by increasing a query parameter value for each request, such as page number or offset
3. **Pagination Follow Next Link**: shows how to retrieve and split items by following the next page reference provided in the HTTP response body
Use cases:
* Processing paginated API responses
* Splitting API response items into individual records
* Creating separate tasks for each item
* Supporting different API pagination strategies
#### 2. Write Items
**Write Items to a File**
Shows how to write processed items into files stored on a local filesystem using the Write Items to a File transformer.
The package includes two transformer examples with different file format types:
1. **CSV Format**: shows how to convert processed data into a CSV file structure and store it on the local filesystem. Commonly used for exporting structured tabular data
2. **JSON Format**: shows how to convert processed data into a JSON file structure and store it on the local filesystem. Commonly used for exchanging structured data between applications
Use cases:
* Exporting processed integration data
* Generating CSV or JSON files
* Preparing files for external systems or further processing
#### 3. Batch Items
**Create Batches by Combining Items**
Shows how to combine multiple items into a single batch before continuing the integration process. Batching helps optimize data processing by reducing the number of operations when handling large datasets.
Use cases:
* Creating batch API requests
* Combining multiple records into one payload
* Improving processing efficiency for large datasets
#### 4. Filtering
**Filtering Transformer Examples**
Shows how to filter data using different filtering methods. Filtering allows you to control which records should continue through the integration flow based on specific conditions or validation rules.
The package includes multiple filtering examples:
1. **Filter Based on Transformer**: shows how to filter data based on the output or result of another transformer
2. **Filter by Storage Entities**: shows how to filter data by comparing values stored in Alumio storage entities
3. **Key Condition**: shows how to filter records based on the existence or value of a specific key
4. **Not Condition**: shows how to exclude records that match a specific condition
5. **Validate by JSON Schema**: shows how to validate and filter data by checking whether the payload matches a defined JSON schema structure
6. **Value Condition**: shows how to filter records based on specific field values
Use cases:
* Applying business rules
* Removing unnecessary records
* Validating incoming data
* Processing only matching records
#### 5. Operator
**Operator Transformer Examples**
Shows how to use the Operator Transformer to perform operations on data values and arrays.
The package includes examples using different operator types:
1. **Array Intersect**: shows how to compare two arrays and return only values that exist in both arrays
2. **Array Merge**: shows how to combine multiple arrays into a single array
3. **Array Diff**: shows how to compare arrays and return values that are different between them
Use cases:
* Comparing datasets
* Combining collections of data
* Identifying differences between records
* Preparing data structures
#### 6. Render Template
**Render a Template Transformer**
Shows how to generate dynamic content using templates based on incoming data. The transformer allows data to be combined with predefined templates to create formatted output structures.
Use cases:
* Creating dynamic payloads
* Generating formatted messages
* Preparing structured content for external systems
#### 7. Storage
**Update a Storage Entity Transformer**
Shows how to use the Storage Transformer to update values in Alumio storage entities during an integration flow. Storage entities allow reusable values to be maintained and accessed during processing.
Use cases:
* Updating stored values
* Maintaining integration state
* Saving temporary information
* Reusing data between processing steps
#### 8. Grouping
**Group Records Transformer**
Shows how to use the Grouping Transformer to organize multiple records into groups based on specific fields or conditions. The transformer helps structure related data before further processing or sending it to another system.
Use cases:
* Grouping records by attributes
* Creating grouped payload structures
* Preparing aggregated data
* Organizing related items
#### 9. Move Data Accessor
**Move Data Between Accessors Transformer**
Shows how to move data between different locations within an Alumio data structure.
The package includes multiple accessor movement examples:
1. **Pattern to Children Accessor**: moves data from a matching pattern into a children accessor structure
2. **Key to Key Accessor**: moves data from one key accessor to another key accessor
3. **Key to Structure Accessor**: moves data from a key accessor into a structured data accessor
4. **Pattern to Key Accessor**: moves data from a matching pattern into a specific key accessor
Use cases:
* Restructuring payload data
* Moving values between fields
* Preparing data for mapping
* Adjusting payload structures
#### 10. Mappers
**Mapper Transformer Examples**
Shows how to use the Mapper Transformer to modify and transform data values using different mapper operations.
The package includes the following mapper examples:
1. **List: Split into Chunks**: shows how to split a list into smaller groups containing a defined number of items
2. **List: Fill List with Value**: shows how to add or fill list elements with a specified value
3. **List: Flip Keys and Values**: shows how to swap keys and values within a list structure
4. **String: PCRE Replace**: shows how to replace parts of a string using PCRE (Perl Compatible Regular Expression) patterns
Use cases:
* Restructuring list data
* Formatting values
* Replacing text values
* Preparing data for outgoing requests
### Typical Use Cases
The Transformers package can be used for various integration scenarios, including:
* Transforming API responses before sending them to another system
* Processing large datasets from APIs
* Creating export files
* Preparing batch requests
* Applying validation and filtering rules
* Mapping data between different applications
* Generating custom payload structures
* Managing temporary integration data
* Reorganizing complex data structures
### Customization
These transformer examples are designed as reusable templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* Transformation logic
* Input and output data structures
* Filtering conditions
* Mapping configurations
* File formats
* Batch processing rules
* Template content
* Storage values
This allows you to adapt the examples to different business requirements while following Alumio's recommended transformation patterns.
### Integration Flow Example
A typical transformation flow works as follows:
1. Incoming Configuration retrieves data from a source system.
2. Transformer processes and modifies the data based on the required logic.
3. Outgoing Configuration sends the transformed data to the target system.
4. Route manages the complete integration process.
By using these transformer templates, you can quickly create reusable data processing workflows and adapt them to different integration scenarios.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# Webhook
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/example-configurations/webhook
### Overview
The Webhooks package provides pre-configured examples for building and securing webhook integrations in Alumio. These examples show how Alumio can receive incoming webhook requests from external systems and validate them using different request validation methods before processing the data further.
Webhooks allow external systems to send data to Alumio in real time whenever an event occurs, rather than Alumio having to poll for updates. Because webhook endpoints are exposed to receive external requests, securing them with proper validation is essential to ensure that only legitimate requests are processed. This package includes examples for securing webhook requests using signature validation, header existence checks, and header pattern matching. These templates provide a starting point for building secure webhook integrations and can be customized based on your security and validation requirements.
### General Information
The Webhooks package shows how different Alumio components work together to securely receive and validate incoming webhook requests:
* **Incoming Configuration** –– receives webhook requests sent by external systems.
* **Request Validator** –– checks incoming requests against defined security rules before allowing them to be processed.
* **Transformer** –– processes and prepares the validated webhook payload for further use in the integration flow.
These examples help simplify the process of securing webhook endpoints, allowing you to confirm that incoming requests are authentic and trusted before any data is processed.
### Package Contents
The package includes the following example configurations:
**1. Secure with Request Validators: Signature**
Shows how to validate incoming webhook requests using a signature check. The sending system generates a signature based on the request payload and a shared secret, which Alumio then verifies to confirm the request has not been altered and originates from a trusted source.
Use cases:
* Verifying that a webhook request has not been tampered with.
* Confirming the request originates from a trusted sender.
* Meeting security requirements for platforms that sign their webhook payloads.
**2. Secure with Request Validators: Header Exists**
Shows how to validate incoming webhook requests by checking whether a specific required header is present in the request. This example can be used to reject requests that are missing an expected header before further processing occurs.
Use cases:
* Ensuring required identification or authentication headers are present.
* Rejecting incomplete or malformed requests early.
* Enforcing a minimum request structure before processing.
**3. Secure with Request Validators: Header Pattern**
Shows how to validate incoming webhook requests by checking whether a specific header value matches a defined pattern. This example can be used to confirm that a header contains an expected format, value, or token before the request is accepted.
Use cases:
* Validating header values against expected formats or tokens.
* Restricting requests to specific clients or systems based on header content.
* Adding an extra layer of validation alongside other security checks.
### Typical Use Cases
The Webhooks package can be used for various integration scenarios, including:
* Receiving real-time event notifications from external systems.
* Securing webhook endpoints against unauthorized or malicious requests.
* Validating request authenticity using signatures.
* Enforcing required headers before processing incoming data.
* Building trusted, event-driven integrations with third-party platforms.
### Customization
These configurations are designed as reusable templates. After importing the package, you can customize:
* Signature validation settings and shared secrets.
* Required header names and expected values.
* Header pattern matching rules.
* Response handling for requests that fail validation.
* Transformers used to process validated webhook data.
This allows you to adapt the examples to your own webhook security requirements while following Alumio's recommended integration approach.
### Integration Flow Example
A typical Webhooks integration flow works as follows:
1. Incoming configuration receives the webhook request from the external system.
2. Request Validator checks the request using the configured validation method (signature, header exists, or header pattern).
3. Valid requests continue to the Transformer for processing; invalid requests are rejected.
4. Route manages the data flow to the target system or storage.
Using these templates, you can quickly create secure, event-driven webhook integrations in Alumio while following a reusable and configurable integration approach.
## Template Import
Follow these steps to import a template to Alumio:
1. Log in to your Alumio dashboard.
2. Navigate to **More > System > Import/Export**
3. Click to browse or drag and drop **ndjson** file to upload it.
4. Click **Import Configurations** to start the import.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/index
Alumio provides ready-to-use integration templates. Each template includes pre-configured routes, transformers, and schedulers to synchronize product data, categories, and attributes between systems.
Select a template below to get started:
* [Akeneo to Spryker](/guides/akeneo-to-spryker)
* [Akeneo to Shopify](/guides/akeneo-to-shopify)
* [Akeneo to Magento 2](/guides/akeneo-to-magento-2)
* [Akeneo to Bigcommerce](/guides/akeneo-to-bigcommerce)
* [Akeneo to CommerceTools](/guides/akeneo-to-commercetools)
* [Akeneo to Centra](/guides/akeneo-to-centra)
* [Akeneo to Shopware](/guides/akeneo-to-shopware)
# Base64 Media Retriever
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/legacy-magento-2-connector-replacement/magento-2-connector-base64-media-retriever
## Overview
The **Base64 Media Retriever** is a configuration-based transformer that retrieves media files (such as product images) from a Magento 2 source and converts them into Base64-encoded strings for inclusion in the data payload. It replaces the deprecated prototype-based `base64-media-retriever` previously used in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
This component has been migrated from a prototype-based implementation to a configuration-based setup as part of the Legacy Magento 2 Connector replacement project.
## Prototype vs Configuration-based
This is an important behavioral difference to understand before setting up this component.
| | Prototype-based | Configuration-based |
| - | - | - |
| **Reusability** | Can be reused across different flows by changing a few fields | Not reusable across different purposes or payloads |
| **Flexibility** | One prototype can serve multiple use cases | (Not always) Each use case requires its own dedicated configuration |
| **How to reuse** | Modify fields directly | Duplicate the configuration and adjust as needed |
If you need to transform a different payload structure or serve a different use case, you must **duplicate** this transformer and adjust the configuration accordingly. Do not modify an existing configuration as another Route already uses it.
## Type
**Transformer**
## Purpose
This transformer fetches media files referenced in the source payload (typically product images) and encodes them as Base64 strings. This is useful when the target system expects media to be embedded directly in the payload rather than referenced by URL.
## Configuration
| Parameter | Description | Required |
| - | - | - |
| `media_base_url` | The base URL of the Magento 2 media storage | Yes |
| `output_field` | The field name in the output payload where the Base64 string will be stored | Yes |
| `authentication` | Optional : Authentication method to access the media endpoint | No |
| `allowed_mime_types` | Optional : List of allowed media types to retrieve (e.g. `image/jpeg`, `image/png`) | No |
## Input / Output
**Input:** Payload containing media file URLs or paths (JSON)
**Output:** Same payload with media files replaced or enriched with Base64-encoded strings
### Example Input
```json theme={null}
{
"sku": "PROD-001",
"url": "https://www.sample.org/leaf-blue.png"
}
```
### Example Output
```json theme={null}
{
"sku": "PROD-001",
"url": "https://www.sample.org/leaf-blue.png",
"base64_output": "iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAA..."
}
```
## Usage
1. Navigate to **Transformers** in your Alumio environment.
2. Search for or create a new **Base64 Media Retriever** transformer.
3. Configure the `media_url`, and `output_field` parameters.
4. Add this transformer to the relevant route in the transformation step, typically after the Subscriber and before the target Publisher.
## Deprecated VS New
An example of the deprecated configuration:
\
An example of the new configuration:
## Notes
* Replaces the prototype: `base64-media-retriever`
* Unlike the prototype-based implementation, this configuration-based transformer is **not reusable across different purposes or payloads**. If you need to transform a different payload structure or serve a different use case, you must duplicate this transformer and adjust the configuration accordingly.
* Large media files will significantly increase payload size. Consider whether Base64 encoding is strictly required by the target system.
* If the target system supports URL-based media references, it is recommended to pass the media URL directly instead of encoding it.
* Ensure the `media_base_url` is accessible from the Alumio environment at runtime.
# Magento 2 Customer Attribute Subscriber
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/legacy-magento-2-connector-replacement/magento-2-connector-magento-2-customer-attributes-subscriber
Configuration-based replacement for the prototype customer-attribute-subscriber in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
## Overview
The **Customer Attribute Subscriber** is a configuration-based subscriber that listens for customer attribute data from a Magento 2 source system. It replaces the deprecated prototype-based `magento-2-customer-attribute-subscriber` previously used in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
This component has been migrated from a prototype-based implementation to a configuration-based setup as part of the Legacy Magento 2 Connector replacement project.
## Prototype vs Configuration-based
This is an important behavioral difference to understand before setting up this component.
| | Prototype-based | Configuration-based |
| - | - | - |
| **Reusability** | Can be reused across different flows by changing a few fields | Not reusable across different purposes or payloads |
| **Flexibility** | One prototype can serve multiple use cases | (Not always) Each use case requires its own dedicated configuration |
| **How to reuse** | Modify fields directly | Duplicate the configuration and adjust as needed |
If you need to handle a different payload structure or use case, you must **duplicate** this Subscriber and adjust the configuration accordingly. Do not modify an existing configuration as another Route already uses it.
## Type
**Subscriber**
## Purpose
This Subscriber listens to incoming customer attribute data from Magento 2 and triggers the appropriate Route for further processing. It is used in flows where customer data or custom attributes need to be synced or mapped to a target system.
## Configuration
| Parameter | Description | Required |
| - | - | - |
| `store_code` | The Magento 2 Store Code | Yes |
| `http-client` | The HTTP Client Authentication method used to connect to Magento 2 | Yes |
| `entity-schema` | The specific schema for the entity | No |
## Usage
1. Navigate to **Subscribers** in your Alumio environment.
2. Search for **Magento 2 Customer Attribute Subscriber**.
3. Configure the required parameters as described above.
4. Attach this Subscriber to the relevant route as the Incoming configuration.
## Deprecated VS New
An example of the deprecated configuration:
An example of the new configuration:
## Related Components
* [Magento 2 Customer Attributes Subscriber (Transformer - Mapping) (Transformer)](magento-2-customer-attribute-subscriber-v2-transformer) - to restructure the result.
## Notes
* Replaces the prototype: `magento-2-customer-attribute-subscriber`
* Unlike the prototype-based implementation, this configuration-based subscriber is **not reusable across different purposes or payloads**. If you need to handle a different payload structure or use case, you must duplicate this Subscriber and adjust the configuration accordingly.
* Commonly used in customer attribute data sync flows between Magento 2 and ERP or CRM systems.
# Magento 2 Order Restructure
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/legacy-magento-2-connector-replacement/magento-2-connector-magento-2-order-restructure-transformer
Configuration-based replacement for the prototype magento2-order-restructure in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
## Overview
The **Magento 2 Order Restructure** is a configuration-based transformer that restructures the raw order payload received from Magento 2 into a format suitable for further processing or delivery to a target system. It replaces the prototype-based `magento2-order-restructure` previously used in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
This component has been migrated from a prototype-based implementation to a configuration-based setup as part of the Legacy Magento 2 Connector replacement project.
## Prototype vs Configuration-based
This is an important behavioral difference to understand before setting up this component.
| | Prototype-based | Configuration-based |
| - | - | - |
| **Reusability** | Can be reused across different flows by changing a few fields | Not reusable across different purposes or payloads |
| **Flexibility** | One prototype can serve multiple use cases | (Not always) Each use case requires its own dedicated configuration |
| **How to reuse** | Modify fields directly | Duplicate the configuration and adjust as needed |
If you need to transform a different payload structure or serve a different use case, you must **duplicate** this transformer and adjust the configuration accordingly. Do not modify an existing configuration as another Route already uses it.
## Type
**Transformer**
## Purpose
This transformer takes the raw order data from Magento 2 and restructures it into a normalized format. This typically includes flattening nested structures, renaming fields, mapping values, and preparing the payload for the target system.
## Configuration
| Parameter | Description | Required |
| - | - | - |
| `state` | Set the field for state (state/status/both) | Yes |
| `mutation-storage` | The storage to set the mutation date | Yes |
| | | |
## Usage
1. Navigate to **Transformers** in your Alumio environment.
2. Search for or create a new **Magento 2 Order Restructure** transformer.
3. Configure the field mappings and optional parameters as described above.
4. Add this transformer to the relevant route in the transformation step.
## Deprecated VS New
An example of the deprecated configuration:
An example of the new configuration:
## Notes
* Replaces the prototype: `magento2-order-restructure`
* Unlike the prototype-based implementation, this configuration-based transformer is **not reusable across different purposes or payloads**. If you need to transform a different payload structure or serve a different use case, you must duplicate this transformer and adjust the configuration accordingly.
* Field mapping should be reviewed carefully to ensure it matches the target system's expected payload structure.
# Magento 2 Order Subscriber
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/legacy-magento-2-connector-replacement/magento-2-connector-magento-2-order-subscriber
Configuration-based replacement for the prototype magento2-order-subscriber in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
## Overview
The **Magento 2 Order Subscriber** is a configuration-based subscriber that listens for order-related events from a Magento 2 source system. It replaces the deprecated prototype-based `magento2-order-subscriber` previously used in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
This component has been migrated from a prototype-based implementation to a configuration-based setup as part of the Legacy Magento 2 Connector replacement project.
## Prototype vs Configuration-based
This is an important behavioral difference to understand before setting up this component.
| | Prototype-based | Configuration-based |
| - | - | - |
| **Reusability** | Can be reused across different flows by changing a few fields | Not reusable across different purposes or payloads |
| **Flexibility** | One prototype can serve multiple use cases | (Not always) Each use case requires its own dedicated configuration |
| **How to reuse** | Modify fields directly | Duplicate the configuration and adjust as needed |
If you need to handle a different payload structure or use case, you must **duplicate** this Subscriber and adjust the configuration accordingly. Do not modify an existing configuration as another Route already uses it.
## Type
**Subscriber**
## Purpose
This Subscriber listens to incoming order data from Magento 2 and triggers the appropriate Route for further processing. It acts as the entry point for order-related integration flows.
## Configuration
| Parameter | Description | Required |
| - | - | - |
| `store_code` | The Magento 2 Store Code | Yes |
| `http-client` | The HTTP Client Authentication method used to connect to Magento 2 | Yes |
| `mutation-storage` | The storage to set the mutation date | Yes |
| `entity-schema` | The specific schema for the entity | No |
| `limit` | The limit of the items | No |
| `start-date` | The start date | No |
## Usage
1. Navigate to **Subscribers** in your Alumio environment.
2. Search for or create a new **Magento 2 Order Subscriber**.
3. Configure the required parameters as described above.
4. Attach this Subscriber to the relevant route as the Incoming configuration.
## Deprecated VS New
An example of the deprecated configuration:
An example of the new configuration:
## Notes
* Replaces the prototype: `magento2-order-subscriber`
* Unlike the prototype-based implementation, this configuration-based subscriber is **not reusable across different purposes or payloads**. If you need to handle a different payload structure or use case, you must duplicate this Subscriber and adjust the configuration accordingly.
* Ensure the Magento 2 API credentials are correctly configured before activating this Subscriber.
* For large order volumes, tune the `limit` parameter to avoid timeouts.
# Magento 2 Product Attribute Subscriber
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/guides/legacy-magento-2-connector-replacement/magento-2-connector-magento-2-product-attributes-subscriber
Configuration-based replacement for the prototype product-attribute-subscriber in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
## Overview
The **Product Attribute Subscriber** is a configuration-based subscriber that listens for product attribute data from a Magento 2 source system. It replaces the deprecated prototype-based `magento-2-roduct-attribute-subscriber` previously used in the Legacy Magento 2 Connector.
This component has been migrated from a prototype-based implementation to a configuration-based setup as part of the Legacy Magento 2 Connector replacement project.
## Prototype vs Configuration-based
This is an important behavioral difference to understand before setting up this component.
| | Prototype-based | Configuration-based |
| - | - | - |
| **Reusability** | Can be reused across different flows by changing a few fields | Not reusable across different purposes or payloads |
| **Flexibility** | One prototype can serve multiple use cases | (Not always) Each use case requires its own dedicated configuration |
| **How to reuse** | Modify fields directly | Duplicate the configuration and adjust as needed |
If you need to handle a different payload structure or use case, you must **duplicate** this Subscriber and adjust the configuration accordingly. Do not modify an existing configuration as another Route already uses it.
## Type
**Subscriber**
## Purpose
This Subscriber listens to Incoming product attribute data from Magento 2 and triggers the appropriate Route for further processing. It is used in flows where product attribute information needs to be synced or transformed to a target system.
## Configuration
| Parameter | Description | Required |
| - | - | - |
| `store_code` | The Magento 2 Store Code | Yes |
| `http-client` | The HTTP Client Authentication method used to connect to Magento 2 | Yes |
| `entity-schema` | The specific schema for the entity | No |
## Usage
1. Navigate to **Subscribers** in your Alumio environment.
2. Search for **Magento 2 Product Attribute Subscriber**.
3. Configure the required parameters as described above.
4. Attach this Subscriber to the relevant route as the Incoming configuration.
## Deprecated VS New
An example of the deprecated one:
An example of the new configuration:
## Related Components
* ***Magento 2 Product Attributes Subscriber (Transformer - Mapping) (Transformer***[)](/transformers/base64-media-retriever) - to restructure the result.
## Notes
* Replaces the prototype: `magento-2-product-attribute-subscriber`
* Unlike the prototype-based implementation, this configuration-based Subscriber is **not reusable across different purposes or payloads**. If you need to handle a different payload structure or use case, you must duplicate this Subscriber and adjust the configuration accordingly.
* This Subscriber is typically used in product attribute sync flows.
# Connections
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/help-center/faq-connections
Use HTTP Authentication configurations to store credentials separately from the HTTP Client. Reference them across multiple connections without duplicating settings. For sensitive values like API keys, store them as encrypted Environment Variables and reference them using `${VARIABLE_NAME}` syntax.
REST APIs (HTTP), SOAP, databases (MSSQL, MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL), Filesystems (FTP, SFTP, S3), Email servers (SMTP, SendGrid), Webhooks, and HTTP Proxies.
# Getting Started
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/help-center/faq-getting-started
Alumio is an Integration Platform as a Service (iPaaS) used to connect systems, transform data, and automate integrations through configurable data flows, without writing custom code.
Go to [https://admin.alumio.com](https://admin.alumio.com), enter your environment code, and complete the login flow. MFA is required for all login methods.
Contact [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com) to reset your MFA.
The Dashboard is the first page you see. It shows the health of your environment, task statistics, and active issues. From the top navigation, you can access all platform functionality.
# Integrations
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/help-center/faq-integrations
Every integration follows the same pattern: a Scheduler triggers a Route, the Incoming configuration fetches data from the source and creates tasks, and the Outgoing configuration picks up those tasks and sends the data to the destination.
Open the task from the Tasks overview and check the Logs tab. It will show exactly what went wrong, for example a `500` error from the destination API or a misconfigured transformer.
A Failed task encountered an error during processing. A Skipped task was intentionally not sent because a filter on the Outgoing configuration matched –– it is considered done, not broken.
Check the Total throughput time on the Queue page to see how long the process actually takes, then increase the Scheduler interval so it is longer than the process duration.
# Performance
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/help-center/faq-performance
The most common fixes are: reading large files incrementally, using pagination with the progress tracker pattern, disabling real-time processing, or reducing the number of tasks exported per Scheduler run. If none of these help, contact your Customer Success Manager to request a memory limit upgrade.
Use Simple or Long. Full logging stores complete requests and responses and should only be used during testing –– it can cause significant load on the environment.
# Spaces
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/help-center/faq-spaces
Spaces allow partners with a Spaces license to manage multiple end customers within a single Alumio environment, with full isolation of configurations and users between Spaces.
# Storages
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/help-center/faq-storages
Storages persist data between integration runs. The most common use cases are delta filtering (only processing new or changed records), pagination tracking, caching, and cross-system ID mapping.
Enable pruning on the Storage to automatically delete entities older than a defined threshold. Left unmanaged, a full database will make your Alumio environment unavailable.
# Introduction
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/index
Alumio is an Integration Platform as a Service (iPaaS) used to connect systems, transform data, and automate integrations through configurable data flows.
### Accessing Alumio
Alumio can be accessed via:
* [https://admin.alumio.com](https://admin.alumio.com)
To log in, an **environment code** is required. After entering the environment code, the login flow continues for that specific environment.
### Login methods
Alumio supports multiple ways to authenticate. Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) is required for all login methods. If you lose access to your authenticator app, contact [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com) to reset your MFA.
### First-time access
If you have been added to an environment by an administrator and this is your first time using this login method, you must first click **Sign up** on the login page and register using the exact email address you were added with. This step is only required for email and password login –– other methods such as Google or Microsoft do not require it. MFA setup is required on first login.
| Method | Description |
| :- | :- |
| Google account | Log in with your Google account via the Continue with Google button. |
| Microsoft Social account | Log in with a personal Microsoft account. Business accounts are not supported via this method. |
| Azure AD, SAML, OpenID, Google Workspace | Enterprise SSO options available on Enterprise licenses. Contact your administrator to configure these. |
| Email and password | Create a dedicated Alumio account using your email address and a password. MFA setup is required on first login. |
| Passkey or biometric | Once your account is set up, register a passkey or biometric authenticator for faster future logins |
### User preferences
User preferences are personal settings that apply only to your account and do not affect other users in the environment. They are accessible via the profile icon in the top-right corner of the dashboard.
**Date and time format** –– Alumio lets you customise how dates and times are displayed across the interface. The default format is based on your browser locale.
| Date format | Example |
| :- | :- |
| DD-MM-YYYY | 28-04-2026 |
| MM-DD-YYYY | 04-28-2026 |
| YYYY-MM-DD | 2026-04-28 |
| Time format | Example |
| :- | :- |
| 24-hour | 14:30 |
| 12-hour | 2:30 PM |
**Cookie consent** –– when you first visit your Alumio environment, a cookie banner is displayed. You can accept or decline cookie collection (Google Analytics, Hotjar, and YouTube). Your current consent status is visible under User preferences and can be reset at any time.
**Reload dashboard** –– if you cannot see new features after a platform update, this is usually caused by a stale browser cache. The **Reload dashboard** option under User preferences clears the cache directly in Alumio, without affecting your browser settings.
### Watch the Getting Started Guide to know more about Alumio
**1. Getting to know the dashboard and flow of data**
**2**. **Configuring your first integration**
**3**. **Running your first integration & viewing its results**
**4**. **The entity transformers and its possibilities**
**5**. **Using Alumio as a caching system to supercharge your integration**
**6**. **Additional settings within Alumio**
# Version 3.100.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-100-0
Alumio version 3.100.0-RC1 introduces features and fixes that will ensure fewer clicks, clearer feedback, and fewer ways to break things accidentally. We've added Global Variables to Transformers, tightened up memory handling, fixed validation quirks, and improved the copy/pasting of Transformers, among several other UI improvements and performance fixes. Just another few steps in the many more to go in making integrations simple!
## Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.100.0-RC1:
### Add Global Variables for Transformers
You can now create and reuse variables within a set of Transformers with our new Global Variables feature. Access the functionality by simply adding the "Global variable setter" transformer.
***
### Loading indicator for Transformers
We've added a loading indicator that now displays when Transformers are loading, indicating that your data is being processed and there isn't any error.
***
### **Clearer OAuth2 terminology**
We've renamed the "Interactive" grant type for OAuth2 to "Authorization code flow" to improve clarity and understanding of terminology.
***
### Refined page tab design for consistency
We've restyled the tabs of pages to improve usability and consistency across Alumio. This includes an updated error display, refined hover effects, and improved handling of bottom line collapsing.
***
### Placeholder support in Error Transformer
We've enabled placeholders on the Exception message field of the Error Transformer to prevent confusion when working with the Transformer, and improving flexibility in defining error messages.
***
### Optimized JSON schema validation performance
Resolved an issue where high memory usage was caused by using many items from the "Validate by JSON schema" filter. Now the validation schema is stored only once.
***
### Correct parameter handling in HTTP Proxy Tester
We fixed a bug where the HTTP Proxy Tester wasn't correctly passing query parameters in HTTP requests, ensuring more accurate and complete parameter transmission during testing.
***
### Improved Copy/Paste action for Transformers
We solved an issue where the Paste action from the Copy/Paste function incorrectly moved the Transformer to the wrong location, causing test validation to fail. Now paste Transformers exactly where you intend, making testing smoother and improving workflow accuracy.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.100.0-RC1: will be installed in week 46 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.100.0: will be installed in week 48 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.101.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-101-0
While we've been occupied in making Alumio Overdrive into the success it turned out to be, where we previewed our biggest upcoming features, we've managed to introduce a few crucial usability improvements with Alumio version 3.101.0-RC1. Stay tuned for more upcoming product updates as we prepare to take how Alumio makes integrations simple to the next level!
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.101.0-RC1:**
### Clearer configuration screens
We've added inline documentation to Incoming and Outgoing configurations, and fields have been reorganized into tabs for better structure and readability. Now, it's easier to find the settings you need without scrolling through long forms.
### **Smarter handling of disabled routes in Scheduler**
Fixed a bug where disabling a configuration in the Scheduler caused subsequent jobs to fail. The Scheduler now correctly skips only the disabled route, keeping the rest of the batch running smoothly.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.101.0-RC1 will be installed in week 48 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.101.0 will be installed in week 50 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.102.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-102-0
Alumio version 3.102.0-RC1 is all about seeing what your integrations are actually doing, without extra clicks or guesswork. We've given our Route Overview an upgrade with important new additions, added an interactive task-usage graph, and made several key fixes that remove friction around engine assignments and GraphQL variable validation. Just another set of small, deliberate steps toward making integrations easier to understand and harder to break.
## **Here's what's new & improved with Alumio version 3.102.0-RC1:**
### **Enriched Route overview**
Our Route overview just got an upgrade to also display task statistics and error insights directly in the table. A new date-range selector lets you control which statistics are shown, and a dedicated grid view provides a clear, focused overview of all route-related metrics.
***
### Track your usage trends over time
We've added an **interactive task-usage graph** that lets you inspect monthly and yearly activity. Quickly spot spikes, dips, and patterns in how integrations run over time.
***
### Assign engines without retries
We resolved an issue in the Assign Data Engines menu where saving changes could lag, trigger multiple times, or fail to store the updated allocation altogether. Saving now behaves predictably, so your engine assignments stick the first time.
***
### Safer handling of invalid GraphQL variables
We've resolved an issue where saving invalid GraphQL variables could lead to data loss. We've added a clear error message to indicate that the JSON format is incorrect, ensuring bad input is blocked and your existing data stays intact.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.102.0-RC1: will be installed in week 50 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.102.0: will be installed in week 52 (production environments)
* **Important**: These dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.103.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-103-0
As 2025 comes to a close, Alumio version 3.103.0-RC1 delivers a useful new tool that allows you to send emails directly from integration flows. We're also including a set of practical improvements and fixes for several issues that would otherwise mislead monitoring, waste time during cleanup, or break integrations unexpectedly. Stay tuned for some of the bigger features we're working on for upcoming releases and the new year ahead—in our quest to make integrations simple.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.103.0-RC1:**
### Send emails directly from your integration flows
We're happy to introduce our new Email Transformer that allows users to send fully configurable emails directly from integration flows. This makes it easier to trigger automated notifications and reports without relying on external systems.
***
### **Delete large configurations without running out of memory**
We've improved the configuration usage check to handle large configurations efficiently. This prevents out-of-memory errors when deleting configurations with extensive data (such as Transformer tests).
***
### Dashboard error counts now match reality
We resolved an issue where parsing warnings were incorrectly counted as errors. This caused the dashboard error graph to show inflated numbers that didn't align with the actual error list.
***
### Deleting users no longer breaks live API integrations
We fixed an issue where deleting a user would immediately revoke their API keys. This could potentially break active integrations without warning. Now API keys are no longer invalidated when the user is removed.
***
**Fixed a Google Cloud Storage Incoming edge case**
Another issue we resolved involved the Incoming Configuration throwing an exception after successfully using **"Write all items to a storage"** for Google Cloud Storage. This caused the run to fail even though the write had completed.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.103.0-RC1: will be installed in week 52 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.103.0: will be installed in week 54 (production environments)
* **Important**: These dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.104.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-104-0
As we settle into the new year, Alumio version 3.104.0-RC1 starts things off with a set of practical improvements focused on control, security, and everyday usability. This release gives you more say over how running Route jobs behave, adds clearer options for securing MSSQL connections, and makes task filtering quicker and more accessible. Small but meaningful steps as we continue refining the platform in 2025—keeping integrations predictable, transparent, and easier to manage.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.104.0-RC1:**
### Stop running Route jobs—without cutting tasks short
We've added a new Stop action in the Queue page that now makes it possible to stop active Route jobs. In-progress tasks are allowed to complete, while no new tasks are started—giving you a safer way to halt processing without abruptly interrupting running integrations.
***
### More control over secure MSSQL connections
We've added two support options for the MSSQL connection: **Force encryption** and **Trust server certificate**. These options make it easier to configure secure database connectivity while avoiding SSL or certificate-related connection errors.
***
### Faster access to task filtering by Identifier
We've improved task filtering by moving the Identifier filter to the main filter section. This makes it more easily accessible alongside commonly used filters like Created at and Updated at, making it quicker to narrow down tasks when you need them.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.104.0-RC1: will be installed in week 02 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.104.0: will be installed in week 04 (production environments)
* **Important**: These dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.105.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-105-0
To quickly follow up on our first release of updates for the year, Alumio version 3.105.0-RC1 focuses on making workflows more resilient, validation more explicit, and the UI more responsive. This release adds better control over how failures are handled in Routes, improves input validation and mapper clarity, and smooths out a performance issue that could make the Queue feel slower than it actually was. Small changes, but ones that make day-to-day integration work noticeably calmer.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.105.0-RC1:**
### Resolve failed tasks without stopping the Route
We've introduced a new "Resolved" task status for workflows. Now instead of halting an entire Route when a task fails, you can simply mark it with a configurable status and let the workflow continue. This gives you more flexibility in how errors are handled and recovered from.
***
### Clear input validation for mappers and conditions
We now support input validation for mappers, conditions, and operators, providing clear error messages to ensure the correct values are used. This makes misconfigurations easier to spot early and reduces trial-and-error during setup.
***
### Clearer comparison mappers and documentation
We've renamed comparison mappers to Equals (Strict) and Equals (Loose) and updated the documentation popup to ensure a proper overview.
***
### Faster, more responsive Queue table
Resolved a performance issue in the Queue table where the table appeared to load for several seconds despite the API responding quickly, preventing page unresponsiveness. The page now renders promptly, enabling a more seamless UI experience.
\
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.105.0-RC1: will be installed in week 04 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.105.0: will be installed in week 06 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.106.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-106-0
Apart from solving a bunch of usability issues, Alumio version 3.106.0-RC1 makes our integration platform more search-friendly, by introducing a new platform-wide Search feature. We're also including a new Basic mode for the Scheduler to simplify your scheduling needs, and a looping capability in the HTTP Transformer for polling async endpoints. Alongside these features, we've resolved a number of UI and configuration edge cases that could previously lead to confusing behavior or inaccurate feedback.
## **Here's what's new with Alumio version 3.106.0-RC1:**
### Find configurations and tasks faster with our new Search
We're introducing a new Search bar (accessible via a search icon) that helps you quickly find configurations, tasks, and environment variables. Search results can be filtered by labels, creation and update dates, and the users who last edited configurations, greatly speeding up navigation and discovery. For now, entity data and logs aren't included in search, but this is something we may expand to include in the future.
***
### A simpler Scheduler experience with Basic mode
We now support a Basic mode for the Scheduler, which gives you the option to switch between a simplified scheduling interface and the existing scheduler widget based on your needs. The previous cron-based scheduler is still available under the "Custom" option.
***
### Poll endpoints until they're ready with HTTP Transformer loop behavior
We've added loop behavior in the HTTP Transformer, which enables repeated polling of an endpoint until a defined condition is met. This supports use cases such as waiting for asynchronous processes to complete before continuing a flow.
***
### Safer task actions with clearer UI feedback
We fixed an issue where **Retry, Skip, or Fail** actions could be triggered multiple times for tasks. These buttons are now disabled after confirmation, provide clearer visual feedback, and correctly format the affected task count.
***
### More accurate Filesystem usage reporting
We solved an issue where the Filesystem usage widget displayed an incorrect storage size, which could lead to misleading storage warning alerts.
***
### Correct Value Setter behavior when reordering entries
Resolved a problem in the Value Setter Transformer where moving configuration entries up or down could mix values or assign them to the wrong key.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.106.0-RC1: will be installed in week 06 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.106.0: will be installed in week 08 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.107.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-107-0
With the release of Alumio version 3.107.0-RC1, we've focused on stronger control over API usage, clearer system feedback, and more predictable runtime behavior. Several improvements reduce ambiguity in monitoring and logging, while others strengthen integration security and file handling. The result is better governance, improved reliability, and fewer edge-case surprises in production environments.
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.107.0-RC1:**
### Improved API token management and visibility
Our API token management now includes creator tracking, usage insights, direct delete actions, consistent row actions, and clearer copy confirmations. In other words, teams can see who created a token, understand how it is used, and remove unused credentials without friction. This improves governance and traceability.
***
### Clear indicator for unlimited tasks and improved email date formatting
The Statistics tab now shows a visual indicator when tasks are unlimited. Additionally, we've improved date formatting in email alerts to avoid ambiguity. This reduces misinterpretation of capacity limits and avoids confusion in time-sensitive alerts, particularly across regions using different date formats.
***
### HTTP Proxy support for request signature validation
Request signature validation is now available for the HTTP Proxy through a new request processor. It supports the same validators used for Webhook validation, enabling secure and reliable integrations.
***
### New scheduler log status for skipped or overlapping jobs
We've added a new scheduler log status to indicate when a scheduled job is skipped or failed while a similar job is already running. This makes concurrency safeguards visible, improving troubleshooting and operational clarity during parallel executions.
***
### More flexible HTTP logging controls
HTTP logging can now be enabled or disabled more granularly. A new "Enabled logging" dropdown is available in the HTTP transformer, subscriber, and publisher, in addition to existing plugin and checkbox options in HTTP clients and requests.
***
### Filename sanitization for FTP via HTTP Filesystem
When writing files to FTP via the HTTP Filesystem, it's now possible to sanitize filenames. This includes a configurable destination filename field with placeholder support.
***
### Transformer tester UI redesign
We've implemented the new design for the Transformer tester, ensuring it works smoothly across different screen sizes. This improves usability during development and testing, especially for teams working on smaller screens or in split-view environments.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.107.0-RC1: will be installed in week 08 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.107.0: will be installed in week 10 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.108.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-108-0
With the release of version 3.108-RC1, no new features have been introduced, but we've made important improvements to the underlying system to enhance overall stability and reliability. At the same time, we are actively working on delivering major new functionalities, which will be rolled out in the coming period.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.108.0-RC1: will be installed in week 10 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.108.0: will be installed in week 12 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.109.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-109-0
Alumio version 3.109.0-RC1 introduces a new option to our inactivity Alert that users can configure, along with several practical improvements across authentication, filtering, and validation. Overall, the updates in this release focus on giving teams more control over monitoring, improving support for secure integrations, and reducing confusion in everyday configuration workflows. A few targeted fixes also address validation and UI edge cases that could slow down troubleshooting or setup.
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.109.0-RC1:**
### Set disabled time windows for inactivity alerts
We've added a disabled date range option to the "Alert when no new tasks are created during a predefined timespan" alert. This enables users to configure specific days and time ranges in the Timing tab when the alert should not be triggered.
***
### Google service account support for OAuth 2.0 authentication
We now support Google OAuth2.0 Service Account authentication, enabling secure server-to-server integrations with Google APIs without requiring user interaction.
***
### Negative filters for queues and tasks
Negative filter operators such as "Does not equal", "Does not contain", and "Does not include" have been added to the Queue and Tasks pages. This makes it easier for users to exclude values and investigate failures more efficiently.
***
### Note on JSON object property order in editors and widgets
JSON editors and view widgets now display an informational note explaining that object property order is not guaranteed.
***
### Improved validation highlighting for empty required object fields
Fixed a bug where required object fields without properties were not highlighted during validation, even though the form failed to save. This makes validation feedback clearer and helps users identify missing required fields more quickly.
***
### Removed empty category selections in Transformer manager
Fixed an issue where category selections were shown even when no prototypes were available in the Transformer manager. This prevents empty or misleading options from appearing and makes the selection flow clearer.
**Release dates**
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle.
* Release candidate 3.109.0-RC1: will be installed in week 12 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.109.0: will be installed in week 14 (production environments)
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.110.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-110-0
With Alumio version 3.110.0-RC1, we're thrilled to introduce one of the biggest features we've been working on, and it will completely change the way you build integrations: our new Route Builder! If that wasn't enough, we've also upgraded our Import/Export experience with guided validation and inline resolution. Additionally, we've added a 24-hour integration view on the dashboard and made improvements to enable flexible task management. It's safe to say that this release will take the usability and visibility with which you build and manage integrations - to the next level.
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.110.0-RC1:**
### Orchestrate integrations visually with our new Route Builder
Our long-awaited Route Builder is ready to finally go live, and it allows users to build, modify, and manage integrations from one powerful visual interface, start to finish.
* **No more tab-switching** - map out, build, and expand data flows via one interactive and scalable diagram, instead of navigating between separate Incoming, Route, and Outgoing configurations.
* **Direct access to data flow controls** - incoming sources, triggers, transformers, and outgoing destinations.
* **Manage advanced settings** - task retrying, real-time processing, and parallel execution from the same view.
For anyone building or maintaining complex data Routes, this simplifies and elevates your day-to-day integration experience considerably.
***
### Import configurations with clearer validation and guided fixes
We've redesigned the Import/Export workflow with advanced validation and guided resolution steps, enabling users to detect and fix missing variables, missing configurations, and invalid data directly during import. The new flow provides clear insights into file issues, allows creating or linking required components on the fly, and ensures configurations can be safely imported without errors.
***
### Get a fuller 24/7 view of integration activity
We've added a 24-hour view for integrations, allowing users to see the entire day's tasks and to avoid missing activity from the previous night. Your selected view is also saved for the next visit, so the dashboard stays aligned with how you prefer to monitor integrations.
***
### Resolved status in scheduled task pruning
Scheduled task pruning now supports the Resolved status, giving users better control over how scheduled jobs are managed and cleaned up over time.
***
### Enhanced task navigation
We've improved task navigation by adding previous and next controls within the Task detail view. This lets users move through tasks more efficiently without needing to return to the Tasks overview page each time.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.110.0-RC1: will be installed in week 14 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.110.0: will be installed in week 16 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.111.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-111-0
After our recent major feature updates, including our new visual Route Builder, Alumio version 3.111.0-RC1 is a lighter release focused on small but meaningful improvements. This includes localizable date formats, cleaner dropdown behavior, and a fix for an edge case with expired Spaces.
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.111.0-RC1**
### Customize how dates and times are displayed
You can now localize date and time formats in Alumio based on your preference. Set your preferred format in your user preferences, and it will be reflected across the dashboard.
***
### Alphabetically sorted labels in dropdowns
Labels in dropdown menus are now sorted alphabetically, making them easier to scan and select - especially when working with longer lists.
***
### Accurate handling of expired Spaces
Resolved an issue where expired Spaces were not being updated correctly, ensuring their status is now reflected as expected.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.111.0-RC1: will be installed in week 16 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.111.0: will be installed in week 18 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.112.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-112-0
Alumio version 3.112.0-RC1 brings a mix of platform-level improvements and key fixes. We've added direct Azure Blob Storage support in the Filesystem, improved visibility into storage usage, and laid the groundwork for upcoming features with dependency updates. Alongside that, we've addressed several edge cases around task execution, routing, and UI consistency to make integrations behave more predictably. We've also included connector updates to two popular systems!
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.112.0-RC1:**
### Access Azure Blob Storage directly via the Filesystem
You can now connect to Azure Blob Storage directly through the Filesystem interface, removing the need to configure a separate HTTP Client. This simplifies setup and makes working with Azure storage more straightforward.
***
### Dependency updates to support upcoming platform improvements
We've updated several core dependencies to prepare the platform for upcoming improvements, including AI-related capabilities. This update has no impact on existing functionality.
***
### Unique identifiers assigned to existing configurations
Existing configurations are now automatically assigned unique identifiers, enabling platform-wide linking without requiring users to resave records manually.
***
### More robust handling of SOAP responses
Fixed a bug where SOAP publishers and transformers could fail when receiving non-iterable responses. The process now continues as long as the response can be parsed.
***
### Prevent duplicate task execution in real-time routes
Resolved an issue where tasks in real-time routes could be executed twice due to a timing gap between task creation and the "Processing" status update.
***
### "Run route" action now executes reliably
Fixed a bug on the Route detail page where the Run route action would fail with a log error instead of triggering execution.
***
### Correct message placement for Waiting task updates
Solved an issue where messages updating Waiting tasks were incorrectly shown in the Import tab instead of the Export messages tab.
***
### Restored icons in the Code transformer editor
Fixed an issue where icons were missing in the **Code transformer** editor, restoring proper UI visibility.
***
### **Connector updates**
The following connectors have been updated with the new version:
* Sendcloud connector, v3.
* Channable connector, v2.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.112.0-RC1 will be installed in week 18 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.112.0 will be installed in week 20 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.123.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-123-0
Alumio version 3.123.0 lets you set a default log level from your user preferences, extends storage options for Google Cloud, and adds attachment support to the Email Transformer. The release also improves keyboard accessibility for forms and adds a new formatting option to the cXML formatter. On the fixes side, it resolves a date picker and table overlap issue, a form rendering error with complex JMESPath placeholders, and an issue with email servers not showing up in the relations tab.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.123.0:**
### **New and improved**
### **Set a default log level in your user preferences**
You can now set your default log level on the user preferences page. Log views will open using that level from then on, so you no longer have to reselect it each time. The colors and icons for debug and notice level logs have also been updated for better clarity.
***
### **Support for Uniform Bucket-Level Access in the GCS Filesystem connector**
The Filesystem connector now supports Google Cloud Storage buckets that use Uniform Bucket-Level Access, so you can write files to these buckets without running into access errors.
***
### **Add attachments to emails sent through the Email Transformer**
You can now include attachments when sending emails through the Email Transformer.
***
### **Disable CDATA wrapping in the cXML formatter**
The cXML formatter now includes an option to disable CDATA wrapping, matching the flexibility already available in the XML formatter.
***
### **Keyboard navigation for form elements**
Form elements can now be navigated and used with your keyboard, with a clear visual indicator showing which field is currently focused.
## **Fixes**
### **Fixed forms failing to render with complex JMESPath placeholders**
Forms with a complex JMESPath expression in a placeholder no longer fail to load. You can now save and reopen these configurations without errors.
***
### **Fixed email servers not showing up in the relations tab**
SMTP server configurations used by a "Send email" transformer now correctly appear on each other's relations tab, so you can see the connection between them in both directions.
## **Release schedule**
* RC available on Sandbox: week 40
* Stable release on Production: week 42
For more information about our release process, check out our [release notes overview](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes).
# Version 3.124.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-124-0
Alumio version 3.124.0 makes it easier to see how a route processes tasks in the Route Builder, adds new file actions to transformers, and introduces a new, safer Database connector. The release also fixes an HTTP proxy error with binary responses, queue processes stopping after a lost database connection, unreadable SOAP connector errors, Code transformer variables being reported as missing environment variables, and error logs showing only a generic error.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.124.0:**
### **New and improved**
### **See Realtime Processing and Waiting tasks in the Route Builder**
The Route Builder now shows whether a route has Realtime Processing enabled. When it is, the "New tasks" icon is muted and the option to add schedulers is disabled, with an info text explaining why when you hover over them. When the Waiting status feature is enabled, the "Finished tasks" node is replaced by an orange "Waiting tasks" node that links to the documentation.
***
### **Delete and list files from within a transformer**
You can now delete files and list files directly from a transformer. Previously, deleting files was only possible from an incoming, so you can now remove files at any point in your flow, for example only the files that pass a filter.
***
### **A new, safer Database connector**
A new Database connector is now available. It works with raw queries only, and values are passed to the query separately (for example `:sku`) instead of being written into the query as placeholders. This makes your database queries safer and more predictable. The previous Database connector is now deprecated, and we recommend using the new connector for new integrations.
## **Fixes**
### **Fixed HTTP proxies failing with binary responses and merged GET parameters**
An HTTP proxy with "Merge GET parameters" enabled, a response transformer and the Binary formatter no longer fails with an error. The response is now formatted after your transformers have run.
***
### **Fixed long-running queue processes stopping after a lost database connection**
Queue processes that run for a long time are no longer stopped when the connection to the database is briefly lost and restored. You no longer have to restart these processes manually.
***
### **Fixed unreadable error messages from the SOAP connector**
Errors from the SOAP connector are now shown as a clear, readable message instead of a long block of unreadable text.
***
### **Fixed Code transformer variables shown as missing environment variables**
Variables used inside template strings in a Code transformer are no longer reported as missing environment variables on the Environment variables page. Your code already ran correctly; the page now shows this correctly too.
***
### **Fixed error logs showing only a generic error**
Error logs now show the actual error message for every type of log, for example when an incoming configuration can't be built. You no longer need to export the log to see what went wrong.
## **Release schedule**
* RC available on Sandbox: week 42
* Stable release on Production: week 44
For more information about our release process, check out our [release notes overview](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes).
# Version 3.19.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-19-0
For all of you entrusting Alumio to deliver impeccable integrations for your businesses, we would love to let you know that Alumio version 3.19.0-RC2 is live now! Our developers have mitigated several issues and improved pre-existing features to make the platform better to use.
Here’s what is new in **Alumio v3.19.0-RC2**
* **\[Updated]** Logging formatting has been updated for different data types, and guess what, you can now have better readability!
* **\[Updated]** From now on, Alumio will keep the *existing* refresh token when the server doesn’t provide a new token. *Awesome*, isn’t it?
* **\[Resolved]** How often were you complaining about lag issues affecting the form fields while you were typing in them? Well, no more from today!
* **\[Resolved]** Our clients wanted us to add a trigger alert for unsaved changes in the Transformer Tester, and we *took note!*
* **\[Resolved]** Did the Null presence in HTTP client’s GET request body cause Bad Request? That’ a thing of the past!
* **\[New!]** Alumio now has a “read header” option in the XLSX parser.
* **\[Removed]** The “actions” dropdown in the Tasks table overview will no more sore your eyes when a task is in processing!
* **\[Rollback]** We noticed several issues with the recently added “Processes” page. For now, we have disabled this feature until the instability has been resolved.
**Don’t forget the release dates!**
* Release candidate: 3.19.0-RC2 on 04-10-2022 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.19.0 on 18-10-2022 (For usage on Production)
*More updates are incoming, stay tuned!*
# Version 3.20.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-20-0
For all of you entrusting Alumio to deliver impeccable integrations for your businesses, we would love to let you know that **Alumio version:** 3.20.0-RC1 is live now! Our developers have fixed several bugs that were *bugging you* and improved pre-existing features to make the platform even better.
Here’s what has been fixed in the newest version, **Alumio v3.20.0-RC1:**
* **\[Bugfix]** - Previously, the default error ranges for the HTTP client often did not load into the forms correctly. *Now, they do!*
* **\[Bugfix]** - On the server statistics page, the **timeframe selection widget** started popping up for no reason. *Well, no more from today!*
* **\[Bugfix]** - In some cases users wanted to set an **empty string** as a value, and *we made it possible for you!*
* **\[Bugfix]** - The **duplicate** button for storages was probably the most irrelevant thing. Now, it has been removed and in effect, *a thing of the past.*
* **\[Bugfix]**- For code-based configurations, the **Restore** button was visible when there was nothing to restore. We *unrestored* it!
* **\[Updated]** - It is now possible to use the **Copy Entities** *action* inside a **storage** to copy the storage entities to another storage. *Awesome, isn’t it?*
* **\[Updated]** - In the **HTTP Subscriber**, it is now possible to **use pagination in POST requests**.
* **\[Updated]** - For a *razor-sharp accuracy*, it is now possible to use **micro seconds** while tracking the progress in a storage.
* **\[Updated]** - **Tutorial videos** for getting started with the Alumio iPaaS are now **linked** in the Dashboard.
* **\[Updated]** - While restoring configurations in the **version control tab**, a **confirmation popup** now appears. It will prevent the users from *accidentally performing* this action.
**Don’t forget the release dates!**
* Release candidate: 3.20.0-RC1 on 18-10-2022 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.20.0 on 01-11-2022 (For usage on Production)
*More updates are incoming, stay tuned!*
# Version 3.21.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-21-0
For all of you entrusting Alumio to deliver impeccable integrations for your businesses, we would love to let you know that Alumio version 3.21.0-RC4 is live now! Our developers have mitigated several issues, improved pre-existing features and added exclusive ***new*** features to make the platform superior.
Here’s what is new in **3.21.0-RC4**
* **\[New!]** Alumio now supports the importing and exporting of configurations (and their relations) via the dashboard. Exports are written to a file, which can be imported via the page **Settings > Import.**\
This allows our users to easily copy configurations from one environment to another while keeping the relations intact!
* **\[New!]** Alumio has switched to **Auth0 as CIAM**. This allows us to add additional authentication methods to Alumio, besides [Google](https://google.com/). This is aimed at improving the security of the platform.
***(A Trailer Of The Future)***\_ Alumio will soon incorporate additional authentication methods soon. Besides that, our Enterprise clients will be able to login using **Azure AD** upon request.\_
* **\[New!]** **Disk IO** and **inodes availability** has been added to the statistics overview page.
* **\[New!]** We have added a **confirmation popup** when restoring a configuration. *Awesome*, isn’t it?
* **\[Updated]** The session lifetime of the Alumio login has been increased to **2 hours**!
* **\[Updated]** Our clients wanted us to improve the JSON schema validation transformer and we *took note!*
* **\[Resolved]** How often were you complaining about the issue with the **Request body matcher**?*Well, that’s a thing of the past and the previous version is no more!*
* **\[Resolved]** You wanted us to resolve the issue where the **JSON widget validation is not suitable for storage entities**, and *it won’t bug you anymore!*
* **\[Resolved]** Would an async selection would break certain form actions every time you used it? *Now, it doesn’t* and the issue has been resolved\*.\*
* **\[Resolved]** The Alumio support team has resolved a bug wherein the storage detail pages could have an incorrect URL in the outdated Alumio versions.
**Don’t forget the release dates!**
* Release candidate: 3.21.0-RC4 on 01-11-2022 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.21.0 on 15-11-2022 (For usage on Production)
*More updates are incoming, stay tuned!*
# Version 3.22.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-22-0
For all of you entrusting Alumio to deliver impeccable integrations for your businesses, we would love to let you know that **Alumio version:** **3.22.0-RC2** is live now! Our developers have fixed several bugs that were *bugging you* and improved pre-existing features to make the platform even better.
Here are some delightful new features in the newest version **(Alumio 3.22.0-RC2):**
* **\[New!]** Now, it is possible to *fail* a **Task** based on the **response body and header**.
* **\[New!]** Support is now available for *bulk exports* of configurations.
* **\[New!]** Support is now also available for *streaming* **JSON files** to allow for importing large amounts of JSON data.
* **\[New!]** Alumio now shows a warning when you try to remove a configuration that is still related to another configuration
* **\[New!]** From now on, Alumio will try to request a *new* **0Auth token** when the response has a **401** code.
And, we have sorted out several issues and eliminated bugs!
* **\[Resolved]** We received complaints when Alumio users failed to scroll horizontally in Safari, and the issue has been resolved\*.\*
* **\[Resolved]** The support team has detected and resolved a bug wherein clicking **Restore** (in the top bar) for code-based configuration was returning a 500 error (in Version Control).
* **\[Resolved]** Previously, a scrollbar used to be shown in the middle of a log. *Now, it doesn’t!*
* **\[Resolved]** How irritating was it when unsaved changes alerts popped up when there were no changes? *Now, it doesn’t* and the issue has been resolved\*.\*
* **\[Resolved]** The Alumio support team has resolved a bug wherein the **Save & Close** button did not always close a configuration.
* **\[Updated]** The side menu of the vertical screen space has been improved.
**Don’t forget the release dates!**
* Release candidate: 3.22.0-RC2 on 15-11-2022 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.22.0 on 29-11-2022 (For usage on Production)
**A Peek into the future!**
* A new feature will be introduced in Alumio where a user can *debug* the **Transformers** in detail by *setting breakpoints.*
* An option to enable logging of CRUD actions for the storage is coming soon.
*Adios. Stay tuned with us!*
# Version 3.23.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-23-0
We wish to inform everyone who has trusted Alumio to deliver flawless integrations for their organizations/businesses that Alumio version 3.23.0-RC3 is now available. To improve the platform, our developers have eliminated a number of problems, enhanced already-existing functions, and incorporated unique new features.
**Here’s what is new in v3.23.0-RC3**
* **\[New!]** Support has been added for the **Netsuite OAuth flow**.
* **\[New!]** Users can **debug Transformers** in detail by setting breakpoints. *Awesome, isn’t it?*
* **\[New!]** Now, Alumio returns a **401 error** instead of a **400 error** if there is no match found via the ‘header matcher’ for ‘Authorization’.
* **\[Resolved]** The support team has detected and resolved a bug wherein the “Delete” button was not working for API keys.
* **\[Resolved]** How irritating was it when unsaved change detection worked \_incorrectly\_for the merger transformers? *Well, we corrected it!*
* **\[Resolved]** Our clients requested us to resolve the issue where configurations that are in use cannot be restored. Now, *you can* *restore* them!
* **\[Resolved]** The Alumio support team has resolved a bug wherein the “Export” button was not available in some instances.
* **\[Resolved]** We received complaints about the JSON editor size/resizing being broken at times we *took note!* The issue has been resolved.
**Don’t forget the release dates!**
* **Release candidate:** 3.23.0-RC3 on 29-11-2022 (For usage on UAT)
* **Stable release:** 3.23.0 on 13-12-2022 (For use on Production)
**A peek into the future!**
* You can soon recursively duplicate your configurations via the dashboard. *Wait for it!*
* We will soon provide detailed documentation about Alumio’s APIs.
* OAuth1.0a support for Magento 2 is going to be available soon!
# Version 3.24.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-24-0
We wish to inform everyone who has trusted Alumio to deliver flawless integrations for their organizations/businesses that **Alumio version 3.24.0-RC4** is now available. To improve the platform, our developers have eliminated a number of problems and incorporated *unique* new features.
**Here’s what is new in v3.24.0-RC4!**
* **\[New!]** Alumio now generates **API documentation** *automatically*. The API documentation can be found on [https://apidocs.alumio.com](https://apidocs.alumio.com) (stable) and [https://apidocs-rc.alumio.com](https://apidocs-rc.alumio.com) (release candidate). The documentation will be updated with each new version of Alumio!
* **\[New!]** We have added **3 additional conditions** to the filter **- Filter by storage entities**. These are the counter-version of the existing ones. *Awesome, isn’t it?*
**Here’s what we have resolved!**
* **\[Resolved]** The product team has resolved an issue where adding new users in certain conditions would cause problems.
* **\[Resolved]** How often were you frustrated with the **template** in the **Chain SOAP Publisher** when it *did not* accept objects? Now, *it does* and operates smoothly!
* **\[Resolved]** Alumio users complained about an issue where **Strip HTML tags** as **Mapper** would be shown twice. *Well, we corrected it!*
**Don’t forget the release dates!**
* **Release candidate:** 3.24.0-RC4 on 13-12-2022 (For usage on UAT)
* **Stable release:** 3.24.0 on 27-12-2022 (For usage on Production)
*More updates are incoming, stay tuned!*
# Version 3.25.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-25-0
For all of you entrusting Alumio to deliver impeccable integrations for your businesses, we would love to let you know that **Alumio version 3.25.0-RC1** is live now! Our developers have fixed several bugs that were *bugging you*, improved pre-existing features, and added new ones to make the platform more powerful.
**Here’s what is new in v3.25.0-RC1!**
* **\[New!]** Are you adding, updating, and deleting storage entities regularly and losing your grip on them? *Well, that’s a thing of the past!* Easily log and retrace your steps with the new version.
* **\[New!]** You can now **duplicate configurations** in Alumio through the dashboard including all its dependencies. *How awesome is that?*
* **\[New!]** We have introduced a **Sleep Transformer** to delay a process as per requirements.
**Here’s what we have resolved!**
* **\[Resolved]** Alumio experts have resolved an issue where the **read method** “whole file” *did not* work for **JSON**. Now, *it does!*
* **\[Resolved]** Alumio users complained that there were instances when it was *not possible* to **delete** an imported **HTTP authentication**. *We heard you* and the issue has been resolved!
* **\[Resolved]** Alumio users were plagued by an issue wherein the **delete modal** *would not* **disappear** when an **error** occurred during the **deletion process.**
**Don’t forget the release dates!**
* **Release candidate:** 3.25.0-RC1 on 27-12-2022 (For usage on UAT)
* **Stable release:** 3.25.0 on 10-01-2023 (For usage on Production)
*More updates are incoming, stay tuned!*
# Version 3.26.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-26-0
Wishing you all a Happy New Year from Alumio! And, with nothing less than our new and improved **Alumio version 3.26.0-RC1.** The theme for this year’s first update is “solved issues”, several of which we hope will lead the trend of making your integrations with Alumio even simpler and more user-friendly, in 2023!
What’s new with **Alumio version: 3.26.0-RC1**:
* **\[NEW!]** - GET parameters are now available as variables in the response transformer in an HTTP Proxy
* **\[NEW!]** - Now process CSV files with multiple lines within 1 task or set the exact amount of lines per task
* **\[NEW!]** - You can now convert base64 to binary format using an HTTP Proxy
* **\[NEW!]** - We’ve also added tooltips to the different statuses of Breakpoints
What’s improved with **Alumio version: 3.26.0-RC1**:
* **\[Resolved]** - The back button now properly redirects you to the previous page at all times.
* **\[Resolved]** - Couldn’t find the JSON field full-screen button? We found it hidden and made it visible!
* **\[Resolved]** - You can now delete an imported HTTP authentication without any issue!
* **\[Resolved]** - The duplicate action doesn’t break on older Alumio environments anymore.
* **\[Resolved]** - Were you troubled with the read method “whole file” not working for JSON? It now works like a charm!
**Watch out for these release dates!**
* Release candidate: 3.26.0-RC1 on 10-01-2023 (for usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.26.0 on 24-01-2023 (for usage on Production)
# Version 3.27.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-27-0
The Alumio Product Team has hit the ground running with 2023 and we’re already rolling out our second set of crucial improvements with **Alumio version 3.27.0-RC1.** So, what’s new and what’s solved with this new update?
Here’s what’s new with **Alumio version:** **3.27.0-RC1**
**1. \[NEW]** - It’s now possible to create inline configurations within Alumio
**2.** **\[NEW]**- We now have a database publisher that supports batch updates/inserts
**3. \[NEW]**- You can now use a token from storage in bearer authentications
**4. \[NEW]** Last but not least,we’ve added support for ODBC Zen databases!
Here’s what’s solved with **Alumio version: 3.27.0-RC1**
* **\[Solved]** The SOAP and Database client does not throw an exception anymore
* **\[Solved]** The XML deserializer does not cast numeric attributes to integers anymore
**Watch out for these release dates!**
* Release candidate: 3.27.0-RC1 on 24-01-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.27.0 on 07-02-2023 (For usage on Production)
# Version 3.28.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-28-0
The first set of platform improvements for Feb are in with **Alumio version:** **3.28.0-RC1**. Our product team has been hard at work adding a bunch of new user-friendly features, to make integrations even more flexible for advanced Alumio users.
Here’s what’s new and improved with **Alumio version:** **3.28.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added a “Set UTF-8 encoding” plugin for HTTP clients, which encodes text into UTF-8 based on the provided source text.
* **\[NEW]** You can now connect to Magento 2 through OAuth 1.0a authentication!
* **\[NEW]** - We’ve made it easier to view the value of non-encrypted variables by simply hovering over them.
* **\[NEW]** - It’s now possible to configure an Entity Schema for HTTP proxies.
* **\[NEW]** - Feel free to add custom headers to OAuth 2.0 authentications.
* **\[Solved]** - You don’t need to enable logging anymore to create storage.
**Here are the release dates:**
* Release candidate: 3.28.0-RC1 on 07-02-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.28.0 on 21-02-2023 (For usage on Production)
# Version 3.29.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-29-0
We’re excited to announce loads of new features and fixes with **Alumio version: 3.29.0-RC1**! From adding a new feature for Shopify configurations and including a Cron Expression column in our Scheduler, to improving error handling for Webhooks, this new update packs a lot of user-friendly additions from our Product Team.\\
Here’s what’s new and improved **Alumio version: 3.29.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Now view and edit inline configurations without redirecting to another page.
* **\[NEW]** Schedulers now have a “Cron Expression” column for better visibility on the overview pages!
* **\[NEW]** Now send requests with multipart/form data contained through Webhooks.
* **\[NEW]** Shopify works even better with Alumio! We now support page parameters in the pagination.
* **\[NEW]** We added the SSL option “Verify SSL certificate status” to support certificates from non-trusted sources.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve updated the XLSX parser and the CSV parser and improved reporting of errors coming from CSV/XLSX deserializer.
* **\[SOLVED]** Switching transformers in Entity Transformers doesn’t display old settings anymore!
* **\[SOLVED]** The pagination is now set correctly in table overviews when applying filters.
* **\[SOLVED]** The export functionality now has the HTTP Proxy properly included.
* **\[SOLVED]** Now & placeholder doesn’t cause issues while working with Merger Transformer.
* **\[SOLVED]** Error handling for Webhooks has been improved!
* **\[SOLVED]** We’ve improved the configuration containing the “type” property by setting it up as plain data to avoid any error messages.
* **\[SOLVED]** Error reporting with Sherpaan Subscriber in Incoming Configuration is more user-friendly!
* **\[SOLVED]** The Transformer “Move using a pattern” doesn’t show missing data anymore!\\
**Here are the release dates:**
* Release candidate: 3.29.0-RC1 on 21-02-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.29.0 on 07-03-2023 (For usage on Production)
# Version 3.30.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-30-0
Riddle: guess what’s the best kind of room to seek in the world? Answer: the room for improvement!\
Practicing what we preach, we’re happy to bring you a new set of crucial features and fixes to make the Alumio platform even more user-friendly, with Alumio version 3.30.0-RC1.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.30.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** - Freely view the metrics of Memory usage and compare free memory with cached memory.
* **\[NEW]** Filtering by storage entities with a condition where the identifier must not exist in the storage will now filter the input data without errors.
* **\[NEW]** Arrays are now allowed to pass the form validation in the JSON field.
* **\[NEW]** Now inspect datapoints on both succeeded and failed steps set up in the Entity Transformer.
* **\[SOLVED]** Copying storage entities related to copying from one storage to another storage don’t indicate an error anymore.
* **\[SOLVED]** Now “Save\&Continue” and “Save\&Close” while creating a Filesystem without issue.
* **\[SOLVED]** An issue with displaying a validation error while creating a storage.
* **\[SOLVED]** There used to be a problem with importing the exported HTTP client configuration with HTTP Authentication.
**Here’s the release dates:**
* Release candidate: 3.30.0-RC1 on 07-03-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.30.0 on 21-03-2023 (For usage on Production)
# Version 3.31.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-31-0
Hungry for even more Alumio platform improvements? Our product team has dished out a fresh new batch of fixes and features to satisfy your appetite for simplified integrations, with **Alumio version 3.31.0-RC1**.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.31.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** You can now export data from the task overview page to investigate issues easily.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve reorganized [user roles in Alumio](https://forum.alumio.com/t/users-in-alumio/184) for better clarity on role permissions: “Users” are now called “Viewers” and we’ve added a new role called “Editor”.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added a tooltip to the signature field in the HTTP authentication to explain which versions of Magento require a signature.
* **\[NEW]** The default prototype in Storage is now automatically selected instead of displaying old prototypes first.
* **\[SOLVED]** There’s no more issue displaying old data when trying to run the same Transformer for the second time.
* **\[SOLVED]** The default status of the toggle in the Route or Scheduler now show as “Enabled”, instead of “Disabled”.
* **\[SOLVED]** We corrected the text name in the “Follow Pagination” dropdown supported by Shopify: “Follow next links in HTTP header (RFC8288)”.
**Here’s the release dates:**
* Release candidate: 3.31.0-RC1 on 21-03-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.31.0 on 04-04-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.32.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-32-0
We’re happy to announce the release of **Alumio version 3.32.0-RC1**! And, the theme for these new release notes is “Cookies and an even more bug-free environment”.
It includes an array of fixes and improvements from solving an issue with updating the current version to the previous version, to better verifications for deleting configurations, to fixing an issue with updating encrypted values, and it also includes a more detailed cookie consent banner for better transparency\_. We’re happy to keep making integrations simple with Alumio!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.32.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Now it’s possible to view the detailed [cookie consent](https://forum.alumio.com/t/cookies-consent/516) banner and cookie statement explaining what types of data are collected.
* **\[NEW]** Check out the new “User Preferences” option in the Profile section of the menu that allows you to reset recent preferences.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the verification process for when users want to delete a configuration that is already being used.
* **\[NEW]** After running a scheduled job, your can now retrieve information about the failed status from the Logs tab.
* **\[SOLVED]** Fixed an issue with updating the current version to the previous one in the “Version Control” tab that shows all configurations in Alumio.
* **\[SOLVED]** While saving a new value into an existing encrypted value used to get updated, now the value stays the same and doesn’t refresh.
* **\[SOLVED]** Fixed an issue with an invalid signature in Magento Oauth1 Authentication. Explanations about the required specific versions have been added.
* **\[SOLVED]** Eliminated a bug that automatically applied integers instead of strings when the “Automatically type cast values” option was unchecked in the Response decoder.
* **\[SOLVED]** Dropdowns for Transformers and Prototypes now respond correctly on the mobile version and now successfully show values when clicked on.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.32.0-RC1 on 04-04-2023(For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.32.0 on 18-04-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day that Alumio publishes the release notes.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.33.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-33-0
In the refreshing spirit of spring, we’re happy to release **Alumio version 3.33.0-RC1 -** budding with more platform fixes and improvements! With this update we’ve added a new configuration option, fixed an issue with saving data, and made it possible to add missing variables after importing an incoming configuration, among other refinements to help rejuvenate your integration experience with Alumio.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.33.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the logic of selecting the default prototype: in the past, the default prototype was auto-selected in cases where no configurations existed other than the defined default prototype. This prevented users from creating inline configurations. Now the default prototype is no longer auto-selected for the described cases, while remaining automatically selected for all other cases.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve corrected the table header’s components view on small screens: different sizes of buttons and their color, and pagination borders that didn’t cover the whole block are consistent now.
* **\[NEW]** Now add missing variables after importing an incoming configuration. If any variables are missing, the banner with the corresponding link to the page will expand and allow users to input environment variables one by one.
* **\[SOLVED]** An issue with displaying an HTTP 418 response and no errors occurring in the Logs tab while working with the Transformer tester. Now if the error occurs in the Transformer tester, users get an HTTP 500 response and are notified of errors in the Logs tab.
* **\[SOLVED]** A problem with saving data to the storage when an identifier is an integer. In the past, it was possible to save data if the identifier was a string. Now users can set up the integer as a non-string.
* **\[SOLVED]** When using the Compressed decoder in the HTTP Transformer, we fixed a problem with fetching only one file that matches the pattern and parser by adding an “Include all items” configuration option to the HTTP Transformer.
* **\[SOLVED]** We’ve updated the replacement of a configuration that uses deprecated prototypes: instead of the “Remove keys from a storage entity” it will show the “Remove data from a storage entity” transformer.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.33.0-RC1 on 18-04-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.33.0 on 02-05-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.34.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-34-0
The month of May is all about taking things easy, and so with the new **Alumio version 3.34.0-RC1,** we’ve added a new set of features and fixes to make performing tasks with Alumio even easier!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.34.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** You can now Run Route, Skip, or Retry tasks without switching between the Task Details page and the Task Overview page. For an even more user-friendly experience with Alumio, all actions are available on the Task Details page as well: the “Run Route” button works for all Tasks regardless of their status; the “Retry” button displays when the Task with the following statuses occur: Finished, Failed, Skipped; for the Tasks with the “New” status, the “Skip” button is available.
* **\[NEW]** Alumio now gives you the ability to run an inline Incoming Configuration via a popup: on the top right corner, an additional option helps perform actions such as Run Incoming, Export, and Duplicate Incoming Configuration. You can also collapse the popup by clicking the “Escape” button.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added Help Text to all fields throughout the Database clients to bring more clarity on how to configure each field.
* **\[NEW]** No need to worry about knowing when to update your dashboard anymore! Alumio now informs users about a new version available in the Dashboard via a popup. To update the Dashboard version, you need to collapse the browser tabs of Alumio and re-open the application.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added a new option “Repair stuck tasks” to the Scheduler to check stuck tasks in the Route and to help repair them by assigning a new task status during processing.
* **\[SOLVED]** We fixed an issue where users got a 404 error when trying to navigate to a Storage entity using the inline configuration view in the Transformer. Now the user is redirected to the Storage entity without any problems.
* **\[SOLVED]** We fixed an issue that occurred when the user works with two Routes using the same configurations, except that one Route has an incorrectly set up Transformer, but error logs occur in the healthy Route in the Import messages tab.
* **\[SOLVED]** Resolved an issue where using the DELETE method in the HTTP Transformer removes the payload. For this case, the “Send payload with DELETE” checkbox has been added to the Request method.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.34.0-RC1 on 02-05-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.34.0 on 16-05-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.35.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-35-0
Alumio is all about making integrations simple in every way! And this is best exemplified with our new release of **Alumio version 3.35.0-RC1**. It brings some essential new features and fixes to make your integration experience with the Alumio platform even faster and more flexible.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.35.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added the ability to view and navigate to corresponding Routes, as well as Incoming and Outgoing configurations from the Task Overview tab.
* **\[NEW]** It’s now possible to support bulk import from XLSX files. Simply select the option to “Group multiple lines into one task”.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where it was possible to empty storage when logged in with the “User” role.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a problem with sending emails from the Production environment, but marked content as from the UAT environment. Now the subject and content update according to the environment type.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where using the “Increase body parameter” pagination for the HTTP Subscriber displayed no results on the first page of pagination.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.35.0-RC1 on 16-05-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.35.0 on 30-05-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.36.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-36-0
We are excited to announce the launch of a big new feature with the release of **Alumio version 3.36.0-RC1**, and that’s our new “Quick Connect Wizard”! It’s designed to help make integrations with Alumio even more interactive. To add to this, there’s a slew of new features, improvements, and bug fixes, including support to connect with the ABN AMRO API, and added logging to the HTTP Proxy. We look forward to keep building new features that take the idea of “Making Integrations Simple” to the next level!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.36.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Say hello to the Alumio Quick Connect Wizard! Designed to simplify working with HTTP Clients. Step 1 of the wizard helps: create an HTTP Client, choose a platform via search, and view the different categories you want to connect. Step 2 helps maintain settings and input credentials for the selected HTTP Client. The final step provides a summary of previously selected values. Use the “Quick Connect Wizard” to create an interactive connection with the various platforms available within Alumio.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added logging to the HTTP Proxy to enable logs for requests and responses coming from HTTP Proxies.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve created a timestamp filter for Import/Export messages that filters “From-To” dates to view corresponding logs more easily.
* **\[NEW]** The “Health Checks” option has been removed from the Dashboard and it has been replaced with the “Stuck Tasks” option in the Scheduler.
* **\[NEW]** We have now added support to connect with the ABN AMRO API.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved error handling while working with the HTTP Plugin Client, wherein new logs are available for display when such error messages occur.
* **\[NEW]** Pages now display without overlapping when working on the iPad Mini screen type in Alumio.
* **\[NEW]** We resolved an issue with displaying old data in the configuration even after an update. Now data is cleaned up during editing and doesn’t cause a problem when refreshing fields.
* **\[NEW]** Two problems we fixed regarding export logs when real-time processing is enabled: 1) the Logs used to show up in the Import messages tab instead of the Export messages tab; 2) the Logs in the Export messages tab used to keep loading without showing any results.
* **\[NEW]** We also resolved an issue where enabling data points would break the Transformer Tester.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.36.0-RC1 on 30-05-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.36.0 on 16-06-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.37.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-37-0
**Alumio version 3.37.0-RC1** is here already! And it brings to you this month’s second batch of new tweaks, improvements, and features for our integration platform. The theme for this release is - *simple changes go a long way in helping solve complex problems*.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.37.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the display of the “Test all connections” option. The “Test Results” popup is now more informative and understandable for users. A new “Logs” option enables you to view details after the results of finished tests.
* **\[NEW]** The Conditional Transformer has a new check to help verify if the key in the input data exists or not. For this, a new “Key Condition” data transformer has been added with two options: “key exists” and “key not exists”.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve updated the instruction on the Password Reset page to make it easier for users to reset their password.
* **\[NEW]** We resolved a problem with duplicated input and output when using the ‘view data’ option in the data transformer.
* **\[NEW]** We resolved an issue where no logs were shown to explain the reason tasks failed when enabling the “Activate retrying of failed tasks” option for Tasks.
* **\[NEW]** We solved an issue where turning on the new layout of entity transformers resulted in disabling the version control tab without the ability to preview details.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.37.0-RC1 on 13-06-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.37.0 on 27-06-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.38.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-38-0
We’re happy to announce our third release for this month with **Alumio version 3.38.0-RC1**. This one brings some crucial new updates to improve the flexibility and user-friendliness of the Alumio integration platform!
**Release notes**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve enhanced the Relations overview of configurations! Now, the correct parent and children settings are loaded automatically when the Relations tab is opened. It’s also now possible to retrieve parent/children elements from the configurations and display connections between them.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added the ability to verify the signature request validation of the webhook to ensure whether the webhook call is legit. At the moment, the signature type supports two options: “Digest HMAC signature” (the header name and key are required) and “Digest signature” (only the header name is needed).
* **\[NEW]** We solved an issue where retrieving a token when using plugins on oAuth2.0 would result in an error.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.38.0-RC1 on 27-06-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.38.0 on 11-07-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.39.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-39-0
The Alumio development team is working hard behind the scenes on new features which improve the stability of the platform, offer more functionality to storages, and improve the processing speed of Alumio in general. Besides that, we have listened to your feedback regarding the beta forms. In the upcoming months we’ll be releasing these changes.
**Release note**
* **\[New]** We’ve solved an issue with our date-time picker being incorrectly displayed when editing the configuration. We’ve also given the date-time picker a fresh look! While it used to simply show up as a list of input fields, now it’s designed as a calendar that allows you to select a corresponding date and time.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.39.0-RC1 on 11-07-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.39.0 on 25-07-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.40.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-40-0
**Alumio version 3.40.0-RC** is here and the release introduces key user-friendly additions to our flexible integration platform! We’re happy to announce that we’ve finally redesigned the overview of our Entity Transformer to improve our user experience, made useful additions to the Transformer tester, and also now support the Newline-delimited JSON (NDJSON) format. Read on to find out more!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.40.0-RC1:**
* **\[New]** We’ve improved the Entity Transformers view with a more user-friendly and adaptive design! On the left side of the page, we’ve added a tree-view feature that allows you to expand and see all transformers and their settings without any data hidden in popups. You can always go back or along the settings to be on track with the selected transformers! Rather than having the “Back” and "Close” buttons in the popup, there are now the “Up one level” and “Home” buttons above the tree-view to help you navigate back up through the transformer tree. We’ve removed all popups in favor of allowing transformers and their content to be viewed on the page as well.
* **\[New]** In the latest version of Alumio, errors that occur in the Transformer tester are now shown next to the Transformer that they occur in. The data point that can be used for debugging is marked red. And if the “New form layout” beta is active, it will also be highlighted in the tree view feature. Even if the data point is not activated for debugging, it will still correctly show the error.
* **\[New]** We now support the Newline-delimited JSON (NDJSON) format in Alumio. As a result, it has become possible for the NDJSON deserializer to convert incoming JSON Lines requests, while outgoing entities can be transformed to JSON Lines by the NDJSON serializer.
* **\[New]** We’ve solved an issue with the incorrect display of logs pagination: when navigating to the new configuration, the logs pagination displayed outdated pagination settings and an incorrect number of logs.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.40.0-RC1 on 25-07-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.40.0 on 08-08-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.41.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-41-0
With **Alumio version 3.41.0-RC** we’re happy to bring you some new (quite literally) refreshing changes: introducing a new reload button, a value remover, support for **?** placeholders, and some fixes. We hope this helps makes your integration experience with Alumio even more user-friendly!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.41.0-RC1:**
* **\[New]** The removal of values has been simplified when working on a request with big data. Use the “Value remover” transformer and add patterns to remove a key from the data.
* **\[New]** We now support ? placeholders besides the original & placeholders throughout Alumio. When the value doesn’t exist or can be null, ? placeholders won’t fail and return null. If the value exists, the system will show the expected result.
* **\[New]** You don’t need to manually clear your cache to refresh the dashboard anymore! In the past, sometimes new updates weren’t visible to users because of their browser cache issue, and they had to manually clear their cache to find new features. To help with this, we’ve added a new “Reload” button to help retrieve the latest dashboard version with updates, which you can find in Settings > Info page > Dashboard Version. To use the “Reload” button, navigate to the User profile (user icon in the bottom left corner) first. Once you click on the icon, you’ll find the “User preferences” option at the top of the profile popup. On the “User Preferences” page you’ll see 2 available options: Non-essential cookies and Reload dashboard. Press the “Reload” button to refresh the dashboard.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Solved a bug where decimals could not be added when using the “Format: Number”. Now the value turns to “0.00” instead of the incorrect result “0”.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Fixed truncated display of the Entity identifier on the Task details page. It’s now possible to view the full Entity identifier in the task.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.41.0-RC1 on 08-08-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.41.0 on 22-08-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.42.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-42-0
Did you know that August is considered to be the month of harvest? Well, we’re happy to bring you a fresh *harvest* of new features and fixes with **Alumio version 3.42.O-RC1.** We hope to keep reducing integration roadblocks from *cropping* up while c\_ultivating\_ a constantly improved user experience with Alumio.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.42.0-RC1:**
* **\[New]** Deleting configurations have been improved! Instead of only showing the name and link of the configuration when deleting it, you can now see the type and name of configurations that are in use by means of the bulk action or hamburger menu. To delete the related configuration, click on the name of the configuration, and the inline editor expands for you to adjust new settings. As a result, the related configuration won’t be displayed in the original configuration because of the changed settings. You can also delete the related configuration by navigating to the Detailed page and clicking on the “Delete” button. Changes in the “Delete configuration” popup will be applied immediately.
* **\[New]** We now support the HMAC authentication protocol to simplify the building of your integration with payment providers. Create an entity transformer that uses the “String: hash” mapper, then enable the “Use HMAC key” option and input the proper HMAC key. If you want to use the “Return binary data instead of lowercase hexits” option as well, the output won’t be a valid JSON. To solve this, create the “String: Base64 encode” mapper below.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Fixed an issue with the incorrect display of the “Repair stuck tasks” job content and summary in the Scheduler wizard.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Resolved an issue where authentication failed when using a custom client and corresponding headers in the Request authentication by supporting the Request encoder.
* **\[RESOLVED]** We’ve added a string as a new value type to the identifier to resolve an issue with the inability to retrieve data from the storage if the identifier is an integer.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Solved a bug where enabling the task retry in the route caused the creation of the task with the “Retry” status instead of “Skipped”.
* **\[RESOLVED]** The transformer tester doesn’t show an empty array anymore when setting the parser in the Entity transformers to XML and the Read method to Incremental.
* **\[RESOLVED]** We’ve improved the reading of the error messages for the identifiers of the configurations and names of the environment variables to make them more user-friendly.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Fixed a bug where the extra data wasn’t shown in the JSON editor when using the “Value setter” transformer.
* **\[RESOLVED]** We’ve solved a problem when trying to export schedulers from Production to UAT but the child schedulers disappeared in the preview popup.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Violations on importing old configurations in the new Alumio version have been resolved.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.42.0-RC1 on 22-08-2023(For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.42.0 on 05-09-2023 (For usage on Production)
\
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.43.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-43-0
Guess what the release of **Alumio version 3.43.0-RC1** has in common with the month of September? The Latin word “Septem” means “seven” and we’ve brought you seven great new features and fixes to make your integration experience with Alumio user-friendlier, in seven more unique ways!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.43.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Alumio now supports setting your own response HTTP Status code in an HTTP Proxy. To use the feature, create the HTTP Proxy, add Processor to apply to the response from the list, then select the “HTTP response code” option and set up the custom HTTP response in the required field. It should be possible to view the selected HTTP response in the Logs once results are obtained.
* **\[NEW]** To display the most frequently used filters on the Task overview page for better usability, the “Entity identifier” filter is now displayed by default.
* **\[NEW]** There is no more need to switch between form layouts each time you start a new session with Entity Transformers! The system remembers your previous choice and displays the correct form layout by default.
* **\[RESOLVED]** We’ve resolved a problem where sometimes the invite email to a user would contain an incorrect environment name.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Fixed a bug where using the “Filter by storage entities” filter with the condition “An item with the identifier must exist in storage” would sometimes give incorrect results.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Resolved an issue where using the “Use parsed body” checkbox in the Webhook subscriber caused the “Parser” field to be set as required instead of disappearing.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Solved a problem where at certain moments the message “Allowed memory size exhausted’ message would be displayed in the dashboard.
\
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.43.0-RC1 on 05-09-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.43.0 on 19-09-2023 (For usage on Production)
\
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. Request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.44.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-44-0
Marking our second release for the month, **Alumio version 3.44.0-RC1** brings a few (literally) transformative changes! From adding new Transformer testers for the inline configuration to getting rid of a few pesky bugs, the Alumio Product Team was happy to bring you these quick new improvements to your integration experience.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.44.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added Transformer testers to the inline configurations in Alumio! Now it’s possible to test your settings when the configuration editor is expanded for such functionalities as Entity Transformers, HTTP, and SOAP Clients.
* **\[NEW]** To allow tasks to be retried after more than 24 hours, we’ve increased the interval for the retry tasks from 60 to 360 minutes as the maximum.
* **\[RESOLVED]** An issue where creating an HTTP Client with interactive OAuth2 stopped catching errors and didn’t show an error message has been solved.
* **\[RESOLVED]** Fixed a bug where an incoming configuration could not be saved with a Webhook set as Subscriber and with the “Add Uploaded Files“ checkbox selected.
* **\[RESOLVED]** In the beta layout, the displaying of a white screen in the configuration panel prevented adding more transformers in the Conditional Transformer. This has been resolved!
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.44.0-RC1 on 19-09-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.44.0 on 03-10-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. Request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.45.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-45-0
Fun fact about October: In the original 10-month calendar, October was month 8. However, since we’re all about being future-proof, you can think of our new release of - **Alumio version: 3.45.0-RC1 -** as an ode to where October currently stands. Check out **10 new great platform fixes and features** for the 10th month of this year, ensuring your integration experience with Alumio always excels in “keeping up with the times”.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.45.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve unified the UI of Entity transformers in a single view throughout Alumio to improve visual consistency.
* **\[NEW]** When connecting to an external API, we now support a plain text response decoder to request an access token.
* **\[NEW]** Added support for JWT token authentication.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue with the inability to refresh a page when storage identifiers contain backslashes in the JSON editor.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where it was possible to create an incoming configuration without selecting a Publisher.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a problem where copying data in the “Entity Data” tab of the “Task detail” page converted information incorrectly and showed the HTML-escaped characters as unescaped.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where the Scheduler overview page displayed logs in an incorrect order and also showed outdated information.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where it was not possible to navigate to a configuration after a name change in the tree view.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where the URI for the HTTP Client was displayed incorrectly in the interface.
* **\[NEW]** Trying to save a configuration after setting up the value setter in the beta layout used to result in displaying an error. We’ve resolved this as well!
\
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.45.0-RC1 on 03-10-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.45.0 on 17-10-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.46.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-46-0
To continue making your Alumio integration experience simpler and more user-friendly, the release of **Alumio Version 3.46.0-RC1** brings you our second batch of gratifying new features and fixes for the month. It includes a new smart encoding option and enhanced Tree view capabilities among the resolution of several pesky technical bugs. We hope to keep making it *great to integrate* with Alumio!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.46.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added the “RFC 3986 Spaces to %20” encoding option to the Request URI encoder to support spaces to be percent-encoded.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the overview in the Tree view of Entity transformers: you can now view configurations, see highlighted links that differentiate prototypes and configurations, and open the configuration in the Inline configuration editor.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve disabled the ability to increase values in the recently edited field when scrolling the page. Now the value stays static despite scrolling throughout the page.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve fixed an issue where the Route included Incoming and Outgoing configurations with the same identifier but wasn’t shown in the Relations tab correctly. This prevented exporting the configuration correctly.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve solved an issue where visiting the same deprecated storage page multiple times would result in an error.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve resolved a problem where 2 of the same processes could run at the same time when one of them would be a long-running process (multiple hours).
* **\[NEW]** We now support refreshing a token when no expiration date is given in integrations that use OAuth2.0 authentications. The token is refreshed after a 401 response is received.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve fixed a bug where new logs were displayed only in the executed configuration but didn’t appear in the Scheduler logs.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where setting up pagination in the HTTP Subscriber from the zero page caused the first page to be skipped.
* **\[NEW]** Solved a problem with incorrectly sorting logs even when using ascending/descending order in the Import messages tab.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.46.0-RC1 on 17-10-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.46.0 on 31-10-2023 (For usage on Production
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.47.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-47-0
It has barely been two weeks since our [last release notes](https://forum.alumio.com/t/alumio-version-3-46-0-rc1/784). And, we’re already excited to bring you the release of Alumio version 3.47.0-RC1 to share some new fixes we’ve made and a new mapper that we’ve added to our integration platform. Check it out and enjoy an even more seamless and simplified integration experience with Alumio!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.47.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** To help decode the HTML entities, we’ve added a new mapper “String: Decode HTML entities". You can find this new mapper by setting up the “Value setter” and selecting it in the list of mappers.
* **\[NEW]** We solved an issue where authentication settings in the HTTP Client were loaded incorrectly and showed the same fields for all the authentication methods causing an error.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where navigating to the task menu and expanding the filter would display a memory error.
* **\[NEW]** We resolved an issue where building an integration with a default prototype within the advanced tab in the HTTP Client showed a validation error.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve fixed a problem where using the “Server request” validator in combination with the “Validate message” body in the Webhook failed to retrieve an entity in the Incoming configuration and a syntax error occurred.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.47.0-RC1 on 31-10-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.47.0 on 14-11-2023 (For usage on Production)\\
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.48.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-48-0
Ready for some new user-friendly improvements to your Alumio integration experience? With **Alumio version 3.48.0-RC1** we’re happy to bring you some crucial UI fixes, a performance improvement to the “Move using a pattern” transformer, the ability to view details about additional packages, and more!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.48.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** You can now view information about additional packages and their versions installed in Alumio. This can be found in Settings > Info page > Environment tab.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the performance of the “Move using a Pattern” transformer to speed up obtaining results when using large arrays in the transformer.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where the menu would sometimes fail to load on the screen.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve fixed a couple of bugs in our UI! This includes fixing the “Copy URL” option that incorrectly copied the URL due to missing a “/” between the base URL and the HTTP Proxy section. Also, when a new dashboard version is released, users now correctly receive a notification to navigate to “Profile icon > User preferences” to update the dashboard, instead of incorrectly being directed to the “Support Menu”.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a problem with the incorrect display of the editor name of the configuration in the Version Control tab.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where in certain cases no email was sent out for a configured alert.
* **\[NEW]** A bug that caused an error message when using the bulk action to stop processes on the “Processes” page has been fixed.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.48.0-RC1 on 14-11-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.48.0 on 28-11-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.49.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-49-0
Greetings integrators! How fares your integration experience with Alumio? If you’ve been following [our release notes](https://forum.alumio.com/c/ipaas-general/release-notes/32), you know we’re always working towards making it even easier and more refined. As such, we’re happy to bring you a new feature and some user-friendly fixes with the release of **Alumio Version 3.49.0-RC1** to improve how our platform helps make integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.49.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added a toggle to enable the exporting of configurations without tests included by default. Once you click on the toggle at the top right corner of the popup, all tests will be excluded from the configuration before you export it.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug in the repair task functionality where no error was shown in the Import/Export messages tab when a task failed. Now failed tasks are correctly displayed in the Import/Export messages tab.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue involving the moving and copying within data, where keys with periods in them could not be accessed.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where FTP logs couldn’t be displayed in the Export messages tab despite enabled logging.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve solved an issue that caused confusion, where a finished process would be marked as “Processing” on the Processes page.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.49.0-RC1 on 28-11-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.49.0 on 12-12-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.50.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-50-0
In the spirit of the last month of the year, we’re happy to announce that the release of Alumio Version 3.50.0-RC1 comes with some exciting new announcements, apart from the regular new features and fixes. Sorry, no spoilers! Read on to find out…
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.50.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve disabled the ability to schedule duplicate jobs to prevent the increase of the queue. A job will now only be added to the queue when the previous job has been completed.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve fixed the display of data and time widgets to make fields consistent with the rest of the UI components.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where using an empty object as a request parameter in the HTTP Transformer caused an error when trying to save and reload configuration.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue that prevented displaying additional packages in Settings > Info page > Environment tab.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve updated the Hubspot Connector with relevant authentication methods since the HubSpot API Keys are not supported anymore. It’s now possible to authenticate by private app access token or OAuth.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed an issue where the CommerceTools HTTP Client couldn’t refresh/retrieve new tokens. Now the CommerceTools HTTP Client behavior works as expected.
**Announcements!**
We’re happy to inform you about exciting new changes made for integrations in Alumio.
**New Connectors we have built:**
* Spryker Dynamic Data Exchange Connector
* [Visma.net](http://Visma.net) ERP Connector, v9.57
* Totango Connector, v3
* Squarespace Connector, v1
* Shopline Connector, v20230301
* Klarna Connector, v1
**New Connector versions we support:**
* ChannelEngine, v2.13
* Shopify Connector, v2023-10
* Returnless Connector, v2
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.50.0-RC1 on 12-12-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.50.0 on 26-12-2023 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.51.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-51-0
Wishing you all a great holiday season and a happy New Year in advance! Discover the NEW Alumio features, improvements, and connectors we’ve added to ensure an even more user-friendly Alumio integration experience, to kick off the next year!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version: 3.51.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added a new tab on the Route details page to view all related tasks of the corresponding Route. This tab also helps navigate to tasks, view details, retry, export, and run the Route.
* **\[NEW]** It is now possible to bulk delete storage entities within Storages. This allows you to delete a bunch of storage entities at once instead of deleting them one by one.
* **\[NEW]** When formatting numbers in the “Format: number” mapper, there’s no more need to use a thousand separator as a required option. Now the field is optional for usage.
* **\[NEW]** We resolved a bug where the SOAP Publisher fails a task if the SOAP call doesn’t return the XML payload in the response.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed an issue where the URI Query String Matcher didn’t allow users to make requests with the defined query parameters causing an error and failed validation of the request.
**Announcements!**
Apart from these regular improvements, we’re happy to bring you some exciting news about the improved connectivity of Alumio!
**New Connectors we have built:**
* \[ACP-400] - WordPress Connector, v6.3.1
* \[ACP-350] - Xero Connector, v2.0
**New Connector versions we support:**
* \[ACP-473] - WooCommerce Connector, v3
* \[ACP-467] - [Bol.com](http://Bol.com) Retailer Connector, v10
* \[ACP-461] - Shopware 6 Connector, v6.5.3.0
* \[ACP-459] - LightspeedHQ Connector, v3.0
* \[ACP-458] - Sylius Connector, v1.13
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.51.0-RC1 on 26-12-2023 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.51.0 on 09-01-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.52.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-52-0
Here’s wishing you all a great 2024 with Alumio version 3.52.0-RC1 and the year’s first release notes! We’re happy to get this year started with a few quick improvements to your Alumio
integration experience, in a series of many more to come. Stay tuned and keep integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.52.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support multipart/form-data with binary data in the transformer to process requests when multipart/form-data is required.
* **\[NEW]** Solved a bug where the “Getting started” video popup would reappear after closing it. This would only occur for users with the role “Viewer.”
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.52.0-RC1 on 09-01-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.52.0 on 23-01-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.53.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-53-0
The Alumio Product Team has hit the ground running in 2024 and we’re happy to be announcing the month’s second round of new features and fixes with Alumio version 3.53.0-RC1. Here’s to constantly improving the way we help make integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.53.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support the Client Assertion authentication (JWT token) to connect to the integration that requires using Client Assertion or in combination with OAuth2 authentication.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added the Export option to the Storage to filter out entities and export them as a JSON file when the size of the Storage is limited.
* **\[NEW]** You can now optionally log the file contents in the Filesystem to decide whether users want to log the content or not.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the display of pagination configurations: the help text on the “Storage to track progress” field has been added.
* **\[NEW]** Solved wording errors in the JWT authentication to correspond to proper settings in the configuration: the title has been adjusted to “Private key” and the help text has been updated.
**New Connector versions we support:**
* \[ACP-464] - Zoho Creator Connector, v2.1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.53.0-RC1 on 23-01-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.53.0 on 06-02-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.54.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-54-0
New improvements to kick off a new month! Alumio version 3.54.0-RC1 is here and apart from a crucial new feature and getting rid of a pesky bug, we’re happy to bring you some exciting new connector updates to enhance your integration capabilities.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.54.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** While in the past we enabled the encoding type for Publishers in the past, we now also support the “Request URI encoder” option for Subscribers and pagination.
* **\[NEW]** We solved a bug where the incoming configuration would not show new logs when a dependency error occurred.
**Announcements**
We are also happy to share some new integration updates in Alumio!
**New Connectors we have developed:**
* ERPNext Connector, v14
* Dolibarr Connector, v18.0.4
**New Connector versions we support:**
* Shopify Connector, v2024-01
* Salesforce CRM Connector, v59.0
* SAP S4 Hana Odata Connector, v4
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.54.0-RC1 on 06-02-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.54.0 on 20-02-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.55.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-55-0
Greetings integrators! How goes your Alumio integration experience? Here are some new features to help make your integrations even more simple with the release of Alumio version 3.55.0-RC1.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.55.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added cron validation in the Scheduler to inform users when they set their cron expression incorrectly.
* **\[NEW]** We now support a mapper that converts characters into a proper transliteration, for example, to transliterate “é/ë/ê/è/è” etc. to “e” and “áäâ” etc. to “a”.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve enabled adding additional path variables when setting up a webhook to be able to add extra elements to the webhook URL.
**New Connector we have developed:**
* PayPal Connector, v2
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.55.0-RC1 on 20-02-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.55.0 on 05-03-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.56.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-56-0
The month of March is said to mark the start of spring and new beginnings. On that note, we’re happy to bring you crucial new features, fixes, and even connectors with the release of Alumio version 3.56.0-RC1.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.56.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support a generic signature validator for Webhooks to set up configurations without customer signature type.
* **\[NEW]** We added the option to allow parallel processing of Routes in order to speed up task processing in Alumio.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the URL decoding function in the “Deserialize: URL encoded” mapper and created the “Serialize: URL encoded” mapper to encode a string to a URL encoded string.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where running a Route via the Dashboard would display an incorrect modal message.
* **\[NEW]** We solved an issue where periods in the pagination were converted incorrectly when reaching the second page in the HTTP Subscriber.
**New Connectors we have developed:**
* Mirakl Connector, v1.19.0
* Lead Gen & CRM Connector, v1
* Brightpearl Connector, v0.0.0
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.56.0-RC1 on 05-03-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.56.0 on 19-03-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.57.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-57-0
To add to the last release notes that we shared for this month, we are happy to include some crucial new performance and user-friendly improvements with Alumio version 3.57.0-RC1. But more importantly, we have a great announcement!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.57.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve increased the maximum limitation for the “Mail when inactivity has been detected for minutes” alert from 1440 to 2880 minutes / 24 hours.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the performance of the “Move data between accessors” transformer to speed up data processing in the transformer.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where a user couldn’t scroll and view data when retrieving a long response in the Transformer tester.
**New Connector version we support:**
* Zoho CRM Connector, v6
**Announcement!**
We’ve launched the **Alumio Feature Roadmap 2024**, detailing all the major upcoming platform features that we’re working on to release this year!
[Explore our feature roadmap now →](https://www.alumio.com/feature-roadmap-2024)
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.57.0-RC1 on 19-03-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.57.0 on 02-04-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.58.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-58-0
We’re happy to kickstart April by announcing that Alumio version 3.58.0-RC1 comes with many new features, fixes, and support for new Connectors. Including new user-friendly features like a handy Copy/Paste function for configurations and a new Error Transformer, along with multiple bug fixes, this new release adds a variety of improvements to make your Alumio integration experience even more seamless.\\
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.58.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added the Copy/Paste function to help copy configurations and paste them into other parts of Alumio instead of creating the same configuration all over.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve implemented a new “Error” Transformer. It is designed to notify users via alerts if some errors occur in the Transformer that cause the Transformer chain to abort.
* **\[NEW]** We now support multiple conditions in the “ELSE IF” part of a Conditional Transformer to add value comparison for different keys.
* **\[NEW]** To help view who created a Transformer, their status, and last update, we’ve added the “Updated at” and “Last edited by” fields on the Entity Transformers overview.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where a webhook called with an additional path did not show logs in the Logs tab.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a bug where pagination in logs would not navigate the user to the next page when manually trying to insert the expected page.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where configurations in certain situations couldn’t be deleted from the overview page due to an “out of memory” error.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug that caused the memory usage of the Outgoing configuration to be displayed in the Incoming configurations in the Logs tab.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where making an API call to Magento oAuth1.a as a Client caused a request failure.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where filtering by “Failed” status couldn’t be done on the Processed page due to the status absence.
**New Connectors we now support:**
* Scayle Connector, v1
* Kogan Connector, v2.0
* Accelo Connector, v0
* Caflou Connector, v1
* Freshdesk Connector, v2
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.58.0-RC1 on 02-04-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.58.0 on 16-04-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.59.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-59-0
To add to the many new features and fixes we introduced with our last release notes for the month, here are two new gems to sweeten the pot with Alumio version 3.59.0-RC1!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.59.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support exporting all your configurations in one go. To use the functionality, navigate to Settings > Import/Export and click on the “Export all configurations” button.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where killing the processing job indicated the “Failed” status instead of displaying the “Killed” status.
**New Connector we now support:**
* Catch of the Day Connector, v2.0.0
**New Connector version we support:**
* Visma Connector, v9.82
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.59.0-RC1 on 16-04-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.59.0 on 30-04-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.60.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-60-0
They say May is the month to kick back a little. So, let’s start it off with a few aperitifs of user-friendly improvements brought to your integrations with Alumio version 3.60.0-RC1, sprinkled with support for three new great connectors.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.60.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support .tar.gz and .gz file formats in the Compressed Deserialiser for extracting files.
* **\[NEW]** An issue where Scheduler logs always displayed a Timeout for successfully finished tasks has been fixed.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve solved an issue where a job with the “Scheduled” status got stuck in the queue, and no other jobs with the same configurations could be scheduled. We’ve also added extra logging to Alumio to debug such issues with more ease.
**New Connectors we now support:**
* MyDeal Connector, v3.3
* AS2 Gateway Connector, v1.2
* Zoho Desk Connector, v1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.60.0-RC1 on 30-04-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.60.0 on 14-05-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.61.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-61-0
We’re happy to announce that Alumio has been [ranked #1 in Emerce 100](https://cstories.nl/stories/digitale-transformatie/?utm_campaign=Social_Linkedin_Organic_Banner_Link_Clickable\&utm_content=291115948\&utm_medium=social\&utm_source=linkedin\&hss_channel=lcp-27013888) for best cloud service provider in the Netherlands! Keeping with the spirit, the release of Alumio version 3.61.0-RC1 introduces a wide array of platform fixes and improvements in our quest to constantly enhance your integration experience with us.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.61.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the logging of failed webhooks. Now, when the “Server request validator” request is denied, webhooks display the “Failed” status and a correct log message.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where a process stopped when a log couldn’t be written.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where the disabled field wasn’t visible in the Version Control tab.
* **\[NEW]** Solved a bug where the “Delete” Method on Publisher didn’t send any payload.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue with the Akeneo connector where exporting data from Alumio indicated an error.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a problem with the Salsify connector where the base URL host was replaced by the endpoint name, causing an error during connection.
**New Connectors we now support:**
* Amazon Selling Partner, v2023
* Qapla Connector, v1.3
* NextChapter Connector, v1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.61.0-RC1 on 14-05-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.61.0 on 28-05-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.62.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-62-0
It’s our third release for this month with Alumio version 3.62.0-RC1, which brings even more features, fixes, and connectors to make your integrations simple. This includes introducing a new Task feature that allows users to decide on finished or failed tasks, fixing a bug where retrying a non-existing task caused all tasks to be retried, and new connector support for popular payment options. Happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.62.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** A new “Waiting” status has been added to Tasks when a Task is processed, which allows users to decide whether it has been finished or failed. After that, it’s possible to update the status of multiple Tasks to “Finished” or “Failed” using the bulk action.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added the Document Type Definitions (DTD) when selecting the “cXML” option to make routes and send cXML invoices and other information via Alumio.
* **\[NEW]** An issue with the “MySQL server has gone away" error has been resolved when a process runs too long without sending back any data.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where retrying a non-existing task caused all tasks to be retried.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the performance of the Route and Incoming details pages, the Transformer tester, and all places where JSON fields are used.
**New Connectors we support:**
* [Pay.nl](http://Pay.nl), v2.0
* Stripe Connector, v1
* Klipfolio Connector, v1.0
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.62.0-RC1 on 28-05-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.62.0 on 11-06-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.63.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-63-0
Are you maximizing the process automation potential of your Alumio environment? With the release of Alumio version 3.63.0-RC1, we’re happy to kick the month off by introducing some crucial new functionality-based features and fixes that will make your integration processes with Alumio all the more simple.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.63.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the view and functionality of the Processes page (renamed to the “Queue” page) to make working with queues and jobs easier. Click here to [find the page overview →](https://forum.alumio.com/t/the-queue-page-in-alumio/1138)
* **\[NEW]** We’ve made the password option in the Basic authentication optional since some systems use API Key Authentication inside the Username without the Password, for example, Stripe.
* **\[NEW]** A confirmation popup has been added for when users want to disable/enable schedulers to prevent them from accidentally clicking the toggle.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve fixed the view of tasks within configurations to resolve the issue where the amount of Tasks was not always shown correctly.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where importing all exported configurations threw an error.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where the “The required properties (runId) are missing” error occurred when trying to click the log of the finished Incoming configuration.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a problem where page actions were available and active when navigating to the invalid page like non-existing tasks.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where Magento Oauth1 required the request parameter to be sorted. Now Alumio sorts the request parameter so the request will be successful even if the user makes it unsorted.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Akeneo GraphQL Connector
* SendGrid Connector, v3
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.63.0-RC1 on 11-06-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.63.0 on 25-06-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.64.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-64-0
Don’t want to miss out when a new version of Alumio is installed and want to stay up-to-date with the latest platform changes? With Alumio version 3.64.0-RC1, we’ve now added notifications for these regular updates within your Alumio environment, along with a bunch of new features, fixes, and support for a bunch of great connectors. Let’s keep making integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.64.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support a CSV Serializer and Deserializer to encode and decode CSV files and handle data in Alumio.
* **\[NEW]** It’s now possible to view system logs of jobs as pruning tasks, task statistics aggregation, sending notifications, and pruning logs.
\
**\[NEW]** We now notify our users when a new version is installed and suggest checking our Release notes in the forum to stay up-to-date with Alumio changes.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve enabled the ability to ignore errors when a SOAP request returns a non-200 response to use other options in the HTTP client.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where the “Malformed UTF-8 characters, possibly incorrectly encoded” error was thrown after retrieving binary files from the Compressed Response decoder in the HTTP transformer.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where the SearchableStorage class included the set method as “value” instead of having only “key” as an argument.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a problem where webhooks were published into the Queue but couldn’t be executed.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where two transformers were swapped around in a list, and the content of one could be set to another type of transformer.
**New Connectors we support:**
* MontaWMS Connector, v6
* Datadog Connector, v1
* Auth0 Connector, v1.0
* Microsoft Teams Connector, v1
* Adyen Connector, v71
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.64.0-RC1 on 25-06-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.64.0 on 09-07-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.65.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-65-0
Looking to boost your integration efficiency? With Alumio version 3.65.0-RC1 we’re happy to introduce a bunch of new tweaks and fixes that ensure a more intuitive integration experience. We’ve improved error messages and details on logging levels, introduced a new editor for JSON/JMESPath fields, and now support Connectors for four new popular applications.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.65.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** It’s now possible to parse query parameters on the webhook URL to connect to the Business Central application.
* **\[NEW]** We have deprecated the legacy Unit4 and Akeneo connectors from Alumio. From now on you can use the latest version of the connectors only. The old configurations will still function for existing configurations.
* **\[NEW]** We introduced a new editor for JSON/JMESPath fields.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve included more details on explaining the difference between logging levels to bring more clarity when selecting an option.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve fixed an issue with the inability of importing/exporting data from UAT to Production using a storage by improving the storage path. This issue happened in very specific use-cases.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the error message when text can’t be converted to UTF-8: instead of displaying “Argument #1 (\$content) must be of type string, bool given”, now it shows the “The data cannot be encoded to UTF-8” message.
**New Connectors we support:**
* \[ACP-513] - Picqer Connector, v1
* \[ACP-560] - Cloudflare Connector, v4.0.0
* \[ACP-564] - [Remote.com](http://Remote.com) Connector, v0.1.0
* \[ACP-570] - Reloadify Connector, v2
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.65.0-RC1 on 09-07-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.65.0 on 23-07-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.66.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-66-0
With Alumio version 3.66.0-RC1 we’re introducing some crucial improvements in integration processes and logging. We hope these new fixes and features ensure smoother operations and more productive workflows. Happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.66.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support placeholders in the HTTP Proxy request to append dynamic values to the headers.
* **\[NEW]** We have improved the logging of Alumio. Now each API request is logged when it starts and when it ends. Also each queue process is logged when it starts and when it ends. A queue process that is stopped or killed is also logged.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where Alumio generated the wrong URL instead of increasing the page’s value, which caused pagination to work incorrectly in the SAP B1 configuration.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a problem where processes were killed and displayed as “Failed” when the connection to the server was lost.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Startdeliver Connector, v1
* FastSpring Connector
* BigCartel Connector, v1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.66.0-RC1 on 23-07-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.66.0 on 06-08-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.67.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-67-0
With the release of Alumio version 3.67.0-RC1, we’re keen on kicking off the month by introducing a key usability enhancement to the platform. We’ve also added Connector support for three more great applications to our extensive library. Stay tuned for more upcoming features and fixes!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.67.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** The dashboard caching behavior has been improved. Now users don’t have to refresh the dashboard via the Reset Dashboard function to see updates, since the dashboard should be updated automatically.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Occtoo Connector, vMarch2024
* Storyblok Connector, v1
* [Google](https://google.com/) Calendar Connector
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.67.0-RC1 on 06-08-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.67.0 on 20-08-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.68.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-68-0
We’re excited to announce a wide range of fixes and features with Alumio version 3.68.0-RC1! The update includes a new Alumio Status page, the ability to HTML-encode a string when XML-serializing, the ability to run an Incoming Configuration from the Route page among many other changes. It also introduces a plethora of new fixes and support for new Connectors. As always, happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.68.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve introduced a new page: [Alumio Status](https://status.alumio.com/) - where you can track the uptime of Alumio services and also subscribe to receive notifications when an issue with one of the services occurs.
* **\[NEW]** We have restructured the Info page (Settings > Info) to display more information about your license and other useful items.
* **\[NEW]** Legacy Magento2 and Shopware packages have been removed. It is no longer possible to add these prototypes, however existing configurations will still function as normal.
* **\[NEW]** Your filter settings are now stored in the application, instead of your browser. This ensures the settings will never get lost after an Alumio update or clearing the cache in your browser.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where the Scheduler would have a small delay in execution, in certain cases.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where it was possible to trigger the “Login” button multiple times, causing potential issues.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where the Transformer Tester would sometimes disappear from the page when using the popup.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where importing a HTTP Client would throw an error.
* **\[NEW]** Added the ability to HTML-encode a string when XML-serializing.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where it was not possible to write/read to an sFTP server when using a PrivateKey connection.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where saving an entity transformer would reset the edited expected entities.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where the dashboard sometimes showed a 404 error when loading a page.
* **\[NEW]** We have restructured the menu-items of Alumio by moving them around and partly re-naming certain menu-items.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where it was not possible to save or update a transformer when mapping a boolean value to a strong.
* **\[NEW]** It’s now possible to run an Incoming Configuration from the Route details page to test configurations quicker without switching between pages.
**New Connectors we support:**
* PulpoWMS Connector, v2
* TopDesk Connector, v1.1.0
* HaloITSM Connector, v2.152.34
* Copper Connector
**Release dates**
* Release candidate: 3.68.0-RC1 on 20-08-2024 (For usage on UAT)
* Stable release: 3.68.0 on 03-09-2024 (For usage on Production)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.69.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-69-0
We’re excited to kick off the month of September by announcing big customizability updates with the release of Alumio Version 3.69.0-RC1! From introducing the beta program for our new Code Transformer feature to making our JSON editor resizable, from bug fixes to Connector support for new great apps, we hope these new updates will help make customizing integrations in Alumio even more simple and flexible!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.69.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We are happy to introduce a big, new transformer in Alumio called the [Code Transformer](https://forum.alumio.com/t/code-transformer/1308)! It’s currently available for specific clients and partners. If you would like to join the beta program for the Code Transformer, please contact your Customer Success Manager. During the beta program we will only make the transformer available on UAT environments. Once the beta program has ended, the functionality will become available for everyone to use.
* **\[NEW]** The JSON editor has become resizable, therefore, it’s now possible to write long code using a custom editor size without UI issues.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where invoking stored procedures from the Database transformer failed to execute stored procedures causing unexpected behavior.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where creating a new HTTP Client using the Oauth2 authentication type would fail - due to missing the Grant Access button in the Quick Wizard.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Outlook Connector, v1
* Pulseway Connector, v3
* BlueSnap Connector, v3.0
* Mollie Connector, v2
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.69.0-RC1: will be installed on September 02-05, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.69.0: will be installed on September 17-19, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.70.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-70-0
With the release of Alumio version 3.70.0-RC1, apart from resolving issues and optimizing the platform to improve user-friendly functionality, we’re also happy to introduce new UI improvements to deliver a more visually appealing experience. We also support new Connectors for some more great applications. Happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.70.0-RC1:**
* **\[New]** Connection timeout limits are now set up to 30 seconds by default - to prevent processes from getting stuck and delaying the queue.
* **\[New]** We’ve fixed the UI inconsistencies throughout the Alumio functionality in the menu panel, actions, buttons, fonts, spacing, dropdowns, and checkboxes.
* **\[New]** Solved an issue where sandbox environments displayed the “Production” label in the Dashboard.
* **\[New]** Fixed a bug where the task execution caused issues with the “real-time processing” setting: after finishing, the task ran again and indicated the Failed status.
* **\[New]** Resolved a problem where popups couldn’t properly close when having multiple Alumio tabs open on different environments.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Timely Connector, v1.1
* ManageEngine Connector, v3
* Streak Connector, v1
* Ocoya Connector, v1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.70.0-RC1: will be installed on September 16-19, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.70.0: will be installed on October 1-3, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.71.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-71-0
As we welcome the fall season, we are excited to introduce several new key updates in Alumio version 3.71.0-RC1 to continue improving your integration experience. Highlights include our brand-new AI scheduler, faster page load times, improved task processing, resolution of various bugs to ensure smoother workflows, and updates to our Teamleader connector. Additionally, we’re also introducing support for new connectors, including NewRelic v2 and Pipedrive v1. Happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.71.0-RC1:**
* **\[New]** - We are happy to introduce our new [AI scheduler](https://forum.alumio.com/t/scheduler-in-alumio/185). Generating your scheduler expression is now possible by typing your request in a sentence.
* **\[New]** - We’ve added the Priority column to the Scheduler overview page to inform users which jobs can be picked up faster according to the scheduler priorities.
* **\[New]** - We’ve drastically improved the loading time performance of detail pages in Alumio.
* **\[New]** - We have solved a bug in the HTTP message formatter that caused an out-of-memory issue in certain situations when using the Long and Full options.
* **\[New]** - We have resolved an issue where filtering by a specific route would throw an error.
* **\[New]** - We have improved the processed tasks on the Info page to display the correct UI look when limitations are reached.
* **\[New]** - We’ve updated the[ Teamleader Connector](https://forum.alumio.com/t/about-the-teamleader-category/82) with a list of new endpoints to allow users to use the connector’s new functionalities.
**New Connectors we support:**
* NewRelic Connector, v2
* Pipedrive Connector, v1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.71.0-RC1: will be installed on September 30 - October 3, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.71.0: will be installed on October 14-17, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.72.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-72-0
One of our key consistent goals is to improve how user-friendly Alumio is. In this regard, a highlight from the release of Alumio version 3.72.0-RC1 is that we’ve now added quick-view buttons to our forum posts and video tutorials, across Alumio features. Apart from other small QoL improvements to kick off the month, there are new popular applications that we support Connectors for. Stay tuned for more upcoming changes in the month!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.72.0-RC1:**
* **\[New]** We’ve added our forum and video buttons throughout Alumio so users can view “quick help information” when working with the corresponding functionality.
* **\[New]** We’ve improved the display of our Logs to now display when no Logs are found to prevent users from misunderstanding the system behavior.
* **\[New]** Fixed a bug where the default value field always contained the value regardless of making the field empty.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Intuit Mailchimp Connector, v3.0
* InFlow Connector, v2024-03-12
* Airfocus Connector
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.72.0-RC1 will be installed on October 14-17, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.72.0 will be installed on October 28-31, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.73.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-73-0
To follow up the QoL improvements from our last release, our second batch of updates for the month with Alumio version 3.73.0-RC1 includes some essential bug fixes. We’ve also added a new functionality to our “Update a storage entity” Transformer and offer Connector support for five new popular apps (including Google Gemini!).
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.73.0-RC1:**
* **\[New]** We’ve created a new option within the [“Update a storage entity”](https://forum.alumio.com/t/update-a-storage-entity/1356) Transformer to automatically add a storage entity when the identifier doesn’t yet exist in the storage.
* **\[New]** To help search for Connectors faster, we’ve improved the display and placement of Connector categories in the HTTP Quick Wizard.
* **\[New]** We solved an issue where SOAP calls failed using the RPC option and generated payload incorrectly.
* **\[New]** Fixed a bug where scheduling Tasks in a different time zone caused Task execution at an incorrect time.
* **\[New]** Resolved a problem where the dashboard displayed “Error: Minified React error #31” due to navigating a Task directly from the URL.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Aha! Connector, v1
* MistralAI Connector, v1
* [Google](https://google.com/) Gemini Connector
* Perplexity Connector
* Claude by Anthropic Connector, v1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.73.0-RC1: will be installed on October 28-31, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.73.0: will be installed on November 11-14, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.74.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-74-0
We’re excited to announce a major new, user-friendly platform feature with Alumio version 3.74.0-RC1 that you’re going to want to “inspect”. This comes along with other key fixes, improvements, and new popular applications that we provide Connector support for. Stay tuned for many more such upcoming Alumio features that help make integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.74.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’re happy to introduce the [Inspection Tool](https://forum.alumio.com/t/the-alumio-inspection-tool/1386), a brand-new feature in Alumio! It allows users to focus on a specific Transformer and ensure it performs with outputs. With the Inspection Tool, users can execute specific parts of a large Transformer without running the entire Transformer. It replaces the debugging functionality that was previously offered by data points and improves it by showing the input, output, and Transformer settings side by side. In addition, we support autocomplete options based on the available input data for placeholders in the Inspection Tool. To discover the new Inspection Tool, simply navigate to *Transformers → click on the Inspection Tool icon → Run step and view results.*
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added validation on the JWT token name length to prevent users from entering token names of more than 45 characters, as that would result in an error.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve resolved a problem where the counter of used Tasks on the Task Statistics page displayed all consumed Tasks from the previous year without resetting the settings.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where the Total Throughput Time value increased even though the scheduler execution failed.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Jumpseller Connector, v1.0.0
* Veeqo Connector
* ClickUp Connector, v2.0
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.74.0-RC1: will be installed on November 11-14, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.74.0: will be installed on November 25-28, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.75.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-75-0
With Alumio version 3.75.0-RC1, we have an exciting update on our new Code Transformer feature. We’ve also fixed some crucial bugs to improve your integration experience, such as the Scheduler being affected by Daylight Time Savings or an issue with the SOAP client. Here’s to more exciting updates and improvements we’re working on to constantly improve how Alumio helps make integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.75.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We are happy to announce that our new [Code Transformer](https://forum.alumio.com/t/code-transformer/1308) is now available for all users, not just for beta users. The Code Transformer allows you to write JavaScript code to transform data flexibly.
* **\[NEW]** We solved an issue where testing the SOAP Client itself threw an exception, however, running the SOAP Client as a part of the Incoming configuration or Transformer worked correctly.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug that caused failure with the recursive copying of values to children in the Node Transformer.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved a problem where naming changes for Transformers couldn’t be updated immediately within the Tree View feature.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where the Scheduler wasn’t executed correctly due to the timestamp affected by the Daylight Saving Time change.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where clicking on the multi-select option didn’t allow the selection of the proper value.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.75.0-RC1: will be installed on November 25-28, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.75.0: will be installed on December 09-12, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.76.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-76-0
It’s the last month of the year, and we’re keen to kick it off with some great usability improvements with Alumio version 3.76.0-RC1. Key highlights include the ability to set priorities for Routes and Incoming configurations, improved display of Logs in the Task Import/Export messages, and a restyled Task details page, among other great user-friendly enhancements. Keep happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.76.0-RC1**
* **\[NEW]** Now users can [set the priority by themselves when manually](https://forum.alumio.com/t/incoming-in-alumio/174) executing a Route or Incoming configuration in Alumio. By default, the “Medium” priority is selected, however, users can run configurations with the “High” priority by clicking on the “Run Route/Incoming” button from the dropdown on the details page. This makes sure the process will be moved to the top of the queue.
* **\[NEW]** Placeholders and environment variables `${}`, `&{}`, and `?{`} have been improved by highlighting them in [different colors](https://forum.alumio.com/t/how-to-use-alumio-syntax-variable-2/242) to differentiate correct and incorrect inputs.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve restyled the Task details popups to improve the view and usability of popups.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve enhanced the Log display in the Task Import/Export messages to improve the usability and search in different log levels.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the behavior of the Queue job: when Alumio is shutdown because of the out-of-memory issue or gets killed, configuration statuses should display as “Failed” or “Killed” instead of “Started”.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where editing the Object box of the Transformer caused uncontrolled resizing of the field.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.76.0-RC1: will be installed on December 09-12, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.76.0: will be installed on December 23-26, 2024 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.77.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-77-0
To follow up on our latest usability improvements, with Alumio version 3.77.0-RC1 we’ve added enhancements to the Alumio interface and user experience. This includes restyled UI elements, highlighting environment variables in tooltips, and improvements such as hyperlinks in Import/Export Logs to executed configuration. We also now introduce new Connection version support for Shopify and new Connector support for WICS WMS.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.77.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** You can now find environment variables in tooltips when highlighting placeholders, which improves the entire highlighting of data in inputs.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve restyled name widgets, status fields, and identifiers to match the new Alumio UI design.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added hyperlinks to the executed configurations in the Import/Export message logs to let users know where the Task has failed. Apart from this, it also shows the name of the configuration instead of the identifier.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where the custom Entity schema made by the user was set to “Default” when implementing the Transformer to “Execute Entity Transformers”.
**New Connector we support:**
* WICS WMS Connector
**New Connector version we support:**
* Shopify Connector, v2024-10
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.77.0-RC1: will be installed on December 23-26, 2024 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.77.0: will be installed on January 06-09, 2025 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.78.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-78-0
To kick-off 2025, with Alumio version 3.78.0-RC1, we’re happy to start you all off with some simple new usability improvements. Stay tuned for a whole new range of upcoming features we're working on to take your integration experience with Alumio to another level. We wish you all another happy new year in making integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.78.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support adding the HTTP code message to headers in the HTTP Transformer and Incoming configuration to view details when receiving an error in the response.
* **\[NEW]** The UI of the date picker has been improved to match the proper behavior when selecting dates.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where enabling the “Enable caching of the authentication header” option in the Request Authentication caused an error.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.78.0-RC1: will be installed on January 06-09, 2025 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.78.0: will be installed on January 20-23, 2025 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.79.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-79-0
With the release of Alumio 3.79.0-RC1, we’re incredibly excited to announce that we’ve finally launched Alumio Spaces! It’s one of the biggest new platform features we’ve been working on, and we’re thrilled to deliver this game-changer for Alumio Partners. Apart from this, we’ve also added some key usability improvements and bug fixes. Let’s keep making integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.79.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Alumio Spaces is now live! [An Alumio Space](https://forum.alumio.com/t/spaces-overview/1610/1) is a dedicated environment within the Alumio iPaaS (Integration Platform as a Service) that is exclusively managed by Alumio Spaces Partners. It empowers you to efficiently oversee and manage various customer integrations from one central hub. It also provides the flexibility to customize and grow each customer’s integrations, without impacting other spaces. Read more about [Alumio Spaces management ](https://forum.alumio.com/t/space-management/1611)
* **\[NEW]** You can now also choose to skip Tasks with the “Retry” status.
* \[NEW]\*\* We’ve removed the ability to disable most types of configurations. This will only now be applicable for Routes, Schedulers, Webhooks, and Proxies.
* **\[NEW]** We now support new hashing algorithms PS256, PS384, and PS512 to the NetSuite OAuth2 authentication.
* **\[NEW]** We solved an issue that occurred when using a filter with a long loading time and then applying a filter that loads quickly. This would result in displaying the wrong data that didn’t match the last selected filter.
* **\[NEW]** We also fixed a bug where the service worker cache worked incorrectly and caused the loading of outdated prototypes for clients.
**Release dates**
* Due to the big features introduced with Alumio version 3.79.0, we have combined its release with Alumio version 3.80.0. Please check the release notes for this version to view the exact release dates.
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.80.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-80-0
**\[IMPORTANT]** We’ve combined the release of Alumio version 3.80.0-RC1 with version 3.79.0, due to the big features we’ve introduced in the latter. With this release, we’re adding a fix to another common platform issue. In case you missed it, find out bigger feature releases in version 3.79.0!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.80.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where identifiers including `@` in title were encoded incorrectly, causing the system to fail when trying to open storage entities.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.80.0-RC1: will be installed on February 10-13, 2025 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.80.0: will be installed on February 24-27, 2025 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.81.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-81-0
Love organizing your integrations with filters in Alumio? With Alumio version 3.81.0-RC1 we’ve added a big crucial improvement to our filters, along with a small but important usability fix. Happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.81.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved filters in Alumio to allow storing selected filters for a better search.
**\[NEW]** We resolved an issue where using the cursor auto-scroll by hovering over the filter caused an inappropriate view of the filter list.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.81.0-RC1: will be installed on February 17-20, 2025 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.81.0: will be installed on March 03-06, 2025 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.82.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-82-0
With Alumio version 3.82.0-RC1, we’re happy to introduce OPTIONS as an HTTP request method for Webhooks. Besides that, we’ve made some crucial improvements and fixes to the stability of processes. We’re also excited to announce that our new 2025 feature roadmap is now live on our website, detailing our biggest upcoming features this year. Check it out [here →](https://www.alumio.com/feature-roadmap)
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.82.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We now support OPTIONS as a request method in the Webhooks to enable connecting with applications where this function is required.\\
* **\[NEW]** We resolved an issue where an Incoming configuration continued running even after the job was marked as “Killed.” We’ve improved our Scheduler to prevent it from getting stuck when attempting to terminate a process.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug causing an Incoming configuration to fail due to a MySQL timeout.
* **\[NEW]** We solved an issue where the Memory usage didn’t display the actual memory consumption in the Incoming configuration.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.82.0-RC1: will be installed on March 03-06, 2025 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.82.0: will be installed on March 17-20, 2025 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.83.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-83-0
With Alumio version 3.83.0-RC1, we’re rolling out key bug fixes and usability improvements to make configuring your integrations more seamless. We’re also introducing Connector support for two new apps!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.83.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the behavior of the data container to avoid casting large strings to integers.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where adding another Incoming configuration to the Webhook prevented the retrieval of payload data.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where the “Microsoft Dynamics 365 Business Central — validate webhook subscription” option sent an incorrect response, turning the Content-Type set as “Plain/Text” to a JSON object.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where an HTTP proxy could be saved and closed with errors in the fields.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Ironclad Connector, v1
* Sinch Mailjet Connector, v3
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.83.0-RC1: will be installed on March 17-20, 2025 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.83.0: will be installed on March 31 – April 03, 2025 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.84.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-84-0
With the release of Alumio version 3.84.0-RC1, we’re excited to bring you a plethora of new features, fixes, and improvements! Key highlights include support for sending body payloads in GET requests, easier environment switching, and an improved Getting Started page, among other key updates. Stay happy integrating!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.84.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We support using the “body” payload in the GET method in the HTTP Subscriber/Publisher and Transformers to send the payload directly via Alumio.
**\[NEW]** Now users can view all Alumio environments they have access to and switch between them.
**\[NEW]** We’ve updated our Getting Started page and notifications menu as part of our ongoing improvements to the Alumio UI.
**\[NEW]** We’ve modified the HTTP proxy response to dynamically set an HTTP response code for HTTP proxies.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where the incorrect date was shown in the email while the alert itself was using the correct data.
* **\[NEW]** Improved the error message where moving a file using the “Filesystem: Move a file” option couldn’t overwrite the destination file in the same filesystem.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where the Code Transformer was unable to process large entity data.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where the Queue functionality was not visible for users with the ‘Viewer’ role.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where JSON files could not be read incrementally inside ZIP archives.
* **\[NEW]** Improved the problem with a floating-point calculation during basic arithmetic operations: the “Math” mappers that allow users to round the values have been added.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where users were unable to use the filter feature when exporting entities if the keys of the entities were numeric.
* **\[NEW]** We resolved an issue where storage entities with the “@” identifier couldn’t be deleted.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.84.0-RC1: will be installed on March 31 – April 03, 2025 (Sandbox environments)
* **Important**: Stable release 3.84.0: due to last minute potential stability issues, we have decided to skip the release of version 3.84.0 to production environments. All changes which were included in version 3.84.0 will be released together with version 3.85.0
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.85.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-85-0
We’re excited to introduce big new feature updates with Alumio version 3.85.0-RC1! From our new labelling feature to adding a new functionality to our AI Code Transformer, and new user-friendly biometric log-in methods. We’re eager for these new features to simplify your integration experience with Alumio even further!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.85.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Alumio now supports [Labels](https://forum.alumio.com/t/labels-in-alumio/1842)! This allows users to tag configurations and filter them based on labels, making it easier to search and organize your integrations.
\\
* **\[NEW]** We’ve enhanced our AI Code Transformer workflow by adding the “Generate” button, which opens a popup for generating code and sample data.\\
* **\[NEW]** Users can now use Passkeys or Fingerprint authentication methods on supported devices.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where the user couldn’t use the Enter key in the confirmation popup to confirm actions.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.85.0-RC1: will be installed on April 14-17, 2025 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.85.0: will be installed on April 28–May 1st, 2025 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.86.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-86-0
With Alumio version 3.86.0-RC1, we’re thrilled to announce that we’re finally unveiling our new Route overview that we’ve designed from scratch. To add to this, we’ve also made some crucial improvements to our alerts, a new AI feature in our Transformer Tester, key UX improvements, and several essential bug fixes. We hope these updates boost the stability of your integrations, simplifies troubleshooting workflows, and results in a smoother, more intuitive user experience.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.86.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve designed an all-new, centralized ‘Route overview page’ as the default route detail view. The new visual overhaul provides users with comprehensive insights on task status, errors, memory usage, and run schedules in a single location per route. This new page can be found when opening a specific Route and going to the “Overview” tab (selected by default).
* **\[NEW]** We now support alerts for Webhooks and HTTP Proxies to inform users when the HTTP Proxy/Webhook Task fails.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve implemented the ability to send alerts when a process gets killed, has a fatal error or times out to allow users to take prompt action.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the UI view of the Import/Export page as part of our process to improve our user experience and interface.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added the ability to generate AI input in the Transformer Tester to support testing workflows when the input data is unavailable.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve limited the “Full request” logger up to 500KB to define the maximum string length allowed in logs.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve improved the UI design of the Route overview page to resolve display issues and enhance overall usability.
* **\[NEW]** Resolved an issue where table pagination failed to navigate to the correct page after switching to and returning from the Task page.
* **\[NEW]** Updated the Content Security Policy (CSP) to allow font loading from `data:` sources, ensuring icons in the JSON editor (e.g., collapse/expand) display correctly.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where queries were not logged when using the ‘Use SQL procedure query strategy’ option in the Database Transformer.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where expected results in the Transformer Tester were not saved and reloaded correctly, causing them to appear empty after page reload.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where Alumio forwarded an incorrect transfer encoding header in the HTTP proxy. Additionally, Alumio now filters the accept-encoding header, forwarding only supported values (gzip and deflate).
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.86.0-RC1 will be installed on Week 18th (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.86.0 will be installed on Week 20th (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.87.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-87-0
With Alumio version 3.87.0-RC1, we’re kicking off the month with some new feature improvements to enhance the handling of webhooks and file encodings, along with bug fixes to improve storage operations and pagination. We’re also introducing Connector support for four new applications. Keep integrating simple and smart!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.87.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added support for using header data from incoming webhook requests. This enables users to differentiate sources and route data accordingly within a single webhook.\\
* **\[NEW]** We now support non-UTF-8 file encodings when reading files from a local or external filesystem.\\
* **\[NEW]** Resolved issue with opening or deleting storage entities containing slashes by using query parameters instead of path-based identifiers.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where pagination progress would reset after the Incoming configuration timed out.\\
**New Connectors we support:**
* Writer Connector
* Onshape Connector
* Cohere Connector
* ConnectWise Connector, v3.0
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.87.0-RC1: will be installed on Week 20 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.87.0: will be installed on Week 22 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.88.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-88-0
With Alumio version 3.88.0-RC1, we’re excited to roll out some great usability updates. The Code Transformer — which lets you modify data using JavaScript — is now officially stable, and our new label-based filtering just got more user-friendly. We’ve also added support for a new authentication method, a Connector for a great accounts receivable app, and key usability upgrades. Let’s keep making integrations simple!
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.88.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** The Code Transformer has officially gone out of beta mode. The current version is deemed stable after running in beta for several months.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added support for Microsoft Azure Shared Key Authentication with base64-decoded HMAC key and optional key field mappers.
* **\[NEW]** It’s now possible to navigate to the list of all configurations with label-based filtering by clicking on the corresponding label.
* **\[NEW]** The workings of the “Reload dashboard” functionality has been improved to ensure the latest version of Alumio is displayed properly.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve added a message on the Task detail page when logs are no longer available due to retention.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed a bug where login redirection navigated users to the default space instead of the previously selected space.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Payt Connector, v1
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.88.0-RC1: will be installed on Week 22 (Sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.88.0: will be installed on Week 24 (Production environments)
**How to update your environment**
Your UAT environment is always automatically updated every 2 weeks to the latest release candidate version. This happens on the same day as the release notes are published by Alumio.
**Note:** Your production environment is NOT automatically updated to the next stable version. You can request production updates by contacting our Support Team via: [support@alumio.com](mailto:support@alumio.com). Our Support Team will perform the update in correspondence with your planning.
# Version 3.89.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-89-0
With Alumio 3.89.0-RC1, we’re excited to kick off this month with some big platform updates! Discover an entirely new Transformer and a new drag-and-drop feature in our Inspection Tool, along with key usability improvements. We’ve also included important details about Alumio’s two update cycle options and release dates. Stay tuned for more essential features and fixes that we’re working on to make it easier for you to build, test, and maintain your integrations.
**Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.89.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** Introducing the “Render a Template” Transformer: a new tool in Alumio that simplifies code generation by supporting templatization languages. It enables users to efficiently fill in blanks and transform data with predefined formats directly in the editor.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve re-added a toggle to the Export configuration option to include and exclude tests and allow every child to be enabled individually.
* **\[NEW]** We’ve implemented a Drag & Drop functionality in our Inspection Tool with an editable JSON view and dynamic highlighting of placeholder-supported fields.
* **\[NEW]** We fixed an issue which prevented deleting a Transformer due to an out-of-memory error.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.89.0-RC1: will be installed in week 24 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.89.0: will be installed in week 26 (production environments)
**Important note:** these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle, from the two update cycles Alumio allows you to choose from:
**1. Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**2. Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security.
However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of the new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.90.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-90-0
With the release of Alumio version 3.90.0-RC1, we're excited to announce several small but effective usability improvements. We've enhanced configuration management by displaying task status tracking for real-time configurations, simplifying navigating webhooks, and adding the ability to manually create storage entities. Apart from also adding support for OAuth1 One-Legged authentication flow and timeout settings for MSSQL databases, we've also included some key UI improvements for Alumio Spaces users. Let's keep making integrations simple!
**Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.90.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We've added support for manually creating storage entities via the UI to improve working with configurations.
* **\[NEW]** Real-time processing configurations now display task statuses (e.g., New, Processing) consistently with non-real-time configurations, enabling users to track task progress without the need to open each task.
* **\[NEW]** We now support displaying the number of Data engines and Spaces being used on the Alumio Spaces overview page.
* **\[NEW]** We've added the Webhooks tab on the Incoming configuration page with clickable links to webhook details for easier access between configurations.
**\[NEW]** We've added configurable connection timeout for MSSQL databases with a default of 15 seconds and a maximum of 60 seconds to improve handling of timeouts.
* **\[NEW]** We support OAuth1 One-Legged authentication flow to enable integrations with services like MailPlus that don't require a token or authorization URLs.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where HTTP logs displayed JSON data, however, they contained non-object JSON data instead.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.90.0-RC1: will be installed in week 26 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.90.0: will be installed in week 28 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest** With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)** The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.91.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-91-0
With Alumio version 3.91.0-RC1, we've added the ability to describe environment variables, improved workflow visualization in the Relations tab, and resolved a task failure caused by key expiration. Stay tuned for more key feature updates we plan to release this month!
**Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.91.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We've added a description field to the environment variables to help add more details to a specific variable.
* **\[NEW]** We've improved the relations tab UI to visualize workflows better and highlight configuration statuses (enabled/disabled) for easier tracking and clarity.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed an issue where a Task failed due to the key expiration in the storage.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.91.0-RC1: will be installed in week 28 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.91.0: will be installed in week 30 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.92.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-92-0
With Alumio version 3.92.0-RC1, we're excited to announce major new transformational platform updates! Our Transformer pages have just received a complete makeover, making it easier than ever to manage, customize, and troubleshoot your integration logic. This includes features like drag-and-drop field reordering, scope highlighting, and better control to reorganize your Transformers better. Apart from this, we're also happy to introduce a new configurable maintenance window to schedule planned downtime. Let's keep making integrations simple!
**Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.92.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** We are happy to now introduce support for configurable maintenance windows. This allows users to define periods during which schedulers are paused to prevent unnecessary connections and false alerts during planned external system downtimes. To use the maintenance windows functionality, go to "Schedulers → Maintenance Window tab" and schedule downtime effectively.
* **\[NEW]** We've completely redesigned our Transformer pages to provide a clearer and more structured overview that simplifies how you customize your integrations. The newer page layout was designed to help users quickly identify applied Transformers, review configurations with better clarity, and troubleshoot with greater efficiency. This will enhance how you use our Transformers to customize your integrations on several levels.
* **\[NEW]** In addition, we now support a drag-and-drop option for fields in forms, allowing users to reorder items via a drag handle. Freely rearrange fields as per your workflow configuration preferences.
* **\[NEW]** Hover or click to see exactly where each Transformer applies. When hovering over the field, parent elements are now highlighted to indicate the scope of the Transformer. If the field contains a placeholder, when clicking on it, the entire Transformer will be highlighted, letting users know to which area it applies.
* **\[NEW]** You can now move, delete, or add items above or below a selected Transformer using the "…" button inside it. This gives you more flexibility when building your workflows.
* **\[NEW]** The redesigned layout is now available on both the Transformer details page and within the Inspection Tool, providing a consistent and improved user experience across views.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Centra Connector.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.92.0-RC1: will be installed in week 30 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.92.0: will be installed in week 32 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.93.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-93-0
We're thrilled to say that Alumio version 3.93.0-RC1 brings updates that are big enough to completely change the way you view Alumio — quite literally! In other words, we're finally introducing the entirely new Alumio dashboard design we've been working on for a while, and we've given it some big upgrades. If that wasn't enough, we're adding a new dimension to our Alerts system with a new Alerts recipient functionality. There are also some great new usability features, crucial bug fixes, and a new Connector. Here's to taking the idea of making integrations simple to the next level!
**What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.93.0-RC1:**
* **\[NEW]** The new Alumio dashboard design overhaul is finally here! And it's all about providing better visibility into your integrations, enhancing overall usability, and giving you a clear overview of your Alumio environment. With the new layout, you can now easily monitor task statistics, errors, all your Routes, memory pressure, data engines, and disk usage. Each section on the dashboard is clickable, allowing seamless navigation to more detailed views. Stay informed and track progress in real time — all from an even more streamlined and user-friendly interface.
**\[NEW]** Another major update is our new Alert Recipients feature! With this feature, you can create and manage custom contact lists and add recipients to receive alerts via email or webhook requests to stay informed about all important updates across Alumio. For example, whether it's your DevOps team needing instant error alerts via a webhook, or a project lead receiving task failure summaries by email, you can now automate alerts to the right people at the right time.
* **\[NEW]** Webhook alerts can now be configured as recipients alongside emails, enabling Alumio to send real-time requests via Webhook URI when specific events occur across Incoming/Outgoing configurations, Routes, Queues, HTTP Proxies, and Webhooks.
* **\[NEW]** It's now possible to view where environment variables are used across configurations via the new "Usages" tab on the environment variable detail page.
* **\[NEW]** We've added the "Run" button to the Incoming and Outgoing configurations on the Route overview page for quicker access to manual execution.
* **\[NEW]** We've improved error messages for SFTP file read issues to make errors easier to identify and reproduce.
* **\[NEW]** Solved an issue where loading configurations with multiple search criteria caused out-of-memory errors.
* **\[NEW]** Fixed a bug where webhook failures didn't send out email alerts when configured.
**New Connectors we support:**
* Protime Connector, v1.
**Release dates**
* **Release candidate 3.93.0-RC1:** will be installed in week 32 (sandbox environments)
* **Stable release 3.93.0:** will be installed in week 34 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.94.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-94-0
Alumio version 3.94.0-RC1 focuses on quality-of-life improvements. We've made it easier to clear storage in a single step, spot errors at a glance, and simplified searching environment variables. Additionally, we've added direct access to prototype documentation, improved filter support for the Template Transformer, and resolved an error that occurred when connecting to the Oracle Database connection. We hope these updates result in clearer visibility, faster navigation, and simpler integration management.
**What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.94.0-RC1**
**Clear storage faster**
Our new Empty Storage Transformer provides users with a quick way to clear all contents from a storage without using an external API or manually deleting each entity.
***
### Spot and resolve errors more clearly in forms
We've redesigned how errors appear inside forms, making them easier to spot and understand so you can fix issues faster.
***
### Find environment variables faster
We've now added the filtering functionality to the Environment Variables page to make it easier to find specific variables.
***
### Access prototype documentation instantly
Want to be able to view documentation for a prototype faster? You can now find a documentation icon on prototypes to understand them better and get essential tool tips. More documentation will be added over the coming months.
***
### Improved filter support in the Template Transformer
We've expanded the set of supported filters in the Template Transformer, ensuring they are secure and future-proof for long-term compatibility.
***
### Smooth Oracle database connections
Resolved an issue where connecting to the Oracle Database using a password caused an error.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.94.0-RC1: will be installed in week 34 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.94.0: will be installed in week 36 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.95.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-95-0
With Alumio version 3.95.0-RC1, we're happy to release more practical improvements that make Alumio easier and more reliable to work with every day. From more flexible JSON output and a smarter scheduler default to clearer navigation in prototypes and refined filesystem designs, these updates should help streamline and remove friction from usual workflows. We've also improved pagination with the Merger Transformer, restored the Upsert functionality, and resolved several bugs to ensure clearer visibility and smoother performance across your environment.
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.95.0-RC1:**
### More flexible JSON output
The JSON serializer now includes configurable options such as **Pretty Print** for human-readable formatting and **Unescape Slashes** for greater flexibility when generating JSON files.
***
### Easier navigation in prototype dropdowns
We've redesigned the prototype dropdown to now display **categories and descriptions**, making it easier to navigate and select the right option.
***
### Simplifying pagination with the Merger Transformer
You can now use the **Merger Transformer** to handle pagination and overcome system limitations when fetching large amounts of data.
***
### Smarter defaults for task exports
We've set up a **default task export limit** for new scheduler entries to prevent unintended mass exports. You can still check the **"Unlimited tasks"** option for exporting all tasks.
***
### Cleaner, clearer filesystem prototypes
We've reviewed and updated filesystem prototypes and connectors by restructuring fields into tabs, refining labels, and improving inline documentation where needed.
***
### Correct sorting in Object: Sort keys
Solved an issue in the 'Object: Sort keys' mapper where numeric-only keys were always placed first. Now, all keys follow the manually specified sort order accurately.
***
### Accurate space visibility
Fixed a bug where users with access to only one space would see an incorrect space purpose (type).
***
### Restored Upsert functionality
We've re-enabled the Upsert functionality in the updateObjectConfiguration API call, restoring the ability to insert or update objects in a single operation.
***
### Filters no longer break configuration lists
We fixed a bug where the saved **"Status"** or **"Disabled"** filters in **User Preferences** caused issues on configuration listing pages, since these columns are no longer available for display or filtering.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.95.0-RC1: will be installed in week 36 (sandbox environments).
* Stable release 3.95.0: will be installed in week 38 (production environments).
* **Important**: These dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.96.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-96-0
This release introduces important usability improvements, UI refinements, and stability fixes to make Alumio smoother and more reliable. From a fresh new login page and improved usability of our Inspection Tool, to clearer documentation across key prototypes, these changes focus on making everyday Alumio interactions more intuitive. We've also added safeguards like character limits to improve stability and resolved issues that caused failures during Incoming processes.
## What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.96.0-RC1:
### Our newly redesigned login page
Now, when you log in to your Alumio environment, you'll be welcomed by a redesigned page that links you to all our support resources and upcoming events.
***
### Better usability in the Inspection Tool
We've improved the UI of the Inspection Tool with smoother drag-and-drop functionality, clearer interaction when no input data is provided, and better handling of JSON objects as input data.
***
### Clearer documentation in HTTP, Webhook, and SOAP prototypes
We've updated the inline documentation and field organization for the HTTP proxy, Webhook, and SOAP prototypes by including clearer tabs, updated labels, and tooltips for better guidance.
***
### **Safeguards for Transformer test data**
To prevent memory issues and improve stability, we've added a 1MB character limit on Transformer test data fields. This ensures stability and existing Transformer tests are not affected by this change.
***
### Improved stability for Incoming Configurations
We resolved an issue where Incoming Configurations could fail due to out-of-memory errors, improving reliability during heavy processes.
***
### **Better logging for filtered entity information**
Fixed a bug where filtered entity information wasn't being logged or displayed during the Incoming process, ensuring full visibility of your data.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.96.0-RC1: will be installed in week 38 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.96.0: will be installed in week 40 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.97.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-97-0
The release of Alumio version 3.97.0-RC1 brings a powerful mix of new functionality, improved usability, and fixes that make Alumio more transparent and reliable to use every day. We've redesigned our Audit Trail and users with Spaces now have more flexible control over managing their environment and plans. We've also added handy features like allowing you to add custom log messages and favorite most used configurations, along with several other features and fixes that make debugging your integrations and creating smarter workflows even more simple.
## What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.97.0-RC1:
### Added control and flexibility in Spaces
We're excited to announce that Spaces can now be cancelled and reactivated in Alumio itself! Users can manually cancel Spaces, let them expire automatically, or reactivate Spaces, giving you full flexibility in managing environments. Besides that, we have overhauled the Spaces wizard for easier use and added clear "Spaces Terms & Conditions" when creating a new Space for better transparency.
***
**Improved Audit Trail for better traceability**
We've overhauled the **Audit Trail** with a clearer design and expanded functionality that records and displays key system activities, including logins, configuration changes, Task actions, Queue management, Environment variable updates, and Space operations. Improving transparency and debugging, it provides detailed logs of requests and responses to help trace platform interactions.
***
### **Favorite configurations for quick access**
You can now mark configurations as favorites, filter using them, and see indicators directly in the configuration table—making it easier to jump back to the setups you use most often.
***
### **Custom log messages for easier debugging**
We've added a new data Transformer that allows users to write custom log messages with placeholders, log levels, and automatic truncation to simplify integration debugging.
***
### Pagination support in GraphQL Subscriber
We now support pagination in the GraphQL Subscriber, enabling easier handling of large datasets within Incoming configurations.
***
### Clearer documentation in HTTP (API) prototypes
We've added inline documentation across all HTTP (API) prototypes and reorganized fields into appropriate tabs to improve visibility.
***
### **Restored logging for filtered entities**
The logging of filtered entity information in the Incoming process has been restored, adding the ability to disable it via environment variables. We've also improved exception handling for clearer debugging.
***
### **Faster application of alert settings**
Fixed a bug where changes to inactivity and interval alert settings weren't applied immediately after editing, ensuring alerts are now received without delay.
**Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.97.0-RC1: will be installed in week 40 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.97.0: will be installed in week 42 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.98.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-98-0
The release of Alumio version 3.98.0-RC1 brings smoother navigation, stronger security, and improved control across key areas of the platform. With this release, users can now directly manage Waiting Tasks from the dashboard, benefit from clearer documentation across database prototypes, and enjoy faster performance in the Transformer editor. We've also added new queue handling API endpoints to enhance processing stability and introduced automatic redaction of sensitive data in logs for better security.
## What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.98.0-RC1:
### Manage Waiting Tasks directly from the dashboard
It's now possible to update tasks with the "Waiting" status to "Finished" or "Failed" directly from the dashboard, available for both single and bulk actions. The help text and forum documentation for the Waiting Task feature have also been improved for better clarity.
***
### Clearer documentation across database prototypes
We've updated all database prototypes with improved field organisation, clearer descriptions, and enhanced documentation for easier navigation.
***
### New queue handling API endpoints for better performance control
We've added queue handling API endpoints, ensuring requests are processed through the Alumio queue system for improved performance control and server stability.
***
### Improved performance in the Transformer editor
The performance of the Inspection Tool to ensure smoother operation and faster response times when working with large datasets in the Transformer editor has been improved.
***
### Enhanced security through automatic log redaction
We've implemented automatic redaction of sensitive HTTP headers, such as Authorisation and Proxy-Authorisation, in logs to enhance security and prevent exposure of confidential data.
***
### Fixed transformer header display issue
Fixed a bug where long transformer names caused the header to expand and obscure the sidebar tabs in the transformer editor.
***
### Internal queue logs removed from client notifications
Solved an issue where internal queue logs were mistakenly included in client-facing notifications; these logs are now properly excluded to prevent confusion.
**Release dates**
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
* Release candidate 3.98.0-RC1: will be installed in week 42 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.98.0: will be installed in week 44 (production environments)
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Version 3.99.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/3-99-0
The release of Alumio version 3.99.0-RC1 introduces a smoother, faster, and more intuitive experience across the platform. This update focuses on enhancing usability and performance, from smarter variable tooltips and improved form responsiveness to faster API responses and more efficient configuration handling. We've also resolved a queue alert issue to make job monitoring more reliable and accurate.
## Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.99.0-RC1:
### Enhanced variable tooltips and drag-and-drop functionality
We've improved variable tooltips to display current values for better visibility. You can now drag and drop both placeholders and environment variables into fields with automatic highlighting for easier placement. Additionally, unused placeholders can now be removed directly, providing more flexibility when editing.
***
### Improved Name and Description field handling
We've updated the "Name" and "Description" fields to allow saving the name independently without affecting other changes. Updates are now logged in the history table for better traceability, and conflicts are clearly displayed if description edits overlap with other updates.
***
### Faster API responses for smoother navigation
We've improved the speed of API responses to prevent long loading and response times in the Dashboard. This update ensures that your workspace loads faster and runs more efficiently.
***
### Optimized configuration performance
We've enhanced configuration performance by reducing the number of displayed elements per page. This optimization speeds up navigation and interaction, especially when working with large configurations.
***
### More responsive form inputs
Form input performance has been improved, making typing in large configuration input fields much more responsive. You'll now notice smoother, faster feedback when editing complex configurations.
***
### Reliable queue alerts with clearer job status handling
We've fixed a bug that caused false positive queue alerts when jobs failed due to another process already running. These jobs are now marked as **skipped** instead of **failed**, ensuring alerts are only triggered for genuine job failures.
**Release dates**
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle.
* Release candidate 3.99.0-RC1: will be installed in week 44 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.99.0: will be installed in week 46 (production environments)
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**\
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**\
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/index
The Alumio Product Team is constantly improving our integration platform with new fixes, tweaks, and features - in our endless quest to make integrations simple. To keep track of all these improvements and new announcements (such as the new connectors we create), please follow our new bi-weekly Release Notes to discover what’s new with Alumio!
### **Understanding Alumio Update Cycles: Platform Guide**
Alumio gives you control over how and when your environment receives new versions. Whether you prioritize cutting-edge features or rock-solid stability, there is an update cycle suited to your needs.
**Update cycles**
Alumio offers two update cycles to choose from. By default, your environment is set to the “Latest” update cycle.
**Latest**
With the “Latest” update cycle, your environment will always receive the most recent version of Alumio. Updates are first deployed to sandbox environments. Two weeks later, the same version is released to production environments. Every 2 weeks, a new version of Alumio is released.
**Long-Term Support (LTS)**
The LTS version is released quarterly and is based on a thoroughly tested Alumio release that is a few versions behind the latest version, providing extra stability and security. However, selecting this option also means you won’t have access to any newly released Alumio features for a period of three months.
Sandbox environments (such as UAT) receive the LTS version one month before the start of the new quarter (i.e. June), specifically on the first Monday of that month.
The LTS version is deployed to production environments on the first Monday of each new quarter (i.e. July). This provides a full month for testing prior to deploying the new LTS version to production.
**You can switch your update cycle through the Alumio interface**
1. Log in to your Alumio environment.
2. Navigate to **System > Settings**.
3. Modify the **Update Cycle** setting and click **Apply** to save your changes.
**2026 Release Schedule**
| Quarter | Version | UAT Release | Production Release |
| :- | :- | :- | :- |
| Q1 2026 | 3.97.0 | December 1, 2025 | January 5, 2026 |
| Q2 2026 | 3.105.2 | March 4, 2026 | April 6, 2026 |
| Q3 2026 | 3.111.2 | June 1, 2026 | July 6, 2026 |
| Q4 2026 | 3.119.1 | September 7, 2026 | October 5, 2026 |
The dates above reflect current planning and may be adjusted. Any changes will be communicated via an update to this page.
# Version 3.113.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-113-0
Alumio version 3.113.0-RC1 introduces a few lighter, developer-friendly updates, bug fixes, and two connector updates. This includes a useful new Skip Transformer functionality to help improve building and debugging Routes, along with key issues resolved around dashboard consistency, stuck notification jobs, and HTTP proxy self-calls that could create nasty request loops. A smaller release overall - but one focused on removing friction where it matters most to streamline integrations.
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.113.0-RC1:**
### **Disable Transformers without breaking the entire Route**
We’re happy to introduce the new **Disable Transformer** option that allows users to mark Transformer configurations as skippable, allowing integrations to continue running without executing them. This makes testing and debugging Routes much easier, especially when isolating issues in longer transformation chains.\
\
To disable a Transformer:\
Transformers → select a Transformer → click “...” next to it → select the "Disable" option.
***
### **Dashboard engine counts now match the License page**
Fixed a bug where the Dashboard displayed a different number of data engines than the License page.
***
### **Notification jobs no longer run indefinitely**
Resolved an issue where the system job responsible for sending notifications could get stuck and run indefinitely.
***
### **Prevented HTTP proxy self-call loops**
Solved a problem where an HTTP proxy could be configured to call itself, creating request loops that could eventually destabilize environments. Self-referencing proxy calls are now prevented.
***
### **Connector updates**
The following connectors have been updated with the new version:
* Zoho CRM connector, v8.
* Teamleader connector, v2023-09-26.
### **Release dates**
* Release candidate 3.113.0-RC1: will be installed in week 20 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.113.0: will be installed in week 22 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment.](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes)
# Version 3.114.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-114-0
Alumio version 3.114.0 is a UX-focused release centered on making complex configurations easier to navigate and manage. Key highlights include a new Compact View for Transformers, improved Conditional Transformer display, a redesigned User Preferences and Settings layout, and more secure authentication options for MSSQL connections. We’re also introducing new Connector updates for four popular applications.
## **What’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.114.0:**
### **See your entire Transformer chain at a glance with Compact View**
We have introduced a Compact View of Transformers that gives you a cleaner, more reliable way to navigate and manage complex Transformer configurations. You can also search for corresponding Transformers using the search option in the right sidebar. Toggle to Compact View at the top of the Transformers page.
***
### **Navigate Conditional Transformer logic without losing track**
The display of conditions in the Conditional Transformer has been improved for easier navigation. Conditions are now grouped and displayed in clearly defined sections.
***
### **Stop internal query parameters from reaching external systems**
A new “Forward GET parameters” option has been added underneath the URL field in the HTTP proxy settings. This prevents internal query parameters from being unintentionally passed to external systems.
***
### **Connect MSSQL more securely with Microsoft Entra authentication**
MSSQL connections now support Microsoft Entra (Azure AD) Service Principal authentication, enabling more secure and modern authentication alongside the existing username/password option.
***
### **Reference or share any Transformer directly with a single link**
You can now copy a direct link to a specific Transformer from its action menu, available in both Classic and Compact views.
***
### **Find your settings faster with a redesigned User Preferences layout**
The User Preferences and Settings pages have been redesigned with a cleaner, more structured layout for easier navigation and configuration.
***
### **Connector updates**
The following connectors have been updated with the new version:
* [Monday.com](http://Monday.com), v2026-04
* Storyblok, v2
* Stripe, v2
* SalesLayer, v2.
***
### **Release schedule**
* Release candidate 3.114.0-RC1: scheduled for deployment in week 22 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.114.0: scheduled for deployment in week 24 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment.](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes)
# Version 3.115.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-115-0
Alumio version 3.115.0 is a performance and usability release focused on the transformer workflow and large-payload handling. We've made the Task detail page load entity data on demand, restyled the Manage Transformers block, and made the Transformer Tester directly accessible from your detail pages, alongside fixes for large API payloads and the Task overview layout. We've also included connector updates for two popular applications.
## **What's new and improved with Alumio version 3.115.0:**
### **Handle large payloads without browser crashes**
The Task detail page now loads entity data on demand rather than all at once, significantly improving performance and preventing browser crashes when working with large payloads.
***
### **A cleaner Manage Transformers block for data input**
The Manage Transformers block has been restyled with a new array item template for data input fields. And the Transformer Tester is now directly accessible from the route, incoming, and outgoing detail pages.
***
### **Disable the automatic Expect: 100-continue header for large API payloads**
Fixed a bug where large payloads sent to APIs such as Google Gemini failed with an error due to an automatically injected `Expect: 100-continue` header. A new checkbox option in HTTP Clients lets you disable this header.
***
### **Keeping the Task overview readable at high action counts**
Resolved a layout issue on the Task overview page where a large number of task actions broke the formatting. Action counts are now shown in a compact format (e.g. 1k), with the exact number displayed on hover.
***
### **Connector updates**
The following connectors have been updated with the new version:
* Qapla, v2.
* Pipedrive, v2.
***
### **Release schedule**
* Release candidate 3.115.0-RC1: scheduled for deployment in week 24 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.115.0: scheduled for deployment in week 26 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment.](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes)
# Version 3.116.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-116-0
Alumio version 3.116.0 brings meaningful usability and visibility updates for the Alumio dashboard. We've added purpose-built log layouts for each activity type, a one-click way to paste configurations into array items, broader audit trail coverage, and pattern guidance built into the fields you're configuring. It also brings a cleaner public API reference and several consistency and performance improvements. We've also included a connector update for one popular application.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.116.0:**
### **Logs that visually match what you're inspecting**
We are pleased to introduce custom log designs for various types of activity in Alumio. When viewing logs on a Task, Route, or connection detail page, you will now see purpose-built log layouts tailored to the type of activity that was performed. This applies to HTTP requests and responses, HTTP Proxies, Webhooks, Database queries, Storage operations, emails, Queue events, and process activity. Each log type surfaces the details that are most relevant to that activity, making it significantly faster to understand what happened and troubleshoot issues in your integrations.
***
### **Paste configurations straight into array items**
You can now copy and paste configurations into array items more easily. A “Paste from clipboard” option has been added directly to the array item menu, making it faster to duplicate and reuse settings without extra steps.
***
### **Audit trails now show a more complete picture**
The Audit trail now tracks a wider range of actions, including running routes, testing configurations, exporting tasks to CSV, marking tasks as resolved, assigning data engines, and retrieving access tokens. This gives you a more complete record of activity on your environment.
***
### **Get pattern guidance, right where you configure**
Help texts and [documentation links for pattern fields](https://docs.alumio.com/references/patterns "https://docs.alumio.com/references/patterns") are now available directly in the dashboard. When working with patterns, you can click \[**Learn more about patterns**] to go straight to the relevant documentation, making it easier to understand how each pattern type works and when to use it.
***
### **A cleaner public API reference**
The API schema hosted on the [docs site](https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/application/get-application-capabilities "https://docs.alumio.com/api-reference/application/get-application-capabilities") has been cleaned up and improved. Internal-only endpoints have been removed from the public reference, and deprecated items have been updated.
***
### **Clearer terminology across the platform**
Several terminology updates have been applied across the platform to improve clarity and consistency. This includes renaming “List” to “[Array or object](https://docs.alumio.com/references/mapper/list-count "https://docs.alumio.com/references/mapper/list-count")” in relevant places and aligning component naming to make navigation more intuitive.
***
### **Test large data sets with better responsiveness**
The Dashboard now handles large test data more efficiently. When testing transformers or working with large data sets, the interface stays responsive because data is no longer held in a way that could slow things down.
***
### **Missing quick-add dropdown for array items in Safari is fixed**
An issue where the quick-add dropdown for array items was not appearing in Safari has been resolved. You can now add items to arrays as expected in Safari.
***
### **Fixed a test error in the Inspection tool after re-enabling a transformer**
An issue where running a test from the Inspection tool would throw an error if the transformer had previously been disabled and re-enabled has been resolved.
***
### **Connector updates**
The following connectors have been updated with the new version:
* BigQuery, v2
### **Release schedule**
* Release candidate 3.116.0-RC1: scheduled for deployment in week 26 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.116.0: scheduled for deployment in week 28 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment.](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes)
# Version 3.117.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-117-0
Alumio version 3.117.0 improves our new Route Builder and Transformer experience, with updates to alerting and task management. The Route Builder now displays transformer counts, we’ve redesigned the conditional transformer layout, brought Slack and Microsoft Teams into our alerting system, and made it possible to edit task entity data without reprocessing. The release also moves the dashboard onto a newer technical foundation.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.117.0:**
### **See Transformer counts without leaving the Route builder**
You can now see at a glance how many transformers are linked to an Incoming, Outgoing, or Route node directly in the Route Builder. Hovering over the indicator shows you exactly which transformers are assigned.
***
### **A redesigned conditional layout for Transformers**
The conditional layout for Transformers has been redesigned to be easier to work with, including an expand all/collapse all option and a remembered preference for how forms open.
***
### **Get alerts in Slack and Microsoft Teams**
You can now add Slack and Microsoft Teams as recipients for alerts, so your team gets notified directly in the tools you already use.
***
### **Edit task data without reprocessing**
You can now edit the entity data of a Task directly from the Task detail page, avoiding the need to reprocess or restart a Task after a failure.
***
### **A faster, more reliable dashboard**
The dashboard has been upgraded to a newer technical foundation, making the interface faster and more reliable.
***
### **Fixed the Transformer tester visibility in the Route builder**
Fixed a bug where the Transformer tester showed or hid incorrectly when creating or editing Incoming/Outgoing configurations in the Route builder.
***
### **Release schedule**
* Release candidate 3.117.0-RC1: scheduled for deployment in week 28 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.117.0: scheduled for deployment in week 30 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment.](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes)
# Version 3.118.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-118-0
Alumio version 3.118.0 is a stability and reliability release. It resolves a series of fixes across the dashboard, Transformers, and configuration management, from clearer error messaging to more accurate audit logging. Individually small, together they smooth out the day-to-day friction of building and testing integrations.
### **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.118.0**
**Fixed a false “already exists” error when naming filters**
You can now save a filter with the same name across different configuration types (for example, Transformers and Incoming Configurations) without getting a false “already exists” error.
***
### **Fixed unclear WSDL error pop-ups**
WSDL error pop-ups no longer show confusing extra technical details, making the error message clearer.
***
### **Fixed incorrect “User updated” entries in the Audit Trail**
The Audit Trail no longer logs incorrect "User updated" entries. A record is only added when a user's role actually changes.
***
### **Fixed missing errors in the Transformer tester**
An issue where the Transformer tester didn't show errors correctly has been fixed. You'll now see the correct response data and errors when testing Transformers.
***
### **Fixed the Outgoing jobs widget failing to display results**
An issue where the Outgoing jobs widget failed to display results has been fixed. Linked schedulers now show up correctly on the Route detail page.
***
### **Release schedule**
* Release candidate 3.118.0-RC1: scheduled for deployment in week 30 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.118.0: scheduled for deployment in week 32 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment.](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes)
# Version 3.119.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-119-0
Alumio version 3.119.0 makes day-to-day work in the dashboard easier to move through. The task detail view now opens larger with entity data expanded, storages open on the Entities tab, and the route detail page has a dedicated tab for Incoming logs. Alongside that, the release resolves a set of reliability issues affecting filtered exports, cached authentication tokens, space setup, and permission-based buttons.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.119.0:**
## **New and improved**
### **A clearer view of large tasks**
The task detail view has been resized, and entity data payloads are now shown expanded by default, so you don't need an extra click to see them. To switch the task view between modal and page layout, go to the User preferences page and select the corresponding option.
***
### **Get to your entities and generic configurations faster**
The Entities tab is now the default view for storages, and generic subscribers and publishers have moved to the top of the list.
***
### **Check incoming activity from the route itself**
The route detail page now includes a dedicated tab for Incoming logs, so you can review activity without leaving the page.
***
### **Enter URLs without the http prefix**
You can now enter a URL without the http\:// or https\:// prefix in your configurations. Alumio automatically adds the correct prefix for you.
***
### **Help links now point to the docs site**
Across the dashboard, including the Login page and Support menu, help links now open our [new documentation site](https://docs.alumio.com/ "https://docs.alumio.com/") instead of the old forum.
***
### **Know when a data engine becomes available**
A help text now explains that data engines only become available once they've finished their current job. It appears wherever data engines can be rearranged, so it's clear why a space might not start a new data engine right away.
***
## **Fixes**
### **Fixed empty files when exporting filtered entities**
Fixed an issue where exporting entities from a storage with a filter applied always produced an empty file. Filtered exports now correctly include the matching entities.
***
### **Fixed unexpected failures when a cached authentication token was missing**
Resolved a problem where certain incoming configurations could fail unexpectedly when the cached authentication token was missing. The system now automatically reauthenticates instead of showing an error.
***
### **Fixed an internal error that interrupted space setup**
Fixed a bug where an internal error during space setup could occasionally interrupt the sync process. Space creation is now more reliable.
***
### **Fixed truncated request URLs in logs**
Solved an issue where long request URLs shown in logs were cut off and hard to read. The full URL is now shown when you expand the log details.
***
### **Fixed uneditable task entity data in list format**
Resolved a problem where task entity data could not be edited when it was formatted as a list. You can now edit this data as expected.
***
### **Fixed API key buttons showing for view-only users**
Fixed a bug where users with view-only access could see options to create or delete API keys, even though these actions weren't available to them. These buttons are now hidden for users without the right permissions.
***
## **Release schedule**
* Release candidate 3.119.0-RC1: scheduled for deployment in week 32 (sandbox environments)
* Stable release 3.119.0: scheduled for deployment in week 34 (production environments)
* **Important**: these dates apply only to environments configured with the 'Latest' update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment.](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes)
# Version 3.120.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-120-0
Alumio version 3.120.0 adds to the visibility and reliability of your integrations. The processed task count is back on the task statistics page, a scheduler entry can now carry on after a single job fails, and the route detail page has been reorganized so recent tasks and runs are visible without extra clicks. The release also improves storage reads and resolves issues in the Audit trail filter, task timestamps, and the transformer tester.
## **Here’s what’s new and improved with Alumio version 3.120.0:**
### **New and improved**
### **See the number of tasks processed clearly**
The number of processed tasks now shows once again on the task statistics page, along with an explanation of how the number is calculated.
### **Keep a scheduler running after one job fails**
You can now configure a scheduler entry to keep running its remaining jobs even if one job fails.
### **Recent tasks and runs without the extra clicks**
The route detail page has been reorganized so the information you need most, such as recent tasks and runs, is visible without extra clicks.
### **More reliable storage reads**
Storage reliability has been improved to reduce cases where reading a storage item unexpectedly returns empty data.
### **A clearer path to your first route**
Getting started is easier for new users, with a clearer path to creating your first route and a link to a getting-started walkthrough.
## **Fixes**
### **No more incorrect Updated at times on skipped tasks**
Resolved an issue where a task’s “Updated at” time was not set correctly when the task was skipped.
### **No more missing categories in the Audit trail filter**
Fixed a bug where the Audit trail Category filter was missing some categories. All available categories now appear in the filter.
### **No more missing data for the first transformer step**
Solved an issue where the transformer tester did not show input and output data for the first step in some cases.
## **Release schedule**
* **Release candidate 3.120.0-RC1:** scheduled for deployment in week 34 (sandbox environments)
* **Stable release 3.120.0:** scheduled for deployment in week 36 (production environments)
* **Important:** these dates apply only to environments configured with the ‘Latest’ update cycle. Find more information on [how to update your environment](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes "https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes").
# Version 3.121.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-121-0
Alumio version 3.121.0 improves visibility into queue activity and gives you clearer bulk log exports to NDJSON. The release also fixes issues with queue consumer restarts, configuration duplication, Mock request matching, stacked log windows, and Audit trail exports.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.121.0:**
### **New and improved**
### **See queue activity right on the configuration's Logs tab**
You can now see queue activity directly on a configuration's Logs tab, so you don't have to leave the page to check what's happening in the queue.
***
### **Bulk export logs to NDJSON**
Logs can now be exported in bulk to NDJSON, making it easier to pull large volumes of log data into other tools for analysis.
***
### **A tidier sidebar in configuration forms**
The sidebar in configuration forms has been cleaned up, making it easier to find what you need while building or editing a configuration.
***
## **Fixes**
### **Fixed multiple log windows stacking when clicking "Review the logs"**
Clicking "Review the logs" no longer opens additional stacked windows on top of existing ones.
***
### **Fixed missing Audit trail entries for exports**
Exports are now correctly recorded in the Audit trail, so you have a complete history of export activity.
***
### **Fixed queue consumers not restarting for all Spaces after an environment update**
Queue consumers now restart correctly across all Spaces after an environment update, instead of only some.
***
### **Fixed a syntax error on GET requests using a Body Matcher in Mock**
GET requests that use a Body Matcher in Mock no longer trigger a syntax error.
***
### **Fixed duplicating a configuration from within the configuration stack**
Duplicating a configuration from within the configuration stack now works as expected.
## **Release schedule**
* RC available on Sandbox: week 36
* Stable release on Production: week 38
For more information about our release process, check out our [release notes overview](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes).
# Version 3.122.0
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes/version-3-122-0
Alumio version 3.122.0 improves visibility across the Queue, Dashboard, and Route alerts pages, adds a fuller version history for Data integrations, and adds support for non-standard FTP directory listings. The release also fixes issues with the "Add alert" modal, GraphQL GET requests and error handling, storage entity bulk deletes, and dependent detection.
## **Here's what's new and improved with Alumio version 3.122.0:**
### **New and improved**
### **See both incoming and route alerts in one place**
The route alerts tab now shows alerts for both the route and its incoming, matching what the alerts widget on the route overview page already shows. When creating an alert from this tab, you can select incoming alerts as well.
***
### **A clearer way to filter the Queue page**
The configuration filter on the Queue page now uses a dropdown, so you can select an incoming or route to filter by without confusion between identifier and name.
***
### **See the current version in your configuration's history**
The version control table now shows the current version alongside earlier ones, clearly marked as such. The current version can't be restored.
***
### **See what was imported after an import**
After importing a file with the Import/Export feature, you'll now see a table listing all the configurations that were imported.
***
### **Support for non-standard FTP directory listings**
The FTP directory-listing parser now handles non-standard LIST formats, including listings with a single combined ownership field, so connections to servers that return these formats no longer fail during listing.
***
### **Placeholder validation now works outside the Inspection tool**
Placeholders in a transformer are now validated using the currently visible input data, even when you're not using the Inspection tool.
***
### **A round of UI and UX polish across the Dashboard**
We've made a series of consistency improvements across the Dashboard: task identifiers can now be copied to the clipboard, save and delete buttons are consistently colored and positioned across modals, modal titles follow the configuration name, and confirmation dialogs (such as deleting configurations or emptying storage) are clearer and safer to use.
## **Fixes**
### **Fixed the "Add alert" modal going blank when editing a recipient**
Opening a recipient's edit page from within the "Add alert" modal in the configuration stack no longer leaves the "Add alert" modal blank and positioned above the recipient modal.
***
### **Fixed GraphQL GET requests not sending variables correctly**
GraphQL requests using the GET method now send their variables in the standard JSON-encoded format, so variables such as pagination parameters are no longer silently ignored by GraphQL servers that follow the specification.
***
### **Fixed GraphQL error responses being marked as successful**
A GraphQL response that contains errors is now marked as failed, with the error messages included in the exception, instead of being silently marked as successful. This can be turned off with the new "Throw on errors" setting.
***
### **Fixed the AND filter being ignored when bulk deleting storage entities**
Bulk deleting storage entities now correctly applies an "and" filter, instead of ignoring it and removing all entities.
***
### **Fixed dependent detection missing configurations after the move to ULIDs**
Detecting whether a configuration has dependents now correctly matches both the older specification-based references and the newer identifier-based ones, so dependents are no longer missed.
## **Release schedule**
* RC available on Sandbox: week 38
* Stable release on Production: week 40
For more information about our release process, check out our [release notes overview](https://docs.alumio.com/release-notes).
# Get to know Alumio
Source: https://docs.alumio.com/untitled-page-2
This series of videos will walk you through everything you need to get started with Alumio. Starting from the basics of the dashboard and data flow, you will learn how to build and run your first integration, work with Entity transformers, use Alumio as a caching system, and explore additional settings to get the most out of the platform.
**1. Getting to know the dashboard and flow of data**
**2**. **Configuring your first integration**
**3**. **Running your first integration & viewing its results**
**4**. **The entity transformers and its possibilities**
**5**. **Using Alumio as a caching system to supercharge your integration**
**6**. **Additional settings within Alumio**